ML100620127: Difference between revisions

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
(Created page by program invented by StriderTol)
(StriderTol Bot change)
 
(3 intermediate revisions by the same user not shown)
Line 15: Line 15:


=Text=
=Text=
{{#Wiki_filter:FACILITY NAME: __ -=S..:.:.t.-=L::.::u:.=,c.:.;::ie:....-
{{#Wiki_filter:FACILITY NAME: _ _...;;;;;S-=t.-=L;;..;;;;u~c.;;.;;;ie~        _ _ __
___ _ Section 3
                        -=S..:.:.t.-=L::.::u:.=,c.:.;::ie:....-_             Section 3 REPORTNUMBER:_~2~OO~9~-3~O~1                            _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____
________ ___ DRAFT SRO WRITTEN EXAM CONTENTS:
DRAFT SRO WRITTEN EXAM CONTENTS:
o Draft SRO Written Exam (2SQ with ES-401-S Information)
o   Draft SRO Written Exam (2SQ with ES-401-S Information)
Location of Electronic Files: Submitted By: ** Verified By: ________ _ FACILITY NAME: __
Location of Electronic Files:
___ _ Section 3
Submitted By: ~~-**-":'::-
________________
              .~~        ~                          Verified By: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
___ DRAFT SRO WRITTEN EXAM CONTENTS:
 
o Draft SRO Written Exam (2SQ with ES-401-S Information)
Examination Outline Cross-reference:                       Level                           RO                    SRO Tier#                                                 1 Group #                                               1 KIA #                           007EG2.4.20 Importance Rating                                    4.3 Reactor Trip Stabilization - Recovery: Knowledge of operational implications of EOP warnings, cautions and notes Proposed Question:                     SRO 76 I/C was performing a AFAS surveillance on Unit 2 while at 100% power when an inadvertent IIC AFAS-1 occurred. The crew is implementing 2-EOP-01 Standard Post Trip Actions with the following:
Location of Electronic Files: Submitted By: -":'::-Verified By: ________ _
Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO 007EG2.4.20 Reactor Trip Stabilization  
-Recovery:
Knowledge of operational implications of EOP warnings, cautions and notes Proposed Question:
SRO 76 SRO 1 1 4.3 I/C was performing a AFAS surveillance on Unit 2 while at 100% power when an inadvertent AFAS-1 occurred.
The crew is implementing 2-EOP-01 Standard Post Trip Actions with the following:
* The 2B3 4.16KVAC bus did NOT transfer to the startup transformers and the 2B Diesel Generator did NOT start.
* The 2B3 4.16KVAC bus did NOT transfer to the startup transformers and the 2B Diesel Generator did NOT start.
* RCS subcooling is 15°F.
* RCSsubcooling RCS   subcooling is 15°F.
* RCS pressure is 1780 psia and lowering.
* RCS pressure is 1780 psia and lowering.
While performing 2-EOP-01 which of the following directions CAN be given to the crew and why? A. Override and open Main Feedwater isolation valves on the 'A' side. Actions are to be taken to maintain or regain safety functions.
While performing 2-EOP-01 which of the following directions CAN be given to the crew and why?
(                      A. Override and open Main Feedwater isolation valves on the 'A' side. Actions are to be taken to maintain or regain safety functions.
B. Manually start the 2B Diesel Generator from the RTGB. To ensure redundant power available in the event of single train failure of equipment and lor components.
B. Manually start the 2B Diesel Generator from the RTGB. To ensure redundant power available in the event of single train failure of equipment and lor components.
C. Cooldown the RCS to regain minimum subcooling.
C. Cooldown the RCS to regain minimum subcooling. Actions are to be taken to maintain or regain safety functions.
Actions are to be taken to maintain or regain safety functions.
D. Manually actuating SIAS. If actuation setpoint inevitable, manual actuation will ensure SIAS and all its components have actuated prior to setpoint.
D. Manually actuating SIAS. If actuation setpoint inevitable, manual actuation will ensure SIAS and all its components have actuated prior to setpoint.
151 ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
151
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO 007EG2.4.20 Reactor Trip Stabilization
 
-Recovery:
Proposed Answer:           B Explanation (Optional):
Knowledge of operational implications of EOP warnings, cautions and notes Proposed Question:
A. Incorrect: can be overridden AFTER 2-EOP-01 but not while in 2-EOP-01 B. Correct C. Incorrect: this was a recent procedure change that doe not allow a cooldown while in 2-EOP-01.
SRO 76 SRO 4.3 IIC was performing a AFAS surveillance on Unit 2 while at 100% power when an inadvertent AFAS-1 occurred.
D. Incorrect: manual actuation of any ESFAS in not allowed at PSL. Most other utilities allow and expect manual actuation if reaching setpoint is inevitable.
The crew is implementing 2-EOP-01 Standard Post Trip Actions with the following:
Technical Reference(s):     OPS-521 Emergency Operating       (Attach if not previously provided)
* The 2B3 4.16KVAC bus did NOT transfer to the startup transformers and the 2B Diesel Generator did NOT start.
* RCSsubcooling is 15°F.
* RCS pressure is 1780 psia and lowering.
While performing 2-EOP-01 which of the following directions CAN be given to the crew and why? A. Override and open Main Feedwater isolation valves on the 'A' side. Actions are to be taken to maintain or regain safety functions.
B. Manually start the 2B Diesel Generator from the RTGB. To ensure redundant power available in the event of single train failure of equipment and lor components.
C. Cooldown the RCS to regain minimum subcooling.
Actions are to be taken to maintain or regain safety functions.
D. Manually actuating SIAS. If actuation setpoint inevitable, manual actuation will ensure SIAS and all its components have actuated prior to setpoint.
151 
( Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect:
can be overridden AFTER 2-EOP-01 but not while in 2-EOP-01 B. Correct C. Incorrect:
this was a recent procedure change that doe not allow a cooldown while in 2-EOP-01.
D. Incorrect:
manual actuation of any ESFAS in not allowed at PSL. Most other utilities allow and expect manual actuation if reaching setpoint is inevitable.
Technical Reference(s):
OPS-521 Emergency Operating (Attach if not previously provided)
Procedure Implementation Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Procedure Implementation Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
Learning Objective:         0702822-04, 0702822-08             (As available)
0702822-04, 0702822-08 (As available)
                            --------~----------------
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) -----x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 ---55.43 5 ---Comments:
                            ----------~------------~
x 152 ( Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional):
(
A. Incorrect:
Question Source:           Bank #
can be overridden AFTER 2-EOP-01 but not while in 2-EOP-01 B. Correct C. Incorrect:
Modified Bank #                   (Note changes or attach parent)
this was a recent procedure change that doe not allow a cooldown while in 2-EOP-01.
New                  x Question History:           Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:   Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis                 x 10 CFR Part 55 Content:     55.41     10 55.43   -
D. Incorrect:
5 --
manual actuation of any ESFAS in not allowed at PSL. Most other utilities allow and expect manual actuation if reaching setpoint is inevitable.
Comments:
Technical Reference(s):
(
OPS-521 Emergency Operating (Attach if not previously provided)
152
Procedure Implementation Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
 
Learning Objective:
ST. LUCIE PLANT                               OPS-521
0702822-04, 0702822-08 (As available)
\.
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) ----------
OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT POLICY                           Rev. 13 EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE                             Date   03/31/09 03/31109 IMPLEMENTATION                              Page   6of16 6 of 16
x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 ---55.43 5 ------Comments:
: 1. H. (continued)
x 152
: 3.     If a Safety Function is not being met or a contingency action must be taken, that information must be communicated to the US. The US will direct these contingency actions. This communication will utilize 4-parts.
: 1. H. ST. LUCIE PLANT OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT POLICY EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE IMPLEMENTATION OPS-521 Rev. 13 Date 03/31/09 Page 6of16 (continued)
: 4.     Following completion of the Immediate Actions, the SM, US and RCOs should spend approximately one minute assessing plant status and acknowledging alarms.
: 3. If a Safety Function is not being met or a contingency action must be taken, that information must be communicated to the US. The US will direct these contingency actions. This communication will utilize 4-parts. 4. Following completion of the Immediate Actions, the SM, US and RCOs should spend approximately one minute assessing plant status and acknowledging alarms. During this time the Desk RCO should: a. Announce on the Gaitronics "Attention all Plant Personnel, the Unit 1 (2) Reactor has tripped." b. NOTIFY the NPO to perform Appendix X, Section 1 of EOP-99 c. CONTACT the STA and Shift Communicator to report to the Control Room and d. Close the MSR TCV block and/or warm-up valves. e. While the US and BRCO are performing the Inventory and/or Pressure Control safety function, the DRCO should CLOSE MV-OS-S14.
During this time the Desk RCO should:
: f. g. Mentally perform EOP-1 to quickly assess the status of the plant.
: a.       Announce on the Gaitronics "Attention all Plant Personnel, the Unit 1 (2) Reactor has tripped."
1I:b fI(Mtg ** zazes@ I p .... IfPI.Miifi"'+1iJ8MPfMaMfMl y ... ;giiPi8J 'Iii \. 1. H. ( ST. LUCIE PLANT OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT POLICY EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE IMPLEMENTATION (continued)
: b.       NOTIFY the NPO to perform Appendix X, Section 1 of EOP-99
OPS-521 Rev. 13 Date 03/31109 Page 6 of 16 3. If a Safety Function is not being met or a contingency action must be taken, that information must be communicated to the US. The US will direct these contingency actions. This communication will utilize 4-parts. 4. Following completion of the Immediate Actions, the SM, US and RCOs should spend approximately one minute assessing plant status and acknowledging alarms. During this time the Desk RCO should: a. Announce on the Gaitronics "Attention all Plant Personnel, the Unit 1 (2) Reactor has tripped." b. NOTIFY the NPO to perform Appendix X, Section 1 of EOP-99 c. CONTACT the STA and Shift Communicator to report to the Control Room and d. Close the MSR TCV block and/or warm-up valves. e. While the US and BRCO are performing the Inventory and/or Pressure Control safety function, the DRCO should CLOSE MV-OS-S14.
: c.       CONTACT the STA and Shift Communicator to report to the Control Room and
The US / SM should: f. Mentally perform EOP-1 to quickly assess the status of the plant. g. Actions required to stabilize the plant may be taken at that time. (e.g.,close an EDG breaker, start a eharging pump, manually control S/G pressure)
(
: 1. J. ST. LUCIE PLANT OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT POLICY EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE IMPLEMENTATION OPS-521 Rev. 13 Date 03/31/09 Page 11 of 16 (continued)
: d.       Close the MSR TCV block and/or warm-up valves.
: 6. 7.
: e.       While the US and BRCO are performing the Inventory and/or Pressure Control safety function, the DRCO should CLOSE MV-OS-S14.
prevent a crew decision to manually operate AFW components, start pumps and open valves, if deemed necessary.
The US / SM should:
ESFAS Actuation:
: f.       Mentally perform EOP-1 to quickly assess the status of the plant.
Use of ESF Override features in EOPs a. When opening a valve that was closed by SIAS or CIAS, increased awareness
: g.     "~.'iI\'@MrnQ@                  1I:b pl~¥1;@Ji;h~.~lIStI!b.l>tIt4ip" Actions required to stabilize the   plant may be taken at that time.
/ monitoring should be employed on that system to detect a release to the environment via that flow path. b. Increasing RAB radiation indications, loss of Containment sump inventory and unexpected Containment depressurization are all examples of Containment boundary leakage which may have been created by operator action, and should be considered when taking these type of actions. II ,.1\\114 -'f"'WjI ... 1 .
                                * *zazes@
ThisoV'erridesa
(e.g.,close fI(Mtg                    I p. . . .start an EDG breaker,       IfPI.Miifi"'+1iJ8MPfMaMfMl a eharging pump, manually y
..
_~control S/G...  ;giiPi8J 'Iii pressure)
L. CCW to RCPs: 1. SPT As take precedence over restoring CCW. 2. Restore CCW to RCPs when an RCO is available AND the attention required to restore does NOT adversely affect the maintenance or recovery of other safety functions.
 
M. Excess Steam Demand event guidance while implementing EOP-05, Excess Steam Demand, and EOP-15, Functional Recovery.
(                                          ST. LUCIE PLANT                                       OPS-521
: 1. Regardless of the rate of RCS pressure and inventory reduction during an Excess Steam Demand, RCS pressure SHALL NOT be intentionally lowered to enhance inventory addition into the RCS unless the RCS Inventory Control Safety Function can NOT be maintained otherwise.
\
: 2. 11 a Main Steam Safety Valve is stuck open, or was stuck open, causing entry into an EOP, Then the affected Steam Generator shall be considered faulted until the Safety Valve is gagged, even if the Safety Valve reseats. The Steam Generator shall NOT be unisolated until the Safety Valve is gagged. ( \ 1. J. ST. LUCIE PLANT OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT POLICY EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE IMPLEMENTATION ( continued)
OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT POLICY                                         Rev. 13 EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE                                         Date   03/31/09 IMPLEMENTATION                                      Page   11 of 16
OPS-521 Rev. 13 Date 03/31/09 Page 11 of 16 6. Manual initiation of AFAS should NOT be done during other scenarios because it defeats the rupture identification circuit. This does NOT prevent a crew decision to manually operate AFW components, start pumps and open valves, if deemed necessary.  
: 1. J. (continued)
: 7. ESFAS Actuation:
(continued)
Use of ESF Override features in EOPs a. When opening a valve that was closed by SIAS or CIAS, increased awareness  
_~~~'~~~~t~tt~:~~iif~~*J~~;:tr;:~~~~i~ri~~i~t~!::C~~~ios
/ monitoring should be employed on that system to detect a release to the environment via that flow path. b. Increasing RAB radiation indications, loss of Containment sump inventory and unexpected Containment depressurization are all examples of Containment boundary leakage which may have been created by operator action, and should be considered when taking these type of actions. K. Manual Override o'f MFIV Following AFAS Actuation (l:::Jnit 1. Do NOT override and open MFIV from within EOP-1. This overrides a safeguard signal prior to diagnosing the event. L. CCW to RCPs: 1. SPTAs take precedence over restoring CCW. 2. Restore CCWto RCPs when an RCO is available AND the attention required to restore does NOT adversely affect the maintenance or recovery of other safety functions.
: 6.       Manual initiation of AFAS should NOT be done during other scenarios because it defeats the rupture identification circuit. This does NOT prevent a crew decision to manually operate AFW components, start pumps and open valves, if deemed necessary.
M. Excess Steam Demand event guidance while implementing EOP-05, Excess Steam Demand, and EOP-15, Functional Recovery.  
: 7.       ESFAS Actuation: Use of ESF Override features in EOPs
: 1. Regardless of the rate of RCS pressure and inventory reduction during an Excess Steam Demand, RCS pressure SHALL NOT be intentionally lowered to enhance inventory addition into the RCS unless the RCS Inventory Control Safety Function can NOT be maintained otherwise.  
: a.         When opening a valve that was closed by SIAS or CIAS, increased awareness / monitoring should be employed on that system to detect a release to the environment via that flow path.
: 2. 11 a Main Steam Safety Valve is stuck open, or was stuck open, causing entry into an EOP, Then the affected Steam Generator shall be considered faulted until the Safety Valve is gagged, even if the Safety Valve reseats. The Steam Generator shall NOT be unisolated until the Safety Valve is gagged.
: b.         Increasing RAB radiation indications, loss of Containment sump inventory and unexpected Containment depressurization are all examples of Containment boundary leakage which may have been created by operator action, and should be considered when taking these type of actions.
FPL Title: ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE SAFETY RELATED CONTINUOUS USE 11/18/07 STANDARD POST TRIP ACTIONS SPTA Responsible Department:
K.
OPERATIONS REVISION  
II ,.1\\114 Manual Override-'f"'WjI  o'f MFIV ...      -!q----IIIIt'I(~
Following       AFAS Actuation (l:::Jnit 2~:
1 1..      Dot,~*q;*~v~rrt~*~i*Wnct'6~~*~"ij'F1V;fr({mWiftlfn*E0P-1; Do   NOT override and open MFIV from within EOP-1. ThisoV'erridesa        This overrides a
              ..~ikE1:fll;!\I,,~t<'l())S~Qll\ial*i~ri'6r:f6*)er,~gRos\irn9) safeguard signal prior to diagnosing t:t:re~vent.          the event.
L. CCW to RCPs:
: 1.       SPTAs SPTAs take precedence over restoring CCW.
: 2.       Restore CCWtoCCW to RCPs when an RCO is available AND the attention required to restore does NOT adversely affect the maintenance or recovery of other safety functions.
M. Excess Steam Demand event guidance while implementing EOP-05, Excess Steam Demand, and EOP-15, Functional Recovery.
: 1.       Regardless of the rate of RCS pressure and inventory reduction during an Excess Steam Demand, RCS pressure SHALL NOT be intentionally lowered to enhance inventory addition into the RCS unless the RCS Inventory Control Safety Function can NOT be maintained otherwise.
: 2.       11 a Main Steam Safety Valve is stuck open,                       or was stuck open, causing entry into an EOP, Then the affected Steam Generator shall be considered faulted until the Safety Valve is gagged, even if the Safety Valve reseats. The Steam Generator shall NOT be unisolated until the Safety Valve is gagged.
 
Procedure.. No.
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2                                             2-EOP-01 EMERGENCY OPERATING                                   Current Revi .          No.
c                                                            PROCEDURE
        .Q ......;
        -2 cw c E w ::l FPL                                SAFETY RELATED                                 Effective Date E u                                                      CONTINUOUS USE                                         11/18/07
  >-      ::l    0
 
==Title:==
...Jg~
Z -0 0            ....J o      ~ ~
c-oi=
Z C'O c Z
                    <<                      STANDARD POST TRIP ACTIONS O..c .-
_u-o I--o~
  <<co o:::;:C'O,t:;
0=:;
0:: .Q 8 C c SPTA o*~            C'O      Responsible Department: OPERATIONS LL W..c z ...        ~    0
  -~~W                    REVISION  


==SUMMARY==
==SUMMARY==
: Revision 25 -Incorporated PCR 07-3408 for CR 2007 -9375 (Joe Hess ling, 11/06/07)
0:: .;::      ~    -
Revision 24 -Incorporated PCR 05-2946 to update revision based upon PSTG revision.
o      ~~ !:!:
NO WORD CHANGES MADE. (Joe Hessling, 10/12/05)
LL w u
Revision 23 -Incorporated PCR 03-2800 to incorporate operator feedback issues. (J. Martin, 11/18/03)
              -{;3 0:::
Revision 22 -Incorporated CEN-152, rev 5.2 and allowed procedure to conform with writer's guide. (J. R. Martin, 08/08102)
W    Revision 25 - Incorporated PCR 07-3408 for CR 2007-9375               to'!ll~sl!~'trf!l~rett~~~~~il~~~!~l~~~'~lm~~~l~'
Revision 21 -Made grammatical and formatting changes and changed SIG pressure. (Steve Napier, 10/03/01)
2007 -9375 to  delete direction to cool down
AND THIS PROCEDURE HAS BEEN COMPLETELY REWRITTEN.
          ~ '3. >          ~:@~fI~~~i~m!~t~$'J~~\~~:~~'~~~~l~l\r&)
This procedure has been rewritten to meet CEN 152 Revision 5.1 criteria. (Steve Napier, 08/10/01)
RCS    based  on  losing  subcooling.  (Joe   Hessling, Hess ling, 11/06/07) wn.W
Revision FRG Review Date Approved By Approval Date SLOPS 0 12/23/85 D. A. Sager 12/23/85 DATE Plant General Ma DOCT Revision FRG Review Date Approved By Approval Date DOCN 25 11/06/07 C. Costanzo 11/06/07 SYS Plant General Manager COM N/A ITM Authorized Approver N/A ( c .Q ......; -c 2 w c E w ::l E u >-::l 0 Z -0 0 ....J o << Z c-oi= C'O c Z O..c _u-o
          ..... C'O  I-0 .....
<<co o:::;:C'O,t:;
Qj;;::.. 0 ro                Revision 24 - Incorporated PCR 05-2946 to update revision based upon PSTG revision. NO WORD CHANGES MADE. (Joe Hessling, 10/12/05)
0=:; C c 0:: .Q 8 C'O LL W..c z ..... 0 0:: .;:: -o !:!: LL -{;3 0::: w u W '3. > wn.W ..... C'O I-0 ..... << Qj;;::.. 0 ro FPL Title: ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE SAFETY RELATED CONTINUOUS USE Procedure
(                          Revision 23 - Incorporated PCR 03-2800 to incorporate operator feedback issues. (J. Martin, 11/18/03)
.. No. 2-EOP-01 Current Revi . No. Effective Date 11/18/07 STANDARD POST TRIP ACTIONS SPTA Responsible Department:
Revision 22 - Incorporated CEN-152, rev 5.2 and allowed procedure to conform with writer's guide. (J. R. Martin, 08/08102) 08/08/02)
OPERATIONS REVISION
Revision 21 - Made grammatical and formatting changes and changed SIG                 S/G pressure.
(Steve Napier, 10/03/01)
AND THIS PROCEDURE HAS BEEN COMPLETELY REWRITTEN. This procedure has been rewritten to meet CEN 152 Revision 5.1 criteria. (Steve Napier, 08/10/01)
Revision     FRG Review Date             Approved By           Approval Date                 SLOPS S-LOPS 0             12/23/85                 D. A. Sager             12/23/85             DATE Plant General Man Ma                                   DOCT Revision     FRG Review Date             Approved By           Approval Date         DOCN 25             11/06/07                 C. Costanzo             11/06/07             SYS Plant General Manager                             COM N/A                                     ITM Authorized Approver N/A Authorized Approver nor Correction


==SUMMARY==
( Examination Outline Cross-reference:                       Level                   RO            SRO Tier#                                 1 Group #                               1 KIA #
: Revision 25 -Incorporated PCR 07-3408 for CR 2007-9375 to delete direction to cool down RCS based on losing subcooling. (Joe Hessling, 11/06/07)
K/A#                    009EA2.14 Importance Rating                     4.4 Small Break LOCA: Actions to be taken if PTS limits are violated Proposed Question:                 SRO 77 Unit 1 is experiencing a SBLOCA. While in 1-EOP-03 'LOCA', the leak was isolated at 0400.
Revision 24 -Incorporated PCR 05-2946 to update revision based upon PSTG revision.
The following timeline and conditions exist:
NO WORD CHANGES MADE. (Joe Hessling, 10/12/05)
Time                       0422               0432               0442         0452 RCS Pressure                       psi a 1720 psia           1750 psia           1820 psia   1830 psia RCS temperature ReS                       425&deg;F                 415&deg;F               410&deg;F       400&deg;F Pressurizer Level         28%                   29%                 30%           31%
Revision 23 -Incorporated PCR 03-2800 to incorporate operator feedback issues. (J. Martin, 11/18/03)
* 1A Charging pump is running, 1 1A                                        1BBand and 1  1CC Charging pumps have been stopped.
Revision 22 -Incorporated CEN-152, rev 5.2 and allowed procedure to conform with writer's guide. (J. R. Martin, 08/08/02)
* 1A S/G level is 50% NR with AFW at 150 gpm.
Revision 21 -Made grammatical and formatting changes and changed S/G pressure. (Steve Napier, 10/03/01)
AND THIS PROCEDURE HAS BEEN COMPLETELY REWRITTEN.
This procedure has been rewritten to meet CEN 152 Revision 5.1 criteria. (Steve Napier, 08/10/01)
Revision FRG Review Date Approved By Approval Date S-LOPS 0 12/23/85 D. A. Sager 12/23/85 DATE Plant General Man DOCT Revision FRG Review Date Approved By Approval Date DOCN 25 11/06/07 C. Costanzo 11/06/07 SYS Plant General Manager COM N/A ITM Authorized Approver N/A Authorized Approver nor Correction Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating Small Break LOCA: Actions to be taken if PTS limits are violated Proposed Question:
SRO 77 RO 009EA2.14 SRO 1 1 4.4 Unit 1 is experiencing a SBLOCA. While in 1-EOP-03 'LOCA', the leak was isolated at 0400. The following timeline and conditions exist: Time 0422 0432 0442 0452 RCS Pressure 1720 psia 1750 psia 1820 psia 1830 psia ReS temperature 425&deg;F 415&deg;F 410&deg;F 400&deg;F Pressurizer Level 28% 29% 30% 31%
* 1A Charging pump is running, 1B and 1C Charging pumps have been stopped.
* 1 A S/G level is 50% NR with AFW at 150 gpm.
* 1 B S/G level is 43% NR with AFW at 160 gpm.
* 1 B S/G level is 43% NR with AFW at 160 gpm.
(
* Containment temperature is 110&deg;F.
* Containment temperature is 110&deg;F.
* SIAS has NOT been reset. Which of the following states the: 1) Safety function in jeopardy at 0452? 2) Actions required to regain / maintain the jeopardized safety function?
* SIAS has NOT been reset.
A. 1) Core Heat removal 2) Stop the cooldown and depressurize the RCS. "':' B. 1) Core Heat removal 2) Continue to cooldown NOT to exceed 100&deg;F in anyone hour. C. 1) Pressure control 2) Continue to cooldown NOT to exceed 100&deg;F in anyone hour. D. 1) Pressure control 2) Stop the cooldown and depressurize the RCS. 153 ( ( ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Which of the following states the:
Level Tier# Group # K/A# Importance Rating Small Break LOCA: Actions to be taken if PTS limits are violated Proposed Question:
: 1) Safety function in jeopardy at 0452?
SRO 77 RO 009EA2.14 SRO 1 1 4.4 Unit 1 is experiencing a SBLOCA. While in 1-EOP-03 'LOCA', the leak was isolated at 0400. The following timeline and conditions exist: Time 0422 0432 0442 0452 RCS Pressure 1720 psi a 1750 psia 1820 psia 1830 psia RCS temperature 425&deg;F 415&deg;F 410&deg;F 400&deg;F Pressurizer Level 28% 29% 30% 31%
: 2) Actions required to regain / maintain the jeopardized safety function?
* 1 A Charging pump is running, 1 Band 1 C Charging pumps have been stopped.
A. 1) Core Heat removal
* 1 A S/G level is 50% NR with AFW at 150 gpm.
: 2) Stop the cooldown and depressurize the RCS.
* 1 B S/G level is 43% NR with AFW at 160 gpm.
B. 1) Core Heat removal
* Containment temperature is 110&deg;F.
: 2) Continue to cooldown NOT to exceed 100&deg;F in anyone hour.
* SIAS has NOT been reset. Which of the following states the: 1) Safety function in jeopardy at 0452? 2) Actions required to regain / maintain the jeopardized safety function?
C. 1) Pressure control
A. 1) Core Heat removal 2) Stop the cooldown and depressurize the RCS. B. 1) Core Heat removal 2) Continue to cooldown NOT to exceed 100&deg;F in anyone hour. C. 1) Pressure control 2) Continue to cooldown NOT to exceed 100&deg;F in anyone hour. D. 1) Pressure control 2) Stop the cooldown and depressurize the RCS. 153 Proposed Answer: D Explanation (Optional):
: 2) Continue to cooldown NOT to exceed 100&deg;F in anyone hour.
A. Incorrect, all criteria is met core heat removal. RCS is >200&deg;F subcooled at 0432. RCS is outside Figure 1 A, >200&deg;F subcooled B. Incorrect, Core Heat removal is met, cooldown will make subcooling worse C. Incorrect, cooldown will make subcooling worse D. Correct, RCS is outside Figure 1A, >200&deg;F subcooled Technical Reference(s):
D. 1) Pressure control
1-EOP-03 (Attach if not previously provided) 1-EOP-99 Figure 1 A Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
: 2) Stop the cooldown and depressurize the RCS.
1-EOP-99 Figures 1 A and 1 B Learning Objective:
(
_0-=-.7c...::0:..::2:..::8=24-,---=..0-=-.9
153
_______ (As available)
 
Question Source: Bank# Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) -----x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 5 ---Comments:
Proposed Answer:               D0 Explanation (Optional):
x 154 ( ( Proposed Answer: 0 Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect, all criteria is met core heat removal. RCS is >200&deg;F subcooled at 0432. RCS is outside Figure 1A, >200&deg;F subcooled B. Incorrect, Core Heat removal is met, cooldown will make subcooling worse C. Incorrect, cooldown will make subcooling worse D. Correct, RCS is outside Figure 1A, >200&deg;F subcooled Technical Reference(s):         1-EOP-03                                              (Attach if not previously provided) 1-EOP-99 Figure 1A Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:                            1-EOP-99 Figures 1A and 1B Learning Objective:          _0-=-.7c...::0:..::2:..::8=24-,---=..0-=-.9
A. Incorrect, all criteria is met core heat removal. RCS is >200&deg;F subcooled at 0432. RCS is outside Figure 1 A, >200&deg;F subcooled B. Incorrect, Core Heat removal is met, cooldown will make subcooling worse C. Incorrect, cooldown will make subcooling worse D. Correct, RCS is outside Figure 1A, >200&deg;F subcooled Technical Reference(s):
_0_7_0_2_8_2_4-_0_9_                        ____
1-EOP-03 (Attach if not previously provided) 1-EOP-99 Figure 1 A Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
_ (As available)
1-EOP-99 Figures 1 A and 1 B Learning Objective:
Question Source:                Bank#
_0_7_0_2_8_2_4-_0_9
(                                Modified Bank #                                      (Note changes or attach parent)
________ (As available)
New                                          x Question History:              Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:      Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis                                    x 10 CFR Part 55 Content:        55.41 55.43                      --
Question Source: Bank# Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 5 ---Comments:
5  --    -
x 154  
Comments:
( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 39 PPENDICES
(
/ FIGURES / TABLES / DATA SHEETS 116 of 155 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-99 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 FIGURE 1A RCSPRESSURETEMPERATURE (Page 1 of 1) (Containment Temperature Less Than or Equal to 200&deg;F) CAUTION The RCP NPSH curve assumes one pump is operating in each loop. RCP instrumentation should be monitored for seal and pump performance in accordance with 1-EOP-99, Table 13. 2400** 2200 2{1()0 1800 i 1600 .e e '" it< '" 1400 i!: "" " '" '&sect; 1200 e "" " ., 1000 1;; " 'S &#xa3; 800 1')00 400 200* 0 () 100 RCS Pressure Range 2250 psia to 1000 psia 1000 psi a to 500 psia Less than 500 psia ZOO I I I l Subcooled'  
154
.... 9 I ""'1 I I ! / SOo 400 500 600 indicllt<l>d Res Temperature (F) 700 000 Required QSPDS Subcooled Margin Reading (Rep CET) ( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 39 PPENDICES
 
/ FIGURES / TABLES / DATA SHEETS 116 of 155 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-99 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 FIGURE 1A RCS PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (Page 1 of 1) (Containment Temperature Less Than or Equal to 200&deg;F) CAUTION The RCP NPSH curve assumes one pump is operating in each loop. RCP instrumentation should be monitored for seal and pump performance in accordance with 1-EOP-99, Table 13. 2400
REVISION NO.:                PROCEDURE TITLE:                                                            PAGE:
* 2200 2000 1800 i 1600 .8: e " '" '" 1400 i&#xa3; "-t :> 1200 '" <II e 0-"
39                    PPENDICES / FIGURES / TABLES / DATA SHEETS 116 of 155 PROCEDURE NO.:
* 1000 v 'is $: 800 600 400 200 Shlitdown o o 100 ZDO 300 400 500 600 700 eoo Indical'ld Res Temperature IF) RCS Pressure Range Required QSPDS Subcooled Margin Reading (Rep CET) 2250 psia to 1000 psia 1000 psi a to 500 psia 50 to 170T Less than 500 psia REVISION NO.: 39 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-99 PROCEDURE TITLE: PPENDICES
1-EOP-99                                         ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 FIGURE 1A RCSPRESSURETEMPERATURE RCS PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (Page 1 of 1)
/ FIGURES / TABLES / DATA SHEETS ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 FIGURE 18 RCS PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (Page 1 of 1) (Containment Temperature Greater Than 200&deg;F) CAUTION PAGE: 117 of 155 The RCP NPSH curve assumes one pump is operating in each loop. RCP instrumentation should be monitored for seal and pump performance in accordance with 1-EOP-99, Table 13. 2200 . 2000 1800 ' 1000 ; 800 600 400 200 . o ' o Maximum Subcooleo" "'" RCPNPSH ReqUirement",-
(Containment Temperature Less Than or Equal to 200&deg;F)
'
CAUTION The RCP NPSH curve assumes one pump is operating in each loop. RCP instrumentation should be monitored for seal and pump performance in accordance with 1-EOP-99, Table 13.
.. i ,; .' ., '\ .: ... _____ L ____
2400 2400***
100 400 Minimum Subcooled" . 'Includes 500 600 Indicated ReS Temperature (F) 700 eoo ( ( REVISION NO.: 39 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-99 PROCEDURE TITLE: APPENDICES
I I~J 2200 2{1()0 2000 I
/ FIGURES / TABLES / DATA SHEETS ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 FIGURE 18 RCS PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (Page 1 of 1) (Containment Temperature Greater Than 200&deg;F) CAUTION PAGE: 117 of 155 The RCP NPSH curve assumes one pump is operating in each loop. RCP instrumentation should be monitored for seal and pump performance in accordance with 1-EOP-99, Table 13. 2400 2200 2000 1800 -;;-1600 'iii .e :::l <11 '" 1400 .. Q. N '\: 1200, = '" '" Q. "" 11l 1000 '" u ii .s 800 600 400 200 0 0 NQTE At}
I l
A!r! hHQ()
1800 Subcooled' .... 9  I
Unll" j R'C...c (My to t"l!t tm PfW.;,duRl U!oC H v.Qlldtly 01 OPOf1Wf.>\Jd ,l.nt;l .f CP;)flgoC tho FOr Cnortiin!;itQ-f I 100 200 300 400 Subcooled'
(                    i.e.8:   1600
'Includes Ir;strumanl Um:wtaltlti#s
                                                                        ""'1 I e
: 500 GOO 700 800 Indicated ReS Temperature (FJ 
it<
( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: 26 LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-03 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 4.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS (continued)
i!:
INSTRUCTIONS Maintain RCS within Figure 1A or 1B Limits MAINTAIN the RCS less than the upper limits of Figure 1A or 1 B, RCS Pressure Temperature, by performing ANY of the following:
i&#xa3;
A. OPERATE Main or Auxiliary Pressurizer sprays. B. !f HPSI throttle criteria are met, Then THROTTLE SI flow. REFER TO Appendix S, Safety Injection Throttling and Restoration.
                      """'"t 1400 I
o 27. Maintain SIG Level 60 to 70% NR ENSURE at least ONE S/G has level being maintained or restored to between 60 and 70% N R. 26.1 !f the RCS is over-subcooled, or RCS pressure exceeds the upper limits of Figure 1A or 1 B, RCS Pressure Temperature, Then RESTORE subcool1ng or pressure to within the appropriate limit: A. STOP the cooldawn.
                      '&sect;,~:>
B. DEPRESSURIZE the RCS using Main or Auxiliary Pressurizer spray. C. !f HPSI throttle criteria are met, Then THROTTLE SI flow. REFER TO Appendix S, Safety Injection Throttling and Restoration.
                        '"~e
26.2 !f the cooldown rate is greater than 100&deg;F in ANY 1 hour period, Then RESTORE the cooldown rate to within its limit: A. STOP the cooldown AS NECESSARY.
                        <II 1200                                        /
0-1;;
                      'S"
                      'is
                      &#xa3;$:
v 1000 800 1')00 600 400 200*
200 Shlitdown o0 o
()        100 ZOO ZDO      SOo 300        400        500    600    700 eoo 000 indicllt<l>d Res Temperature IF)
Indical'ld                    (F)
RCS Pressure Range                      Required QSPDS Subcooled Margin Reading (Rep CET) 2250 psia to 1000 psia 1000 psi a to 500 psia                                                    50 to 170T Less than 500 psia
 
REVISION NO.:                PROCEDURE TITLE:                                                                                                          PAGE:
39                  APPENDICES PPENDICES / FIGURES / TABLES / DATA SHEETS
(  I----------------~                                                                                                                                          117 of 155 PROCEDURE NO.:
1-EOP-99                                                                        ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 FIGURE 18 RCS PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (Page 1 of 1)
(Containment Temperature Greater Than 200&deg;F)
CAUTION The RCP NPSH curve assumes one pump is operating in each loop. RCP instrumentation should be monitored for seal and pump performance in accordance with 1-EOP-99, Table 13.
NQTE 2400      At} ()-r"f'f'<)!~)( A!r! h~~ hHQ() P!t:~'o:l Unll" j t:()~lltOl Rr..w~m R'C...c u~,    (My      r<'~t!$~&#xa2;fI to t"l!t ~'":.t'&#xa2;n ~t tm PfW.;,duRl U!oC H,<'Orr',!:~
v.Qlldtly 01 ~hc OPOf1Wf.>\Jd ,l.nt;l .f CP;)flgoC ~J<:> (jt'C:C-~$~fY rot~tv tho FOr Cnortiin!;itQ-f I 2200 .
2000 1800 '                                                           Maximum
(                                                                                      Subcooleo" "'",~
                -;;-  1600
                'iii
                .e
                  ~
:::l
                  <11
                  '"~  1400 ..
Q.
                  ~
N
                '\:
                  =    1200,
                  '"'"~
Q.
                ""11l  1000 ;
                  '"u ii
                .s                    RCPNPSH 800        ReqUirement",- '
600            _____
I'~~*
                                                      ' \L ____ . :...
i
                                                                                      "!'~
400                                                                                          Minimum Subcooled" Subcooled' 200 .                                                                                          . 'Includes Ir;strumanl Um:wtaltlti#s :
o0 '
o0                  100                    200               300               400     500         600 GOO          700         eoo 800 Indicated ReS Temperature (F)     (FJ
 
REVISION NO.:            PROCEDURE TITLE:                                            PAGE:
26                        LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT PROCEDURE NO.:
1-EOP-03                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 4.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS (continued)
INSTRUCTIONS                            CONTINGENCY ACTIONS o    26. Maintain RCS within Figure 1A or 1B Limits 26.1 !f the RCS is over-subcooled, 26.111 or RCS pressure exceeds the upper limits of Figure 1A or 1B,  S, MAINTAIN the RCS less than the                  RCS Pressure Temperature, upper limits of Figure 1A or 1 B, S, RCS        Then RESTORE subcool1ng subcooling Pressure Temperature, by performing            or pressure to within the ANY of the following:                          appropriate limit:
A. OPERATE Main                                              cooldawn.
A. STOP the cooldown.
or Auxiliary Pressurizer sprays.
B. DEPRESSURIZE the RCS B. !f 11 HPSI throttle criteria are met,            using Main Then THROTTLE SI flow.                        or Auxiliary Pressurizer spray.
REFER TO Appendix S, Safety Injection Throttling and                  C. If
                                                                  !f HPSI  throttle criteria are met, Restoration.                                   Then THROTTLE SI flow.
(                                                                  REFER TO Appendix S, Safety Injection Throttling and Restoration.
26.2 !f the cooldown rate is greater than 26.211 100&deg;F in ANY 1 hour period, Then RESTORE the cooldown rate to within its limit:
A. STOP the cooldown AS NECESSARY.
B. MAINTAIN the plant in a stable pressure-temperature configuration.
B. MAINTAIN the plant in a stable pressure-temperature configuration.
C. CONTINUE the plant cooldown within the 100&deg;F in ANY 1 hour period limit. ( ( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 26 LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-03 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 4.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS (continued)
C. CONTINUE the plant cooldown within the 100&deg;F in ANY 1 hour period limit.
INSTRUCTIONS o 26. Maintain RCS within Figure 1A or 1B Limits MAINTAIN the RCS less than the upper limits of Figure 1A or 1 S, RCS Pressure Temperature, by performing ANY of the following:
o     27. Maintain SIG Level 60 to 70% NR ENSURE at least ONE S/G has level being maintained or restored to between 60 and 70% NR. N R.
A. OPERATE Main or Auxiliary Pressurizer sprays. B. 11 HPSI throttle criteria are met, Then THROTTLE SI flow. REFER TO Appendix S, Safety Injection Throttling and Restoration.
(
o 27. Maintain SIG Level 60 to 70% NR ENSURE at least ONE S/G has level being maintained or restored to between 60 and 70% NR. CONTINGENCY ACTIONS 26.111 the RCS is over-subcooled, or RCS pressure exceeds the upper limits of Figure 1A or 1 S, RCS Pressure Temperature, Then RESTORE subcooling or pressure to within the appropriate limit: A. STOP the cooldown.
 
B. DEPRESSURIZE the RCS using Main or Auxiliary Pressurizer spray. C. If HPSI throttle criteria are met, Then THROTTLE SI flow. REFER TO Appendix S, Safety Injection Throttling and Restoration.
REVISION NO.:       PROCEDURE TITLE:                                 PAGE:
26.211 the cooldown rate is greater than 100&deg;F in ANY 1 hour period, Then RESTORE the cooldown rate to within its limit: A. STOP the cooldown AS NECESSARY.
26                   LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT 55 of 67 PROCEDURE NO.:
B. MAINTAIN the plant in a stable pressure-temperature configuration.
1-EOP-03                         ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 3 of 11)
C. CONTINUE the plant cooldown within the 100&deg;F in ANY 1 hour period limit. 
: 3. RCS INVENTORY CONTROL SAFETY                     ACCEPTANCE FUNCTION                     CRITERIA             CHECK ~
( ( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: 26 LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-03 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 3 of 11) SAFETY FUNCTION 3. RCS INVENTORY CONTROL ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA A. IF HPSI Throttling Criteria Met: Pressurizer Level RCS Subcooling Reactor Vessel Level At least 30% Greater than or equal to minimum subcooling Hot legs covered (sensors 4 through 8 covered) Less than 20&deg;F difference between T HOT and Rep CET temperature OR (Continued on Next Page) CHECK AND AND OR REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 26 LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT 55 of 67 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-03 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 3 of 11) 3. RCS INVENTORY CONTROL SAFETY ACCEPTANCE FUNCTION CRITERIA CHECK A. IF HPSI Throttling Criteria Met: Pressurizer Level At least 30% I I I I I I I AND RCS Subcooling Greater than or equal I I I I I I I to minimum subcooling AND Reactor Vessel Hot legs covered I 1 I I J I Level (sensors 4 through 8 covered) OR Less than 20&deg;F I I I I I I difference between T HOT and Rep CET temperature OR JJ (Continued on Next Page) (
A. IF HPSI Throttling Criteria Met:
REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: 26 LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT PROCEDURE NO.: B. 1-EOP-03 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 4 of 11) 3. RCS INVENTORY CONTROL (continued)
Pressurizer Level         At least 30%           I I I I I I I AND RCS Subcooling             Greater than or equal I I I   I I   I   I to minimum subcooling                   AND
SAFETY FUNCTION ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA IF HPSI Throttling Criteria NOT Met: Charging Pumps All available running I Safety Injection Flow In accordance with Figure 2, Safety Injection Flow vs. RCS Pressure RAS with at least ONE HPSI Pump running Reactor Vessel Level Core covered (sensors 7 and 8 covered) Rep CET Less than 22&deg;F temperature superheated END OF SAFETY FUNCTION 3 CHECK AND OR AND OR REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 26 PROCEDURE NO.: LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT 56 of 67 1-EOP-03 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 i>> .1: .. ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 4 of 11) 3. RCS INVENTORY CONTROL (continued)
(
SAFETY ACCEPTANCE FUNCTION CRITERIA CHECK --J B. IF HPSI Throttling Criteria NOT Met: Charging Pumps ALL available running I I I I I I I AND Safety Injection Flow In accordance with I I I I J I Figure 2, Safety Injection Flow vs. RCS Pressure ( OR RAS with at least I I I I I I ONE HPSI Pump running AND Reactor Vessel Level Core covered I I I I I I (sensors 7 and 8 covered) OR Rep CET Less than 22&deg;F I I I I I I temperature superheated END OF SAFETY FUNCTION 3 REVISION NO.: 26 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-03 SAFETY FUNCTION A. RCS pressure PROCEDURE TITLE: LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 5 of 11) 4. RCS PRESSURE CONTROL ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA Within limits of Figure 1A or 1 B, RCS Pressure Temperature OR CHECK .y B. Charging Pumps ALL ava i I able ru n n i ngl '-----L_..L..--1----'-_-"----'
Reactor Vessel           Hot legs covered       I 1 I I J I       ~
SI Flow SI flow in accordance with Figure 2, Safety Injection Flow vs. RCS Pressure RAS with at least ONE HPSI Pump running END OF SAFETY FUNCTION 4 AND OR REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 26 LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT 570[@7 PROCEDURE NO.: " 1-EOP-03 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 "; ATTACHMENT 1 ", . SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 5 of 11 ) 4. RCS PRESSURE CONTROL SAFETY ACCEPTANCE FUNCTION CRITERIA CHECK -V A. RCS pressure Within limits of I I I I I I I Figure 1A or 1 B, RCS Pressure Temperature OR ( B. Charging Pumps ALL available running I I I I I I I AND SI Flow SI flow in accordance I I I I I I with Figure 2, Safety Injection Flow vs. RCS Pressure OR RAS with at least I I I I I I ONE HPSI Pump running END OF SAFETY FUNCTION 4
Level                   (sensors 4 through 8 covered)
( \. SION NO.: 26 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-03 SAFETY FUNCTION Forced Cire RCS T HOT Natural Cire PROCEDURE TITLE: LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 6 of 11) 5. CORE HEAT REMOVAL ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA Not superheated OR CHECK -,j Rep CET Temperature Less than 22&deg;F superheated END OF SAFETY FUNCTION 5 PAG REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE; .. 26 LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT <';<-/ PROCEDURE NO.: 58 af67 1-EOP-03 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 > ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 6 of 11) 5. CORE HEAT REMOVAL SAFETY ACCEPTANCE FUNCTION CRITERIA CHECK ..J Forced Cire RCS T HOT Not superheated I I I I I I I OR Natural Cire ( Rep CET Temperature Less than 22&deg;F I I I I I I I superheated END OF SAFETY FUNCTION 5 (
OR Less than 20&deg;F         I I I   I I   I   ~
REVISION NO.: 26 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-03 SAFETY FUNCTION PROCEDURE TITLE: LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 7 of 11) 6. RCS HEAT REMOVAL ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA CHECK -V A. Steam Generator Level At least ON E S/G with '-----'----'-_'-----'----'---'
difference between T HOT and Rep CET temperature OR JJ (Continued on Next Page)
level between RCS TCOLD 60 and 70% N R with Feedwater available At least ONE S/G with Feedwater being controlled to restore level to between 60 and 70% NR Stable or lowering OR AND END OF SAFETY FUNCTION 6 REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 26 LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT 596[1:67 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-03 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 7 of 11) 6. RCS HEAT REMOVAL SAFETY ACCEPTANCE FUNCTION CRITERIA CHECK ..J A. Steam Generator At least ONE S/G with I I I I I I Level level between 60 and 70% NR with Feedwater available OR At least ONE S/G with I I I I I I Feedwater being controlled to restore ( level to between 60 and 70% NR AND RCS TCOLD Stable or lowering I I I I I I I END OF SAFETY FUNCTION 6 Examination Outline Cross-reference:
(
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating Loss of Rx Coolant Makeup: How long PZR can be maintained within limits Proposed Question:
 
SRO 78 RO 022AA2.04 SRO 1 1 3.8 Unit 2 is performing a Natural Circulation cooldown lAW 2-0120039  
REVISION NO.:         PROCEDURE TITLE:                                   PAGE:
'Natural Circulation Cooldown'.
26                     LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT 56 of 67 PROCEDURE NO.:
1-EOP-03                           ST. LUCIE UNIT 1                       i>>
                                                                                    .1: ..
ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 4 of 11)
: 3. RCS INVENTORY CONTROL (continued)
SAFETY                       ACCEPTANCE FUNCTION                       CRITERIA                   ~
CHECK --J B. IF HPSI Throttling Criteria NOT Met:
Charging Pumps             All available running ALL                    I I I   I I     I   I AND Safety Injection Flow       In accordance with     I I I I J I         ~
Figure 2, Safety Injection Flow vs.
RCS Pressure
(
OR RAS with at least     I I I   I I     I   ~
ONE HPSI Pump running AND Reactor Vessel Level       Core covered           I I I   I I     I   ~
(sensors 7 and 8 covered)
OR Rep CET                     Less than 22&deg;F         I I I I I I         ~
temperature                 superheated END OF SAFETY FUNCTION 3
 
REVISION NO.:     PROCEDURE TITLE:                                                  PAGE:
26                 LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT 570[@7 PROCEDURE NO.:
1-EOP-03                       ST. LUCIE UNIT 1                                           ";
ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 5 of 11) 11 )
: 4. RCS PRESSURE CONTROL SAFETY                  ACCEPTANCE FUNCTION                    CRITERIA                         CHECK .y  -V A. RCS pressure              Within limits of           I I I I I I I Figure 1A or 1B, RCS Pressure Temperature OR
B. Charging Pumps                   available ALL ava         ru n ni nglI'-----L_..L..--1----'-_-"----'
iIable running         I I I I I I AND SI Flow                 SI flow in accordance       I   I   I   I   I     I   ~
with Figure 2, Safety Injection Flow vs.
RCS Pressure OR RAS with at least           I   I   I   I   I     I   ~
ONE HPSI Pump running END OF SAFETY FUNCTION 4
 
REVISION SION NO.:     PROCEDURE TITLE:                                 PAG ..
PAGE;
                                                                                  <';<-/
26                LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT PROCEDURE NO.:
58 af67 1-EOP-03                       ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 6 of 11)
: 5. CORE HEAT REMOVAL SAFETY                 ACCEPTANCE FUNCTION                   CRITERIA           CHECK -,j
                                                                    ..J Forced Cire RCS T HOT                   Not superheated     I I I I I I I OR Natural Cire
(
Rep CET Temperature         Less than 22&deg;F     I I I I I I I superheated END OF SAFETY FUNCTION 5
((\.
 
REVISION NO.:       PROCEDURE TITLE:                                              PAGE:
26                 LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT                                596[1:67 PROCEDURE NO.:
1-EOP-03                         ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 7 of 11)
: 6. RCS HEAT REMOVAL SAFETY                    ACCEPTANCE FUNCTION                    CRITERIA                     CHECK -V ..J A. Steam Generator                   ONE At least ON E S/G with I'-----'----'-_'-----'----'---'
I I I I I ~
Level                   level between 60 and 70% N  NRR with Feedwater available OR At least ONE S/G with   I   I   I   I
                                                          '-----'----'--~~~~
I     I   ~
Feedwater being controlled to restore
(                                 level to between 60 and 70% NR AND RCS TCOLD               Stable or lowering       I I I I I I I END OF SAFETY FUNCTION 6
 
Examination Outline Cross-reference:                   Level                 RO              SRO Tier#                                 1 Group #                                 1 KIA #                 022AA2.04 Importance Rating                     3.8 Loss of Rx Coolant Makeup: How long PZR can be maintained within limits Proposed Question:                 SRO 78 Unit 2 is performing a Natural Circulation cooldown lAW 2-0120039 'Natural Circulation Cooldown'.
At time 0220 the following conditions were noted:
At time 0220 the following conditions were noted:
* Pressurizer pressure is 1620 psia.
* Pressurizer pressure is 1620 psia.
Line 209: Line 318:
* RCS temperature is 490&deg;F and lowering.
* RCS temperature is 490&deg;F and lowering.
* BAM tanks and RWT are NOT available for makeup to the RCS.
* BAM tanks and RWT are NOT available for makeup to the RCS.
* Pressurizer level is 30% and lowering at a rate of 1.2% every 30 minutes. Based on the above conditions:  
* Pressurizer level is 30% and lowering at a rate of 1.2% every 30 minutes.
: 1) In accordance with Technical Specifications when is the earliest the would be considered Inoperable and what is the required action if the Pressurizer is declared inoperable?
Based on the above conditions:
: 2) What lineup is available for makeup to the RCS? A. 1) 0320, be in HOT SHUTDOWN within 6 hours 2) Safety Injection tanks directly to the suction of the Charging Pumps B. 1) 0350, be in HOT SHUTDOWN within 6 hours 2) Safety Injection tanks directly to the VCT to the suction of the Charging Pumps C. 1) 0320, be in HOT SHUTDOWN within 72 hours 2) Safety Injection tanks directly to the VCT to the suction of the Charging Pumps D. 1) 0350, be in HOT SHUTDOWN within 72 hours 2) Safety Injection tanks directly to the suction of the Charging Pumps 155 ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
(
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating Loss of Rx Coolant Makeup: How long PZR can be maintained within limits Proposed Question:
Pre~surizer would be
SRO 78 RO SRO 022AA2.04 3.8 Unit 2 is performing a Natural Circulation cooldown lAW 2-0120039
: 1) In accordance with Technical Specifications when is the earliest the Pressurizer considered Inoperable and what is the required action if the Pressurizer is declared inoperable?
'Natural Circulation Cooldown'.
: 2) What lineup is available for makeup to the RCS?
At time 0220 the following conditions were noted:
A. 1) 0320, be in HOT SHUTDOWN within 6 hours
* Pressurizer pressure is 1620 psia.
: 2) Safety Injection tanks directly to the suction of the Charging Pumps B. 1) 0350, be in HOT SHUTDOWN within 6 hours
* SIAS has been blocked.
: 2) Safety Injection tanks directly to the VCT to the suction of the Charging Pumps C. 1) 0320, be in HOT SHUTDOWN within 72 hours
* RCS temperature is 490&deg;F and lowering.
: 2) Safety Injection tanks directly to the VCT to the suction of the Charging Pumps D. 1) 0350, be in HOT SHUTDOWN within 72 hours
* BAM tanks and RWT are NOT available for makeup to the RCS.
: 2) Safety Injection tanks directly to the suction of the Charging Pumps 155
* Pressurizer level is 30% and lowering at a rate of 1.2% every 30 minutes. Based on the above conditions:
 
: 1) In accordance with Technical Specifications when is the earliest the Pressurizer would be considered Inoperable and what is the required action if the Pressurizer is declared inoperable?  
Proposed Answer:             B Explanation (Optional):
: 2) What lineup is available for makeup to the RCS? A. 1) 0320, be in HOT SHUTDOWN within 6 hours 2) Safety Injection tanks directly to the suction of the Charging Pumps B. 1) 0350, be in HOT SHUTDOWN within 6 hours 2) Safety Injection tanks directly to the VCT to the suction of the Charging Pumps C. 1) 0320, be in HOT SHUTDOWN within 72 hours 2) Safety Injection tanks directly to the VCT to the suction of the Charging Pumps D. 1) 0350, be in HOT SHUTDOWN within 72 hours 2) Safety Injection tanks directly to the suction of the Charging Pumps 155 Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect: Time line is incorrect. At 0320 Pressurizer level would be appx. 27.5 % which is above the Technical Specification lower limit.
A. Incorrect:
Incorrect: SIT lineup is to the VCT not the RWT. Various valves to the RWT are manipulated but lineup is to the VCT.
Time line is incorrect.
B. Correct: Pressurizer level would be 26.4% which is lower than T.S. lower limit Correct: Lineup is to VCT not RWT C. Incorrect: Time line is incorrect. At 0320 Pressurizer level would be appx. 27.5 % which is above the Technical Specification lower limit. 72 hour restoration time is only for heater operability.
At 0320 Pressurizer level would be appx. 27.5 % which is above the Technical Specification lower limit. Incorrect:
SIT lineup is to the VCT not the RWT. Various valves to the RWT are manipulated but lineup is to the VCT. B. Correct: Pressurizer level would be 26.4% which is lower than T.S. lower limit Correct: Lineup is to VCT not RWT C. Incorrect:
Time line is incorrect.
At 0320 Pressurizer level would be appx. 27.5 % which is above the Technical Specification lower limit. 72 hour restoration time is only for heater operability.
Correct: Lineup is to VCT not RWT D. Correct: Pressurizer level would be 26.4% which is lower than T.S. lower limit. 72 hour restoration time is only for heater operability.
Correct: Lineup is to VCT not RWT D. Correct: Pressurizer level would be 26.4% which is lower than T.S. lower limit. 72 hour restoration time is only for heater operability.
Incorrect:
Incorrect: SIT lineup is to the VCT not the RWT. Various valves to the RWT are manipulated but lineup is to the VCT.
SIT lineup is to the VCT not the RWT. Various valves to the RWT are manipulated but lineup is to the VCT. Technical Reference(s):
Technical Reference(s):       T.S. 3/4.4.3                       (Attach if not previously provided)
T.S. 3/4.4.3 (Attach if not previously provided)  
(                              2-0120039 Natural Circulation Cooldown.
--------------------------
2-0120039 Natural Circulation Cooldown.
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
Learning Objective:           0902723-01,,,--0_7_0_2_85_8_-0_8___
_0_9_0_2_7_23_-_0_1
_0_9_0_2_7_23_-_0_1 0702858-08            available)
,,--0_7_0_2_85_8_-0_8___ (As avai lable) Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 5 ---'-----Comments:
(As avai lable)
x 156 ( ( Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional):
                              ----------~---------------
A. Incorrect:
Question Source:             Bank #
Time line is incorrect.
Modified Bank #                     (Note changes or attach parent)
At 0320 Pressurizer level would be appx. 27.5 % which is above the Technical Specification lower limit. Incorrect:
New                    x Question History:             Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:     Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis                   x 10 CFR Part 55 Content:       55.41 55.43     -  5- -
SIT lineup is to the VCT not the RWT. Various valves to the RWT are manipulated but lineup is to the VCT. B. Correct: Pressurizer level would be 26.4% which is lower than T.S. lower limit Correct: Lineup is to VCT not RWT C. Incorrect:
Comments:
Time line is incorrect.
(
At 0320 Pressurizer level would be appx. 27.5 % which is above the Technical Specification lower limit. 72 hour restoration time is only for heater operability.
156
Correct: Lineup is to VCT not RWT D. Correct: Pressurizer level would be 26.4% which is lower than T.S. lower limit. 72 hour restoration time is only for heater operability.
 
Incorrect:
REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM
SIT lineup is to the VCT not the RWT. Various valves to the RWT are manipulated but lineup is to the VCT. Technical Reference(s):
\.\
T.S. 3/4.4.3 (Attach if not previously provided) 2-0120039 Natural Circulation Cooldown.
3/4.4.3     PRESSURIZER LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.4.3       The pressurizer shall be OPERABLE with a minimum water level of'greater of!greater tIlan or equal to 27% jndicated than                    indicated level and a maximum water level of less than or equal to 68% indicated level and at least two groups of pressurizer heaters capable of being powered from 1E buses each having a nominal capacity of at least 150 kW.
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
APPLICABILITY: MODES 1, 2 and 3.
Learning Objective:
ACTION:
0902723-01, 0702858-08 (As available)
: a. With one group of the above required pressurizer heaters inoperable, restore at least two groups to OPERABLE status within 72 hours or be in at least HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours and in HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours.
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) ---------x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 5 ---Comments:
: b. With the pressurizer otherwise inoperable, be in at least HOT STANDBY with the reactor trip breakers open within 6 hours and in HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours.
x 156
( SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.4.3.1     The pressurizer water volume shall be determined to be within its limits at least once per 12 hours.
\ REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 3/4.4.3 PRESSURIZER LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.4.3 The pressurizer shall be OPERABLE with a minimum water level of!greater tIlan or equal to 27% jndicated level and a maximum water level of less than or equal to 68% indicated level and at least two groups of pressurizer heaters capable of being powered from 1 E buses each having a nominal capacity of at least 150 kW. APPLICABILITY:
4.4.3.2     The capacity of each of the above required groups of pressurizer heaters shall be verified to be at least 150 kW at least once per 92 days.
MODES 1, 2 and 3. ACTION: a. With one group of the above required pressurizer heaters inoperable, restore at least two groups to OPERABLE status within 72 hours or be in at least HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours and in HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours. b. With the pressurizer otherwise inoperable, be in at least HOT STANDBY with the reactor trip breakers open within 6 hours and in HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours. SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.4.3.1 The pressurizer water volume shall be determined to be within its limits at least once per 12 hours. 4.4.3.2 The capacity of each of the above required groups of pressurizer heaters shall be verified to be at least 150 kW at least once per 92 days. 4.4.3.3 The emergency power supply for the pressurizer heaters shall be demonstrated OPERABLE at least once per 18 months by verifying that on an Engineered Safety Features Actuation test signal concurrent with a loss of offsite power: a. the pressurizer heaters are automatically shed from the emergency power sources, and b. the pressurizer heaters can be reconnected to their respective buses manually from the control room after resetting of the ESFAS test signal. ST. LUCIE -UNIT 2 3/4 4-9 Amendment No. g, 11 \. ( ( REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 3/4.4.3 PRESSURIZER LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.4.3 The pressurizer shall be OPERABLE with a minimum water level of'greater than or equal to 27% indicated level and a maximum water level of less than or equal to 68% indicated level and at least two groups of pressurizer heaters capable of being powered from 1 E buses each having a nominal capacity of at least 150 kW. APPLICABILITY:
4.4.3.3     The emergency power supply for the pressurizer heaters shall be demonstrated OPERABLE at least once per 18 months by verifying that on an Engineered Safety Features Actuation test signal concurrent with a loss of offsite power:
MODES 1, 2 and 3. ACTION: a. With one group of the above required pressurizer heaters inoperable, restore at least two groups to OPERABLE status within 72 hours or be in at least HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours and in HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours. b. With the pressurizer otherwise inoperable, be in at least HOT STANDBY with the reactor trip breakers open within 6 hours and in HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours. SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.4.3.1 The pressurizer water volume shall be determined to be within its limits at least once per 12 hours. 4.4.3.2 The capacity of each of the above required groups of pressurizer heaters shall be verified to be at least 150 kW at least once per 92 days. 4.4.3.3 The emergency power supply for the pressurizer heaters shall be demonstrated OPERABLE at least once per 18 months by verifying that on an Engineered Safety Features Actuation test signal concurrent with a loss of offsite power: a. the pressurizer heaters are automatically shed from the emergency power sources, and b. the pressurizer heaters can be reconnected to their respective buses manually from the control room after resetting of the ESFAS test signal. ST. LUCIE -UNIT 2 3/4 4-9 Amendment No. g, 11 REVISION NO,: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 36A NATURAL CIRCULATION COOLDOWN 6 of 31 PROCEDURE NO,: 2-0120039 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 7.2 Subsequent Operator Actions (continued)
: a. the pressurizer heaters are automatically shed from the emergency power sources, and
INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS CAUTION After a boron concentration for cold shutdown is attained in the RCS, makeup water added to the RCS during the cooldown should be at least the same boron concentration as in the RCS to prevent boron concentration.  
: b. the pressurizer heaters can be reconnected to their respective buses manually from the control room after resetting of the ESFAS test signal.
: 3. &sect;1 BORATE to maintain adequate SDM throughout the RCS cooldown.  
(
: 4. &sect;1,2,3 PERFORM ALL of the following:
ST. LUCIE - UNIT 2                               3/4 4-9                 Amendment No. g, 11
NOTE If BAM tanks and RWT are NOT available, the SITs may be used for makeup to the RCS per Appendix A. Chemistry Department should be informed of any holds or cooldown rate changes that will affect the frequency of RCS boron concentration sampling.
 
Once sampling be ins, at least 15 minutes of lead-time is required to obtain the sample. A. COMMENCE an RCS cooldown to less than 325&deg;F, within the limits of Figure 1, RCS Pressure Temperature, at a rate NOT to exceed 50&deg;F per hour, using SBCS. REFER TO Figure 2, Recommended Cooldown Guidelines.
REVISION NO,:
B. RECORD the Pressurizer water phase temperature on Table 1 and PLOT on Figure 4, Pressurizer I RCS Cooldown Curve, every 30 minutes. C. PLOT the highest RCS cold leg temperature on Figure 4, Pressurizer I RCS Cooldown Curve, every 30 minutes. D. RECORD RCS Boron Concentration every 50&deg;F on Data Sheet 1. A. OPERATE ANY of the following to cooldown the RCS to less than 325&deg;F, within the limits of Figure 1, RCS Pressure Temperature, at a rate NOT to exceed 50&deg;F per hour. REFER TO Figure 2, Recommended Cooldown Guidelines .
NO.:          PROCEDURE TITLE:                                         PAGE:
36A                 NATURAL CIRCULATION COOLDOWN 6 of 31 PROCEDURE NO,:
NO.:
2-0120039                           ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 7.2 Subsequent Operator Actions (continued)
INSTRUCTIONS                           CONTINGENCY ACTIONS CAUTION After a boron concentration for cold shutdown is attained in the RCS, makeup water added to the RCS during the cooldown should be at least the same boron concentration as in the RCS to prevent any dilution of RCS boron concentration.
: 3.   &sect;1 BORATE to maintain adequate SDM             3. If BAM tanks and RWT are NOT throughout the RCS cooldown.                    available, the SITs may be used for makeup to the RCS per Appendix A.
: 4.   &sect;1,2,3 PERFORM ALL of the following:           4.
NOTE Chemistry Department should be informed of any holds or cooldown rate changes that will affect the frequency of RCS boron concentration sampling. Once
(                  be ins, at least 15 minutes of lead-time is required to obtain the sample.
sampling begins, A. COMMENCE an RCS cooldown to                 A. OPERATE ANY of the less than 325&deg;F, within the limits of             following to cooldown the Figure 1, RCS Pressure                             RCS to less than 325&deg;F, Temperature, at a rate NOT to                     within the limits of Figure 1, exceed 50&deg;F per hour, using SBCS.                 RCS Pressure Temperature, REFER TO Figure 2, Recommended                     at a rate NOT to exceed 50&deg;F Cooldown Guidelines.                              per hour. REFER TO Figure 2, Recommended Cooldown Guidelines .
* ADVs
* ADVs
* 2C AFW Pump ( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 36A NATURAL CIRCULATION COOLDOWN 6 of 31 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-0120039 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 7.2 Subsequent Operator Actions (continued)
* 2C AFW Pump B. RECORD the Pressurizer water phase temperature on Table 1 and PLOT on Figure 4, Pressurizer I RCS Cooldown Curve, every 30 minutes.
INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS CAUTION After a boron concentration for cold shutdown is attained in the RCS, makeup water added to the RCS during the cooldown should be at least the same boron concentration as in the RCS to prevent any dilution of RCS boron concentration.
C. PLOT the highest RCS cold leg temperature on Figure 4, Pressurizer I RCS Cooldown Curve, every 30 minutes.
: 3. &sect;1 BORATE to maintain adequate SDM throughout the RCS cooldown.
D. RECORD RCS Boron Concentration every 50&deg;F on Data Sheet 1.
: 3. If BAM tanks and RWT are NOT available, the SITs may be used for makeup to the RCS per Appendix A. 4. &sect;1,2,3 PERFORM ALL of the following:
 
: 4. NOTE Chemistry Department should be informed of any holds or cooldown rate changes that will affect the frequency of RCS boron concentration sampling.
REVISION NO.:         PROCEDURE TITLE:                                     PAGE:
Once sampling begins, at least 15 minutes of lead-time is required to obtain the sample. A. COMMENCE an RCS cooldown to less than 325&deg;F, within the limits of Figure 1, RCS Pressure Temperature, at a rate NOT to exceed 50&deg;F per hour, using SBCS. REFER TO Figure 2, Recommended Cooldown Guidelines.
36A                 NATURAL CIRCULATION COOLDOWN 21 of 31 PROCEDURE NO.:
B. RECORD the Pressurizer water phase temperature on Table 1 and PLOT on Figure 4, Pressurizer I RCS Cooldown Curve, every 30 minutes. C. PLOT the highest RCS cold leg temperature on Figure 4, Pressurizer I RCS Cooldown Curve, every 30 minutes. D. RECORD RCS Boron Concentration every 50&deg;F on Data Sheet 1. A. OPERATE ANY of the following to cooldown the RCS to less than 325&deg;F, within the limits of Figure 1, RCS Pressure Temperature, at a rate NOT to exceed 50&deg;F per hour. REFER TO Figure 2, Recommended Cooldown Guidelines .
2-0120039                         ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 APPENDIX A VCT MAKEUP FROM THE SITs (Page 1 of 2)
* ADVs
INITIAL If other sources of make up are NOT available, the SITs may be used for makeup to the RCS as follows:
* 2C AFW Pump REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 36A NATURAL CIRCULATION COOLDOWN 21 of 31 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-0120039 APPENDIX A VCT MAKEUP FROM THE SITs (Page 1 of 2) If other sources of make up are NOT available, the SITs may be used for makeup to the RCS as follows: CAUTION &sect;1 Use only one SIT at a time. RCS pressure must be less than 1750 psia before using this method. 1. Verify NO CIAS or SIAS signal is present. If present, they must be reset for operation of certain valves. 2. Ensure V2501, VCT Outlet Valve, is in open and V2504, Refueling Water to Charging Pumps, is in closed. 3. Align the SIT to RWTNCT line as follows: 4. 5.
CAUTION
* A. ,-r3 Ensure V2621 , VCT Inlet from Pri M/U Wtr. & BAM Isol CLOSED. B. Close V3597, SIT Test Line to RWT. C. Open and lock V3463, SIT Test Line to RWT. D. Open V3201, SIT Recirc. to VCT. E. Open SE-03-2A12B, SIT Test Line to RWT. Add borated water to the VCT from the selected SIT by opening its associated Fill & Drain Valve as needed. 2A1 SIT:SE-03-1AN3621 2A2 SIT:SE-03-1 BN3611 2B1 SIT:SE-03-1 CN3631 2B2 SIT:SE-03-1 DN3641 Borate the RCS to Cold Shutdown boron concentration.
          &sect;1 Use only one SIT at a time. RCS pressure must be less than 1750 psia before using this method.
INITIAL ( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 36A NATURAL CIRCULATION COOLDOWN 21 of 31 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-0120039 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 APPENDIX A VCT MAKEUP FROM THE SITs (Page 1 of 2) If other sources of make up are NOT available, the SITs may be used for makeup to the RCS as follows: CAUTION &sect;1 Use only one SIT at a time. RCS pressure must be less than 1750 psia before using this method. 1. Verify NO CIAS or SIAS signal is present. If present, they must be reset for operation of certain valves. 2. Ensure V2501, VCT Outlet Valve, is in open and V2504, Refueling Water to Charging Pumps, is in closed. 3. Align the SIT to RWTNCT line as follows: 4. 5. A. ,-[3 Ensure V2621, VCT Inlet from Pri M/U Wtr. & BAM Isol CLOSED. B. Close V3597, SIT Test Line to RWT. C. Open and lock V3463, SIT Test Line to RWT. D. Open V3201, SIT Recirc. to VCT. E. Open SE-03-2A12B, SIT Test Line to RWT. Add borated water to the VCT from the selected SIT by opening its associated Fill & Drain Valve as needed. 2A1 SIT:SE-03-1AN3621 2A2 SIT:SE-03-1 BN3611 2B1 SIT:SE-03-1CN3631 2B2 SIT:SE-03-1 DN3641 Borate the RCS to Cold Shutdown boron concentration.
: 1.     Verify NO CIAS or SIAS signal is present. If present, they must be reset for operation of certain valves.
INITIAL 3J w (J) >> 3J w (J) >> 3J w (J) >> 3J w (J) >>
: 2.     Ensure V2501, VCT Outlet Valve, is in open and V2504, Refueling Water to Charging Pumps, is in closed.
REVISION N
: 3.     Align the SIT to RWTNCT line as follows:
(
A.     ,-r3
                  ,-[3        V2621,, VCT Inlet from Pri M/U Wtr. & BAM Isol Ensure V2621 CLOSED.
B.     Close V3597, SIT Test Line to RWT.
C.     Open and lock V3463, SIT Test Line to RWT.
D.     Open V3201, SIT Recirc. to VCT.
E.     Open SE-03-2A12B, SIT Test Line to RWT.
: 4.      Add borated water to the VCT from the selected SIT by opening its associated Fill & Drain Valve as needed.                                           3J w
(J) 2A1   SIT:SE-03-1AN3621 3J w
2A2   SIT:SE-03-1 BN3611                                                           (J) 2B1   SIT:SE-03-1 CN3631 SIT:SE-03-1CN3631                                                            3J w
2B2   SIT:SE-03-1 DN3641                                                           (J) 3J w
: 5.      Borate the RCS to Cold Shutdown boron concentration.                               (J)
 
REVISION NO.
NO.:         PROCEDURE TITLE:                                     PAGE:
36A               NATURAL CIRCULATION COOLDOWN 22 of 31 PROCEDURE NO.:
2-0120039                         ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 APPENDIX A VCT MAKEUP FROM THE SITs (Page 2 of 2)
INITIAL
: 6.     ~3   When the associated SIT reaches its wide range level of 5%, Then
          'h    ISOLATE by closing its associated fill and drain valve:
A.     2A1 SIT:SE-03-1A1V3621 SIT:SE-03-1AN3621 B.      2A2 SIT:SE-03-1 BN3611 C.      2B1 SIT:SE-03-1CN3631 D.      2B2 SIT:SE-03-1 DN3641
(
END OF APPENDIX A
 
                                                                                                        , ./
r~; ;/~;I  t, c,
                                                                                                    ~
TABLE 1.2 OPERATIONAL MODES OPERATIONAL                REACTIVITY            % OF RATED
                                                          %                  AVERAGE COOLANT MODE                CONDITION, KeffKeff  THERMAL POWER*        TEMPERATURE
: 1. POWER OPERATION                ~  0.99              >5%
: 2. STARTUP                        ~  0.99              ~5%
:::5%                ~  325&deg;F
: 3. HOT STANDBY                      < 0.99                  0                ~  325&deg;F
: 4. HOT SHUTDOWN                    < 0.99                  0            325&deg;F> T avg > 200&deg;F
: 5. COLD SHUTDOWN                    < 0.99                  0                ~ 200&deg;F
: 6. REFUELlNG**                    ~ 0.95
:::                      0                ~ 140&deg;F
* Excluding decay heat.
  ** Fuel in the reactor vessel with the vessel head closure bolts less than fully tensioned or with the head removed.
(
ST. LUCIE - UNIT 2                                1-9


==O. PROCEDURE==
Examination Outline Cross-reference:                          Level                            RO                    SRO Tier#
Group #                                                  1 KIA #                            058AG2.2.4 Importance Rating                                        3.6 Loss of DC Power: Ability to explain the variations in control board layout, systems, instrumentation and procedural actions between units at a facility.
Proposed Question:                    SRO 79 Unit 1 was at 100% power when a loss of the 1A                  1A DC bus occurs.
: 1) The response of the Auxiliary Feedwater Actuation System (AFAS) will be:
: 2) Which Technical Specification action statement applies to the loss of the A DC bus?
A. 1) Channel A will be in bypass, channel C will be in trip. If SG levels drop to <19%
narrow range, full AFAS actuation will occur in 235 seconds.
: 2) Restore the 1A DC bus to operable status within 2 hours.
B. 1) Channel A will be in bypass, channel C will be in trip. If SG levels drop to <19%
(            narrow range, full AFAS actuation will occur in 210 seconds.
: 2) Restore the 1A DC bus to operable status within 6 hours.
C. 1) Channel A will be in trip, channel C will be in bypass. If SG levels drop to <19%
narrow range, full AFAS actuation will occur in 210 seconds.
: 2) Restore the 1A DC bus to operable status within 2 hours.
D. 1) Channel A will be in trip, channel C will be in bypass. If SG levels drop to <19%
narrow range, full AFAS actuation will occur in 235 seconds.
: 2) Restore the 1A DC bus to operable status within 6 hours.
(
157


TITLE: PAGE: 36A NATURAL CIRCULATION COOLDOWN 22 of 31 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-0120039 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 APPENDIX A VCT MAKEUP FROM THE SITs (Page 2 of 2) INITIAL 6. When the associated SIT reaches its wide range level of 5%, Then ISOLATE by closing its associated fill and drain valve: A. 2A1 SIT:SE-03-1AN3621 B. 2A2 SIT:SE-03-1 BN3611 C. 2B1 SIT:SE-03-1CN3631 D. 2B2 SIT:SE-03-1 DN3641 END OF APPENDIX A REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 36A NATURAL CIRCULATION COOLDOWN 22 of 31 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-0120039 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 APPENDIX A VCT MAKEUP FROM THE SITs (Page 2 of 2) INITIAL 6. 'h When the associated SIT reaches its wide range level of 5%, Then ISOLATE by closing its associated fill and drain valve: A. 2A1 SIT:SE-03-1A1V3621 B. 2A2 SIT:SE-03-1 BN3611 C. 2B1 SIT:SE-03-1CN3631 D. 2B2 SIT:SE-03-1 DN3641 ( END OF APPENDIX A OPERATIONAL MODE 1. POWER OPERATION
Proposed Answer:           A Explanation (Optional):
: 2. STARTUP 3. HOT STANDBY 4. HOT SHUTDOWN 5. COLD SHUTDOWN 6. REFUELlNG**
A. Correct:
* Excluding decay heat. TABLE 1.2 OPERATIONAL MODES REACTIVITY
B. Incorrect: 210 seconds AFAS time delay is Unit 2 not Unit 1. T.S. action is 2 hours not 6 hours C. Incorrect: A channel in trip, not bypass. C channel in bypass not trip.
% OF RATED AVERAGE COOLANT CONDITION, Keff THERMAL POWER* TEMPERATURE 0.99 >5% 0.99 325&deg;F < 0.99 0 325&deg;F < 0.99 0 325&deg;F> T avg > 200&deg;F < 0.99 0 200&deg;F 0.95 0 140&deg;F ** Fuel in the reactor vessel with the vessel head closure bolts less than fully tensioned or with the head removed. ST. LUCIE -UNIT 2 1-9 ( OPERATIONAL MODE 1. POWER OPERATION
D. Incorrect: A channel in trip, not bypass. C channel in bypass not trip. T.S. action 2 hours not 6 hours Technical Reference(s):   PSL OPS SYS 412 TXT                 (Attach if not previously provided)
: 2. STARTUP 3. HOT STANDBY 4. HOT SHUTDOWN 5. COLD SHUTDOWN 6. REFUELlNG**
* Excluding decay heat. TABLE 1.2 OPERATIONAL MODES REACTIVITY
% OF RATED CONDITION, Keff THERMAL POWER* 0.99 >5% 0.99 :::5% < 0.99 0 < 0.99 0 < 0.99 0 ::: 0.95 0 ** Fuel in the reactor vessel with the vessel head closure bolts less than fully tensioned or with the head removed. ST. LUCIE -UNIT 2 1-9 AVERAGE COOLANT TEMPERATURE 325&deg;F 325&deg;F 325&deg;F> T avg > 200&deg;F ::: 200&deg;F ::: 140&deg;F , ./
t, c, 
( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO SRO 1 058AG2.2.4 3.6 Loss of DC Power: Ability to explain the variations in control board layout, systems, instrumentation and procedural actions between units at a facility.
Proposed Question:
SRO 79 Unit 1 was at 100% power when a loss of the 1A DC bus occurs. 1) The response of the Auxiliary Feedwater Actuation System (AFAS) will be: 2) Which Technical Specification action statement applies to the loss of the A DC bus? A. 1) Channel A will be in bypass, channel C will be in trip. If SG levels drop to <19% narrow range, full AFAS actuation will occur in 235 seconds. 2) Restore the 1 A DC bus to operable status within 2 hours. B. 1) Channel A will be in bypass, channel C will be in trip. If SG levels drop to <19% narrow range, full AFAS actuation will occur in 210 seconds. 2) Restore the 1 A DC bus to operable status within 6 hours. C. 1) Channel A will be in trip, channel C will be in bypass. If SG levels drop to <19% narrow range, full AFAS actuation will occur in 210 seconds. 2) Restore the 1 A DC bus to operable status within 2 hours. D. 1) Channel A will be in trip, channel C will be in bypass. If SG levels drop to <19% narrow range, full AFAS actuation will occur in 235 seconds. 2) Restore the 1 A DC bus to operable status within 6 hours. 157 ( ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO SRO 058AG2.2.4 3.6 Loss of DC Power: Ability to explain the variations in control board layout, systems, instrumentation and procedural actions between units at a facility.
Proposed Question:
SRO 79 Unit 1 was at 100% power when a loss of the 1 A DC bus occurs. 1) The response of the Auxiliary Feedwater Actuation System (AFAS) will be: 2) Which Technical Specification action statement applies to the loss of the A DC bus? A. 1) Channel A will be in bypass, channel C will be in trip. If SG levels drop to <19% narrow range, full AFAS actuation will occur in 235 seconds. 2) Restore the 1 A DC bus to operable status within 2 hours. B. 1) Channel A will be in bypass, channel C will be in trip. If SG levels drop to <19% narrow range, full AFAS actuation will occur in 210 seconds. 2) Restore the 1 A DC bus to operable status within 6 hours. C. 1) Channel A will be in trip, channel C will be in bypass. If SG levels drop to <19% narrow range, full AFAS actuation will occur in 210 seconds. 2) Restore the 1 A DC bus to operable status within 2 hours. D. 1) Channel A will be in trip, channel C will be in bypass. If SG levels drop to <19% narrow range, full AFAS actuation will occur in 235 seconds. 2) Restore the 1 A DC bus to operable status within 6 hours. 157 Proposed Answer: A Explanation (Optional):
A. Correct: B. Incorrect:
210 seconds AFAS time delay is Unit 2 not Unit 1. T.S. action is 2 hours not 6 hours C. Incorrect:
A channel in trip, not bypass. C channel in bypass not trip. D. Incorrect:
A channel in trip, not bypass. C channel in bypass not trip. T.S. action 2 hours not 6 hours Technical Reference(s):
PSL OPS SYS 412 TXT (Attach if not previously provided)  
-------------------------
T.S. 3.8.2.3 Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
T.S. 3.8.2.3 Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
Learning Objective:       PSL OPS 0702412 Obj. 14, 19         (As available)
PSL OPS 0702412 Obj. 14, 19 (As available)
Question Source:           Bank #
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) ------X Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 5,6,7 ,10 55.43 2 ---Comments:
Modified Bank #                     (Note changes or attach parent)
X 158 ( ( , Proposed Answer: A Explanation (Optional):
New                    X
A. Correct: B. Incorrect:
(
210 seconds AFAS time delay is Unit 2 not Unit 1. T.S. action is 2 hours not 6 hours C. Incorrect:
Question History:         Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis                   X 10 CFR Part 55 Content:   55.41     5,6,7
A channel in trip, not bypass. C channel in bypass not trip. D. Incorrect:
                                        ,10 55.43     2 Comments:
A channel in trip, not bypass. C channel in bypass not trip. T.S. action 2 hours not 6 hours Technical Reference(s):
(,
PSL OPS SYS 412 TXT (Attach if not previously provided)
158
--------------------------
 
T.S. 3.8.2.3 Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
PSL OPS SYS 412 TXT R22                                            For Training Use Only Battery Bus A and Instrument Inverters Band D are powered from Battery Bus B. The internal power supply auctioneering scheme for AFAS is such that the Bistable, Matrices, Initiation, Actuation, and Trip Bypass circuits for each channel should remain energized in the event one safety battery bus is lost. However, power would be lost to the corresponding process instruments (e.g., S/G Level, pressure) resulting in an actuation of AFAS-1 and AFAS-2. The Battery Failure Bypass was built to preclude the unneeded actuation.
Learning Objective:
Both of the Battery Buses are monitored for voltage and in the event one of them loses power the Battery Failure Bypass is invoked in affected Ch. A or B. The two affected channels will trip, but in Ch. A(B) the battery bus monitoring relay causes the AFAS-1 and AFAS-2 Channel Bypass Relays in the affected Channel A or B to energize, placing that channel in Trip Channel Bypass. This causes the same annunciation and indication as the CHANNEL BYPASS, plus illuminates the BATTERY FAILURE BYPASS indicator on the Ch. A or B Control Panel front and additional annunciators on RTGB-102(202). The additional annunciators are:
PSL OPS 0702412 Obj. 14, 19 (As available)
UNIT 1                                        UNIT2
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) X Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 5,6,7 ,10 55.43 2 ---Comments:
(       AFAS Bistable Pretrip AFAS Cabinet Trouble AFAS Stm Gen Faulted Channel Trip AFAS Stm Gen Low Level Channel Trip AFAS TroublelTest Trouble/Test The end result is one of the two affected channels is bypassed (Ch. A or B), the other is in a tripped condition (Ch. C or D) and the AFAS coincidence logic is reduced to 1 out of 2. If a low level or loss of power subsequently occurs in one of the two operable channels, an AFAS-1 (2) would occur.
X 158 
Based on actual plant operating conditions on loss of a single DC bus, Reactor Protection System will cause the plant to trip. When SG levels drop to <19% on 2/4 channels AFAS-1 and AFAS-2 will actuate after its assigned time delay of 235[210] seconds is met.
( PSL OPS SYS 412 TXT R22 For Training Use Only Battery Bus A and Instrument Inverters Band D are powered from Battery Bus B. The internal power supply auctioneering scheme for AFAS is such that the Bistable, Matrices, Initiation, Actuation, and Trip Bypass circuits for each channel should remain energized in the event one safety battery bus is lost. However, power would be lost to the corresponding process instruments (e.g., S/G Level, pressure) resulting in an actuation of AFAS-1 and AFAS-2. The Battery Failure Bypass was built to preclude the unneeded actuation.
On Unit 1, if the "B" DC bus (and thus the AB DC bus) were lost, then AFW Pumps Band C would NOT start. AFW Pump A would feed SG-A. If the "A" DC bus were lost (AB DC bus remained energized), then AFW Pump B would feed SG-B and AFW Pump C would start Page 49 of99
Both of the Battery Buses are monitored for voltage and in the event one of them loses power the Battery Failure Bypass is invoked in affected Ch. A or B. The two affected channels will trip, but in Ch. A(B) the battery bus monitoring relay causes the AFAS-1 and AFAS-2 Channel Bypass Relays in the affected Channel A or B to energize, placing that channel in Trip Channel Bypass. This causes the same annunciation and indication as the CHANNEL BYPASS, plus illuminates the BATTERY FAILURE BYPASS indicator on the Ch. A or B Control Panel front and additional annunciators on RTGB-102(202).
 
The additional annunciators are: UNIT 1 AFAS Bistable Pretrip AFAS Stm Gen Faulted Channel Trip AFAS Stm Gen Low Level Channel Trip AFAS TroublelTest UNIT2 AFAS Cabinet Trouble The end result is one of the two affected channels is bypassed (Ch. A or B), the other is in a tripped condition (Ch. C or D) and the AFAS coincidence logic is reduced to 1 out of 2. If a low level or loss of power subsequently occurs in one of the two operable channels, an AFAS-1 (2) would occur. Based on actual plant operating conditions on loss of a single DC bus, Reactor Protection System will cause the plant to trip. When SG levels drop to <19% on 2/4 channels AFAS-1 and AFAS-2 will actuate after its assigned time delay of 235[210] seconds is met. On Unit 1, if the "B" DC bus (and thus the AB DC bus) were lost, then AFW Pumps Band C would NOT start. AFW Pump A would feed SG-A. If the "A" DC bus were lost (AB DC bus remained energized), then AFW Pump B would feed SG-B and AFW Pump C would start Page 49 of99 ( PSL OPS SYS 412 TXT R22 For Training Use Only Battery Bus A and Instrument Inverters Band D are powered from Battery Bus B. The internal power supply auctioneering scheme for AFAS is such that the Bistable, Matrices, Initiation, Actuation, and Trip Bypass circuits for each channel should remain energized in the event one safety battery bus is lost. However, power would be lost to the corresponding process instruments (e.g., S/G Level, pressure) resulting in an actuation of AFAS-1 and AFAS-2. The Battery Failure Bypass was built to preclude the unneeded actuation.
PSL OPS SYS 412 TXT R22                                                          For Training Use Only electric Pumps would sequence back on. As an alternative, flow can be restored immediately by using the C pump.
Both of the Battery Buses are monitored for voltage and in the event one of them loses power the Battery Failure Bypass is invoked in affected Ch. A or B. The two affected channels will trip, but in Ch. A(B) the battery bus monitoring relay causes the AFAS-1 and AFAS-2 Channel Bypass Relays in the affected Channel A or B to energize, placing that channel in Trip Channel Bypass. This causes the same annunciation and indication as the CHANNEL BYPASS, plus illuminates the BATTERY FAILURE BYPASS indicator on the Ch. A or B Control Panel front and additional annunciators on RTGB-102(202).
Both of these examples are potential scenarios for an AFAS-1 (2) dIp              dip lockout to one of the S/Gs. A feedwater header dIp  dip lockout can occur due to one header being pressurized before the other one. This can result from differences in equipment response times (Le.,                 (i.e.,
The additional annunciators are: UNIT 1 AFAS Bistable Pretrip AFAS Stm Gen Faulted Channel Trip AFAS Stm Gen Low Level Channel Trip AFAS Trouble/Test UNIT2 AFAS Cabinet Trouble The end result is one of the two affected channels is bypassed (Ch. A or B), the other is in a tripped condition (Ch. C or D) and the AFAS coincidence logic is reduced to 1 out of 2. If a low level or loss of power subsequently occurs in one of the two operable channels, an AFAS-1 (2) would occur. Based on actual plant operating conditions on loss of a single DC bus, Reactor Protection System will cause the plant to trip. When SG levels drop to <19% on 2/4 channels AFAS-1 and AFAS-2 will actuate after its assigned time delay of 235[210] seconds is met. On Unit 1, if the "B" DC bus (and thus the AB DC bus) were lost, then AFW Pumps Band C would NOT start. AFW Pump A would feed SG-A. If the "A" DC bus were lost (AB DC bus remained energized), then AFW Pump B would feed SG-B and AFW Pump C would start Page 49 of99 PSL OPS SYS 412 TXT R22 For Training Use Only electric Pumps would sequence back on. As an alternative, flow can be restored immediately by using the C pump. Both of these examples are potential scenarios for an AFAS-1 (2) dIp lockout to one of the S/Gs. A feedwater header dIp lockout can occur due to one header being pressurized before the other one. This can result from differences in equipment response times (Le., valve stroke), differences in the sequence of events (Le., AFAS-1 occurs before AFAS-2), loss of one offsite source vs. both, etc. OPERATION OF REMOTE-MANUAL INITIATION SWITCHES (RTGB-202)
valve stroke), differences in the sequence of events (Le.,          (i.e., AFAS-1 occurs before AFAS-2),
Each Remote-Manual Initiation Switch at RTGB-202 de-energizes the Initiation, Interposing, Lockout, and both the cycling and latching Actuation Relays for its respective channel without a time delay. Thus, all four switches associated with AFAS-1 (2) should be positioned to MANUAL for complete actuation and AFW flow will commence without delay. ---... ...............
loss of one offsite source vs. both, etc.
After the flow control valves have traveled to their full-open position, they can then be throttled to establish manual S/G level control. Since the switches de-energize the Initiation Relays directly (Figure 26), both the Fault/Rupture Identification and the Automatic Level Control features associated with that S/G will be overridden.
OPERATION OF REMOTE-MANUAL INITIATION SWITCHES (RTGB-202)
AFAS System behavior upon returning the RTGB-202 switches to AUTO will depend upon the status of S/G level and the Initiation Time Delay timer: 1. R), ***
Each Remote-Manual Initiation Switch at RTGB-202 de-energizes the Initiation, Interposing, Lockout, and both the cycling and latching Actuation Relays for its respective channel without a time delay. Thus, all four switches associated with AFAS-1 (2) should be positioned to MANUAL for complete actuation and AFW flow will commence without delay.
.'1". and level has not been restored NR ), AFW flow should continue uninterrupted.
After the flow control valves have traveled to their full-open position, they can then be
However, if manual-close operation had been used to move the flow control valves from their full open position, the valves will remain in the manual control mode. Automatic valve cycling operation will not be established until level is restored to the AFAS reset point. 2. If 2/4 channels have sensed S/G level below the AFAS trip setpoint, the timer has not yet reached the end of its preset delay, and level has not been restored, the Page 54 of99 ( PSL OPS SYS 412 TXT R22 For Training Use Only electric Pumps would sequence back on. As an alternative, flow can be restored immediately by using the C pump. Both of these examples are potential scenarios for an AFAS-1 (2) dip lockout to one of the S/Gs. A feedwater header dip lockout can occur due to one header being pressurized before the other one. This can result from differences in equipment response times (i.e., valve stroke), differences in the sequence of events (i.e., AFAS-1 occurs before AFAS-2), loss of one offsite source vs. both, etc. OPERATION OF REMOTE-MANUAL INITIATION SWITCHES (RTGB-202)
(
Each Remote-Manual Initiation Switch at RTGB-202 de-energizes the Initiation, Interposing, Lockout, and both the cycling and latching Actuation Relays for its respective channel without a time delay. Thus, all four switches associated with AFAS-1 (2) should be positioned to MANUAL for complete actuation and AFW flow will commence without delay. After the flow control valves have traveled to their full-open position, they can then be throttled to establish manual S/G level control. Since the switches de-energize the Initiation Relays directly (Figure 26), both the Fault/Rupture Identification and the Automatic Level Control features associated with that S/G will be overridden.
throttled to establish manual S/G level control. Since the switches de-energize the Initiation Relays directly (Figure 26), both the Fault/Rupture Identification and the Automatic Level Control features associated with that S/G will be overridden.
AFAS System behavior upon returning the RTGB-202 switches to AUTO will depend upon the status of S/G level and the Initiation Time Delay timer: 1.JL?/4 channels have sensed S/G level below the AFAS trip sBtpointb&#xa3;J9.5%
AFAS System behavior upon returning the RTGB-202 switches to AUTO will depend upon the status of S/G level and the Initiation Time Delay timer:
NR), the'firli'erfH3s"reacne'dtheend ofthe preset delay. 235121(1]
1.
s"econds, and level has not been restored NR ), AFW flow should continue uninterrupted.
1.JL?/4 channels have sensed S/G level below the AFAS trip sBtpointb&#xa3;J9.5% NR),
However, if manual-close operation had been used to move the flow control valves from their full open position, the valves will remain in the manual control mode. Automatic valve cycling operation will not be established until level is restored to the AFAS reset point. 2. If 2/4 channels have sensed S/G level below the AFAS trip setpoint, the timer has not yet reached the end of its preset delay, and level has not been restored, the Page 54 of99 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS D.C. DISTRIBUTION
the'firli'erfH3s"reacne'dtheend ofthe preset delay. 235121(1]                  .'1".
-OPERATING LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.8.2.3 As a minimum the following D.C. electrical sources shall be OPERABLE:
                                                                                ~.J~ria_l*
: a. 125-volt D.C. bus No. 1A, 125-volt Battery bank No. 1A and a full capacity charger. b. 125-volt D.C. bus No. 1B, 125-volt Battery bank No. 1B and a full capacity charger. APPLICABILITY:
s"econds, and not been restored (~29% NR ), AFW flow should continue uninterrupted. However, if and level R),
MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4. ACTION: a. With one of the required battery banks or busses inoperable, restore the inoperable battery bank or bus to OPERABLE status within 2 hours or be in at least HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours. b. With one of the required full capacity chargers inoperable, demonstrate the OPERABILITY of its associated battery banks by performing Surveillance Requirement 4.8.2.3.2.a.1 within 1 hour, and at least once per 8 hours thereafter.
has level has manual-close operation had been used to move the flow control valves from their full open position, the valves will remain in the manual control mode. Automatic valve cycling operation will not be established until level is restored to the AFAS reset point.
If any Category A limit in Table 4.8-2 is not met, declare the battery inoperable.
: 2. If 2/4 channels have sensed S/G level below the AFAS trip setpoint, the timer has not yet reached the end of its preset delay, and level has not been restored, the Page 54 of99
 
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS D.C. DISTRIBUTION - OPERATING LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.8.2.3      As a minimum the following D.C. electrical sources shall be OPERABLE:
: a. 125-volt D.C. bus No. 1A, 125-volt Battery bank No. 1A and a full capacity charger.
: b.                        No.11B, 125-volt D.C. bus No. B, 125-volt Battery bank No.
No.11B B and a full capacity charger.
APPLICABILITY: MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4.
ACTION:
: a. With one of the required battery banks or busses inoperable, restore the inoperable battery bank or bus to OPERABLE status within 2 hours or be in at least HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours.
: b. With one of the required full capacity chargers inoperable, demonstrate the OPERABILITY of its associated battery banks by performing Surveillance Requirement 4.8.2.3.2.a.1 within 1 hour, and at least once per 8 hours thereafter. If any l                    Category A limit in Table 4.8-2 is not met, declare the battery inoperable.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.8.2.3.1 Each D.C. bus train shall be determined OPERABLE and energized at least once per 7 days by verifying indicated power availability.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.8.2.3.1 Each D.C. bus train shall be determined OPERABLE and energized at least once per 7 days by verifying indicated power availability.
4.8.2.3.2 Each 125-volt battery bank and charger shall be demonstrated OPERABLE:  
4.8.2.3.2 Each 125-volt battery bank and charger shall be demonstrated OPERABLE:
: a. At least once per 7 days by verifying that: 1. The parameters in Table 4.8-2 meet the Category A limits, and 2. The total battery terminal voltage is greater than or equal to 129-volts on float charge. ST. LUCIE -UNIT 1 3/48-10 Amendment No. 61 ItJ /r/ o/"J 07fJLc./fl-14 l ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS D.C. DISTRIBUTION
: a. At least once per 7 days by verifying that:
-OPERATING LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.8.2.3 As a minimum the following D.C. electrical sources shall be OPERABLE:
: 1. The parameters in Table 4.8-2 meet the Category A limits, and
: a. 125-volt D.C. bus No. 1A, 125-volt Battery bank No. 1A and a full capacity charger. b. 125-volt D.C. bus No.1 B, 125-volt Battery bank No.1 B and a full capacity charger. APPLICABILITY:
: 2. The total battery terminal voltage is greater than or equal to 129-volts on float charge.
MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4. ACTION: a. With one of the required battery banks or busses inoperable, restore the inoperable battery bank or bus to OPERABLE status within 2 hours or be in at least HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours. b. With one of the required full capacity chargers inoperable, demonstrate the OPERABILITY of its associated battery banks by performing Surveillance Requirement 4.8.2.3.2.a.1 within 1 hour, and at least once per 8 hours thereafter.
ST. LUCIE - UNIT 1                                 3/48-10                 Amendment No. 61 ItJ If}
If any Category A limit in Table 4.8-2 is not met, declare the battery inoperable.
                                                                                    /
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.8.2.3.1 Each D.C. bus train shall be determined OPERABLE and energized at least once per 7 days by verifying indicated power availability.
                                                                                    /r0/ o/"J o~..J 07fJLc./fl-07fn. <.}12--   Ja 14
4.8.2.3.2 Each 125-volt battery bank and charger shall be demonstrated OPERABLE:
 
: a. At least once per 7 days by verifying that: 1. The parameters in Table 4.8-2 meet the Category A limits, and 2. The total battery terminal voltage is greater than or equal to 129-volts on float charge. ST. LUCIE -UNIT 1 3/48-10 Amendment No. 61 If} /0 07fn. <.}12--J a Examination Outline Cross-reference:
( Examination Outline Cross-reference:                   Level             RO            SRO Tier #                         1 Group #                         1 KIA #             038EA 1.41 038EA1.41 Importance Rating               3.4 Steam Generator Tube Rupture (SGTR): Venting of the S/G to atmosphere Proposed Question:               SRO 80 Unit 1 has tripped 10 minutes ago, from 100% power with the following:
Level Tier # Group # KIA # Importance Rating Steam Generator Tube Rupture (SGTR): Venting of the S/G to atmosphere Proposed Question:
SRO 80 RO 038EA1.41 Unit 1 has tripped 10 minutes ago, from 100% power with the following:
Time 0220
Time 0220
* 1 C Charging pump is out of service
* 1C Charging pump is out of service
* 1A and 1 B Charging pumps are operating
* 1A and 1B 1A          S Charging pumps are operating
* Letdown has been isolated
* Letdown has been isolated
* SG Blowdown, SJAE, and Main Steam line Monitors are in alarm
* Slowdown, SJAE, and Main Steam line Monitors are in alarm SG Blowdown,
* Pressurizer level is 22% and lowering
* Pressurizer level is 22% and lowering
* Pressurizer pressure is 1980 psia and lowering
* Pressurizer pressure is 1980 psia and lowering
* Tave is 532&deg;F and stable with SBCS in automatic Time 0240 SRO 1 1 3.4
* Tave is 532&deg;F and stable with SBCS in automatic
* A loss of offsite power occurs and both EDG's start and load on their respective buses. Which ONE of the following identifies the Emergency Classifications for the above times? A. Unusual Event at Time 0220. Site Area Emergency at Time 0240. B. Unusual Event at Time 0220. Alert at Time 0240. C. Alert at Time 0220. Site Area Emergency at Time 0240. D. Alert at Time 0220. General Emergency at Time 0240. 159 ( ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
(                                Time 0240
Level Tier # Group # KIA # Importance Rating Steam Generator Tube Rupture (SGTR): Venting of the S/G to atmosphere Proposed Question:
* A loss of offsite power occurs and both EDG's start and load on their respective buses.
SRO 80 RO 038EA 1.41 Unit 1 has tripped 10 minutes ago, from 100% power with the following:
Which ONE of the following identifies the Emergency Classifications for the above times?
Time 0220
A. Unusual Event at Time 0220. Site Area Emergency at Time 0240.
* 1 C Charging pump is out of service
B. Unusual Event at Time 0220. Alert at Time 0240.
* 1 A and 1 S Charging pumps are operating
C. Alert at Time 0220. Site Area Emergency at Time 0240.
* Letdown has been isolated
D. Alert at Time 0220. General Emergency at Time 0240.
* SG Slowdown, SJAE, and Main Steam line Monitors are in alarm
159
* Pressurizer level is 22% and lowering
 
* Pressurizer pressure is 1980 psia and lowering
( Proposed Answer:                 C Explanation (Optional):
* Tave is 532&deg;F and stable with SBCS in automatic Time 0240 SRO 3.4
InCOrrect: Initial classification is Alert due to SGTR >Charging pump capacity. SAE due A. Incorrect:
* A loss of offsite power occurs and both EDG's start and load on their respective buses. Which ONE of the following identifies the Emergency Classifications for the above times? A. Unusual Event at Time 0220. Site Area Emergency at Time 0240. B. Unusual Event at Time 0220. Alert at Time 0240. C. Alert at Time 0220. Site Area Emergency at Time 0240. D. Alert at Time 0220. General Emergency at Time 0240. 159 C Proposed Answer: C Explanation (Optional):
to loss of SBCS (LOOP) and atmospheric dump valves required to be open.
A. Incorrect:
B. Incorrect: Same as above.
Initial classification is Alert due to SGTR >Charging pump capacity.
C. Correct. Steam Bypass to condenser will not be available due to loss of non-vital buses.
SAE due to loss of SBCS (LOOP) and atmospheric dump valves required to be open. B. Incorrect:
Atmospheric Steam Dump valves will have to be opened to cool down the RCS. This will require escalation to SAE.
Same as above. C. Correct. Steam Bypass to condenser will not be available due to loss of non-vital buses. Atmospheric Steam Dump valves will have to be opened to cool down the RCS. This will require escalation to SAE. D. Incorrect:
D. Incorrect: General Emergency would require loss of 2 of 3 fission barriers with imminent loss of third.
General Emergency would require loss of 2 of 3 fission barriers with imminent loss of third. Technical Reference(s):
Technical Reference(s):         EPIP-01 Classification Of                 (Attach if not previously provided)
EPIP-01 Classification Of Emergencies. (Attach if not previously provided)
Emergencies.
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
Learning Objective:           -=c.c.-::....:::=...:.~O...:-...
0702833-03
                                --=--'-.:....:~:...:.....--=-=-
_______ (As available)
0702833-03 _                  _________
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New X Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 5 ---Comments:
(As available)
x 152 ( ( Proposed Answer: C Explanation (Optional):
Question Source:                 Bank #
A. InCOrrect:
Modified Bank #                           (Note changes or attach parent)
Initial classification is Alert due to SGTR >Charging pump capacity.
C
SAE due to loss of SBCS (LOOP) and atmospheric dump valves required to be open. B. Incorrect:
(                                  New                               X Question History:               Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:       Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis                         x 10 CFR Part 55 Content:         55.41 55.43 Comments:
Same as above. C. Correct. Steam Bypass to condenser will not be available due to loss of non-vital buses. Atmospheric Steam Dump valves will have to be opened to cool down the RCS. This will require escalation to SAE. D. Incorrect:
152
General Emergency would require loss of 2 of 3 fission barriers with imminent loss of third. Technical Reference(s):
 
EPIP-01 Classification Of Emergencies. (Attach if not previously provided)
Q _ S'D REVISION NO.:       PROCEDURE TITLE:                                                                                                                                 PAGE:
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
16                                             CLASSIFICATION OF EMERGENCIES NO ..
Learning Objective:
PROCEDURE NO.:
0702833-03
17 of 39 EPIP-01                                                         ST. LUCIE PLANT A ITACHMENT 1 ATTACHMENT EMERGENCY CLASSIFICATION TABLE (Page 3 of 21       21))
________ (As available)
EVENT/CLASS               UNUSUAL EVENT                             ALERT                           SITE AREA EMERGENCY                             GENERAL EMERGENCY
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New X Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 5 ---Comments:
: 2. ABNORMAL         A. RCS PRIISEC Leakage             B.1. RaQid gross failure of one Ra!!id                               C .1. RaJ;lid C.1. Ra!2id gross failure of steam           D.                             Qroduct Loss of 2 of the 3 fission !!roduct PRIMARY TO SECONDARY LEAK RATE
x 152 Q _ S'D REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 16 CLASSIFICATION OF EMERGENCIES 17 of 39 PROCEDURE NO.: EPIP-01 ST. LUCIE PLANT A IT ACHMENT 1 EMERGENCY CLASSIFICATION TABLE (Page 3 of 21 ) EVENT/CLASS UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT SITE AREA EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY  
                        . Measured RCS to secondary leakage exceeds Tech. Spec.
: 2. ABNORMAL A. RCS PRIISEC Leakage B.1. Ra!!id gross failure of one C .1. RaJ;lid gross failure of steam D. Loss of 2 of the 3 fission !!roduct PRIMARY TO steam generator tube {WITHIN generator tubes {GREATER barriers with imminent loss of the SECONDARY LEAK . Measured RCS to secondary charging !!um!! caJ;laciM with THAN charging \:lum\:l third (any two of the following RATE leakage exceeds Tech. Spec. loss of offsite J;lower with a loss of offsite \:lower exist and the third is imminent). (Page 1 of 2) limits. AND
Qum!2 caJ;laciM charging !!um!!
* Measured RCS to secondary
(WITHIN steam generator tube {WITHIN ca!2acityl with Qower loss of offsite J;lower (GREATER generator tubes {GREATER
* Measured RCS to secondary
                                                                                                                              \:lum\:l ca\:lacit~}
* Fuel element failure (confirmed . Secondary plant activity is leakage greater than Tech. Spec . leakage is greater than charging DEQ 1-131 activity greater than detected.
THAN charging !2um!2      ca!2acitYl Qower with a loss of offsite \:lower barriers with imminent loss of the third (any two of the following exist and the third is imminent).
limits and within charging pump pump capacity.
(Page 1 of 2)       limits.
275 capacity.
                        .            AND Secondary plant activity is detected.
AND AND
* Measured RCS to secondary leakage greater than Tech. Spec Limits and within charging pump limits Spec..
* Secondary plant activity is
* Measured RCS to secondary leakage is greater than charging pump capacity.
* LOCA or SGTR.
* Fuel element failure (confirmed DEQ 1-131 activity greater than
* Secondary plant activity is detected.
                                                                                                                                                              ~Ci/mL).
detected.
AND
* Containment integrity breached, AND
* Loss of both Non-Vital 4.16 KV or Secondary steam release in
* Loss of both Non-Vital 4.16 KV buses. progress from affected steam buses. generator (i.e., stuck open ADVs, steam safety(s) or an unisolable leak). (continued on next page) (continued on next page) t NOTE I Also refer to Potential Core Melt . EvenUClass
: 14. 2. ABNORMAL PRIMARY TO SECONDARY LEAK RATE CLASSIFYING, GO TO EPIP-02, DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE EMERGENCY COORDINATOR REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 16 CLASSIFICATION OF EMERGENCIES 17 of 39 PROCEDURE NO .. EPIP-01 ST. LUCIE PLANT ATTACHMENT 1 EMERGENCY CLASSIFICATION TABLE (Page 3 of 21) EVENT/CLASS UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT SITE AREA EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY
: 2. ABNORMAL A. RCS PRIISEC Leakage B.1. RaQid gross failure of one C.1. Ra!2id gross failure of steam D. Loss of 2 of the 3 fission Qroduct PRIMARY TO steam generator tube (WITHIN generator tubes (GREATER barriers with imminent loss of the SECONDARY LEAK . Measured RCS to secondary charging Qum!2 ca!2acityl with THAN charging !2um!2 ca!2acitYl third (any two of the following RATE leakage exceeds Tech. Spec. loss of offsite Qower with a loss of offsite Qower exist and the third is imminent). (Page 1 of 2) limits. AND
* Measured RCS to secondary
* Measured RCS to secondary
* Fuel element failure (confirmed . Secondary plant activity is leakage greater than Tech. Spec. leakage is greater than charging DEQ 1-131 activity greater than detected.
Limits and within charging pump pump capacity.
275 IlCi/mL).
275 IlCi/mL).
capaciity.
capaciity.
AND AND
capacity.                                                AND AND Secondary plant activity is
* Secondary plant activity is
* Secondary plant activity is detected.
* LOCA or SGTR.
* LOCA or SGTR.
* Secondary plant activity is detected.
detected.
detected.
AND
AND AND Loss of both Non-Vital 4.16 KV           **    Containment integrity breached, or Secondary steam release in
* Containment integrity breached, AND
* Loss of both Non-Vital 4.16 KV buses.
* Loss of both Non-Vital 4.16 KV or Secondary steam release in
buses.                                          progress from affected steam generator (i.e., stuck open ADVs, steam safety(s) or an unisolable leak}.
* Loss of both Non-Vital 4.16 KV buses. progress from affected steam buses. generator (i.e., stuck open ADVs, steam safety(s) or an unisolable leak}. (continued on next page) (continued on next page) I NOTE I Also refer to Potential Core Melt Event/Class  
leak).
: 14. 2. ABNORMAL PRIMARY TO SECONDARY LEAK RATE AFTER CLASSIFYING, GO TO EPIP-02, DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE EMERGENCY COORDINATOR REVISION NO.: 16 PROCEDURE NO.: EPIP-01 EVENT/CLASS
(continued on next page)
: 2. ABNORMAL PRIMARY TO SECONDARY LEAK RATE (Page 2 of 2) 2. ABNORMAL PRIMARY TO SECONDARY LEAK RATE PROCEDURE TITLE: UNUSUAL EVENT CLASSIFICATION OF EMERGENCIES ST. LUCIE PLANT A IT ACHMENT 1 EMERGENCY CLASSIFICATION TABLE (Page 4 of 21) ALERT B.2. Rapid failure of steam generator tubes (GREATER THAN charging pump
(continued on next page)
* Measured RCS to secondary leakage greater than charging pump capacity.
It              NOTE Core Melt Also refer to Potential Event/Class 14.
AND
                                                                                                                                                      . EvenUClass I
: 2. ABNORMAL PRIMARY TO SECONDARY LEAK RATE
~FTER AFTER CLASSIFYING, GO TO EPIP-02, DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE EMERGENCY COORDINATOR
 
o~tD REVISION NO.:       PROCEDURE TITLE:                                                                                        PAGE:
16                                 CLASSIFICATION OF EMERGENCIES 18 of 39 PROCEDURE NO.:
EPIP-01                                             ST. LUCIE PLANT A ITACHMENT 1 ATTACHMENT EMERGENCY CLASSIFICATION TABLE (Page 4 of 21)
EVENT/CLASS            UNUSUAL EVENT                    ALERT               SITE AREA EMERGENCY                GENERAL EMERGENCY
: 2. ABNORMAL                                  B.2. Rapid failure of steam   C.2. &sect;,
                                                                                      &sect;z  Rapid failure of steam PRIMARY TO                                      generator tubes (GREATER                          tube(s) generator tubels)
SECONDARY LEAK                                  THAN charging pump                (GREATER THAN charging RATE                                            ~
capacity)                          pump capacity) with steam (Page 2 of 2)                                                                      release in progress
* Measured RCS to secondary leakage greater than charging
* Measured RCS to secondary pump capacity.                  leakage greater than charging AND              pump capacity.
* Secondary plant activity is                    AND detected.
* Secondary plant activity is detected.
* Secondary plant activity is detected.
SITE AREA EMERGENCY C.2. &sect;z Rapid failure of steam generator tubels) (GREATER THAN charging pump capacity) with steam release in progress
* Measured RCS to secondary leakage greater than charging pump capacity.
AND
AND
* Secondary plant activity is detected.
* Secondary steam release in progress from affected steam generator (i.e (i.e.,.. stuck open ADVs, steam safety(s) or an unisolable leak.)
AND
: 2. ABNORMAL PRIMARY TO SECONDARY LEAK RATE AFTER CLASSIFYING, GO TO EPIP-02, DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE EMERGENCY COORDINATOR IAFTER
* Secondary steam release in progress from affected steam generator (i.e .. stuck open ADVs, steam safety(s) or an unisolable leak.) IAFTER CLASSIFYING, GO TO EPIP-02, DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE EMERGENCY COORDINATOR PAGE: 18 of 39 GENERAL EMERGENCY REVISION NO.: 16 PROCEDURE NO.: EPIP-01 EVENT/CLASS
 
: 2. ABNORMAL PRIMARY TO SECONDARY LEAK RATE (Page 2 of 2) 2. ABNORMAL PRIMARY TO SECONDARY LEAK RATE PROCEDURE TITLE: UNUSUAL EVENT CLASSIFICATION OF EMERGENCIES ST. LUCIE PLANT ATTACHMENT 1 EMERGENCY CLASSIFICATION TABLE (Page 4 of 21) ALERT B.2. Rapid failure of steam generator tubes (GREATER THAN charging pump capacity)
Examination Outline Cross-reference:                   Level                               RO                  SRO Tier#                                                     1 Group #                                                   1 KIA #                               062AA2.05 Importance Rating                                        2.5 Loss of Nuclear Svc Water: The normal values for SWS-header flow rate and the flow rates to the components cooled by the SWS.
* Measured RCS to secondary leakage greater than charging pump capacity.
Proposed Question:                 SRO 80 Unit 2 is at 30% power with the 2A TCW Heat Exchanger out of service. The 2A Heat Exchanger is to be filled and vented using 2-NOP-21.03A '2A Intake Cooling Water System Operation'. The A header is pressurized and the 2A TCW Heat Exchanger will be filled using manual control (throttling open) of MV-21-3, A ICW TRAIN TO TCW HXS.
AND
Which ONE of the following states:
* Secondary plant activity is detected.
: 1) The maximum flow through the tubes of the 2A TCW Heat Exchanger?
SITE AREA EMERGENCY C.2. &sect;, Rapid failure of steam generator tube(s) (GREATER THAN charging pump capacity) with steam release in progress
: 2) The Operability status of the 2A Intake Cooling Water header?
* Measured RCS to secondary leakage greater than charging pump capacity.
A. 1) 6250 gpm
AND
: 2) 2A ICW header is OPERABLE as long as MV-21-3 can be closed manually if
* Secondary plant activity is detected.
(                      required.
* Secondary steam release in progress from affected steam generator (i.e., stuck open ADVs, steam safety(s) or an unisolable leak.) AFTER CLASSIFYING, GO TO EPIP-02, DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE EMERGENCY COORDINATOR PAGE: 18 of 39 GENERAL EMERGENCY Examination Outline Cross-reference:
B. 1) 19000 gpm
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO 062AA2.05 SRO 1 1 2.5 Loss of Nuclear Svc Water: The normal values for SWS-header flow rate and the flow rates to the components cooled by the SWS. Proposed Question:
: 2) 2A ICW header is OPERABLE as long as MV-21-3 can be closed manually if required.
SRO 80 Unit 2 is at 30% power with the 2A TCW Heat Exchanger out of service. The 2A Heat Exchanger is to be filled and vented using 2-NOP-21.03A  
C. 1) 6250 gpm
'2A Intake Cooling Water System Operation'.
: 2) 2A ICW header is NOT OPERABLE until MV-21-3 has been electrically stroked satisfactorily.
The A header is pressurized and the 2A TCW Heat Exchanger will be filled using manual control (throttling open) of MV-21-3, A ICW TRAIN TO TCW HXS. Which ONE of the following states: 1) The maximum flow through the tubes of the 2A TCW Heat Exchanger?  
D. 1) 19000 gpm
: 2) The Operability status of the 2A Intake Cooling Water header? A. 1) 6250 gpm 2) 2A ICW header is OPERABLE as long as MV-21-3 can be closed manually if required.
: 2) 2A ICW header is NOT OPERABLE until MV has been electrically stroked satisfactorily.
B. 1) 19000 gpm 2) 2A ICW header is OPERABLE as long as MV-21-3 can be closed manually if required.
(
C. 1) 6250 gpm 2) 2A ICW header is NOT OPERABLE until MV-21-3 has been electrically stroked satisfactorily.
159
D. 1) 19000 gpm 2) 2A ICW header is NOT OPERABLE until MV-21-has been electrically stroked satisfactorily.
 
159 ( ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Proposed Answer:             C Explanation (Optional):
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO 062AA2.05 SRO 1 2.5 Loss of Nuclear Svc Water: The normal values for SWS-header flow rate and the flow rates to the components cooled by the SWS. Proposed Question:
A. Incorrect: flow rate correct but MV-21-3 must be electrically stroked satisfactorily to be declared back in service.
SRO 80 Unit 2 is at 30% power with the 2A TCW Heat Exchanger out of service. The 2A Heat Exchanger is to be filled and vented using 2-NOP-21.03A
B. Incorrect: flow rate is for CCW heat exchanger not TCW heat exchanger, MV-21-3 must be electrically stroked satisfactorily to be declared back in service.
'2A Intake Cooling Water System Operation'.
C. Correct D. Incorrect: flow rate is for CCW heat exchanger not TCW heat exchanger Technical Reference(s):     2-NOP-21.03A 2A Intake             (Attach if not previously provided)
The A header is pressurized and the 2A TCW Heat Exchanger will be filled using manual control (throttling open) of MV-21-3, A ICW TRAIN TO TCW HXS. Which ONE of the following states: 1) The maximum flow through the tubes of the 2A TCW Heat Exchanger?
Cooling Water System Operation 2-0640030 Intake Cooling Water System 2-NOP-14.02 Component Cooling Water System Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
: 2) The Operability status of the 2A Intake Cooling Water header? A. 1) 6250 gpm 2) 2A ICW header is OPERABLE as long as MV-21-3 can be closed manually if required.
Learning Objective:         PSL OPS SYS 313 LPC Obj.             (As available)
B. 1) 19000 gpm 2) 2A ICW header is OPERABLE as long as MV-21-3 can be closed manually if required.
B.2
C. 1) 6250 gpm 2) 2A ICW header is NOT OPERABLE until MV-21-3 has been electrically stroked satisfactorily.
(
D. 1) 19000 gpm 2) 2A ICW header is NOT OPERABLE until MV-21-has been electrically stroked satisfactorily.
Question Source:             Bank#
159 Proposed Answer: C Explanation (Optional):
Bank #
A. Incorrect:
Modified Bank #                     (Note changes or attach parent)
flow rate correct but MV-21-3 must be electrically stroked satisfactorily to be declared back in service. B. Incorrect:
New                    x Question History:           Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:   Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis                   x 10 CFR Part 55 Content:     55.41 55.43     5 Comments:
flow rate is for CCW heat exchanger not TCW heat exchanger, MV-21-3 must be electrically stroked satisfactorily to be declared back in service. C. Correct D. Incorrect:
(
flow rate is for CCW heat exchanger not TCW heat exchanger Technical Reference(s):
160
2-NOP-21.03A 2A Intake Cooling Water System Operation (Attach if not previously provided) 2-0640030 Intake Cooling Water System 2-NOP-14.02 Component Cooling Water System Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
 
Learning Objective:
REVISION NO.:           PROCEDURE TITLE:                                             PAGE:
Question Source: PSL OPS SYS 313 LPC Obj. B.2 Bank# (As available)
1 2A INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM OPERATION PROCEDURE NO.:
Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) -----x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 5 ---Comments:
2-NOP-21.03A                               ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 5.2          ,M       ;;4&211:"1.'*
x 160 ( ( Proposed Answer: C Explanation (Optional):
* Filling A Non-EssentiallCW        - _
A. Incorrect:
Header  Using_MV-21-3'7                         INITIAL NOTE Manual control of MV-21-3, A ICW TRAIN TO TCW HXS will render 2A ICW header out of service until MV-21-3 has been electrically stroked satisfactorily.
flow rate correct but MV-21-3 must be electrically stroked satisfactorily to be declared back in service. B. Incorrect:
: 1.     ENSURE A Non-EssentiallCW Header down stream of MV-21-3, A ICW TRAIN TO TCW HXS is aligned per 2-NOP-21.12, Intake Cooling Water Initial Valve Alignment.
flow rate is for CCW heat exchanger not TCW heat exchanger, MV-21-3 must be electrically stroked satisfactorily to be declared back in service. C. Correct D. Incorrect:
: 2. VERIFY A Essential     ICW Header is pressurized.
flow rate is for CCW heat exchanger not TCW heat exchanger Technical Reference(s):
EssentiallCW I
2-NOP-21.03A 2A Intake Cooling Water System Operation (Attach if not previously provided) 2-0640030 Intake Cooling Water System 2-NOP-14.02 Component Cooling Water System Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
: 3.     CLOSE TCV-13-2A, 2A TCW HX OUTLET using manual control (TGB/22/S-20IW-C).
Learning Objective:
(TGB/22/S-20/W-C).
Question Source: PSL OPS SYS 313 LPC Obj. B.2 Bank # (As available)
: 4.     CLOSE TCV-34-3A, 2A OBHX TUBE SIDE OUTLET using manual control (TGB/43/N-211D).
Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 5 ---Comments:
(TGB/43/N-21/D).
x 160 REVISION NO.: 1 PROCEDURE TITLE: 2A INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM OPERATION PROCEDURE NO.: 5.2 2-NOP-21.03A ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 ,M ;;4&211:"1.'  
(           5.     OPEN breaker 2-41301, Intake Cooling Wtr Hdr. A Non-Emerg. Isol
** -__ '7 -Manual control of MV-21-3, A ICW TRAIN TO TCW HXS will render 2A ICW header out of service until MV-21-3 has been electrically stroked satisfactorily.  
\
: 1. ENSURE A Non-EssentiallCW Header down stream of MV-21-3, A ICW TRAIN TO TCW HXS is aligned per 2-NOP-21.12, Intake Cooling Water Initial Valve Alignment.  
Va. MV-21-3, (RAB 43' A Switch Gear Room 480V MCC 2A6).
: 2. VERIFY A Essential ICW Header is pressurized.  
I
: 3. CLOSE TCV-13-2A, 2A TCW HX OUTLET using manual control (TGB/22/S-20IW-C).  
: 6.     Manually THROTTLE OPEN MV-21-3, A ICW TRAIN TO TCW HXS (INTK/11/N-4IW-C).
: 4. CLOSE TCV-34-3A, 2A OBHX TUBE SIDE OUTLET using manual control (TGB/43/N-211D).
(INTK/11/N-4/W-C).
: 5. OPEN breaker 2-41301, Intake Cooling Wtr Hdr. A Non-Emerg.
: 7.     VENT 2A TCW Heat Exchanger:
Isol Va. MV-21-3, (RAB 43' A Switch Gear Room 480V MCC 2A6). 6. Manually THROTTLE OPEN MV-21-3, A ICW TRAIN TO TCW HXS (INTK/11/N-4IW-C).
: 7. VENT 2A TCW Heat Exchanger:
A. OPEN SH21171 , 2A TCW HX OUTLET HEAD VENT (TGB/26/N-21/E-K).
B. OPEN SH21172, 2A TCW HX TUBE SIDE INLET HEAD VENT (TGB/26/N-21/W-D).
C. WHEN a solid stream of water issues from vents, THEN CLOSE valves:
* SH21171, 2A TCW HX OUTLET HEAD VENT
* SH21172, 2A TCW HX TUBE SIDE INLET HEAD VENT 8. VENT 2A OBHX Heat Exchanger:
A. OPEN SH212012, 2A OBHX INLET HEAD VENT (TGB/45/S-20/E-K).
REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 1 2A INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM OPERATION PROCEDURE NO.: 2-NOP-21.03A ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 5.2 Filling A Non-EssentiallCW Header Using MV-21-3 INITIAL NOTE Manual control of MV-21-3, A ICW TRAIN TO TCW HXS will render 2A ICW header out of service until MV-21-3 has been electrically stroked satisfactorily.
: 1. ENSURE A Non-EssentiallCW Header down stream of MV-21-3, A ICW TRAIN TO TCW HXS is aligned per 2-NOP-21.12, Intake Cooling Water Initial Valve Alignment.
I 2. VERIFY A EssentiallCW Header is pressurized.
: 3. CLOSE TCV-13-2A, 2A TCW HX OUTLET using manual control (TGB/22/S-20/W-C).  
: 4. CLOSE TCV-34-3A, 2A OBHX TUBE SIDE OUTLET using manual control (TGB/43/N-21/D). ( 5. OPEN breaker 2-41301, Intake Cooling Wtr Hdr. A Non-Emerg.
Isol \ Va. MV-21-3, (RAB 43' A Switch Gear Room 480V MCC 2A6). I 6. Manually THROTTLE OPEN MV-21-3, A ICW TRAIN TO TCW HXS (INTK/11/N-4/W-C).  
: 7. VENT 2A TCW Heat Exchanger:
A. OPEN SH21171 , 2A TCW HX OUTLET HEAD VENT (TGB/26/N-21/E-K).
A. OPEN SH21171 , 2A TCW HX OUTLET HEAD VENT (TGB/26/N-21/E-K).
B. OPEN SH21172, 2A TCW HX TUBE SIDE INLET HEAD VENT (TGB/26/N-21/W-D).
B. OPEN SH21172, 2A TCW HX TUBE SIDE INLET HEAD VENT (TGB/26/N-21/W-D).
C. WHEN a solid stream of water issues from vents, THEN CLOSE valves:
C. WHEN a solid stream of water issues from vents, THEN CLOSE valves:
* SH21171, 2A TCW HX OUTLET HEAD VENT
                            **    SH21171, 2A TCW HX OUTLET HEAD VENT
* SH21172, 2A TCW HX TUBE SIDE INLET HEAD VENT 8. VENT 2A OBHX Heat Exchanger:
                            **    SH21172, 2A TCW HX TUBE SIDE INLET HEAD VENT
i A. OPEN SH212012, 2A OBHX INLET HEAD VENT I (TGB/45/S-20/E-K).
: 8.     VENT 2A OBHX Heat Exchanger:
REVISION NO.: 1 PROCEDURE TITLE: 2A INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM OPERATION PROCEDURE NO.: 2-NOP-21.03A ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 1.0 PURPOSE This procedure provides instructions for operating the Intake Cooling Water (ICW) System Train A under normal plant operating condition.  
i                   A. OPEN SH212012, 2A OBHX INLET HEAD VENT                                     I (TGB/45/S-20/E-K).


===2.0 PRECAUTIONS===
REVISION NO.:            PROCEDURE TITLE:                                            PAGE:
1 2A INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM OPERATION              :4 of 29 PROCEDURE NO.:
NO,:
2-NOP-21.03A                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 1.0      PURPOSE                                                                        'INITIAL This procedure provides instructions for operating the Intake Cooling Water (ICW) System Train A under normal plant operating condition.
2.0       PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS 2.1      Precautions
: 1.      During normal operations, the standby ICW pump RTGB control switch shall be maintained in PULL TO LOCK position.
: 2.      When approaching maximum flows, the heat exchangers should be monitored carefully to detect tube rattle.
2.2      Limitations
: 1.      Flow through a single ICW pump shall not exceed 21,600 gpm.
(Section 7.1.3 Management Directive 1) fIIIII'
: 2. A Flow through the tubes of a Component Cooling Water (CCW) Heat Exchanger shall not exceed 19,000 gpm.
: 3.      Flow through the tubes of a Turbine Cooling Water (TCW) Heat Exchangers shall not exceed 6,250 gpm.
: 4.      The ICW Pump discharge valve should be opened approximately 10 turns when starting on a depressurized header.
: 5.      ICW pumps shall not be operated for any extended period of time with the discharge valve near closed.
3.0      PREREQUISITES AND INITIAL CONDITIONS 3.1      Prerequisites
: 1.      ENSURE Screen Wash System is available to support ICW Pump operation per 2-NOP-11, Circulating Water System Initial Alignment.
: 2.      ENSURE Intake Cooling Water is aligned in accordance with 2-NOP-21 .12, Intake Cooling Water System Initial Valve Alignment.
2-NOP-21.12, 3.2      Initial Conditions None


AND LIMITATIONS
(
 
Proposed Answer:              A Explanation (Optional):
===2.1 Precautions===
A. Correct. MV-18-1 is initially opened. If air leak confirmed, MV-18-1 is closed in 1-101003. Letdown valves close on loss of air which requires Charging pumps to be stopped.
 
B. Incorrect; All Unit 1 CCW valves to the RCP's are outside of Containment. 2 of 4 CCW valves on Unit 2 are inside containment.
2.2 1. During normal operations, the standby ICW pump RTGB control switch shall be maintained in PULL TO LOCK position.  
C. Incorrect: MV-18-1 is initially opened.
: 2. When approaching maximum flows, the heat exchangers should be monitored carefully to detect tube rattle. 1. Flow through a single ICW pump shall not exceed 21,600 gpm. (Section 7.1.3 Management Directive
D. Incorrect: CCW would be lost on Unit 2 but not on Unit 1 Technical Reference(s):       1-1010030 Loss of Instrument            (Attach if not previously provided)
: 1) fIIIII'A Flow through the tubes of a Component Cooling Water (CCW) Heat Exchanger shall not exceed 19,000 gpm. ".., Flow through the tubes of a Turbine Cooling Water (TCW) Heat Exchangers shall not exceed 6,250 gpm. 4. The ICW Pump discharge valve should be opened approximately 10 turns when starting on a depressurized header. 5. ICW pumps shall not be operated for any extended period of time with the discharge valve near closed. 3.0 PREREQUISITES AND INITIAL CONDITIONS
Air, Unit 1 T.S. 3.6.1.4 1-ARP-01-F46 Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: _ _ _            ____ __ __ __ __ __
 
Learning Objective:         _ 0702860-08,           0902723-02_ _ _ (As available) 07_0_2_8_60_-_08--,-,_0_9_02_7_2_3_-0_2
===3.1 Prerequisites===
                              ------~---------
: 1. ENSURE Screen Wash System is available to support ICW Pump operation per 2-NOP-11, Circulating Water System Initial Alignment.
Question Source:              Bank #
: 2. ENSURE Intake Cooling Water is aligned in accordance with 2-NOP-21 .12, Intake Cooling Water System Initial Valve Alignment.  
Modified Bank #                        (Note changes or attach parent)
 
New                              x Question History:             Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:      Memory or Fundamental Knowledge              -
===3.2 Initial===
X  --- -
Conditions None REVISION NO.: 1 PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 2A INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM OPERATION PROCEDURE NO,: 1.0 2-NOP-21.03A ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PURPOSE This procedure provides instructions for operating the Intake Cooling Water (ICW) System Train A under normal plant operating condition.
Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content:       55.41      -
 
10 55.43        5--
===2.0 PRECAUTIONS===
Comments:
 
162
AND LIMITATIONS
 
===2.1 Precautions===
: 1. During normal operations, the standby ICW pump RTGB control switch shall be maintained in PULL TO LOCK position.  
: 2. When approaching maximum flows, the heat exchangers should be monitored carefully to detect tube rattle. 2.2 Limitations
: 1. Flow through a single ICW pump shall not exceed 21,600 gpm. (Section 7.1.3 Management Directive
: 1) 2. Flow through the tubes of a Component Cooling Water (CCW) Heat Exchanger shall not exceed 19,000 gpm. 3. Flow through the tubes of a Turbine Cooling Water (TCW) Heat Exchangers shall not exceed 6,250 gpm. 4. The ICW Pump discharge valve should be opened approximately 10 turns when starting on a depressurized header. 5. ICW pumps shall not be operated for any extended period of time with the discharge valve near closed. 3.0 PREREQUISITES AND INITIAL CONDITIONS
 
===3.1 Prerequisites===
: 1. ENSURE Screen Wash System is available to support ICW Pump operation per 2-NOP-11, Circulating Water System Initial Alignment.
: 2. ENSURE Intake Cooling Water is aligned in accordance with 2-NOP-21.12, Intake Cooling Water System Initial Valve Alignment.
 
===3.2 Initial===
Conditions None :4 of 29 'INITIAL 


( Proposed Answer: A Explanation (Optional):
REVISION:               PROCEDURE TITLE:                                                       PANEL; 1A                     ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE                                       F PROCEDURE NO:                                                                                 WINDOW:
A. Correct. MV-18-1 is initially opened. If air leak confirmed, MV-18-1 is closed in 1-101003. Letdown valves close on loss of air which requires Charging pumps to be stopped. B. Incorrect; All Unit 1 CCW valves to the RCP's are outside of Containment.
1-ARP-01-F46                                   ST. LUCIE UNIT 1                                       46 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL F 1       2 3           4   5   6     7   8 9     10 11       12   13   14   15   16                                   CNTMT AIR CNTMTAIR 17     18 19       20   21   22   23   24                                     DRYER 25     26 27         28   29   30   31   32                                   OUTLET 33 41 DEVICE:
2 of 4 CCW valves on Unit 2 are inside containment.
34 35 42 43 PIS-18-32 I1599 599 36 44 37 45
C. Incorrect:
                                    -38    39 47 40 48 LOCATION:
MV-18-1 is initially opened. D. Incorrect:
RAB/RTGB-102 PRESS LOW SETPOINT:
CCW would be lost on Unit 2 but not on Unit 1 Technical Reference(s):
80 psig F-46 ALARM CONFIRMATION:
1-1010030 Loss of Instrument Air, Unit 1 T.S. 3.6.1.4 (Attach if not previously provided) 1-ARP-01-F46 Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
: 1. PIS-18-32, Cntmt Instr Air Hdr Press, (RTGB-1 02) indicates low pressure.
________ _ Learning Objective:
OPERATOR ACTIONS:
_ 07_0_2_8_60_-_08--,-,_0_9_02_7_2_3_-0_2
NOTE
___ (As available)
* Containment Instrument Air Compressor will load at 95 psig and unload at 105 psig.
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) -----x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge X ---Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 -'----55.43 5 ---Comments:
* Standby Containment Air Compressor will auto start at 90 psig decreasing and will unload
162 Proposed Answer: A Explanation (Optional):
(                at 100 psig.
A. Correct. MV-18-1 is initially opened. If air leak confirmed, MV-18-1 is closed in 1-101003. Letdown valves close on loss of air which requires Charging pumps to be stopped. B. Incorrect; All Unit 1 CCW valves to the RCP's are outside of Containment.
* PCV-18-5, Backup Instrument Air Supply to Containment, will open at 80 psig decreasing.
2 of 4 CCW valves on Unit 2 are inside containment.
: 1. CHECK PIS-18-32, Containment Instrument Air Header Pressure, (RTGB-102)
C. Incorrect:
(RTGB-1 02) to determine containment instrument air pressure.
MV-18-1 is initially opened. D. Incorrect:
: 2. DISPATCH an operator to check reflash panels AF-22-1, AF-22-2, and AF-22-3 (RAB 43' elevation near column RA2-RAJ) to determine cause of alarm.
CCW would be lost on Unit 2 but not on Unit 1 Technical Reference(s):
1f a low air pressure condition exits, Then PERFORM the following:
1-1010030 Loss of Instrument Air, Unit 1 T.S. 3.6.1.4 (Attach if not previously provided) 1-ARP-01-F46 Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
: 3. If A. ENSURE MV-18-1, Instr Air to Cntmt, is OPEN.
_________
B. If S. 1f standby Containment Air Compressor is NOT operating, Then PLACE standby Containment Instrument Air Compressor in service in accordance with 1-NOP-18.41, Containment Instrument Air Compressors - Normal Operation.                                                                      ......
_ Learning Objective:
                                                                                                                ;;0 C. IMPLEMENT off-normal procedure 1-1010030, Loss of Instrument Air.                                   >>
0702860-08, 0902723-02 (As available)
CAUSES:       Alarm may be caused by failure of 1A (1B)
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge X ----Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 ---55.43 5 ---Comments:
(1 B) Containment Air Compressor or malfunction of 1A (1 B) Containment Air Dryer.
162 REVISION:
PROCEDURE TITLE: 1A ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE PROCEDURE NO: 1-ARP-01-F46 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 -47 48 DEVICE: LOCATION:
PIS-18-32 I 599 RAB/RTGB-102 ALARM CONFIRMATION:
CNTMTAIR DRYER OUTLET PRESS LOW SETPOINT:
80 psig 1. PIS-18-32, Cntmt Instr Air Hdr Press, (RTGB-1 02) indicates low pressure.
OPERATOR ACTIONS: NOTE
* Containment Instrument Air Compressor will load at 95 psig and unload at 105 psig. F-46
* Standby Containment Air Compressor will auto start at 90 psig decreasing and will unload at 100 psig.
* PCV-18-5, Backup Instrument Air Supply to Containment, will open at 80 psig decreasing.  
: 1. CHECK PIS-18-32, Containment Instrument Air Header Pressure, (RTGB-102) to determine containment instrument air pressure.  
: 2. DISPATCH an operator to check reflash panels AF-22-1, AF-22-2, and AF-22-3 (RAB 43' elevation near column RA2-RAJ) to determine cause of alarm. 3. 1f a low air pressure condition exits, Then PERFORM the following:
A. ENSURE MV-18-1, Instr Air to Cntmt, is OPEN. S. 1f standby Containment Air Compressor is NOT operating, Then PLACE standby Containment Instrument Air Compressor in service in accordance with 1-NOP-18.41, Containment Instrument Air Compressors  
-Normal Operation.
C. IMPLEMENT off-normal procedure 1-1010030, Loss of Instrument Air. CAUSES: Alarm may be caused by failure of 1A (1B) Containment Air Compressor or malfunction of 1A (1 B) Containment Air Dryer.  


==REFERENCES:==
==REFERENCES:==
: 1. CWD 8770-B-327, Sheets 599 and 642 2. TEDB ...... ;;0 ..... >> ( , l REVISION:
: 1. CWD CWO 8770-B-327, Sheets 599 and 642
PROCEDURE TITLE: PANEL; 1A ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE F PROCEDURE NO: WINDOW: 1-ARP-01-F46 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL F DEVICE: LOCATION:
: 2. TEDB l
PIS-18-32 1599 RAB/RTGB-102 ALARM CONFIRMATION:
CNTMT AIR DRYER OUTLET PRESS LOW SETPOINT:
80 psig 1. PIS-18-32, Cntmt Instr Air Hdr Press, (RTGB-1 02) indicates low pressure.
OPERATOR ACTIONS: NOTE
* Containment Instrument Air Compressor will load at 95 psig and unload at 105 psig. 46 F-46
* Standby Containment Air Compressor will auto start at 90 psig decreasing and will unload at 100 psig.
* PCV-18-5, Backup Instrument Air Supply to Containment, will open at 80 psig decreasing.
: 1. CHECK PIS-18-32, Containment Instrument Air Header Pressure, (RTGB-1 02) to determine containment instrument air pressure.
: 2. DISPATCH an operator to check reflash panels AF-22-1, AF-22-2, and AF-22-3 (RAB 43' elevation near column RA2-RAJ) to determine cause of alarm. 3. If a low air pressure condition exits, Then PERFORM the following:
A. ENSURE MV-18-1, Instr Air to Cntmt, is OPEN. B. If standby Containment Air Compressor is NOT operating, Then PLACE standby Containment Instrument Air Compressor in service in accordance with 1-NOP-18.41, Containment Instrument Air Compressors
-Normal Operation.
C. IMPLEMENT off-normal procedure 1-1010030, Loss of Instrument Air. CAUSES: Alarm may be caused by failure of 1A (1 B) Containment Air Compressor or malfunction of 1A (1 B) Containment Air Dryer.


==REFERENCES:==
REVISION NO.:           PROCEDURE TITLE:                                         PAGE:
: 1. CWO 8770-B-327, Sheets 599 and 642 2. TEDB NO.: 34A LOSS OF INSTRUMENT AIR PROCEDURE NO.: 1-1010030 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 .2 Subsequent Operator Actions (continued)
34A                         LOSS OF INSTRUMENT AIR PROCEDURE NO.:
INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS NOTE
12 of 23 1-1010030                             ST. LUCIE UNIT 1
.2 7.2     Subsequent Operator Actions (continued)
INSTRUCTIONS                             CONTINGENCY ACTIONS NOTE
* Indications that there is an instrument air leak inside containment may include the following:
* Indications that there is an instrument air leak inside containment may include the following:
* PIS-18-32, Containment Instrument Air Header Pressure, indicates significantly lower than PI-18-9, Instrument Air Header Pressure.
* PIS-18-32, Containment Instrument Air Header Pressure, indicates significantly lower than PI-18-9, Instrument Air Header Pressure.
Line 607: Line 732:
* Letdown isolates.
* Letdown isolates.
* Pressurizer Spray Valves fail closed. The use of Auxiliary Spray valves will be limited due to loss of letdown flow.
* Pressurizer Spray Valves fail closed. The use of Auxiliary Spray valves will be limited due to loss of letdown flow.
* RCPs should remain operable since the CCW Supply and Return valves are located outside containment.
* RCPs should remain operable since the CCW Supply and Return valves are located outside containment. The RCP Cooling Water Outlet valves fail open. The RCP oil reservoir levels will indicate low.
The RCP Cooling Water Outlet valves fail open. The RCP oil reservoir levels will indicate low.
* Steam Generator Blowdown Slowdown flow isolates.
* Steam Generator Blowdown flow isolates.  
* Technical Specification"'''_Irequires 3.6.1.4 requires that primary containment internal pressure be maintained between -0.7 and 2.4 psig.
"'''_Irequires that primary containment  
15.
-0.7 and 2.4 15 !f there is an instrument air leak inside 15. containment, Then perform the following:
15    !f there is an instrument air leak inside       15.
A. Ensure MV-18-1, Instr Air to Cntmt, is CLOSED. B. Isolate letdown and charging in accordance with 1-0NP-02.03, Charging and Letdown. c. Utilize pressurizer heaters and auxiliary spray valves as required to maintain pressurizer pressure.
containment, Then perform the following:
A. !f MV-18-1 is unable to be closed from the control room, Then dispatch an operator to manually close MV-18-1 (Located in the 19.5 Pipe Pen, Pen 9). REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 34A 12 of 23 LOSS OF INSTRUMENT AIR PROCEDURE NO.: 1-1010030 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 7.2 Subsequent Operator Actions (continued)
A. Ensure MV-18-1, Instr Air to Cntmt,               A. !f MV-18-1 is unable to be is CLOSED.                                         closed from the control room, Then dispatch an operator to manually close MV-18-1 (Located in the 19.5 Pipe Pen, Pen 9).
INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS NOTE
B. Isolate letdown and charging in accordance with 1-0NP-02.03, Charging and Letdown.
* Indications that there is an instrument air leak inside containment may include the following:
: c. Utilize pressurizer heaters and auxiliary spray valves as required to maintain pressurizer pressure.
* PIS-18-32, Containment Instrument Air Header Pressure, indicates significantly lower than PI-18-9, Instrument Air Header Pressure.
 
* Instrument air operated components inside containment have positioned to their fail position (Reference Appendix C)
REVISION NO.:
* Containment Pressure is rising.
IREVISION              PROCEDURE TITLE:                                    PAGE:
* Loss of instrument air to containment will result in the following:
34A                      LOSS OF INSTRUMENT AIR 22 of 23 PROCEDURE IIRF NO.:
* Letdown isolates.
1-1010030                            ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 APPENDIX C AIR ACTUATED COMPONENTS (Page 5 of 6) 11.
* Pressurizer Spray Valves fail closed. The use of Auxiliary Spray valves will be limited due to loss of letdown flow.
111.     Instrument Air COMPONENT          LOC                          DESCRIPTION                  FAIL POSITION FCV-23-3              oe    1A 1A S/G Bldn Penetr 6 Isol                    Closed FCV-23-5              oe    1B S/G Bldn Penetr 5 Isol                    Closed FCV-23-7             oe    1A S/G Bldn Sample Isol 1A                                          Closed FCV-23-9              oe    1B S/G Bldn Sample Isol                      Closed FCV-23-12            oe    A S/G Bldn Hdr to SGBTF                      Closed FCV-23-14            oe    B S/G Bldn Hdr to SGBTF                      Closed RCV-23-2              oe    Unit 1 S/G Bldn to Bldn Fltrs RAD Cntl      Open RCV-23-1              oe    Unit 1 S/G Bldn to Disch Canal RAD Cntl      Closed RCV-31-1             oe    Processed Bldn to Disch Canal RAD Cntl      Closed FCV-23-4              Ie    1A S/G Bldn Penetr 6 Isol                    Closed FCV-23-6              Ie    1B S/G Bldn Penetr 5 Isol                   Closed PCV-18-3            ANN    Instr Air to A Main Hatch Door Seal          Open
* RCPs should remain operable since the CCW Supply and Return valves are located outside containment.
(    PCV-18-4            ANN    Instr Air to B Main Hatch Door Seal          Open
The RCP Cooling Water Outlet valves fail open. The RCP oil reservoir levels will indicate low.
: 12.      Heating, Ventilation and Air Condition COMPONENT          LOC                          DESCRIPTION                  FAIL POSITION FCV-25-1              OC    RX Cntmt Purge Isol before Penetr P-11      Closed FCV-25-6              OC    Inlet of HVE-8A &      & HVE-8B Casing      Closed FCV-25-7            ANN    Cntmt VAC Relief                            ~Closed FCV-25-8            ANN    Cntmt VAC Relief A "'...... '.S:
* Steam Generator Slowdown flow isolates.
Closed FCV-25-3              IC    RX Cntmt Purge Isol after Penetr P-11        Closed FCV-25-4              IC    RX Cntmt Purge Isol before Penetr P-1 0      Closed FCV-25-2            ANN    RX Cntmt Purge Isol Penetr P-11 in Annulus  Closed FCV-25-5           ANN    RX Cntmt Purge Isol Penetr P-1 0 in Annulus  Closed
* Technical Specification 3.6.1.4 requires that primary containment internal pressure be maintained between -0.7 and 2.4 psig. 15. !f there is an instrument air leak inside 15. containment, Then perform the following:
: 13.      Radiation Monitoring COMPONENT          LOC                          DESCRIPTION                  FAIL POSITION FCV-26-2, 4, 6        OC    RCB Atmospheric Sample Isol. Valve          Closed FCV-26-1, 3, 5        IS    RCB Atmospheric Sample Isol. Valve          Closed
A. Ensure MV-18-1, Instr Air to Cntmt, is CLOSED. B. Isolate letdown and charging in accordance with 1-0NP-02.03, Charging and Letdown. c. Utilize pressurizer heaters and auxiliary spray valves as required to maintain pressurizer pressure.
 
A. !f MV-18-1 is unable to be closed from the control room, Then dispatch an operator to manually close MV-18-1 (Located in the 19.5 Pipe Pen, Pen 9).
CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS
IREVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: 34A IIRF NO.: LOSS OF INSTRUMENT AIR 22 1-1010030 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 APPENDIX C AIR ACTUATED COMPONENTS (Page 5 of 6) 111. Instrument Air COMPONENT LOC DESCRIPTION FAIL POSITION FCV-23-3 oe 1 A S/G Bldn Penetr 6 Isol Closed FCV-23-5 oe 1 B S/G Bldn Penetr 5 Isol Closed FCV-23-7 oe 1 A S/G Bldn Sample Isol Closed FCV-23-9 oe 1 B S/G Bldn Sample Isol Closed FCV-23-12 oe A S/G Bldn Hdr to SGBTF Closed FCV-23-14 oe B S/G Bldn Hdr to SGBTF Closed RCV-23-2 oe Unit 1 S/G Bldn to Bldn Fltrs RAD Cntl Open RCV-23-1 oe Unit 1 S/G Bldn to Disch Canal RAD Cntl Closed RCV-31-1 oe Processed Bldn to Disch Canal RAD Cntl Closed FCV-23-4 Ie 1 A S/G Bldn Penetr 6 Isol Closed FCV-23-6 Ie 1 B S/G Bldn Penetr 5 Isol Closed PCV-18-3 ANN Instr Air to A Main Hatch Door Seal Open PCV-18-4 ANN Instr Air to B Main Hatch Door Seal Open 12. Heating, Ventilation and Air Condition COMPONENT LOC DESCRIPTION FAIL POSITION FCV-25-1 OC RX Cntmt Purge Isol before Penetr P-11 Closed FCV-25-6 OC Inlet of HVE-8A & HVE-8B Casing Closed FCV-25-7 FCV-25-8 A "'...... '.S: FCV-25-3 IC RX Cntmt Purge Isol after Penetr P-11 Closed FCV-25-4 IC RX Cntmt Purge Isol before Penetr P-1 0 Closed FCV-25-2 ANN RX Cntmt Purge Isol Penetr P-11 in Annulus Closed FCV-25-5 ANN RX Cntmt Purge Isol Penetr P-1 0 in Annulus Closed 13. Radiation Monitoring COMPONENT LOC DESCRIPTION FAIL POSITION FCV-26-2, 4, 6 OC RCB Atmospheric Sample Isol. Valve Closed FCV-26-1, 3, 5 IS RCB Atmospheric Sample Isol. Valve Closed REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 34A PROCEDURE NO.: LOSS OF INSTRUMENT AIR 22 of 23 1-1010030 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 '.:. : APPENDIX C AIR ACTUATED COMPONENTS (Page 5 of 6) 11. Instrument Air COMPONENT LOC DESCRIPTION FAIL POSITION FCV-23-3 oe 1A S/G Bldn Penetr 6 Isol Closed FCV-23-5 oe 1 B S/G Bldn Penetr 5 Isol Closed FCV-23-7 oe 1A S/G Bldn Sample Isol Closed FCV-23-9 oe 1 B S/G Bldn Sample Isol Closed FCV-23-12 oe A S/G Bldn Hdr to SGBTF Closed FCV-23-14 oe B S/G Bldn Hdr to SGBTF Closed RCV-23-2 oe Unit 1 S/G Bldn to Bldn Fltrs RAD Cntl Open RCV-23-1 oe Unit 1 S/G Bldn to Disch Canal RAD Cntl Closed RCV-31-1 oe Processed Bldn to Disch Canal RAD Cntl Closed FCV-23-4 Ie 1 A S/G Bldn Penetr 6 Isol Closed FCV-23-6 Ie 1 B S/G Bldn Penetr 5 Isol Closed PCV-18-3 ANN Instr Air to A Main Hatch Door Seal Open ( PCV-18-4 ANN Instr Air to B Main Hatch Door Seal Open 12. Heating, Ventilation and Air Condition COMPONENT LOC DESCRIPTION FAIL POSITION FCV-25-1 OC RX Cntmt Purge Isol before Penetr P-11 Closed FCV-25-6 OC Inlet of HVE-8A & HVE-8B Casing Closed FCV-25-7 ANN Cntmt VAC Relief Closed FCV-25-8 ANN Cntmt VAC Relief Closed FCV-25-3 IC RX Cntmt Purge Isol after Penetr P-11 Closed FCV-25-4 IC RX Cntmt Purge Isol before Penetr P-1 0 Closed FCV-25-2 ANN RX Cntmt Purge Isol Penetr P-11 in Annulus Closed FCV-25-5 ANN RX Cntmt Purge Isol Penetr P-1 0 in Annulus Closed 13. Radiation Monitoring COMPONENT LOC DESCRIPTION FAIL POSITION FCV-26-2, 4, 6 OC RCB Atmospheric Sample Isol. Valve Closed FCV-26-1, 3, 5 IS RCB Atmospheric Sample Isol. Valve Closed 
(
( CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS INTERNAL PRESSURE LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.6.1.4 Primary containment internal pressure shall be maintained between -0.7 and 2.4 PSIG. APPLICABILITY:
INTERNAL PRESSURE LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.6.1.4    Primary containment internal pressure shall be maintained between -0.7 and 2.4 PSIG.
MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4. ACTION: With the containment internal pressure outside of the limits above, restore the internal pressure to within the limits within 1 hour or be in at least HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours. SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.6.1.4 The primary containment internal pressure shall be determined to be within the limits at least once per 12 hours. ST. LUCIE -UNIT 1 3/46-12 ( CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS INTERNAL PRESSURE LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.6.1.4 Primary containment internal pressure shall be maintained between -0.7 and 2.4 PSIG. APPLICABILITY:
APPLICABILITY: MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4.
MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4. ACTION: With the containment internal pressure outside of the limits above, restore the internal pressure to within the limits within 1 hour or be in at least HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours. SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.6.1.4 The primary containment internal pressure shall be determined to be within the limits at least once per 12 hours. ST. LUCIE -UNIT 1 3/46-12 Examination Outline Cross-reference:
ACTION:
Level Tier # Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO 037AA2.10 SRO 1 2 4.1 Ability to determine and interpret the following as they apply to the Steam Generator Tube Leak: Tech-Spec limits for ReS leakage Proposed Question:
With the containment internal pressure outside of the limits above, restore the internal pressure to within the limits within 1 hour or be in at least HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours.
SRO 82 Unit 1 is at 100% power with the following Reactor Coolant System Leakage rates. 1 A Stearn Generator:  
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.6.1.4      The primary containment internal pressure shall be determined to be within the limits at least once per 12 hours.
.05 gpm 1 B Steam Generator:  
(
.11 gpm Which ONE of the following states the Technical Specification Reactor Coolant System Leakage that is being exceeded and what is the applicable action statement?
ST. LUCIE - UNIT 1                              3/46-12
A. TOTAL of 1A and 1 B Steam Generator together exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 6 hours. B. ONLY 1 B Steam Generator leakage exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 6 hours. C. ONLY 1 B Steam Generator leakage exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 4 hours. D. TOTAL of 1A and 1 B Steam Generator together exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 4 hours. Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional):
 
155 ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Examination Outline Cross-reference:                         Level                          RO                      SRO Tier #                                                  1 Group #                                                2 KIA #
Level Tier # Group # KJA # Importance Rating RO 037AA2.10 SRO 1 2 4.1 Ability to determine and interpret the following as they apply to the Steam Generator Tube Leak: Tech-Spec limits for ReS leakage Proposed Question:
KJA                            037AA2.10 Importance Rating                                      4.1 Ability to determine and interpret the following as they apply to the Steam Generator Tube Leak: Tech-Spec limits for ReS leakage Proposed Question:                       SRO 82 Unit 1 is at 100% power with the following Reactor Coolant System Leakage rates.
SRO 82 Unit 1 is at 100% power with the following Reactor Coolant System Leakage rates. 1 A Stearn Generator:
1A Stearn Generator: .05 gpm 1B Steam Generator: .11 gpm Which ONE of the following states the Technical Specification Reactor Coolant System Leakage that is being exceeded and what is the applicable action statement?
.05 gpm 1 B Steam Generator:
A. TOTAL of 1A and 1B          1B Steam Generator together exceeds the Tech. Spec.
.11 gpm Which ONE of the following states the Technical Specification Reactor Coolant System Leakage that is being exceeded and what is the applicable action statement?
limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 6 hours.
A. TOTAL of 1A and 1B Steam Generator together exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 6 hours. B. ONLY 1 B Steam Generator leakage exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 6 hours. C. ONLY 1 B Steam Generator leakage exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 4 hours. D. TOTAL of 1 A and 1 B Steam Generator together exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 4 hours. Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional):
B. ONLY 1B Steam Generator leakage exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in
155 A. Incorrect: 1 A SG .05 gpm is 72 gallons per day. 1 B is 158 gal per day. Up to 150 gallons per day through ONLY ONE SG is the limit. B. Correct::
(                                at least Hot Standby within 6 hours.
11 gpm is 158 gallons per day. C. Incorrect:
C. ONLY 1B Steam Generator leakage exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 4 hours.
Hot standby in 6 hours D. Incorrect:
D. TOTAL of 1         A and 1B Steam Generator together exceeds the Tech. Spec.
Total riot correct, Hot standby in 6 hours Technical Reference(s):
1A limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 4 hours.
T.S. 3.4.6.2 Reactor Coolant System Leakage (Attach if not previously provided)
Proposed Answer:                        B Explanation (Optional):
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
155
Learning Objective:
 
0902723-02 (As available)
A. Incorrect: 1A SG .05 gpm is 72 gallons per day. 1B is 158 gal per day. Up to 150
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 5 ......."-_-
(        gallons per day through ONLY ONE SG is the limit.
B. Correct:: 11 gpm is 158 gallons per day.
C. Incorrect: Hot standby in 6 hours D. Incorrect: Total riot riOt correct, Hot standby in 6 hours Reference( s):
Technical Reference(s):      T.S. 3.4.6.2 Reactor Coolant    (Attach if not previously provided)
System Leakage Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:          0902723-02                      (As available)
Question Source:            Bank #
Modified Bank #                (Note changes or attach parent)
New                  x
(
Question History:            Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:    Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis              x 10 CFR Part 55 Content:      55.41 55.43 Comments:
156
 
Examination Outline Cross-reference:                          Level                          RO                      SRO Tier Tier#  #                                                1 Group #                                                2 KIA #                          037AA2.10 Importance Rating                                      4.1 Ability to determine and interpret the following as they apply to the Steam Generator Tube Leak: Tech-Spec limits for RCS leakage Proposed Question:                      SRO 82 Unit 1 is at 100% power with the following Reactor Coolant System Leakage rates .
1A Steam Generator:              .05 gpm 1B Steam Generator:              .11 gpm PORV 1402:                      1.2 gpm Check Valve V3227                0.8 gpm Which ONE of the following states the Technical Specification Reactor Coolant System Leakage that is being exceeded and what is the applicable action statement?
A. TOTAL of 1A and 1 B Steam Generator leakage exceeds the Tech. Spec.
limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 6 hours.
B. ONLY 1 B Steam Generator leakage exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 6 hours.
C. Leakage from Check Valve V3227 exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 4 hours.
D. Leakage from the PORV 1402 exceeds the Tech. Spec limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 4 hours.
163
 
Proposed Answer:              B Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect: 1A SG .05 gpm is 72 gallons per day. 1 B is 158 gal per day. Up to 150 gallons per day through ONLY ONE SG is the limit.
B. Correct:: 11 gpm is 158 gallons per day.
C. Incorrect: V3227 is allowed 1 gpm or 1-5 gpm if previous leakage rates allow.
D. Incorrect: PORV leakage is identified leakage and up to 1               &deg; 10 gpm allowed.
Technical Reference(s):     T.S. 3.4.6.2 Reactor Coolant                    (Attach if not previously provided)
System Leakage Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:       _0-,-9,-0,--2_7_2~3-~0_2
_0-'-9:......:0'-'-2_7_23-'-----'-0_2_
_ (As available)
(  Question Source:              Bank #
Bank#
Modified Bank #                                (Note changes or attach parent)
New                                    x Question History:            Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:    Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis                              x 10 CFR Part 55 Content:      55.41 55.43                      5
_5-=--_
Comments:
Comments:
x 156 ( ( A. Incorrect: 1 A SG .05 gpm is 72 gallons per day. 1 B is 158 gal per day. Up to 150 gallons per day through ONLY ONE SG is the limit. B. Correct::
I, 164
11 gpm is 158 gallons per day. C. Incorrect:
 
Hot standby in 6 hours D. Incorrect:
REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM
Total riOt correct, Hot standby in 6 hours Technical Reference( s): T.S. 3.4.6.2 Reactor Coolant System Leakage (Attach if not previously provided)
(
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.4.6.2     Reactor Coolant System operational leakage shall be limited to:
Learning Objective:
: a. No PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE,
0902723-02 (As available)
: b. 1 GPM UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE,
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) -----x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 5 ---Comments:
: c. 150 gallons per day primary-to-secondary leakage through anyone steam generator (SG),
x 156 Examination Outline Cross-reference:
: d. 10 GPM IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE from the Reactor Coolant System, and
Level Tier# Group # KIA # RO SRO 1 2 037AA2.10 Importance Rating 4.1 Ability to determine and interpret the following as they apply to the Steam Generator Tube Leak: Tech-Spec limits for RCS leakage Proposed Question:
: e. Leakage as specified in Table 3.4.6-1 for each Reactor Coolant System Pressure Isolation Valve identified in Table 3.4.6-1.
SRO 82 Unit 1 is at 100% power with the following Reactor Coolant System Leakage rates . 1 A Steam Generator: 1 B Steam Generator: . 05 gpm .11 gpm 1.2 gpm 0.8 gpm PORV 1402: Check Valve V3227 Which ONE of the following states the Technical Specification Reactor Coolant System Leakage that is being exceeded and what is the applicable action statement?
APPLICABILITY: MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4.
A. TOTAL of 1 A and 1 B Steam Generator leakage exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 6 hours. B. ONLY 1 B Steam Generator leakage exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 6 hours. C. Leakage from Check Valve V3227 exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 4 hours. D. Leakage from the PORV 1402 exceeds the Tech. Spec limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 4 hours. 163 Examination Outline Cross-reference:
ACTION:
Level Tier # Group # KIA # RO SRO 2 037AA2.10 Importance Rating 4.1 Ability to determine and interpret the following as they apply to the Steam Generator Tube Leak: Tech-Spec limits for RCS leakage Proposed Question:
: a. With any PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE, or with primary-to-secondary leakage not within limit, be in at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours.
SRO 82 Unit 1 is at 100% power with the following Reactor Coolant System Leakage rates . 1 A Steam Generator: 1 B Steam Generator: . 05 gpm .11 gpm 1.2 gpm 0.8 gpm PORV 1402: Check Valve V3227 Which ONE of the following states the Technical Specification Reactor Coolant System Leakage that is being exceeded and what is the applicable action statement?
: b. With any Reactor Coolant System operational leakage greater than anyone of the above limits, excluding primary-to-secondary leakage, PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE, and Reactor Coolant System Pressure Isolation Valve leakage, reduce the leakage rate to within limits within 4 hours or be in at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours.
A. TOTAL of 1 A and 1 B Steam Generator leakage exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 6 hours. B. ONLY 1 B Steam Generator leakage exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 6 hours. C. Leakage from Check Valve V3227 exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 4 hours. D. Leakage from the PORV 1402 exceeds the Tech. Spec limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 4 hours. 163 Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional):
: c. With any Reactor Coolant System Pressure Isolation Valve leakage greater than the limit in 3.4.6.2.e above reactor operation may continue provided that at least two valves, including check valves, in each high pressure line having a non-functional valve are in and remain in the mode corresponding to the isolated con-dition. Motor operated valves shall be placed in the closed posi-tion, and power supplies deenergized. (Note, however, that this may lead to ACTION requirements for systems involved.) Otherwise, reduce the leakage rate to within limits within 4 hours or be in at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours.
A. Incorrect: 1 A SG .05 gpm is 72 gallons per day. 1 B is 158 gal per day. Up to 150 gallons per day through ONLY ONE SG is the limit. B. Correct::
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.4.6.2     Reactor Coolant System operational leakages shall be demonstrated to be within each of the above limits by:
11 gpm is 158 gallons per day. C. Incorrect:
: a. Monitoring the containment atmosphere gaseous and particulate radioactivity at least once per 12 hours.
V3227 is allowed 1 gpm or 1-5 gpm if previous leakage rates allow. D. Incorrect:
ST. LUCIE - UNIT 1                               3/44-14               OFder dated 4/20/81 Order 4-1-&, 200 Amendment No. 448,
PORV leakage is identified leakage and up to 1 &deg; gpm allowed. Technical Reference(s):
T.S. 3.4.6.2 Reactor Coolant System Leakage (Attach if not previously provided)
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
_0-'-9:......:0'-'-2_7_23-'-----'-0_2
_______ (As available)
Question Source: Bank# Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) -----x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 _5-=--_ Comments:
x 164 ( I , Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect: 1 A SG .05 gpm is 72 gallons per day. 1 B is 158 gal per day. Up to 150 gallons per day through ONLY ONE SG is the limit. B. Correct::
11 gpm is 158 gallons per day. C. Incorrect:
V3227 is allowed 1 gpm or 1-5 gpm if previous leakage rates allow. D. Incorrect:
PORV leakage is identified leakage and up to 10 gpm allowed. Technical Reference(s):
T.S. 3.4.6.2 Reactor Coolant System Leakage (Attach if not previously provided)
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
________ (As available)
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 5 ---Comments:
x 164 
( REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.4.6.2 Reactor Coolant System operational leakage shall be limited to: a. No PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE, b. 1 GPM UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE, c. 150 gallons per day primary-to-secondary leakage through anyone steam generator (SG), d. 10 GPM IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE from the Reactor Coolant System, and e. Leakage as specified in Table 3.4.6-1 for each Reactor Coolant System Pressure Isolation Valve identified in Table 3.4.6-1. APPLICABILITY:
MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4. ACTION: a. With any PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE, or with primary-to-secondary leakage not within limit, be in at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours. b. With any Reactor Coolant System operational leakage greater than anyone of the above limits, excluding primary-to-secondary leakage, PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE, and Reactor Coolant System Pressure Isolation Valve leakage, reduce the leakage rate to within limits within 4 hours or be in at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours. c. With any Reactor Coolant System Pressure Isolation Valve leakage greater than the limit in 3.4.6.2.e above reactor operation may continue provided that at least two valves, including check valves, in each high pressure line having a non-functional valve are in and remain in the mode corresponding to the isolated dition. Motor operated valves shall be placed in the closed tion, and power supplies deenergized. (Note, however, that this may lead to ACTION requirements for systems involved.)
Otherwise, reduce the leakage rate to within limits within 4 hours or be in at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours. SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.4.6.2 Reactor Coolant System operational leakages shall be demonstrated to be within each of the above limits by: a. Monitoring the containment atmosphere gaseous and particulate radioactivity at least once per 12 hours. ST. LUCIE -UNIT 1 3/44-14 OFder dated 4/20/81 Amendment No. 448, 200 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.4.6.2 Reactor Coolant System operational leakage shall be limited to: a. No PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE, b. 1 GPM UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE, c. 150 gallons per day primary-to-secondary leakage through anyone steam generator (SG), d. 10 GPM IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE from the Reactor Coolant System, and e. Leakage as specified in Table 3.4.6-1 for each Reactor Coolant System Pressure Isolation Valve identified in Table 3.4.6-1. APPLICABILITY:
MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4. ACTION: a. With any PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE, or with primary-to-secondary leakage not within limit, be in at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours. b. With any Reactor Coolant System operational leakage greater than anyone of the above limits, excluding primary-to-secondary leakage, PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE, and Reactor Coolant System Pressure Isolation Valve leakage, reduce the leakage rate to within limits within 4 hours or be in at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours. c. With any Reactor Coolant System Pressure Isolation Valve leakage greater than the limit in 3.4.6.2.e above reactor operation may continue provided that at least two valves, including check valves, in each high pressure line having a non-functional valve are in and remain in the mode corresponding to the isolated dition. Motor operated valves shall be placed in the closed tion, and power supplies deenergized. (Note, however, that this may lead to ACTION requirements for systems involved.)
Otherwise, reduce the leakage rate to within limits within 4 hours or be in at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours. SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.4.6.2 Reactor Coolant System operational leakages shall be demonstrated to be within each of the above limits by: a. Monitoring the containment atmosphere gaseous and particulate radioactivity at least once per 12 hours. ST. LUCIE -UNIT 1 3/44-14 Order dated 4/20/81 Amendment No. 4-1-&, 200 TABLE 3.4 6-1 PRIMARY COOLANT SYSTEM PRESSURE ISOLATION VALVES NOTES Check Valve No. V3227 V3123 V3217 V3113 V3237 V3133 V3247 V3143 V3124 V3114 V3134 V3144 (a) Maximum Allowable Leakage (each valve): 1. Leakage rates less than or equal to 1.0 gpm are acceptable.
: 2. Leakage rates greater than 1.0 gpm but less than or equal to 5.0 gpm are acceptable if the latest measured rate has not exceeded the rate determined by the previous test by an amount the reduces the margin between previous measured leakage rate and the maximum permissible rate of 5.0 gpm by 50% or greater. 3. Leakage rates greater than 1.0 gpm but less than or equal to 5.0 gpm are unacceptable if the latest measured rate exceeded the rate determined by the previous test by an amount that reduces the margin between measured leakage rate and the maximum permissible rate of 5.0 gpm by 50% or greater. 4. Leakage rates greater than 5.0 gpm are unacceptable. (b) To satisfy ALARA requirements, leakage may be measured indirectly (as from the performance of pressure indicators) if accomplished in accordance with approved procedures and supported by computations showing that the method is capable of demonstrating valve compliance with the leakage criteria. (c) Minimum test differential pressure shall not be less than 150 psid. ST. LUCIE -UNIT 1 3/44-14b Order dated 4/20/81 TABLE 3.4 6-1 PRIMARY COOLANT SYSTEM PRESSURE ISOLATION VALVES NOTES Check Valve No. V3227 V3123 V3217 V3113 V3237 V3133 V3247 V3143 V3124 V3114 V3134 V3144 (a) Maximum Allowable Leakage (each valve): 1. Leakage rates less than or equal to 1.0 gpm are acceptable.
: 2. Leakage rates greater than 1.0 gpm but less than or equal to 5.0 gpm are acceptable if the latest measured rate has not exceeded the rate determined by the previous test by an amount the reduces the margin between previous measured leakage rate and the maximum permissible rate of 5.0 gpm by 50% or greater. 3. Leakage rates greater than 1.0 gpm but less than or equal to 5.0 gpm are unacceptable if the latest measured rate exceeded the rate determined by the previous test by an amount that reduces the margin between measured leakage rate and the maximum permissible rate of 5.0 gpm by 50% or greater. 4. Leakage rates greater than 5.0 gpm are unacceptable. (b) To satisfy ALARA requirements, leakage may be measured indirectly (as from the performance of pressure indicators) if accomplished in accordance with approved procedures and supported by computations showing that the method is capable of demonstrating valve compliance with the leakage criteria. (c) Minimum test differential pressure shall not be less than 150 psid. ST. LUCIE -UNIT 1 3/44-14b Order dated 4/20/81 Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO 067AG2.4.21 Plant Fire on Site: Knowledge of the parameters and logic used to assess the status of safety systems Proposed Question:
SRO 83 Given the following events on Unit 1 : SRO 1 2 4.6 r 0912: Unit 1 tripped from 1 00% and an inadvertent SIAS occurred and has yet to be t rese . Iff' 0923: A fire alarm was recejVed in the Control Room. 0925: The NPO lube oil fire under the HP Turbine. 0927: Both 1 A & 1 B Fire Pumps are manually started. 0940: The Fire Brigade is fighting the fire but it is NOT under control. 0941: a Loss of Offsite Power (LOOP) occurs. 1) What will be the status of the electric Fire Pumps in support of the fire fighting effort? 2) At what time is the E-Plan EAL required to be declared?
A. 1) Both Fire pumps will AUTOMATICALLY restart following a time delay after EDG breaker closure. 2)0935 B. 1) Both Fire pumps will AUTOMATICALLY restart following a time delay after EDG breaker closure. 2)0940 C. 1) Both Fire pumps must be MANUALLY restarted following EDG breaker closure. 2)0940 D. 1) Both Fire pumps must be MANUALLY restarted following EDG breaker closure. 2)0935 165 ( ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO 067 AG2.4.21 Plant Fire on Site: Knowledge of the parameters and logic used to assess the status of safety systems Proposed Question:
SRO 83 Given the following events on Unit 1: / $ SRO 2 4.6 <''', " 0912: Unit 1 tripped from 1 00%
and an inadvertent SIAS occurred and has yet to be reset. 1'/ V' 0923: A fire alarm was receiVed in the Control Room. 0925: The NPO lube oil fire under the HP Turbine. 0927: Both 1A & 1 B Fire Pumps are manually started. 0940: The Fire Brigade is fighting the fire but it is NOT under control. 0941: a Loss of Offsite Power (LOOP) occurs. 1) What will be the status of the electric Fire Pumps in support of the fire fighting effort? 2) At what time is the E-Plan EAL required to be declared?
A. 1) Both Fire pumps will AUTOMATICALLY restart following a time delay after EDG breaker closure. 2)0935 B. 1) Both Fire pumps will AUTOMATICALLY restart following a time delay after EDG breaker closure. 2)0940 C. 1) Both Fire pumps must be MANUALLY restarted following EDG breaker closure. 2)0940 D. 1) Both Fire pumps must be MANUALLY restarted following EDG breaker closure. 2)0935 165 Proposed Answer: D Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect:
Electric Driven Fire Pumps will trip on the LOOP and require manual restart following EDG breaker closure. B. Incorrect:
Do not automatically start. Time should be 0935 C. Incorrect:
EAL should be met at 0935 D. Correct: Electric Driven Fire Pumps will trip on the LOOP and require manual restart following EDG breaker closure. 10 min EAL clock started at time 0925 when fire was confirmed by NPO. Technical Reference(s):
NOP-15.12 Fire Protection System Operation (Attach if not previously provided)
EPIP-01 Classification Of emergencies Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
--,,-0-,-70-,,-2:::...:3,--,1-'-.1--=-0,-,-7-,---, -=--90;:....::2,,--,-7--=-0=2---=0-=:2
___ (As available)
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) -----x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 7 ---55.43 5 ---Comments:
x 166 ( ( Proposed Answer: D Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect:
Electric Driven Fire Pumps will trip on the LOOP and require manual restart following EDG breaker closure. B. Incorrect:
Do not automatically start. Time should be 0935 C. Incorrect:
EAL should be met at 0935 D. Correct: Electric Driven Fire Pumps will trip on the LOOP and require manual restart following EDG breaker closure. 10 min EAL clock started at time 0925 when fire was confirmed by NPO. Technical Reference(s):
NOP-15.12 Fire Protection System Operation (Attach if not previously provided)
EPIP-01 Classification Of emergencies Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
---,,0-,-7-,-,0 2=-3=-1 __ 1_-0,--7....!...
-=.9....::..0=.2 7'-0::..::2=--0.:..:2=--___ (As a v a i I a b Ie) Question Source:
Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 7 ---55.43 5 ---Comments:
x 166 
( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 3 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM OPERATION 4of22 PROCEDURE NO.: 0-NOP-15.12 ST. LUCIE PLANT 2.4 Drawings
* 8770-G-084, Firewater, Domestic and Makeup Systems (sheets 1, 2 & 3)
* 8770-G-087, Miscellaneous Systems (sheet 2)
* 2998-G-087, Miscellaneous Systems (sheet 2) 2.5 ,-r1 CR-01-1501, Restoration of Sprinkler Systems 3.0 PREREQUISITES 3.1 NOP-15.11, Fire Protection System Initial Alignment, is complete.


===3.2 Domestic===
TABLE 3.4 6-1 PRIMARY COOLANT SYSTEM PRESSURE ISOLATION VALVES Check Valve No.
Water System is in operation in accordance with 01-15-01, Domestic Water System -Normal Operation.
V3227 V3123 V3217 V3113 V3237 V3133 V3247 V3143 V3124 V3114 V3134 V3144 NOTES (a)  Maximum Allowable Leakage (each valve):
: 1. Leakage rates less than or equal to 1.0 gpm are acceptable.
: 2. Leakage rates greater than 1.0 gpm but less than or equal to 5.0 gpm are acceptable if the latest measured rate has not exceeded the rate determined by the previous test by an amount the reduces the margin between previous measured leakage rate and the maximum permissible rate of 5.0 gpm by 50% or greater.
: 3. Leakage rates greater than 1.0 gpm but less than or equal to 5.0 gpm are unacceptable if the latest measured rate exceeded the rate determined by the previous test by an amount that reduces the margin between measured leakage rate and the maximum permissible rate of 5.0 gpm by 50% or greater.
: 4. Leakage rates greater than 5.0 gpm are unacceptable.
(b)  To satisfy ALARA requirements, leakage may be measured indirectly (as from the performance of pressure indicators) if accomplished in accordance with approved procedures and supported by computations showing that the method is capable of demonstrating valve compliance with the leakage criteria.
(c)  Minimum test differential pressure shall not be less than 150 psid.
ST. LUCIE - UNIT 1                            3/44-14b                Order dated 4/20/81


===4.0 PRECAUTIONS===
Examination Outline Cross-reference:                      Level                              RO          SRO Tier#                                          1 Group #                                        2 KIA #                              067AG2.4.21 067 AG2.4.21 Importance Rating                              4.6 Plant Fire on Site: Knowledge of the parameters and logic used to assess the status of safety systems Proposed Question:                    SRO 83 Given the following events on Unit 1              1:: /
r$
                                              ~er 0912: Unit 1 tripped from 100% 8~~~r and an inadvertent SIAS occurred and has yet to be
                                              ~~
reset.t .
rese                          1'/
Iff' V'
0923: A fire alarm was receiVedrecejVed in the Control Room.
0925: The NPO confirmed~
confirmed~ lube oil fire under the HP Turbine.
0927: Both 1      1AA & 1B Fire Pumps are manually started.
0940: The Fire Brigade is fighting the fire but it is NOT under control.
0941: a Loss of Offsite Power (LOOP) occurs.
: 1) What will be the status of the electric Fire Pumps in support of the fire fighting effort?
: 2) At what time is the E-Plan EAL required to be declared?
(
A. 1) Both Fire pumps will AUTOMATICALLY restart following a time delay after EDG breaker closure.
2)0935 B. 1) Both Fire pumps will AUTOMATICALLY restart following a time delay after EDG breaker closure.
2)0940 C. 1) Both Fire pumps must be MANUALLY restarted following EDG breaker closure.
2)0940 D. 1) Both Fire pumps must be MANUALLY restarted following EDG breaker closure.
2)0935
(
165


/ LIMITATIONS 4.1 Both Fire Pumps should be properly aligned and operational at all times. INITIAL US US 4.2 &sect;1 Level in the City Water Tanks shall be maintained above 14' 6" at all times. 4.3 Fire Pump operation following a SIAS: SIAS -Overrides Fire Pump automatic start. Permissive to manually start. LOOP coincident with SIAS -Pump receives a TRIP signal. Permissive to manually start after the associated bus is energized.  
Proposed Answer:                D Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect: Electric Driven Fire Pumps will trip on the LOOP and require manual restart following EDG breaker closure.
B. Incorrect: Do not automatically start. Time should be 0935 C. Incorrect: EAL should be met at 0935 D. Correct: Electric Driven Fire Pumps will trip on the LOOP and require manual restart following EDG breaker closure. 10 min EAL clock started at time 0925 when fire was confirmed by NPO.
Technical Reference(s):        NOP-15.12 Fire Protection                                                                    (Attach if not previously provided)
System Operation EPIP-01 Classification Of emergencies
(
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:        --,,-0-,-70-,,-2:::...:3,--,1-'
                            ---,,0-,-7-,-,02=-3=-1__      -.1--=-0,-,-7-,---,
1_-0,--7....!...-=.-=--90;
: 9. . : .:.0.=.: 2,7'-0::..::2=--0.:..:2=--___
                                                                                                    --,-7--=-0=2---=0-=:2_ _ _ (As available) a v a iIa b Ie)
Question Source:                Bank #
Modified Bank #                                                                              (Note changes or attach parent)
New                                                                        x Question History:              Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:      Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis                                                                              x 10 CFR Part 55 Content:        55.41                      ---
7 55.43                      -
5  --        -
Comments:
(
166


===5.0 RECORDS===
REVISION NO.:           PROCEDURE TITLE:                                     PAGE:
REQUIRED 5.1 Completed copy of this procedure shall be maintained in the plant files in accordance with QI-17-PSL-1, Quality Assurance Records. REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 3 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM OPERATION 4 of 22 PROCEDURE NO.: 0-NOP-15.12 ST. LUCIE PLANT 2.4 Drawings
3               FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM OPERATION
( PROCEDURE NO.:
4 of 22 4of22 0-NOP-15.12                           ST. LUCIE PLANT 2.4     Drawings
* 8770-G-084, Firewater, Domestic and Makeup Systems (sheets 1, 2 & 3)
* 8770-G-084, Firewater, Domestic and Makeup Systems (sheets 1, 2 & 3)
* 8770-G-087, Miscellaneous Systems (sheet 2)
* 8770-G-087, Miscellaneous Systems (sheet 2)
* 2998-G-087, Miscellaneous Systems (sheet 2) 2.5 CR-01-1501, Restoration of Sprinkler Systems 3.0 PREREQUISITES 3.1 NOP-15.11, Fire Protection System Initial Alignment, is complete.  
* 2998-G-087, Miscellaneous Systems (sheet 2) 2.5     ,-r1
 
          ~1    CR-01-1501, Restoration of Sprinkler Systems 3.0     PREREQUISITES                                                               INITIAL 3.1     NOP-15.11, Fire Protection System Initial Alignment, is complete.
===3.2 Domestic===
US 3.2     Domestic Water System is in operation in accordance with 01-15-01, Domestic Water System - Normal Operation.
Water System is in operation in accordance with 01-15-01, Domestic Water System -Normal Operation.  
US 4.0      PRECAUTIONS / LIMITATIONS 4.1      Both Fire Pumps should be properly aligned and operational at all times.
4.2      &sect;1    Level in the City Water Tanks shall be maintained above 14' 6" at all times.
4.3      Fire Pump operation following a SIAS:
* SIAS - Overrides Fire Pump automatic start. Permissive to manually start.
* LOOP coincident with SIAS - Pump receives a TRIP signal. Permissive to manually start after the associated bus is energized.
5.0      RECORDS REQUIRED 5.1      Completed copy of this procedure shall be maintained in the plant files in accordance with QI-17-PSL-1, QI-17 -PSL-1, Quality Assurance Records.


===4.0 PRECAUTIONS===
REVISION NO.:          PROCEDURE TITLE:                                          PAGE:
16                    CLASSIFICATION OF EMERGENCIES PROCEDURE NO.:
EPIP-01                            ST. LUCIE PLANT S1.
5.2    Classifying the Event (continued
: 1. A.      1 1., (continued)
Example Scenarios:
(1)    1000 Fire Alarm is received in the Control Room 1005 Fire is confirmed by a NLO in the field 10 minute clock starts 1015 10 minutes have passed since fire was confirmed, the fire is not out and is uncontrolled - EAL is met and an Unusual Event is to be declared - There is no additional 15 minute assessment period.
(2)    1000 All Feedwater is lost
(                                                    15 minute clock starts 1100 S/G levels lower to below 40% wide range -
EAL is met and an Alert is to be declared -
There is no additional 15 minute assessment period.
: 2. Use the best information available when working through the Emergency Classification Table. When confronted with conflicting information for which resolution is not apparent, classify the condition at the highest appropriate emergency class.
: 3. il, If, in the judgement of the Shift Manager (SM) IEmergency
                                                                  /Emergency Coordinator (EC), a situation is more serious than indicated by instrument readings or other parameters, Then classify the emergency condition at the more serious level (i.e., at the highest appropriate emergency class).
: 4. 115      Security Event il the Control If              Room is contacted by any of the following: Security, NRC, FBI or NORAD that a terrorist attack on the plant site is imminent or is occurring, Then perform the actions in ONOP-72.01, Response to Security Events and the applicable Security Force Instruction (SFI).
(


/ LIMITATIONS 4.1 Both Fire Pumps should be properly aligned and operational at all times. INITIAL US US 4.2 &sect;1 Level in the City Water Tanks shall be maintained above 14' 6" at all times. 4.3 Fire Pump operation following a SIAS:
( Examination Outline Cross-reference:                           Level                   RO              SRO Tier#                                     1 Group #                                   2 K/A#                     074EG2.2.40 Importance Rating                         4.7 Inad Core Cooling: Ability to apply technical specifications for a system Proposed Question:                     SRO 84 The following are the Unit 1 QSPDS indications.
* SIAS -Overrides Fire Pump automatic start. Permissive to manually start.
Incore Thermocouples Operable                           Reactor Vessel Level Monitoring Sys. Operable Channel A                         3/core quadrant                                 4 sensors Channel B                         2/core quadrant                                 3 sensors In accordance with Technical Specifications which ONE of the following states the operability of the above systems?
* LOOP coincident with SIAS -Pump receives a TRIP signal. Permissive to manually start after the associated bus is energized.
(                    A. Channel A and Channel B for Incore and Reactor Vessel Level are OPERABLE.
 
===5.0 RECORDS===
REQUIRED 5.1 Completed copy of this procedure shall be maintained in the plant files in accordance with QI-17 -PSL-1, Quality Assurance Records. 
( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: 16 CLASSIFICATION OF EMERGENCIES PROCEDURE NO.: EPIP-01 S1. LUCIE PLANT 5.2 Classifying the Event (continued
: 1. A. 1 , (continued)
Example Scenarios:
(1) 1000 Fire Alarm is received in the Control Room 1005 Fire is confirmed by a NLO in the field 10 minute clock starts 1015 10 minutes have passed since fire was confirmed, the fire is not out and is uncontrolled
-EAL is met and an Unusual Event is to be declared -There is no additional 15 minute assessment period. (2) 1000 All Feedwater is lost 15 minute clock starts 1100 S/G levels lower to below 40% wide range -EAL is met and an Alert is to be declared -There is no additional 15 minute assessment period. 2. Use the best information available when working through the Emergency Classification Table. When confronted with conflicting information for which resolution is not apparent, classify the condition at the highest appropriate emergency class. 3. il, in the judgement of the Shift Manager (SM) IEmergency Coordinator (EC), a situation is more serious than indicated by instrument readings or other parameters, Then classify the emergency condition at the more serious level (i.e., at the highest appropriate emergency class). 4. 115 Security Event il the Control Room is contacted by any of the following:
Security, NRC, FBI or NORAD that a terrorist attack on the plant site is imminent or is occurring, Then perform the actions in ONOP-72.01, Response to Security Events and the applicable Security Force Instruction (SFI). ( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 16 CLASSIFICATION OF EMERGENCIES PROCEDURE NO.: EPIP-01 ST. LUCIE PLANT 5.2 Classifying the Event (continued
: 1. A. 1. (continued)
Example Scenarios:
(1) 1000 Fire Alarm is received in the Control Room 1005 Fire is confirmed by a NLO in the field (2) 10 minute clock starts 1015 10 minutes have passed since fire was confirmed, the fire is not out and is uncontrolled
-EAL is met and an Unusual Event is to be declared -There is no additional 15 minute assessment period. 1000 All Feedwater is lost 15 minute clock starts 1100 S/G levels lower to below 40% wide range -EAL is met and an Alert is to be declared -There is no additional 15 minute assessment period. 2. Use the best information available when working through the Emergency Classification Table. When confronted with conflicting information for which resolution is not apparent, classify the condition at the highest appropriate emergency class. 3. If, in the judgement of the Shift Manager (SM) /Emergency Coordinator (EC), a situation is more serious than indicated by instrument readings or other parameters, Then classify the emergency condition at the more serious level (i.e., at the highest appropriate emergency class). 4. 115 Security Event If the Control Room is contacted by any of the following:
Security, NRC, FBI or NORAD that a terrorist attack on the plant site is imminent or is occurring, Then perform the actions in ONOP-72.01, Response to Security Events and the applicable Security Force Instruction (SFI). 
( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Level Tier# Group # K/A# RO SRO 1 2 074EG2.2.40 Importance Rating 4.7 Inad Core Cooling: Ability to apply technical specifications for a system Proposed Question:
SRO 84 The following are the Unit 1 QSPDS indications.
Incore Thermocouples Operable Reactor Vessel Level Monitoring Sys. Operable Channel A 3/core quadrant 4 sensors Channel B 2/core quadrant 3 sensors In accordance with Technical Specifications which ONE of the following states the operability of the above systems? A. Channel A and Channel B for Incore and Reactor Vessel Level are OPERABLE.
B. Channel A for Incore and Reactor Vessel are operable, Channel B for Incore and Reactor level are INOPERABLE.
B. Channel A for Incore and Reactor Vessel are operable, Channel B for Incore and Reactor level are INOPERABLE.
C. Channel A and B for Incore are OPERABLE, Channel A for Reactor Vessel is OPERABLE, Channel B for Reactor Vessel is INOPERABLE.
C. Channel A and B for Incore are OPERABLE, Channel A for Reactor Vessel is OPERABLE, Channel B for Reactor Vessel is INOPERABLE.
D. Channel A for Incore is OPERABLE, Channel B for Incore is INOPERABLE.
D. Channel A for Incore is OPERABLE, Channel B for Incore is INOPERABLE.
Channel A and B for Reactor Vessel are both OPERABLE.
Channel A and B for Reactor Vessel are both OPERABLE.
167 ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
167
Level Tier# Group # K/A# RO SRO 1 2 074EG2.2.40 Importance Rating 4.7 Inad Core Cooling: Ability to apply technical specifications for a system Proposed Question:
 
SRO 84 The following are the Unit 1 QSPDS indications.
Proposed Answer:             C
Incore Thermocouples Operable Reactor Vessel Level Monitoring Sys. Operable Channel A 3/core quadrant 4 sensors Channel B 2/core quadrant 3 sensors In accordance with Technical Specifications which ONE of the following states the operability of the above systems? A. Channel A and Channel B for Incore and Reactor Vessel Level are OPERABLE.
( Explanation (Optional):
B. Channel A for Incore and Reactor Vessel are operable, Channel B for Incore and Reactor level are INOPERABLE.
A. Incorrect, Channel B for Reactor Vessel is INOPERABLE. Must have a minimum of 4 sensors operable.
C. Channel A and B for Incore are OPERABLE, Channel A for Reactor Vessel is OPERABLE, Channel B for Reactor Vessel is INOPERABLE.
B. Incorrect C. Correct, channel B Reactor Vessel level only has 3 sensors operable D. Incorrect Technical Reference(s):     T.S. Table 3.3-11 Accident                     (Attach if not previously provided)
D. Channel A for Incore is OPERABLE, Channel B for Incore is INOPERABLE.
Montioring Ops Policy 503 Technical Specification Guidance Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Channel A and B for Reactor Vessel are both OPERABLE.
( Learning Objective:       _0,---7---,0_2_40-,---7_0~bJ,--*. _1_1_ _ _ _ _ _
167 
_0,,-7--,0,--2_4-,-0_7_O_b.L..j._1_1______         (As available)
( Proposed Answer: C Explanation (Optional):
Question Source:             Bank #
A. Incorrect, Channel B for Reactor Vessel is INOPERABLE.
Modified Bank #                               (Note changes or attach parent)
Must have a minimum of 4 sensors operable.
New                                  x Question History:           Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:   Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis                             x 10 CFR Part 55 Content:     55.41             -
B. Incorrect C. Correct, channel B Reactor Vessel level only has 3 sensors operable D. Incorrect Technical Reference(s):
10- -   -
T.S. Table 3.3-11 Accident Montioring (Attach if not previously provided)
55.43               2,5 Comments:
Ops Policy 503 Technical Specification Guidance Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
168
Learning Objective:
 
_1_1 ______ (As available)
                                                                        -                                                                  ~
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) -----x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 ---55.43 2,5 Comments:
{lid o~l~\
x 168 ( Proposed Answer: C Explanation (Optional):
    ~,~
A. Incorrect, Channel B for Reactor Vessel is INOPERABLE.
TABLE 3.3-11 ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION MINIMUM TOTAL NO.               CHANNELS INSTRUMENT                              OF CHANNELS                 OPERABLE                     ACTION
Must have a minimum of 4 sensors operable.
: 1. Pressurizer Water Level                                              2                       1                       1,6
B. Incorrect C. Correct, channel B Reactor Vessel level only has 3 sensors operable D. Incorrect Technical Reference(s):
: 2. Auxiliary Feedwater Flow Rate                                   1/pump                 1/pump                       7
T.S. Table 3.3-11 Accident Montioring (Attach if not previously provided)
: 3. RCS Subcooling Margin Monitor                                       2                       1                       1,6
Ops Policy 503 Technical Specification Guidance Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
: 4. PORV Position Indicator                                         1/valve                 1/valve                       2 Acoustic Flow Monitor
Learning Objective:
: 5. PORV Block Valve Position                                       1/valve                 1/valve                       2 Indicator
_0,,-7--,0,--2_4-,-0_7
: 6. Safety Valve Position                                           1/valve                 1/valve                       3 Indicator
_O_b.L..j  
                                                                      /...-._--...,
._1_1______ (As available)
                                                                                              ~21core
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 ---55.43 2,5 Comments:
: 7. Incore thermocouples                                  ,/'       4/core'*
x 168
4/core~                2/core       ".            1,6
{lid INSTRUMENT
                                                                  ~ quadrant ")
: 1. Pressurizer Water Level 2. Auxiliary Feedwater Flow Rate 3. RCS Subcooling Margin Monitor 4. PORV Position Indicator Acoustic Flow Monitor 5. PORV Block Valve Position Indicator
i
: 6. Safety Valve Position Indicator
                                                                                              ~uadrant
: 7. Incore thermocouples
___ quadrant ~
: 8. Containment Sump Water Level (Narrow Range) 9. Containment Sump Water Level (Wide Range) 10. Reactor Vessel Level Monitoring System 11. Containment Pressure TABLE 3.3-11 ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION MINIMUM TOTAL NO. CHANNELS OF CHANNELS OPERABLE 2 1 1/pump 1/pump 2 1 1/valve 1/valve 1/valve 1/valve 1/valve 1/valve ------'-..
                                                                      ~'--,.-,. f* .. ------/
". quadrant ___ quadrant --f";-'-, 1*-
: 8. Containment Sump Water Level
2 1 2** 1 ** 2 1 * ** The non-safety grade containment sump water level instrument may be substituted.
                                                                              --f";-'-                ,. 1 1*-
Definition of OPERABLE:
                                                                                                            '-'-'-~'
A channel is composed of eight (8) sensors in a probe, of which four (4) sensors must be OPERABLE.
4,5 (Narrow Range)
ACTION 1,6 7 1,6 2 2 3 1,6 4,5 4,5 4,5 1,6 ST. LUCIE -UNIT 1 3/43-42 Amendment No. U, 177 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. * ** -TABLE 3.3-11 ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION MINIMUM TOTAL NO. CHANNELS INSTRUMENT OF CHANNELS OPERABLE Pressurizer Water Level 2 1 Auxiliary Feedwater Flow Rate 1/pump 1/pump RCS Subcooling Margin Monitor 2 1 PORV Position Indicator 1/valve 1/valve Acoustic Flow Monitor PORV Block Valve Position 1/valve 1/valve Indicator Safety Valve Position 1/valve 1/valve Indicator Incore thermocouples Containment Sump Water Level /...-._--..., " ,/' 4/core'* , 2/core quadrant ") i f* .. ------/ . 1 * .. (Narrow Range) Containment Sump Water Level 2 1 (Wide Range) Reactor Vessel Level Monitoring System 2** 1 ** Containment Pressure 2 1 The non-safety grade containment sump water level instrument may be substituted.
: 9. Containment Sump Water Level                                         2                       1                       4,5 (Wide Range)
Definition of OPERABLE:
: 10. Reactor Vessel Level Monitoring 2**                     1**                     4,5 System
A channel is composed of eight (8) sensors in a probe, of which four (4) sensors must be OPERABLE.
: 11. Containment Pressure                                                   2                       1                      1,6
ACTION 1,6 7 1,6 2 2 3 1,6 4,5 4,5 4,5 1,6 ST LUCIE -UNIT 1 3/43-42 Amendment No. U, +9, 177
* The non-safety grade containment sump water level instrument may be substituted.
( ACTION 1 -ACTION 2 -ACTION 3 -ACTION 4 -ACTION 5 -TABLE 3.3-11 (continued)
      **    Definition of OPERABLE: A channel is composed of eight (8) sensors in a probe, of which four (4) sensors must be OPERABLE.
ACTION STATEMENTS With the number of OPERABLE channels less than the Total No. of Channels shown in Table 3.3-11, either restore the inoperable channel(s) to OPERABLE status within 30 days or be in HOT STANDBY within the next 12 hours. With position indication inoperable, restore the inoperable indicator to OPERABLE status or close the associated PORV block valve and remove power from its operator within 48 hours or be in HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours. With any individual valve position indicator inoperable, obtain quench tank temperature, level and pressure information once per shift to determine valve position.
ST ST. LUCIE - UNIT 1                                             3/43-42                             Amendment No. U, ~,
With the number of OPERABLE Channels one less than the Total Number of Channels shown in Table 3.3-11, either restore the inoperable channel to OPERABLE status within 7 days if repairs are feasible without shutting down or prepare and submit a Special Report to the Commission pursuant to the specification  
                                                                                                                            +9, ~, ~, 177
 
TABLE 3.3-11 (continued)
(
ACTION STATEMENTS ACTION 1 -      With the number of OPERABLE channels less than the Total No. of Channels shown in Table 3.3-11, either restore the inoperable channel(s) to OPERABLE status within 30 days or be in HOT STANDBY within the next 12 hours.
ACTION 2 -      With position indication inoperable, restore the inoperable indicator to OPERABLE status or close the associated PORV block valve and remove power from its operator within 48 hours or be in HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours.
ACTION 3 -      With any individual valve position indicator inoperable, obtain quench tank temperature, level and pressure information once per shift to determine valve position.
ACTION 4 -      With the number of OPERABLE Channels one less than the Total Number of Channels shown in Table 3.3-11, either restore the inoperable channel to OPERABLE status within 7 days if repairs are feasible without shutting down or prepare and submit a Special Report to the Commission pursuant to the specification 6.9.2 within 30 days following the event outlining the action taken, the cause of the inoperability and the plans and schedule for restoring the system to OPERABLE status.
ACTION 5 -      With the number of OPERABLE Channels less than the Minimum Channels OPERABLE requirements of Table 3.3-11, either restore the inoperable channel(s) to OPERABLE status within 48 hours if repairs are feasible without shutting down or:
: 1. Initiate an alternate method of monitoring the reactor vessel inventory; and
: 2. Prepare and submit a Special Report to the Commission pursuant to Specification 6.9.2 within 30 days following the event outlining the action taken, the cause of the inoperability and the plans and schedule for restoring the system to OPERABLE status; and
: 3. Restore the Channel to OPERABLE status at the next scheduled refueling.
ACTION 6 -      With the number of OPERABLE accident monitoring channels less than the Minimum Channels OPERABLE requirements of Table 3.3-11, either restore the inoperable channel(s) to OPERABLE status within 48 hours or be at least in HOT SHUTDOWN within the next 12 hours.
ACTION 7 -      With the number of OPERABLE accident monitoring channels less than the Minimum Channels OPERABLE requirements of Table 3.3-11, either restore the inoperable channel(s) to OPERABLE status within 72 hours or be at least in HOT SHUTDOWN within the next 12 hours.
ST. LUCIE - UNIT 1                                3/43-43                Amendment No. J+, +9,165
                                                                                                +9, 165


====6.9.2 within====
                        ~t-- til lI/i!t~
30 days following the event outlining the action taken, the cause of the inoperability and the plans and schedule for restoring the system to OPERABLE status. With the number of OPERABLE Channels less than the Minimum Channels OPERABLE requirements of Table 3.3-11, either restore the inoperable channel(s) to OPERABLE status within 48 hours if repairs are feasible without shutting down or: 1. Initiate an alternate method of monitoring the reactor vessel inventory; and 2. Prepare and submit a Special Report to the Commission pursuant to Specification
a....-
ST. LUCIE PLANT                                  OPS-503
(
OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT POLICY                            Rev. 35 Date  05/04/09 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION GUIDANCE Page  8 of 34 Operational Guidance for Section 3/4.3 (continued) 3/4.3.3        Monitoring Instrumentation (Unit 1)
: 1. Table 3.3-6 Item 1 Area Rad Monitors The FHB Refueling Canal Area Rad monitor (channel 8) is redundant to the Fuel Storage Pool Area Rad monitor (channel 7) as documented in CR 2006-30899 disposition. Either chan nel may be used for compliance with the technical specification when one of these Area Radiation Monitors is out of service.
: 2. Radiation monitors identified in Tech Specs and ODCM that alarm in the Control Room must have alarm capability in order to be declared OPERABLE. OPER ABLE. If the alarm function does not 0 perate, then the n the appropriate actions need to be taken in accordance with Tech Specs or ODCM. While the use of the RM-23P may be used on Unit 2 to com ply with the alternate method of monitoring, any reports would still be required until the Radiation Radiati on Monitor is restored to Operable status.
3/4.3.3.8      Accident Monitoring Instrumentation
: 1. Containment Pressure Transm itter Isolation Valves If power is lost to SE-07-5E or SE-07-5F, Containment Pressure Transmitter Isolation Valves, these valves will fail closed. This results in associated pressure transmitter transm        (PT-07-4A itter (PT              PT                            4A 1 or PT      4B1) 4B  1) being isolated, and will NOT reflect actual req uirements of TIS 3.3.3.6, Accident containment pressure. Apply the appropriate requirements Containm ent Isolation Valves in Section Monitoring Instrumentation. Also refer to Containment 3.6.3.
If power is lost to SE-07-5A I B I C I D, Containment Pressure Transmitter Isolation Valves, the associated valve willw ill fail open such that containm containmentent pressure input to RPS and ESFAS is assured.
: 2. Core Exit Thermocouples Technical Specification Table 3.3-11 lists the total number of channels as 4/core quadrant with a minimum number of channels of 2/core quadrant.
A.      Total- 4/core quadrant requires at least 2/core quadrant on A QSPDS and 2/core quadrant on B QSPDS to reach a total of 4/core quadrant. This will ensure that upon a loss of one channel of QSPDS the minimum number of CETs would still be available.
B.      Minimum - 2/core quadrant per QSPDS channel (Le.,      (i.e., one operable QSPDS channel with 2 CETs per core quadrant operable).


====6.9.2 within====
Examination Outline Cross-reference:                        Level                    RO              SRO Tier#                                      1 Group #                                    2 KIA #
30 days following the event outlining the action taken, the cause of the inoperability and the plans and schedule for restoring the system to OPERABLE status; and 3. Restore the Channel to OPERABLE status at the next scheduled refueling.
K/A#                      076AA2.04 Importance Rating                          3.0 High Reactor Coolant Activity: Process effluent radiation chart recorder Proposed Question:                    SRO 85 Unit 1 has been at 100% power for 67 days:
ACTION 6 -With the number of OPERABLE accident monitoring channels less than the Minimum Channels OPERABLE requirements of Table 3.3-11, either restore the inoperable channel(s) to OPERABLE status within 48 hours or be at least in HOT SHUTDOWN within the next 12 hours. ACTION 7 -With the number of OPERABLE accident monitoring channels less than the Minimum Channels OPERABLE requirements of Table 3.3-11, either restore the inoperable channel(s) to OPERABLE status within 72 hours or be at least in HOT SHUTDOWN within the next 12 hours. ST. LUCIE -UNIT 1 3/43-43 Amendment No. J+, +9,165 TABLE 3.3-11 (continued)
xv'"
ACTION STATEMENTS ACTION 1 -With the number of OPERABLE channels less than the Total No. of Channels shown in Table 3.3-11, either restore the inoperable channel(s) to OPERABLE status within 30 days or be in HOT STANDBY within the next 12 hours. ACTION 2 -With position indication inoperable, restore the inoperable indicator to OPERABLE status or close the associated PORV block valve and remove power from its operator within 48 hours or be in HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours. ACTION 3 -With any individual valve position indicator inoperable, obtain quench tank temperature, level and pressure information once per shift to determine valve position.
RR-2202)Process radiation monitor has indicated a significant increase in ./selected RR-2202process                                                                            Vselected isotope and Gross activity has not significantly changed.
ACTION 4 -With the number of OPERABLE Channels one less than the Total Number of Channels shown in Table 3.3-11, either restore the inoperable channel to OPERABLE status within 7 days if repairs are feasible without shutting down or prepare and submit a Special Report to the Commission pursuant to the specification
: 1) Based on the above indications, what is occurring in the Fuel/RCS?
: 2) What Technical Specification action is required ifj\selected Isotope exceeds the limit for longer than the allowable time?                                ~
                                                                          ""y  ;,'A,..
A. 1) Fuel Failure
: 2) Be in HOT STANDBY with Tave <500&deg;F within 6 hours.
B. 1) Crud Burst
(                       2) Be in HOT STANDBY with Tave <500&deg;F within 6 hours.
C. 1) Fuel Failure
: 2) Be in HOT STANDBY with Tave <515&deg;F within 6 hours.
D. 1) Crud Burst
: 2) Be in HOT STANDBY with Tave <515&deg;F within 6 hours.
169


====6.9.2 within====
Proposed Answer:            A
30 days following the event outlining the action taken, the cause of the inoperability and the plans and schedule for restoring the system to OPERABLE status. ACTION 5 -With the number of OPERABLE Channels less than the Minimum Channels OPERABLE requirements of Table 3.3-11, either restore the inoperable channel(s) to OPERABLE status within 48 hours if repairs are feasible without shutting down or: 1. Initiate an alternate method of monitoring the reactor vessel inventory; and 2. Prepare and submit a Special Report to the Commission pursuant to Specification
( Explanation (Optional):
A. Correct: Iodine increase that remains above prior level during steady state B. Incorrect: Must have gross activity increase during power change C. Incorrect: Tave <515&deg;F is Technical Specification limit for critically.
D. Incorrect: Both 1 and 2 Technical Reference(s):    U1 T.S. 3.4.8                                (Attach if not previously provided) 1-0NP-01.06 Excessive RCS Activity Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:      _0_7_0_2_8_6_1-_0_8~,0_9_0_2_7_2_3-_0_1_ _ _ (As available)
_0_7_0_2_8_61_-_08-",-0_9_0_27_2_3_-0_1___
Question Source:            Bank #
(                             Modified Bank #                              (Note changes or attach parent)
New                            x Question History:          Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:  Memory or Fundamental Knowledge                    -
X Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content:     55.41 55.43      -
5 Comments:
170


====6.9.2 within====
REVISION SION NO.:           PROCEDURE RE TITLE:                                       PAGE:
30 days following the event outlining the action taken, the cause of the inoperability and the plans and schedule for restoring the system to OPERABLE status; and 3. Restore the Channel to OPERABLE status at the next scheduled refueling.
3E                     PROCESS RADIATION MONITORS
ACTION 6 -With the number of OPERABLE accident monitoring channels less than the Minimum Channels OPERABLE requirements of Table 3.3-11, either restore the inoperable channel(s) to OPERABLE status within 48 hours or be at least in HOT SHUTDOWN within the next 12 hours. ACTION 7 -With the number of OPERABLE accident monitoring channels less than the Minimum Channels OPERABLE requirements of Table 3.3-11, either restore the inoperable channel(s) to OPERABLE status within 72 hours or be at least in HOT SHUTDOWN within the next 12 hours. ST. LUCIE -UNIT 1 3/43-43 Amendment No. J+, +9, 165 
( PROCEDURE NO.:
( 3/4.3.3 ST. LUCIE PLANT OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT POLICY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION GUIDANCE Operational Guidance for Section 3/4.3 (continued)
156(39 1-0NP-26.01                               ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 4.4 Letdown Monitor (continued)
Monitoring Instrumentation (Unit 1) 1. Table 3.3-6 Item 1 Area Rad Monitors OPS-503 Rev. 35 Date 05/04/09 Page 8 of 34 The FHB Refueling Canal Area Rad monitor (channel 8) is redundant to the Fuel Storage Pool Area Rad monitor (channel 7) as documented in CR 2006-30899 disposition.
INSTRUCTIONS                               CONTINGENCY ACTIONS NOTE
Either chan nel may be used for compliance with the technical specification when one of these Area Radiation Monitors is out of service. 2. Radiation monitors identified in Tech Specs and ODCM that alarm in the Control Room must have alarm capability in order to be declared OPERABLE.
If the alarm function does not 0 perate, then the appropriate actions need to be taken in accordance with Tech Specs or ODCM. While the use of the RM-23P may be used on Unit 2 to com ply with the alternate method of monitoring, any reports would still be required until the Radiati on Monitor is restored to Operable status. 3/4.3.3.8 Accident Monitoring Instrumentation
: 1. Containment Pressure Transm itter Isolation Valves If power is lost to SE-07-5E or SE-07-5F, Containment Pressure Transmitter Isolation Valves, these valves will fail closed. This results in associated pressure transm itter (PT 4A 1 or PT 4B 1) being isolated, and will NOT reflect actual containment pressure.
Apply the appropriate requirements of TIS 3.3.3.6, Accident Monitoring Instrumentation.
Also refer to Containment Isolation Valves in Section 3.6.3. If power is lost to SE-07-5A I B I C I D, Containment Pressure Transmitter Isolation Valves, the associated valve will fail open such that containment pressure input to RPS and ESFAS is assured. 2. Core Exit Thermocouples Technical Specification Table 3.3-11 lists the total number of channels as 4/core quadrant with a minimum number of channels of 2/core quadrant.
A. Total-4/core quadrant requires at least 2/core quadrant on A QSPDS and 2/core quadrant on B QSPDS to reach a total of 4/core quadrant.
This will ensure that upon a loss of one channel of QSPDS the minimum number of CETs would still be available.
B. Minimum -2/core quadrant per QSPDS channel (Le., one operable QSPDS channel with 2 CETs per core quadrant operable).
3/4.3.3 til a....-ST. LUCIE PLANT OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT POLICY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION GUIDANCE Operational Guidance for Section 3/4.3 (continued)
Monitoring Instrumentation (Unit 1) 1. Table 3.3-6 Item 1 Area Rad Monitors OPS-503 Rev. 35 Date 05/04/09 Page 8 of 34 The FHB Refueling Canal Area Rad monitor (channel 8) is redundant to the Fuel Storage Pool Area Rad monitor (channel 7) as documented in CR 2006-30899 disposition.
Either chan nel may be used for compliance with the technical specification when one of these Area Radiation Monitors is out of service. 2. Radiation monitors identified in Tech Specs and ODCM that alarm in the Control Room must have alarm capability in order to be declared OPER ABLE. If the alarm function does not 0 perate, the n the appropriate actions need to be taken in accordance with Tech Specs or ODCM. While the use of the RM-23P may be used on Unit 2 to com ply with the alternate method of monitoring, any reports would still be required until the Radiation Monitor is restored to Operable status. 3/4.3.3.8 Accident Monitoring Instrumentation
: 1. Containment Pressure Transm itter Isolation Valves If power is lost to SE-07-5E or SE-07-5F, Containment Pressure Transmitter Isolation Valves, these valves will fail closed. This results in associated pressure transmitter (PT-07-4A 1 or PT-07-4B1) being isolated, and will NOT reflect actual containment pressure.
Apply the appropriate req uirements of TIS 3.3.3.6, Accident Monitoring Instrumentation.
Also refer to Containm ent Isolation Valves in Section 3.6.3. If power is lost to SE-07-5A I B I C I D, Containment Pressure Transmitter Isolation Valves, the associated valve w ill fail open such that containm ent pressure input to RPS and ESFAS is assured. 2. Core Exit Thermocouples Technical Specification Table 3.3-11 lists the total number of channels as 4/core quadrant with a minimum number of channels of 2/core quadrant.
A. Total-4/core quadrant requires at least 2/core quadrant on A QSPDS and 2/core quadrant on B QSPDS to reach a total of 4/core quadrant.
This will ensure that upon a loss of one channel of QSPDS the minimum number of CETs would still be available.
B. Minimum -2/core quadrant per QSPDS channel (i.e., one operable QSPDS channel with 2 CETs per core quadrant operable).
Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Level Tier# Group # K/A# Importance Rating High Reactor Coolant Activity:
Process effluent radiation chart recorder Proposed Question:
SRO 85 Unit 1 has been at 100% power for 67 days: RO 076AA2.04 SRO 1 2 3.0 RR-2202process radiation monitor has indicated a significant increase in Vselected isotope and Gross activity has not significantly changed. 1) Based on the above indications, what is occurring in the Fuel/RCS?
: 2) What Technical Specification action is required ifj\selected Isotope exceeds the limit for longer than the allowable time? A, A. 1) Fuel Failure 2) Be in HOT STANDBY with Tave <500&deg;F within 6 hours. B. 1) Crud Burst 2) Be in HOT STANDBY with Tave <500&deg;F within 6 hours. C. 1) Fuel Failure 2) Be in HOT STANDBY with Tave <515&deg;F within 6 hours. D. 1) Crud Burst 2) Be in HOT STANDBY with Tave <515&deg;F within 6 hours. 169 ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating High Reactor Coolant Activity:
Process effluent radiation chart recorder Proposed Question:
SRO 85 RO SRO 2 076AA2.04 3.0 Unit 1 has been at 100% power for 67 days: xv'" RR-2202)Process radiation monitor has indicated a significant increase in ./selected isotope and Gross activity has not significantly changed. 1) Based on the above indications, what is occurring in the Fuel/RCS?
: 2) What Technical Specification action is required ifj\selected Isotope exceeds the limit for longer than the allowable time? ""y ;,' .. A. 1) Fuel Failure 2) Be in HOT STANDBY with Tave <500&deg;F within 6 hours. B. 1) Crud Burst 2) Be in HOT STANDBY with Tave <500&deg;F within 6 hours. C. 1) Fuel Failure 2) Be in HOT STANDBY with Tave <515&deg;F within 6 hours. D. 1) Crud Burst 2) Be in HOT STANDBY with Tave <515&deg;F within 6 hours. 169 
( Proposed Answer: A Explanation (Optional):
A. Correct: Iodine increase that remains above prior level during steady state B. Incorrect:
Must have gross activity increase during power change C. Incorrect:
Tave <515&deg;F is Technical Specification limit for critically.
D. Incorrect:
Both 1 and 2 Technical Reference(s):
U1 T.S. 3.4.8 (Attach if not previously provided)
-------------------------
1-0NP-01.06 Excessive RCS Activity Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
_0_7_0_2_8_61_-_08-",-0_9_0_27_2_3_-0_1___ (As available)
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) -----x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge X -------Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 5 --"---Comments:
170 ( Proposed Answer: A Explanation (Optional):
A. Correct: Iodine increase that remains above prior level during steady state B. Incorrect:
Must have gross activity increase during power change C. Incorrect:
Tave <515&deg;F is Technical Specification limit for critically.
D. Incorrect:
Both 1 and 2 Technical Reference(s):
U1 T.S. 3.4.8 (Attach if not previously provided)
--------------------------
1-0NP-01.06 Excessive RCS Activity Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
0_9_0_2_7_2_3-_0_1
___ (As available)
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) ---------x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge X -----Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 5 ---Comments:
170 
( SION NO.: RE TITLE: 3E PROCESS RADIATION MONITORS PROCEDURE NO.: 1-0NP-26.01 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 4.4 Letdown Monitor (continued)
INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS NOTE
* Iodine increase that remains significantly above prior levels during steady state operation is indicative of fuel failure.
* Iodine increase that remains significantly above prior levels during steady state operation is indicative of fuel failure.
* Iodine increase concurrent with a Gross Activity increase during a plant load change is indicative of a crud burst. 3. !f the affected monitor is functioning properly and indicates high activity, Then GO TO 1-0NP-01 .06, Excessive RCS Activity.
* Iodine increase concurrent with a Gross Activity increase during a plant load change is indicative of a crud burst.
END OF SECTION 4.4 ( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 3E 156(39 PROCEDURE NO.: PROCESS RADIATION MONITORS 1-0NP-26.01 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 4.4 Letdown Monitor (continued)
: 3. If
INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS NOTE
              !f the affected monitor is functioning properly and indicates high activity, 1-0NP-01.06, Then GO TO 1-0NP-01         .06, Excessive RCS Activity.
* Iodine increase that remains significantly above prior levels during steady state operation is indicative of fuel failure.
(
* Iodine increase concurrent with a Gross Activity increase during a plant load change is indicative of a crud burst. 3. If the affected monitor is functioning properly and indicates high activity, Then GO TO 1-0NP-01.06, Excessive RCS Activity.
END OF SECTION 4.4
END OF SECTION 4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM SPECIFIC ACTIVITY LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.4.8 The specific activity of the primary coolant shall be limited to: a. 1.0 IlCi/gram DOSE EQUIVALENT 1-131, and b. 100/E IlCi/gram.
 
APPLICABILITY:
REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM SPECIFIC ACTIVITY LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.4.8       The specific activity of the primary coolant shall be limited to:
MODES 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5. ACTION: MODES 1, 2 and 3*: a. With the specific activity of the primary coolant> 1.0 IlCi/gram DOSE EQUIVALENT 1-131 for more than 100 hours during one tinuous time interval or exceeding the limit line shown on Figure 3.4-1, be in HOT STANDBY with Tavg < 500&deg;F within 6 hours. b. With the specific activity of the primary coolant> 100/E IlCi/gram, be in HOT STANDBY with Tavg < 500&deg;F within 6 hours. MODES 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5: With the specific activity of the primal): coolant> 1.0 IlCi/gram DOSE EQUIVALENT 1-131 or> 100/EIlCi/gram, perform the sampling and analysis requirement of item 4 a) of Table 4.4-4 until the specific activity of the primary coolant is restored to within its limits. SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.4.8 The specific activity of the primary coolant shall be determined to be within the limits by performance of the sampling and analysis gram of Table 4.4-4.
a     ~ 1.0 IlCi/gram a.. .:=:       f.lCilgram DOSE EQUIVALENT 1-131, and
* With Tavg 500&deg;F. ST. LUCIE -UNIT 1 3/44-17 Amendment No. W, 101 ( REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM SPECIFIC ACTIVITY LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.4.8 The specific activity of the primary coolant shall be limited to: a . .:=: 1.0 f.lCilgram DOSE EQUIVALENT 1-131, and b. .:=: 100/E f.lCi/gram.
                    ~ 100/E IlCi/gram.
APPLICABILITY:
: b. .:=:           f.lCi/gram.
MODES 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5. ACTION: MODES 1,2 and 3*: a. With the specific activity of the primary coolant> 1.0 f.lCilgram DOSE EQUIVALENT 1-131 for more than 100 hours during one tinuous time interval or exceeding the limit line shown on Figure 3.4-1, be in HOT STANDBY with Tavg < 500&deg;F within 6 hours. b. With the specific activity of the primary coolant> 100/E f.lCi/gram, be in HOT STANDBY with T avg < 500&deg;F within 6 hours. MODES 1,2,3,4 and 5: With the specific activity of the primal)' coolant> 1.0 f.lCilgram DOSE EQUIVALENT 1-131 or> 100/Ef.lCilgram, perform the sampling and analysis requirement of item 4 a) of Table 4.4-4 until the specific activity of the primary coolant is restored to within its limits. SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.4.8 The specific activity of the primary coolant shall be determined to be within the limits by performance of the sampling and analysis gram of Table 4.4-4.
APPLICABILITY: MODES 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5.
* With T avg ::: 500&deg; F. ST. LUCIE -UNIT 1 3/44-17 Amendment No. W, 101
ACTION:
( 5. Loss of charging and letdown a. Inability to makeup to ReS to compensate for: 1 ) power change 2) Temp changes 3) Rep Bleedoff 6. Res crud burst a. Increased activity in ReS 1 ) Unit 1 letdown process monitor
MODES 1,  1,2 2 and 3*:
* Increase in gross gamma (channel 40) 2) Unit 2 RAD monitor isolated 7. Failed fuel element a. Increased activity in ReS 1 ) Unit 1 letdown process monitor
: a.     With the specific activity of the primary coolant> 1.0 IlCi/gram f.lCilgram DOSE EQUIVALENT 1-131 for more than 100 hours during one con-tinuous time interval or exceeding the limit line shown on Figure 3.4-1, be in HOT STANDBY with Tavg < 500&deg;F within 6 hours.
: b.     With the specific activity of the primary coolant> 100/E f.lCi/gram, be in HOT STANDBY with T IlCi/gram,                                avg < 500&deg;F within 6 hours.
Tavg MODES 1,     2, 3, 4 and 5:
1,2,3,4
(
With the specific activity of the primal):
primal)' coolant> 1.0 IlCi/gram f.lCilgram DOSE EQUIVALENT 1-131 or> 100/Ef.lCilgram, 100/EIlCi/gram, perform the sampling and analysis requirement of item 4 a) of Table 4.4-4 until the specific activity of the primary coolant is restored to within its limits.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.4.8       The specific activity of the primary coolant shall be determined to be within the limits by performance of the sampling and analysis pro-gram of Table 4.4-4.
* With T avg ~
Tavg    ::: 500&deg;F.
500&deg; F.
ST. LUCIE - UNIT 1                                   3/44-17                   Amendment No. W, 101
 
(       5. Loss of charging and letdown                     EO-9E
: a. Inability to makeup to ReS to compensate for:
1 ) power change
: 2) Temp changes
: 3) Rep Bleedoff                                                 -----.,
: 6. Res crud burst                                   EO-9F
: a. Increased activity in ReS
: 1) Unit 1 letdown process monitor                                   ?
* Increase in gross gamma (channel 40)
* Increase in gross gamma (channel 40)
* Increase in 1-131 (channel 41) 2) Unit 2 Rad monitor isolated 8. Inadvertent Start of a charging pump while the ReS is solid a. Res P increase b. Potential ReS integrity challenge V. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OVERVIEW A. Operability of Boron Injection Flowpaths
: 2) Unit 2 RAD monitor isolated
: 1. Shutdown must have one boron injection flowpath.
                                                                                      \)
: 2. Operating must have two complete boron injection flowpaths EO-9E EO-9F EO-9G EO-9H EO-11, TS 3.1.2.1 TS 3.1.2.2 0702205, Rev. 18, Page 37 of 48 FOR TRAINING USE ONLY 5. Loss of charging and letdown a. Inability to makeup to ReS to compensate for: 1 ) power change 2) Temp changes 3) Rep Bleedoff 6. Res crud burst a. Increased activity in ReS 1 ) Unit 1 letdown process monitor
EO-9G f
* Increase in gross gamma (channel 40) 2) Unit 2 RAD monitor isolated 7. Failed fuel element a. Increased activity in ReS 1 ) Unit 1 letdown process monitor
: 7. Failed fuel element
: a. Increased activity in ReS
: 1) Unit 1 letdown process monitor
* Increase in gross gamma (channel 40)
* Increase in gross gamma (channel 40)
* Increase in 1-131 (channel 41) 2) Unit 2 Rad monitor isolated 8. Inadvertent Start of a charging pump while the ReS is solid a. Res P increase b. Potential ReS integrity challenge V. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OVERVIEW A. Operability of Boron Injection Flowpaths  
* Increase in 1-131 (channel 41)
: 1. Shutdown must have one boron injection flowpath.  
: 2) Unit 2 Rad monitor isolated
: 2. Operating must have two complete boron ( injection flowpaths EO-9E -----., EO-9F ? \ EO-9G ) f EO-9H EO-11, TS 3.1.2.1 TS 3.1.2.2 0702205, Rev. 18, Page 37 of 48 FOR TRAINING USE ONLY Examination Outline Cross-reference:
: 8. Inadvertent Start of a charging pump while the   EO-9H ReS is solid
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating Reactor Coolant Pump: Ability to explain all system limits and precautions Proposed Question:
: a. Res P increase
SRO 86 RO 003G2.1.32 SRO 2 1 4.0 Unit 1 is in Mode 5 performing 1-NOP-01.05  
: b. Potential ReS integrity challenge V. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OVERVIEW A. Operability of Boron Injection Flowpaths           EO-11,
'FILLING AND VENTING THE RCS'. The RCS is solid and the crew is preparing to start the first RCP for venting after a short SNO. The following conditions exist:
: 1. Shutdown must have one boron injection           TS 3.1.2.1 flowpath.
: 2. Operating must have two complete boron           TS 3.1.2.2 injection flowpaths
(
0702205, Rev. 18, Page 37 of 48 FOR TRAINING USE ONLY
 
Examination Outline Cross-reference:                         Level             RO        SRO Tier#                       2 Group #                     1 KIA #             003G2.1.32 Importance Rating           4.0 Reactor Coolant Pump: Ability to explain all system limits and precautions Proposed Question:                   SRO 86 Unit 1 is in Mode 5 performing 1-NOP-01.05 'FILLING AND VENTING THE RCS'. The RCS is solid and the crew is preparing to start the first RCP for venting after a short SNO. The following conditions exist:
* RCS temperature is 140&deg;F.
* RCS temperature is 140&deg;F.
* RCS pressure is 310 psia.
* RCS pressure is 310 psia.
* Secondary side of the Steam Generator is 145&deg;F. 1) Which of the following states the acceptability of starting the RCP? 2) What are the Technical Specification bases for the criteria to start the RCP? A. 1) The RCP may NOT be started with the Steam Generator temperature above the RCS temperature.  
* Secondary side of the Steam Generator is 145&deg;F.
: 2) To prevent RCS overpressurization due to energy addition to the RCS. B. 1) The RCP may NOT be started with the Steam Generator temperature above the RCS temperature.  
: 1) Which of the following states the acceptability of starting the RCP?
: 2) What are the Technical Specification bases for the criteria to start the RCP?
(
A. 1) The RCP may NOT be started with the Steam Generator temperature above the RCS temperature.
: 2) To prevent RCS overpressurization due to energy addition to the RCS.
B. 1) The RCP may NOT be started with the Steam Generator temperature above the RCS temperature.
: 2) To prevent challenging the opening of the PORV's which are NOT designed to relieve a water solid condition.
: 2) To prevent challenging the opening of the PORV's which are NOT designed to relieve a water solid condition.
C. 1) The RCP MAY be started with the current RCS I Steam Generator T. 2) To prevent RCS overpressurization due to energy addition to the RCS. D. 1) The RCP MAY be started with the current RCS I Steam Generator T. 2) To prevent challenging the opening of the PORV's which are NOT designed to relieve a water solid condition.
C. 1) The RCP MAY be started with the current RCS I Steam Generator ~    f.. T.
171 ( ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
: 2) To prevent RCS overpressurization due to energy addition to the RCS.
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating Reactor Coolant Pump: Ability to explain all system limits and precautions Proposed Question:
D. 1) The RCP MAY be started with the current RCS I Steam Generator f..   ~ T.
SRO 86 RO 003G2.1.32 SRO 2 4.0 Unit 1 is in Mode 5 performing 1-NOP-01.05
'FILLING AND VENTING THE RCS'. The RCS is solid and the crew is preparing to start the first RCP for venting after a short SNO. The following conditions exist:
* RCS temperature is 140&deg;F.
* RCS pressure is 310 psia.
* Secondary side of the Steam Generator is 145&deg;F. 1) Which of the following states the acceptability of starting the RCP? 2) What are the Technical Specification bases for the criteria to start the RCP? A. 1) The RCP may NOT be started with the Steam Generator temperature above the RCS temperature.
: 2) To prevent RCS overpressurization due to energy addition to the RCS. B. 1) The RCP may NOT be started with the Steam Generator temperature above the RCS temperature.  
: 2) To prevent challenging the opening of the PORV's which are NOT designed to relieve a water solid condition.
: 2) To prevent challenging the opening of the PORV's which are NOT designed to relieve a water solid condition.
C. 1) The RCP MAY be started with the current RCS I Steam Generator f.. T. 2) To prevent RCS overpressurization due to energy addition to the RCS. D. 1) The RCP MAY be started with the current RCS I Steam Generator f.. T. 2) To prevent challenging the opening of the PORV's which are NOT designed to relieve a water solid condition.
(
171 Proposed Answer: C Explanation (Optional):
171
A. Incorrect:
 
RCS / SG L'lT is <30&deg;F which is within T.S. criteria of 30&deg;F. B. Incorrect:
Proposed Answer:           C Explanation (Optional):
PORV's are set for L TOP and are designed to relieve water solid conditions.
A. Incorrect: RCS / SG L'lT L'1T is <30&deg;F which is within T.S. criteria of 30&deg;F.
C. Correct: D. Incorrect:
B. Incorrect: PORV's are set for LTOP and are designed to relieve water solid conditions.
PORV's are set for L TOP and are designed to relieve water solid conditions.
C. Correct:
Technical Reference(s):
D. Incorrect: PORV's are set for LTOP and are designed to relieve water solid conditions.
U1 T.S. 3.4.14 (Attach if not previously provided)  
Technical Reference(s):     U1 T.S. 3.4.14                                       (Attach if not previously provided)
-------------------------
U1 T.S. 3/4.4 BASES 1-NOP-01.05 Filling and Venting The RCS Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
U1 T.S. 3/4.4 BASES 1-NOP-01.05 Filling and Venting The RCS Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:  
Learning Objective:       _0_9_0_2_7_2_3-~0_1,,-'0_9_0_2_7_2_3-_0_3___
,,-' 0-,-9_0_2_7_2-,---3--,-0-,-3___ (As avai lable) Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) ---------x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 ---55.43 2 ---Comments:
_0_9_0_2_7_2_3-_0_1-,-,0-,-9_0_2_7_2-,---3--,-0-,-3___ (As avai ava ilable)
x 172 ( Proposed Answer: C Explanation (Optional):
( Question Source:           Bank #
A. Incorrect:
Modified Bank #                                     (Note changes or attach parent)
RCS / SG L'1T is <30&deg;F which is within T.S. criteria of 30&deg;F. B. Incorrect:
New                            x Question History:           Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:   Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis                                   x 10 CFR Part 55 Content:     55.41         10 55.43         2 Comments:
PORV's are set for L TOP and are designed to relieve water solid conditions.
172
C. Correct: D. Incorrect:
 
PORV's are set for L TOP and are designed to relieve water solid conditions.
REVISION NO.:             PROCEDURE TITLE:                                         PAGE:
Technical Reference(s):
20A                        FILLING AND VENTING THE RCS
U1 T.S. 3.4.14 (Attach if not previously provided)
( PROCEDURE NO.:
-------------------------
8 of 118 1-NOP-01 1-NOP-01.05  .05                          ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 4.9    1112,13
U1 T.S. 3/4.4 BASES 1-NOP-01.05 Filling and Venting The RCS Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
          ~12.13    It is acceptable to fill the RCS from below the 33 foot elevation ((63 inches L1-1117-1) on LI-1117                                                        isollate~d to
Learning Objective:
                                -1) to above the 33 foot elevation with seal injection isolated an RCP (coupled or uncoupled), without pump seal degradation.
_0_9_0_2_7_2_3-_0_1-,-, 0_9_0_2_7_2_3-_0_3___ (As ava i lable) Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) -----x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 ---55.43 2 ---Comments:
4.10    117
x 172 
          ~7      Continued use of seal injection when filling above the level of Seal Cartridge is not required.
( 20A FILLING AND VENTING THE RCS 1-NOP-01 .05 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 1112,13 It is acceptable to fill the RCS from below the 33 foot elevation ( on LI-1117 -1) to above the 33 foot elevation with seal injection an RCP (coupled or uncoupled), without pump seal degradation.
4.11    When RCS temperature is greater than 200&deg;F, both charging header loop isolation valves should remain open when seal injection is aligned to the RCPs to minimize thermal stress on the RCP shafts.
117 Continued use of seal injection when filling above the level of Seal Cartridge is not required.
4.12    &sect;1
When RCS temperature is greater than 200&deg;F, both charging header loop isolation valves should remain open when seal injection is aligned to the RCPs to minimize thermal stress on the RCP shafts. &sect;1 When the RCS cold leg temperature is less than 304&deg;F, the Reactor Head is on the Reactor Vessel AND the RCS is NOT vented through a hole greater than 1.75 square inches, Then two PORVs shall be operable, in service and selected to LOW RANGE OPERATION . . 13 When the RCS is in Solid Pressure Control, Then close scrutiny should be given to any action that could result in the de-energization of any portion of the Class 1 E 125V DC System. This could cause both the isolation of the RCS while solid and the simultaneous failure of one PORV thereby challenging the L TOP single failure design criteria.
          &sect;1      When the RCS cold leg temperature is less than 304&deg;F, the Reactor Head is on the Reactor Vessel AND the RCS is NOT vented through a hole greater than 1.75 square inches, Then two PORVs shall be operable, in service and selected to LOW RANGE OPERATION.
14 &sect;11 An RCP shall NOT be started in an idle RCS loop unless the Steam Generator secondary temperature is less than 30 F above each of the RCS cold leg temperatures (T.S. 3.4.14). 15 113 Routine operation of the RCGVS has resulted in degradation of the solenoid actuated valves in the system. RCS venting from the Reactor Vessel and the Pressurizer shall be accomplished through manually operated valves and attached hoses. 16 Do NOT operate the Control Element Drive Mechanisms (CEDMs) unless RCS pressure is at least 100 psia above the pressure that the RCS was vented. !f CEDM operation is required less than 100 psia above the RCS venting pressure, Then VENT the CEDMs in accordance with Appendix A (8770-15818, Replacement Jack Type Control Element Drive Mechanism).
OPERATION .
17 Appendix D, RCGVS Vent Path Debris Removal! Flush, may be performed at any time as management directs and does not require all Related System Status items to be completed.
  .13 4.13   When the RCS is in Solid Pressure Control, Then close scrutiny should be given to any action that could result in the de-energization of any portion of the Class 1E 125V DC System. This could cause both the isolation of the RCS while solid and the simultaneous failure of one PORV thereby challenging the LTOP single failure design criteria.
18 When the RCS was not drained to the point where the S!G U-tubes were drained, RCP sweeps may be limited based on the observed air quantity during system vent and management concurrence.
(
19 This procedure may contain steps that could adversely affect reactivity.
4.14 14    &sect;11 An
ENSURE that proper consideration and appropriate briefings occur prior to performance of steps that could challenge reactivity. ( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 20A FILLING AND VENTING THE RCS 8 of 118 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-NOP-01.05 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 4.9 It is acceptable to fill the RCS from below the 33 foot elevation (63 inches on L1-1117-1) to above the 33 foot elevation with seal injection isolated to an RCP (coupled or uncoupled), without pump seal degradation.
          &sect;1           RCP shall NOT be started in an idle RCS loop unless the Steam Generator secondary temperature is less than 30 F above each of the RCS cold leg temperatures (T.S. 3.4.14).
4.10 Continued use of seal injection when filling above the level of Seal Cartridge is not required.
15 4.15    113
4.11 When RCS temperature is greater than 200&deg;F, both charging header loop isolation valves should remain open when seal injection is aligned to the RCPs to minimize thermal stress on the RCP shafts. 4.12 &sect;1 When the RCS cold leg temperature is less than 304&deg;F, the Reactor Head is on the Reactor Vessel AND the RCS is NOT vented through a hole greater than 1.75 square inches, Then two PORVs shall be operable, in service and selected to LOW RANGE OPERATION.
          ~3      Routine operation of the RCGVS has resulted in degradation of the solenoid actuated valves in the system. RCS venting from the Reactor Vessel and the Pressurizer shall be accomplished through manually operated valves and attached hoses.
4.13 When the RCS is in Solid Pressure Control, Then close scrutiny should be given to any action that could result in the de-energization of any portion of the Class 1 E 125V DC System. This could cause both the isolation of the RCS while solid and the simultaneous failure of one PORV thereby challenging the L TOP single failure design criteria.
16 4.16    Do NOT operate the Control Element Drive Mechanisms (CEDMs) unless RCS pressure is at least 100 psia above the pressure that the RCS was vented. !f        11 CEDM operation is required less than 100 psia above the RCS venting pressure, Then VENT the CEDMs in accordance with Appendix A (8770-15818, Replacement Jack Type Control Element Drive Mechanism).
4.14 &sect;1 An RCP shall NOT be started in an idle RCS loop unless the Steam Generator secondary temperature is less than 30 F above each of the RCS cold leg temperatures (T.S. 3.4.14). 4.15 Routine operation of the RCGVS has resulted in degradation of the solenoid actuated valves in the system. RCS venting from the Reactor Vessel and the Pressurizer shall be accomplished through manually operated valves and attached hoses. 4.16 Do NOT operate the Control Element Drive Mechanisms (CEDMs) unless RCS pressure is at least 100 psia above the pressure that the RCS was vented. 11 CEDM operation is required less than 100 psia above the RCS venting pressure, Then VENT the CEDMs in accordance with Appendix A (8770-15818, Replacement Jack Type Control Element Drive Mechanism).
4.17 17    Appendix D, RCGVS Vent Path Debris Removal/Flush, Removal! Flush, may be performed at any time as management directs and does not require all Related System Status items to be completed.
4.17 Appendix D, RCGVS Vent Path Debris Removal/Flush, may be performed at any time as management directs and does not require all Related System Status items to be completed.
18 4.18    When the RCS was not drained to the point where the S/G      S!G U-tubes were drained, RCP sweeps may be limited based on the observed air quantity during system vent and management concurrence.
4.18 When the RCS was not drained to the point where the S/G U-tubes were drained, RCP sweeps may be limited based on the observed air quantity during system vent and management concurrence.
4.19 19    This procedure may contain steps that could adversely affect reactivity. ENSURE that proper consideration and appropriate briefings occur prior to performance of steps that could challenge reactivity.
4.19 This procedure may contain steps that could adversely affect reactivity.
 
ENSURE that proper consideration and appropriate briefings occur prior to performance of steps that could challenge reactivity.
l!. VV o"V SECTION NO.:
SECTION NO.: TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM REVISION NO.: 3 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
3/4.4 TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 PAGE:
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.11 DELETED 3/4.4.12 PORV BLOCK VALVES 3/4.4.13 3/4.4.14 The opening of the Power Operating Relief Valves fulfills no safety related function.
alJ1/'p 5 280f29 REVISION NO.:                        REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 3                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 3/4.4          REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
The electronic controls of the PORVs must be maintained OPERABLE to ensure satisfaction of Specifications 3.4.12 and 3.4.13. Since it is impractical and undesirable to actually open the PORVs to demonstrate reclosing, it becomes necessary to verify operability of the PORV Block Valves to ensure the capability to isolate a malfunctioning PORV. POWER OPERATED RELIEF VALVES and REACTOR COOLANT PUMP -STARTING The low temperature overpressure protection system (L TOP) is designed to prevent RCS overpressurization above the 10 CFR 50 Appendix G operating limit curves (Figures 3.4-2a and 3.4-2b) at RCS temperatures at or below 304&deg;F during heatup and 281&deg;F during cooldown.
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.11        DELETED 3/4.4.12        PORV BLOCK VALVES The opening of the Power Operating Relief Valves fulfills no safety related function. The electronic controls of the PORVs must be maintained OPERABLE to ensure satisfaction of Specifications 3.4.12 and 3.4.13.
The L TOP system is based on the use of the pressurizer power-operated relief valves (PORVs) and the implementation of administrative and operational controls.
Since it is impractical and undesirable to actually open the PORVs to demonstrate reclosing, it becomes necessary to verify operability of the PORV Block Valves to ensure the capability to isolate a malfunctioning PORV.
The PORVs aligned to the RCS with the low pressure setpoints of 350 and 530 psia, restrictions on RCP starts, limitations on heatup and cooldown rates, and disabling of non-essential components provide assurance that Appendix G PIT limits will not be exceeded during normal operation or design basis overpressurization events due to mass or energy addition to the RCS. The LTOP system APPLICABILITY, ACTIONS, and SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS are consistent with the resolution of Generic Issue 94, "Additional Low-Temperature Overpressure Protection for Light-Water Reactors," pursuant to Generic Letter 90-06. ( SECTION NO.: TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS l!. VV o"V alJ1/'p 5 -PAGE: 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 280f29 REVISION NO.: 3 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
3/4.4.13        POWER OPERATED RELIEF VALVES and 3/4.4.14        REACTOR COOLANT PUMP - STARTING The low temperature overpressure protection system (LTOP) is designed to prevent RCS overpressurization above the 10 CFR 50 Appendix G
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.11 DELETED 3/4.4.12 PORV BLOCK VALVES 3/4.4.13 3/4.4.14 The opening of the Power Operating Relief Valves fulfills no safety related function.
(                operating limit curves (Figures 3.4-2a and 3.4-2b) at RCS temperatures at or below 304&deg;F during heatup and 281&deg;F during cooldown. The LTOP system is based on the use of the pressurizer power-operated relief valves (PORVs) and the implementation of administrative and operational controls.
The electronic controls of the PORVs must be maintained OPERABLE to ensure satisfaction of Specifications 3.4.12 and 3.4.13. Since it is impractical and undesirable to actually open the PORVs to demonstrate reclosing, it becomes necessary to verify operability of the PORV Block Valves to ensure the capability to isolate a malfunctioning PORV. POWER OPERATED RELIEF VALVES and REACTOR COOLANT PUMP -STARTING The low temperature overpressure protection system (L TOP) is designed to prevent RCS overpressurization above the 10 CFR 50 Appendix G operating limit curves (Figures 3.4-2a and 3.4-2b) at RCS temperatures at or below 304&deg;F during heatup and 281&deg;F during cooldown.
The PORVs aligned to the RCS with the low pressure setpoints of 350 and 530 psia, restrictions on RCP starts, limitations on heatup and cooldown rates, and disabling of non-essential components provide assurance that Appendix G PIT limits will not be exceeded during normal
The L TOP system is based on the use of the pressurizer power-operated relief valves (PORVs) and the implementation of administrative and operational controls.
              ; operation or design basis overpressurization events due to mass or energy addition to the RCS. The LTOP system APPLICABILITY, ACTIONS, and SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS are consistent with the resolution of Generic Issue 94, "Additional Low-Temperature
The PORVs aligned to the RCS with the low pressure setpoints of 350 and 530 psia, restrictions on RCP starts, limitations on heatup and cooldown rates, and disabling of non-essential components provide assurance that Appendix G PIT limits will not be exceeded during normal ; operation or design basis overpressurization events due to mass or energy addition to the RCS. The LTOP system APPLICABILITY, ACTIONS, and SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS are consistent with the resolution of Generic Issue 94, "Additional Low-Temperature
: Overpressure Protection for Light-Water Reactors," pursuant to Generic l  Letter 90-06.
: Overpressure Protection for Light-Water Reactors," pursuant to Generic l Letter 90-06.
 
REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM REACTOR COOLANT PUMP -STARTING LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 1 3.4.14 If the steam generator temperature exceeds the primary temperature by more than 30&deg;F, the first idle reactor coolant pump shall not be started. APPLICABILITY:
REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM REACTOR COOLANT PUMP - STARTING LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 1
MODES 4# and 5. ACTION: If a reactor coolant pump is started when the steam generator temperature exceeds primary temperature by more than 30&deg;F, evaluate the subsequent transient to determine compliance with Specification 3.4.9.1. SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.4.14 Prior to starting a reactor coolant pump, verify that the steam generator temperature does not exceed primary temperature by more than 30&deg;F. # Reactor Coolant System Cold Leg Temperature is less than 304&deg;F. ST. LUCIE -UNIT 1 3/44-60 Amendment No. 00, 8-1-, 104 ( REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM REACTOR COOLANT PUMP -STARTING LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 1 3.4.14 If the steam generator temperature exceeds the primary temperature by !" *. more than 30&deg;F, the first idle reactor coolant pump shall not be started. APPLICABILITY:
1 3.4.14      If the steam generator temperature exceeds the primary temperature by more than 30&deg;F, the first idle reactor coolant pump shall not be started.
MODES 4# and 5. ACTION: If a reactor coolant pump is started when the steam generator temperature exceeds primary temperature by more than 30&deg;F, evaluate the subsequent transient to determine compliance with Specification 3.4.9.1. SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.4.14 Prior to starting a reactor coolant pump, verify that the steam generator temperature does not exceed primary temperature by more than 30&deg;F. # Reactor Coolant System Cold Leg Temperature is less than 304&deg;F.
APPLICABILITY: MODES 4# and 5.
ST. LUCIE -UNIT 1 3/44-60 Amendment No. @G, &4-, 104 Examination Outline Cross-reference:
ACTION:
Pressurizer Pressure Control: Heater failures Proposed Question:
If a reactor coolant pump is started when the steam generator temperature exceeds primary temperature by more than 30&deg;F, evaluate the subsequent transient to determine compliance with Specification 3.4.9.1.
SRO 87 Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO 010A2.01 Unit 2 was operating at 100% power. Given the following events and conditions on 8/20 at 0200:
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.4.14      Prior to starting a reactor coolant pump, verify that the steam generator temperature does not exceed primary temperature by more than 30&deg;F.
(
        #    Reactor Coolant System Cold Leg Temperature is less than 304&deg;F.
ST. LUCIE - UNIT 1                                3/44-60                              @G, 8-1-,
Amendment No. 00, &4-, 104
 
Examination Outline Cross-reference:                Level                      RO            SRO Tier#
Tier #                                    2 Group #                                    1 KIA #                      010A2.01 Importance Rating                          3.6 Pressurizer Pressure Control: Heater failures Proposed Question:                   SRO 87 Unit 2 was operating at 100% power. Given the following events and conditions on 8/20 at 0200:
* DCS is temporarily out of service.
* DCS is temporarily out of service.
* Proportional heater bank Pi breaker failed. SRO 2 1 3.6
* Proportional heater bank Pi   P1 breaker failed.
* Surveillance 2-0SP-100.02 (Schedule of Periodic Tests, Checks and Calibrations Week 2) step 7.4 (Thursday) was conducted.
* Surveillance 2-0SP-100.02 (Schedule of Periodic Tests, Checks and Calibrations Week 2) step 7.4 (Thursday) was conducted.
* The following results were obtained for Pressurizer backup heaters: o 1 E bus voltage = 480 volts o B1 = 182 amps o B4 = 192 amps Given:
* The following results were obtained for Pressurizer backup heaters:
* Heater KW calculation:
o 1E bus voltage = 480 volts o B1 =    = 182 amps o B4 = 192 amps Given:
13 x amps x volts Ii 000
* Heater KW calculation: 13   .[3 x amps x volts Ii 000 11000
* The DCS and backup manual calculates heater KW from the 4.16KV side. Losses of approximately 5 KW will occur in Pressurizer heater step down transformers.
* The DCS and backup manual calculates heater KW from the 4.16KV side.
Which ONE of the following statements correctly describes the required maintenance actions to allow continued operation at 100%? A. Power operations may continue with NO restrictions.
Losses of approximately 5 KW will occur in Pressurizer heater step down
Schedule maintenance to repair the proportional heater breaker during the next scheduled maintenance period. B. Schedule maintenance to repair and have the proportional heater group made operable NO later than 8/23 at 0200. C. Schedule maintenance to repair and have the backup heater group B1 made operable NO later than 8/23 at 0200. D. Schedule maintenance to repair and have the backup heater group B1 made operable NO later than 8/20 at 0800. 173 ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
(                              transformers.
Pressurizer Pressure Control: Heater failures Proposed Question:
Which ONE of the following statements correctly describes the required maintenance actions to allow continued operation at 100%?
SRO 87 Level Tier # Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO 010A2.01 Unit 2 was operating at 100% power. Given the following events and conditions on 8/20 at 0200:
A.         Power operations may continue with NO restrictions. Schedule maintenance to repair the proportional heater breaker during the next scheduled maintenance period.
* DCS is temporarily out of service.
B.       Schedule maintenance to repair and have the proportional heater group made operable NO later than 8/23 at 0200.
* Proportional heater bank P1 breaker failed. SRO 2 3.6
C.       Schedule maintenance to repair and have the backup heater group B1 made operable NO later than 8/23 at 0200.
* Surveillance 2-0SP-100.02 (Schedule of Periodic Tests, Checks and Calibrations Week 2) step 7.4 (Thursday) was conducted.
D.       Schedule maintenance to repair and have the backup heater group B1 made operable NO later than 8/20 at 0800.
* The following results were obtained for Pressurizer backup heaters: o 1 E bus voltage = 480 volts o B1 = 182 amps o B4 = 192 amps Given:
173
* Heater KW calculation:
 
.[3 x amps x volts 11000
Proposed Answer:             C Explanation (Optional):
* The DCS and backup manual calculates heater KW from the 4.16KV side. Losses of approximately 5 KW will occur in Pressurizer heater step down transformers.
B1 =1.73*480*182/1 000=151.3KW<155KW - fails B1 =1.73*480*192/1 000=159.3KW>155KW - pass Total for bank B1 = 151.3 KW<155KKW = does not meet surveillance requirement T.S. 3.4.3 requires 2 B/U heater banks B1 and B4 >150KW heating capacity A. Incorrect: with B1 <155KW, the plant is in a 72 hour LCO per action a.
Which ONE of the following statements correctly describes the required maintenance actions to allow continued operation at 100%? A. Power operations may continue with NO restrictions.
B. Incorrect: Repairing the proportional heater bank does not restore pressurizer heater capacity per T.S. 3.4.3 C. Correct D. Incorrect: 72 hour to restore the heater banks.
Schedule maintenance to repair the proportional heater breaker during the next scheduled maintenance period. B. Schedule maintenance to repair and have the proportional heater group made operable NO later than 8/23 at 0200. C. Schedule maintenance to repair and have the backup heater group B1 made operable NO later than 8/23 at 0200. D. Schedule maintenance to repair and have the backup heater group B1 made operable NO later than 8/20 at 0800. 173 Proposed Answer: C Explanation (Optional):
Technical Reference(s):       2-0SP-100.02 2-0SP-1 00.02 Schedule of                   (Attach if not previously provided)
B1 =1.73*480*182/1 000=151.3KW<155KW  
Periodic Tests, Checks and Calibrations Week 2 T.S. 3.4.3 T.S.3.4.3 Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
-fails B1 =1.73*480*192/1 000=159.3KW>155KW  
(
-pass Total for bank B1 = 151.3 KW<155KKW  
Learning Objective:         _0_7_0_2_20_6_-_05--,,_0_7_0_22_0_6_-1_5_
= does not meet surveillance requirement T.S. 3.4.3 requires 2 B/U heater banks B1 and B4 >150KW heating capacity A. Incorrect:
_0_7_0_2_2_0_6-_0_5,--,0_7_0_2_2_0_6-_1_5 __
with B1 <155KW, the plant is in a 72 hour LCO per action a. B. Incorrect:
_ _ (As available) avai lable)
Repairing the proportional heater bank does not restore pressurizer heater capacity per T.S. 3.4.3 C. Correct D. Incorrect:
Question Source:             Bank#
72 hour to restore the heater banks. Technical Reference(s):
Bank #                           X (2004     See Comment NRC Exam)
2-0SP-100.02 Schedule of Periodic Tests, Checks and Calibrations Week 2 (Attach if not previously provided)
Modified Bank #                               (Note changes or attach parent)
T.S.3.4.3 Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:  
New Question History:             Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:     Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis                           x 10 CFR Part 55 Content:       55.41         5
------------------
                                            ---=---
Learning Objective:
55.43       -
_0_7_0_2_20_6_-_05--,,_0_7_0_22_0_6_-1_5
5 Comments:  
___ (As avai lable) Question Source: Bank# X (2004 See Comment NRC Exam) Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) ------Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 5 ---=---55.43 5 --'---x Comments:  


==References:==
==References:==
2004 NRC exam gave references, including Tech. Specs. to determine operability. Revised this question by including the two bullets under 'Given' and not handing out references.
(
174
REVISION NO.:          PROCEDURE TITLE:                                              PAGE:
34A              SCHEDULE OF PERIODIC TESTS, CHECKS
( PROCEDURE NO.:                          AND CALIBRATIONS WEEK 2 19 of 30 2-0SP-100.02                                  ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 7.4    Surveillances performed on Thursday (continued)                                      INITIAL
: 2.      ,-r4  Day shift surveillances are to be performed as follows:
NOTE
* 2A3 and 2B3 bus voltage should be at approximately 4.16 KV for performance of the following surveillance. Consideration should be given to adjusting switchyard voltage as necessary to obtain nominal bus voltage.
          * ,-r5  The pressurizer heater kW can be calculated and used as a second -
check verification of the DCS indicated pressurizer heater kW for the Tech Spec surveillance. The calculation is:
                  .J3 J3 x amps x volts .;--i-11000 000
          * ,-r7  The DCS and backup manual method calculates heater KW from the 4.16 KV side. Losses of approximately 5 KW will occur in pressurizer heater step down transformers.
A.    &sect;1    VERIFY Pressurizer Backup heaters 1 and 4 each have a nominal capacity of at least 150 kw.
: 1.      ,-r7      With only the backup heater bank 1 in service (de-energize "A" side proportional heater P-1) on the "A" side, VERIFY nominal capacity of at least 155 kw (150 kw tech spec + 5 kw xmfer losses) as indicated by DCS point W943A Presszer Heater Pwr A.
___ kw                switchyard voltage OR
                                ,-r5,7    With only the backup heater bank 1 in service on the "A" side, VERIFY VERI FY nominal capacity of at least 155 kW (150 KW tech spec + 5 KW xmfer losses) as indicated by AM 943 on plant auxiliary control board no. 2 VM 954 on RTGB201..
RTGB201 03 x --~~ amps x
                                  .[3                                  volts = _ _ _ __    watts AM 943            VM 954          ----
                                -    - - - watts .;--i- 1000 = -  ____
                                                                    - - - kW
REVISION NO.:        PROCEDURE TITLE:                                          PAGE:
34A              SCHEDULE OF PERIODIC TESTS, CHECKS 20 of 30 PROCEDURE NO.:                      AND CALIBRATIONS WEEK 2 2-0SP-100.02                            ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 7.4    Surveillances performed on Thursday (continued)                                INITIAL
: 2. A.    ((continued) continued)
: 2.      ,-r7
                            ~7    With only the backup heater bank 4 in service (de-energize "B" side proportional heater P-2) on the "B" side, VERIFY nominal capacity of at least 155 kw (150 kw tech spec + 5 kw xmfer losses) as indicated by DCS point W944B Presszer Heater Pwr B.
____ _ kw              switchyard voltage OR
                            ,-r5,7
                            ~5,7  With only the backup heater bank 4 in service on the "B" side, VERIFY nominal capacity of at least 155 kW (150 KW tech spec + 5 KW xmfer losses) as indicated by AM 944 on plant auxiliary control board no. 2 VM964 on RTGB 201.
201 .
                              .J3 x 13    AM 944 amps x VM 964 volts =
watts
____ watts .;-
                                                  -;- 1000 =-____
                                                              - - - - kW___
Tech. Spec.: 4.4.3.2 Record ID 929 Applicable Modes: 1, 2 and 3 B.    &sect;1    PERFORM 2C AFW Pump Monthly Operability per 2-0SP-09.01 C, 2C Auxiliary Feedwater Pump Code Run, Testing of the 2C Auxiliary Feedwater Pump for Operability.
Applicable Modes: 1,2 and 3 C. ALIGN the Fuel Pool Purification System to the Spent Fuel Pool, in accordance with OP 2-0350020, Fuel Pool Cooling and Purification System - Normal Operation.
SNPO Application Modes: All
REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 3/4.4.3      PRESSURIZER LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.4.3        The pressurizer shall be OPERABLE with a minimum water level of greater than or equal to 27% indicated level and a maximum water level of less than or equal to 68% indicated level and at least two groups of pressurizer heaters capable of being powered from 1E buses each having a nominal capacity of at least 150 kW.
APPLICABILITY: MODES 1.          1, 2 and 3.
ACTION:
: a. With one group of the above required pressurizer heaters inoperable.
inoperable, restore at least two groups to OPERABLE status within 72 hours or be in at least HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours and in HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours.
: b. With the pressurizer otherwise inoperable.
inoperable, be in at least HOT STANDBY with the reactor trip breakers open within 6 hours and in HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS
(
4.4.3.1      The pressurizer water volume shall be determined to be within its limits at least once per 12 hours.
4.4.3.2      The capacity of each of the above required groups of pressurizer heaters shall be verified to be at least 150 kW at least once per 92 days.
4.4.3.3      The emergency power supply for the pressurizer heaters shall be demonstrated OPERABLE at least once per 18 months by verifying that on an Engineered Safety Features Actuation test signal concurrent with a loss of offsite power:
: a. the pressurizer heaters are automatically shed from the emergency sources, and power sources.
: b. the pressurizer heaters can be reconnected to their respective buses manually from the control room after resetting of the ESFAS test signal.
ST. LUCIE - UNIT 2                                3/4 4-9                                g, 11 Amendment No. S,


2004 NRC exam gave references, including Tech. Specs. to determine operability.
Examination Outline Cross-reference:                      Level                          RO        SRO Tier#                                      2 Group #                                    1 KIA #                          012G2.4.31 Importance Rating                          4.1 Reactor Protection: Knowledge of annunciators alarms, indications or response procedures.
Revised this question by including the two bullets under 'Given' and not handing out references.
Proposed Question:                  SRO 88 Unit 2 is at 2% power and performing a Reactor startup when the following alarm illuminates:
174 ( ( Proposed Answer: C Explanation (Optional):
START - UP RATE HIGH CHANNEL TRIP L-25 Reactor power remains unchanged.
B1 =1.73*480*182/1 000=151.3KW<155KW
: 1) Which ONE of the following would have caused the annunciator to illuminate?
-fails B1 =1.73*480*192/1 000=159.3KW>155KW
: 2) As a result of the above condition, what are the required Technical Specification actions?
-pass Total for bank B1 = 151.3 KW<155KKW
A. 1) Wide Range Nuclear Instrument failing HIGH
= does not meet surveillance requirement T.S. 3.4.3 requires 2 B/U heater banks B1 and B4 >150KW heating capacity A. Incorrect:
: 2) Bypass or trip the failed channel within one hour. Start up may continue however the channel must be restored to operable status or placed in the tripped condition.
with B1 <155KW, the plant is in a 72 hour LCO per action a. B. Incorrect:
B. 1) Wide Range Nuclear Instrument failing HIGH
Repairing the proportional heater bank does not restore pressurizer heater capacity per T.S. 3.4.3 C. Correct D. Incorrect:
: 2) Bypass or trip the failed channel within one hour. Start up may continue with the channel in bypass however the channel shall be returned to operable status no later than during the next cold shutdown.
72 hour to restore the heater banks. Technical Reference(s):
C. 1) Linear Range Nuclear Instrument failing HIGH
2-0SP-1 00.02 Schedule of Periodic Tests, Checks and Calibrations Week 2 (Attach if not previously provided)
: 2) Bypass or trip the failed channel within one hour. Start up may continue however the channel must be restored to operable status or placed in the tripped condition.
T.S. 3.4.3 Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
D. 1) Linear Range Nuclear Instrument failing HIGH
Learning Objective:
: 2) Bypass or trip the failed channel within one hour. Start up may continue with the channel in bypass however the channel shall be returned to operable status no later than during the next cold shutdown.
_0_7_0_2_2_0_6-_0_5,--,0_7_0_2_2_0_6-_1_5
175
___ (As available)
Question Source: Bank # X (2004 See Comment NRC Exam) Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) ------Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 5 ---55.43 5 ---x Comments:


==References:==
( Proposed Answer:             B
\
Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect: Not required to be placed in the tripped condition. This is a Unit 1 Tech Spec.
B. Correct C. Incorrect: Both parts incorrect D. Incorrect: Part 1 incorrect, Part 2 correct.
Technical Reference(s):      T.S. table 3.3-1                            (Attach if not previously provided) 2-ARP-01-L25 Annunciator Response Procedure Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:        _0_7_0_2_4_03_-_03--,,_0_7_0_24_0_3_-1_4___
_0_7_0_2_4_0_3-_0_3-,---,0_7_0_2_4_0_3-_1_4___ (As available)
Question Source:            Bank #
Modified Bank #                            (Note changes or attach parent)
New                            x Question History:            Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:    Memory or Fundamental Knowledge                      X ____
_X:.....:.......
Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content:      55.41        -
10 55.43      --
5 --    -
Comments:
(
\.
176


2004 NRC exam gave references, including Tech. Specs. to determine operability.
REVISION:               PROCEDURE TITLE:                                                       PANEL:
Revised this question by including the two bullets under 'Given' and not handing out references.
OB                      ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE                                         L PROCEDURE NO:                                                                                   WINDOW:
174 
2-ARP-01-L25                                  ST. LUCIE UNIT 2                                     25 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL L START-UP RATE HIGH CHANNEL TRIP L-25 DEVICE:                                 LOCATION:                           SETPOINT:
( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 34A SCHEDULE OF PERIODIC TESTS, CHECKS AND CALIBRATIONS WEEK 2 19 of 30 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-0SP-100.02 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 7.4 Surveillances performed on Thursday (continued)
Module W9P2 K4 relay                   RPS Cabinets                       ::;
: 2. ,-r4 Day shift surveillances are to be performed as follows: NOTE
:s; 2.49 Decades per minute ALARM CONFIRMATION:
* 2A3 and 2B3 bus voltage should be at approximately 4.16 KV for performance of the following surveillance.
: 1. Any HI RATE Trip Unit trip light LIT
Consideration should be given to adjusting switchyard voltage as necessary to obtain nominal bus voltage. INITIAL * ,-r5 The pressurizer heater kW can be calculated and used as a second -check verification of the DCS indicated pressurizer heater kW for the Tech Spec surveillance.
: 2. JKI-001 A to JKI-001 D,0, Startup Rate, indicate greater than 2.49 DPM startup rate.
The calculation is: .J3 x amps x volts -i-1 000 * ,-r7 The DCS and backup manual method calculates heater KW from the 4.16 KV side. Losses of approximately 5 KW will occur in pressurizer heater step down transformers.
: 3. JI-001A to JI-001 D, 0, Wide Range % Power, indicate a rapidly RISING Reactor power.
A. &sect;1 VERIFY Pressurizer Backup heaters 1 and 4 each have a nominal capacity of at least 150 kw. 1. ,-r7 With only the backup heater bank 1 in service (de-energize "A" side proportional heater P-1) on the "A" side, VERIFY nominal capacity of at least 155 kw (150 kw tech spec + 5 kw xmfer losses) as indicated by DCS point W943A Presszer Heater Pwr A. ___ kw switchyard voltage OR ,-r5,7 With only the backup heater bank 1 in service on the "A" side, VERIFY nominal capacity of at least 155 kW (150 KW tech spec + 5 KW xmfer losses) as indicated by AM 943 on plant auxiliary control board no. 2 VM 954 on RTGB201 . watts .[3 x amps x volts = AM 943 VM 954 ----____ watts -i-1000 = ____ kW REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 34A SCHEDULE OF PERIODIC TESTS, CHECKS AND CALIBRATIONS WEEK 2 19 of 30 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-0SP-100.02 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 7.4 Surveillances performed on Thursday (continued)
: 4. RI-26-80A4/80A5 and RI-26-80B4/80B5, SourcelWide Source/wide range Excore Neutron Monitors indicate a rapidly RISING Reactor power.
: 2. ,-r4 Day shift surveillances are to be performed as follows: NOTE
: 5. RI-26-80A3 and RI-26-80B3, Rate Of Change Excore Neutron Monitors, indicate greater than 2.49 DPM startup rate.
* 2A3 and 2B3 bus voltage should be at approximately 4.16 KV for performance of the following surveillance.
OPERATOR ACTIONS:
Consideration should be given to adjusting switchyard voltage as necessary to obtain nominal bus voltage. INITIAL * ,-r5 The pressurizer heater kW can be calculated and used as a second -check verification of the DCS indicated pressurizer heater kW for the Tech Spec surveillance.
NOTE
The calculation is: J3 x amps x volts .;-1000 * ,-r7 The DCS and backup manual method calculates heater KW from the 4.16 KV side. Losses of approximately 5 KW will occur in pressurizer heater step down transformers.
* This Trip function is enabled between 10-44 % to 15% reactor power.
A. &sect;1 VERIFY Pressurizer Backup heaters 1 and 4 each have a nominal capacity of at least 150 kw. 1. ,-r7 With only the backup heater bank 1 in service (de-energize "A" side proportional heater P-1) on the "A" side, VERIFY nominal capacity of at least 155 kw (150 kw tech spec + 5 kw xmfer losses) as indicated by DCS point W943A Presszer Heater Pwr A. ___ kw switchyard voltage OR ,-r5,7 With only the backup heater bank 1 in service on the "A" side, VERI FY nominal capacity of at least 155 kW (150 KW tech spec + 5 KW xmfer losses) as indicated by AM 943 on plant auxiliary control board no. 2 VM 954 on RTGB201. watts 03 x amps x volts = ____ _ AM 943 VM 954 watts .;-1000 = kW --------
REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 34A SCHEDULE OF PERIODIC TESTS, CHECKS AND CALIBRATIONS WEEK 2 20 of 30 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-0SP-100.02 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 7.4 Surveillances performed on Thursday (continued)
: 2. A. (continued)
: 2. With only the backup heater bank 4 in service (de-energize "B" side proportional heater P-2) on the "B" side, VERIFY nominal capacity of at least 155 kw (150 kw tech spec + 5 kw xmfer losses) as indicated by DCS point W944B Presszer Heater Pwr B. ___ kw switchyard voltage OR With only the backup heater bank 4 in service on the "B" side, VERIFY nominal capacity of at least 155 kW (150 KW tech spec + 5 KW xmfer losses) as indicated by AM 944 on plant auxiliary control board no. 2 VM964 on RTGB 201 . .J3 x amps x volts = AM 944 VM 964 ----____ watts -;-1000 = ____ kW __ _ Tech. Spec.: 4.4.3.2 Record I D 929 Applicable Modes: 1, 2 and 3 B. &sect;1 PERFORM 2C AFW Pump Monthly Operability per 2-0SP-09.01 C, 2C Auxiliary Feedwater Pump Code Run, Testing of the 2C Auxiliary Feedwater Pump for Operability.
Applicable Modes: 1,2 and 3 C. ALIGN the Fuel Pool Purification System to the Spent Fuel Pool, in accordance with OP 2-0350020, Fuel Pool Cooling and Purification System -Normal Operation.
Application Modes: All INITIAL watts SNPO REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 34A SCHEDULE OF PERIODIC TESTS, CHECKS AND CALIBRATIONS WEEK 2 20 of 30 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-0SP-100.02 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 7.4 Surveillances performed on Thursday (continued)
: 2. A. ( continued)
: 2. ,-r7 With only the backup heater bank 4 in service (de-energize "B" side proportional heater P-2) on the "B" side, VERIFY nominal capacity of at least 155 kw (150 kw tech spec + 5 kw xmfer losses) as indicated by DCS point W944B Presszer Heater Pwr B. ___ kw switchyard voltage OR ,-r5,7 With only the backup heater bank 4 in service on the "B" side, VERIFY nominal capacity of at least 155 kW (150 KW tech spec + 5 KW xmfer losses) as indicated by AM 944 on plant auxiliary control board no. 2 VM964 on RTGB 201. 13 x amps x volts = AM 944 VM 964 ----watts .;-1000 = kW __ _ ---------Tech. Spec.: 4.4.3.2 Record I D 929 Applicable Modes: 1, 2 and 3 B. &sect;1 PERFORM 2C AFW Pump Monthly Operability per 2-0SP-09.01 C, 2C Auxiliary Feedwater Pump Code Run, Testing of the 2C Auxiliary Feedwater Pump for Operability.
Applicable Modes: 1,2 and 3 C. ALIGN the Fuel Pool Purification System to the Spent Fuel Pool, in accordance with OP 2-0350020, Fuel Pool Cooling and Purification System -Normal Operation.
Application Modes: All INITIAL watts SNPO REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 3/4.4.3 PRESSURIZER LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.4.3 The pressurizer shall be OPERABLE with a minimum water level of greater than or equal to 27% indicated level and a maximum water level of less than or equal to 68% indicated level and at least two groups of pressurizer heaters capable of being powered from 1 E buses each having a nominal capacity of at least 150 kW. APPLICABILITY:
MODES 1. 2 and 3. ACTION: a. With one group of the above required pressurizer heaters inoperable.
restore at least two groups to OPERABLE status within 72 hours or be in at least HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours and in HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours. b. With the pressurizer otherwise inoperable.
be in at least HOT STANDBY with the reactor trip breakers open within 6 hours and in HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours. SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.4.3.1 The pressurizer water volume shall be determined to be within its limits at least once per 12 hours. 4.4.3.2 The capacity of each of the above required groups of pressurizer heaters shall be verified to be at least 150 kW at least once per 92 days. 4.4.3.3 The emergency power supply for the pressurizer heaters shall be demonstrated OPERABLE at least once per 18 months by verifying that on an Engineered Safety Features Actuation test signal concurrent with a loss of offsite power: a. the pressurizer heaters are automatically shed from the emergency power sources. and b. the pressurizer heaters can be reconnected to their respective buses manually from the control room after resetting of the ESFAS test signal. ST. LUCIE -UNIT 2 3/4 4-9 Amendment No. S, 11 ( REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 3/4.4.3 PRESSURIZER LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.4.3 The pressurizer shall be OPERABLE with a minimum water level of greater than or equal to 27% indicated level and a maximum water level of less than or equal to 68% indicated level and at least two groups of pressurizer heaters capable of being powered from 1 E buses each having a nominal capacity of at least 150 kW. APPLICABILITY:
MODES 1, 2 and 3. ACTION: a. With one group of the above required pressurizer heaters inoperable, restore at least two groups to OPERABLE status within 72 hours or be in at least HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours and in HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours. b. With the pressurizer otherwise inoperable, be in at least HOT STANDBY with the reactor trip breakers open within 6 hours and in HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours. SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.4.3.1 The pressurizer water volume shall be determined to be within its limits at least once per 12 hours. 4.4.3.2 The capacity of each of the above required groups of pressurizer heaters shall be verified to be at least 150 kW at least once per 92 days. 4.4.3.3 The emergency power supply for the pressurizer heaters shall be demonstrated OPERABLE at least once per 18 months by verifying that on an Engineered Safety Features Actuation test signal concurrent with a loss of offsite power: a. the pressurizer heaters are automatically shed from the emergency power sources, and b. the pressurizer heaters can be reconnected to their respective buses manually from the control room after resetting of the ESFAS test signal. ST. LUCIE -UNIT 2 3/4 4-9 Amendment No. g, 11 Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating Reactor Protection:
Knowledge of annunciators alarms, indications or response procedures.
Proposed Question:
SRO 88 RO 012G2.4.31 SRO 2 1 4.1 Unit 2 is at 2% power and performing a Reactor startup when the following alarm illuminates:
START -UP RATE HIGH CHANNEL TRIP L-25 Reactor power remains unchanged.
: 1) Which ONE of the following would have caused the annunciator to illuminate?
: 2) As a result of the above condition, what are the required Technical Specification actions? A. 1) Wide Range Nuclear Instrument failing HIGH 2) Bypass or trip the failed channel within one hour. Start up may continue however the channel must be restored to operable status or placed in the tripped condition.
B. 1) Wide Range Nuclear Instrument failing HIGH 2) Bypass or trip the failed channel within one hour. Start up may continue with the channel in bypass however the channel shall be returned to operable status no later than during the next cold shutdown.
C. 1) Linear Range Nuclear Instrument failing HIGH 2) Bypass or trip the failed channel within one hour. Start up may continue however the channel must be restored to operable status or placed in the tripped condition.
D. 1) Linear Range Nuclear Instrument failing HIGH 2) Bypass or trip the failed channel within one hour. Start up may continue with the channel in bypass however the channel shall be returned to operable status no later than during the next cold shutdown.
175 Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating Reactor Protection:
Knowledge of annunciators alarms, indications or response procedures.
Proposed Question:
SRO 88 RO 012G2.4.31 SRO 2 4.1 Unit 2 is at 2% power and performing a Reactor startup when the following alarm illuminates:
START -UP RATE HIGH CHANNEL TRIP L-25 Reactor power remains unchanged.
: 1) Which ONE of the following would have caused the annunciator to illuminate?
: 2) As a result of the above condition, what are the required Technical Specification actions? A. 1) Wide Range Nuclear Instrument failing HIGH 2) Bypass or trip the failed channel within one hour. Start up may continue however the channel must be restored to operable status or placed in the tripped condition.
B. 1) Wide Range Nuclear Instrument failing HIGH 2) Bypass or trip the failed channel within one hour. Start up may continue with the channel in bypass however the channel shall be returned to operable status no later than during the next cold shutdown.
C. 1) Linear Range Nuclear Instrument failing HIGH 2) Bypass or trip the failed channel within one hour. Start up may continue however the channel must be restored to operable status or placed in the tripped condition.
D. 1) Linear Range Nuclear Instrument failing HIGH 2) Bypass or trip the failed channel within one hour. Start up may continue with the channel in bypass however the channel shall be returned to operable status no later than during the next cold shutdown.
175 Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect:
Not required to be placed in the tripped condition.
This is a Unit 1 Tech Spec. B. Correct C. Incorrect:
Both parts incorrect D. Incorrect:
Part 1 incorrect, Part 2 correct. Technical Reference(s):
T.S. table 3.3-1 (Attach if not previously provided)
-------------------------
2-ARP-01-L25 Annunciator Response Procedure Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
_0_7_0_2_4_03_-_03--,,_0_7_0_24_0_3_-1_4___ (As available)
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) -----x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge
_X:.....:....... __ __ Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 -----'--55.43 5 ---Comments:
176 ( \ ( \. Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect:
Not required to be placed in the tripped condition.
This is a Unit 1 Tech Spec. B. Correct C. Incorrect:
Both parts incorrect D. Incorrect:
Part 1 incorrect, Part 2 correct. Technical Reference(s):
T.S. table 3.3-1 (Attach if not previously provided) 2-ARP-01-L25 Annunciator Response Procedure Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
_0_7_0_2_4_0_3-_0_3-,---, 0_7_0_2_4_0_3-_1_4___ (As available) Question Source:
Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge X ----Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 --'---55.43 5 ---Comments:
176 REVISION:
OB PROCEDURE NO: 2-ARP-01-L25 PROCEDURE TITLE: ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 START-UP RATE HIGH CHANNEL TRIP 25 L-25 DEVICE: LOCATION:
SETPOINT:
Module W9P2 K4 relay RPS Cabinets :s; 2.49 Decades per minute ALARM CONFIRMATION:  
: 1. Any HI RATE Trip Unit trip light LIT 2. JKI-001 A to JKI-001 D, Startup Rate, indicate greater than 2.49 DPM startup rate. 3. JI-001A to JI-001 D, Wide Range % Power, indicate a rapidly RISING Reactor power. 4. RI-26-80A4/80A5 and RI-26-80B4/80B5, SourcelWide range Excore Neutron Monitors indicate a rapidly RISING Reactor power. 5. RI-26-80A3 and RI-26-80B3, Rate Of Change Excore Neutron Monitors, indicate greater than 2.49 DPM startup rate. OPERATOR ACTIONS: NOTE
* This Trip function is enabled between 10-4% to 15% reactor power.
* The Wide Range Nuclear Instruments enable this trip function,
* The Wide Range Nuclear Instruments enable this trip function,
* The Linear Range Instruments disable this trip function 1. !f 2 out of 4 Safety channels on Startup Rate are greater than 2.49 DPM, Then PERFORM the following:
* The Linear Range Instruments disable this trip function
A. TRIP the Reactor B. TRIP the Turbine C. GO TO 2-EOP-01, Standard Post Trip Actions. 2. MONITOR for disagreement between the four Wide Range Nuclear Instruments.  
: 1. 11 2 out of 4 Safety channels on
: 3. !f only one channel is tripped or failed, Then IMPLEMENT 2-0NP-99.01, Loss of Tech Spec Instrumentation.
  !f                                Startup Rate are greater than 2.49 DPM, Then PERFORM the following:
CAUSES: The Reactor tripped on 2/4 logic from High Rate of Power Change or a Wide Range Nuclear Instrument Failed.  
A. TRIP the Reactor B. TRIP the Turbine C. GO TO 2-EOP-01, Standard Post Trip Actions.                                                               --
:::0
                                                                                                                ;;0 o
OJ
: 2. MONITOR for disagreement between the four Wide Range Nuclear Instruments.
11 only one channel is tripped or failed, Then IMPLEMENT 2-0NP-99.01, Loss of Tech Spec
: 3. !f Instrumentation.                                                                                         --
:::0 o
CAUSES:     The Reactor tripped on 2/4 logic from High Rate of Power Change or a Wide Range Nuclear Instrument Failed.


==REFERENCES:==
==REFERENCES:==
: 1. CWD 2998-B-327 SH 406,50,51  
: 1. CWD 2998-B-327 SH 406, CWO                    406,50,51 50, 51
: 2. VTM 2998-14944  
: 2. VTM 2998-14944
: 3. Tech Specs. --;;0 o OJ REVISION:
: 3. Tech Specs.
PROCEDURE TITLE: PANEL: OB ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE L PROCEDURE NO: WINDOW: 2-ARP-01-L25 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL L START-UP RATE HIGH CHANNEL TRIP 25 L-25 DEVICE: LOCATION:
 
SETPOINT:
~,-~
Module W9P2 K4 relay RPS Cabinets ::; 2.49 Decades per minute ALARM CONFIRMATION:
TABLE 3.3-1 REACTOR PROTECTIVE INSTRUMENTATION MINIMUM TOTAL NO.      CHANNELS    CHANNELS      APPLICABLE FUNCTIONAL UNIT            OF CHANNELS      TO TRIP  OPERABLE          MODES  ACTION
: 1. Any HI RATE Trip Unit trip light LIT 2. JKI-001 A to JKI-001 0, Startup Rate, indicate greater than 2.49 DPM startup rate. 3. JI-001A to JI-001 0, Wide Range % Power, indicate a rapidly RISING Reactor power. 4. RI-26-80A4/80A5 and RI-26-80B4/80B5, Source/wide range Excore Neutron Monitors indicate a rapidly RISING Reactor power. 5. RI-26-80A3 and RI-26-80B3, Rate Of Change Excore Neutron Monitors, indicate greater than 2.49 DPM startup rate. OPERATOR ACTIONS: NOTE
: 1. Manual Reactor Trip                          4              2          4              1,2    1 4              2          4          3*,4*,5*    5
* This Trip function is enabled between 10-4% to 15% reactor power.
: 2. Variable Power Level - High                  4            2(a)(d)      3              1,2    2#
* The Wide Range Nuclear Instruments enable this trip function,
: 3. Pressurizer Pressure - High                  4              2          3              1,2    2#
* The Linear Range Instruments disable this trip function 1. 11 2 out of 4 Safety channels on Startup Rate are greater than 2.49 DPM, Then PERFORM the following:
: 4. Thermal Margin/Low Pressure                  4            2(a)(d)      3              1,2    2#
A. TRIP the Reactor B. TRIP the Turbine C. GO TO 2-EOP-01, Standard Post Trip Actions. 2. MONITOR for disagreement between the four Wide Range Nuclear Instruments.  
: 5. Containment Pressure - High                  4              2          3              1,2   2#
: 3. 11 only one channel is tripped or failed, Then IMPLEMENT 2-0NP-99.01, Loss of Tech Spec Instrumentation.
: 6. Steam Generator Pressure - Low              4/SG          2/SG(b)      3/SG              1,2    2#
CAUSES: The Reactor tripped on 2/4 logic from High Rate of Power Change or a Wide Range Nuclear Instrument Failed.  
: 7. Steam Generator Pressure                      4            2(a)(d)      3              1,2    2#
Difference - High
: 8. Steam Generator Level - Low                4/SG            2/SG      3/SG              1,2    2#
: 9. Local Power Density - High                    4            2(c)(d)      3                1    2#
: 10. Loss of Component Cooling Water                                2                          1,2    2#
4                          3 to Reactor Coolant Pumps
: 11. Reactor Protection System Logic                4              2          3              1,2    2#
3*,4*,5*    5
: 12. Reactor Trip Breakers                          4              2(f)        4              1,2   4 3*,4*,5*    5
: 13. Wide Range Logarithmic Neutron Flux Monitor
: a. Startup and Operating -
Rate of Change of Power-Power -                4            2(e)(g)      3              1,2    2#
High
: b. Shutdown                                  4               0          2            3,4,5    3
: 14. Reactor Coolant Flow - Low                  4/SG        2/SG(a)(d)    3/SG              1,2    2#
: 15. Loss of Load (Turbine                                        2(c)                          1    2#
4                          3 Hydraulic Fluid Pressure - Low)
                                                                                                                ~
ST. LUCIE - UNIT 2                                  3/4 3-2                 Amendment No. 60
                                                                                                            ':t.  ....<..
                                                                                                            ':l:""<.
                                                                                                              -cr
                                                                                                              -c;r y~~
T~~~ ~"
                                                                                                              ~
                                                                                                                        .,...~
                                                                                                                \"
 
TABLE 3.3-1 (Continued)
(
ACTION STATEMENTS ACTION 2 -        a. With the number of channels OPERABLE one less than the Total Number of Channels, STARTUP and/or POWER OPERATION may continue provided the inoperable channel is placed in the bypassed or tripped condition within 1 hour. The channel shall be returned to OPERABLE status no later than during the next COLD SHUTDOWN.
: b. With the number of channels OPERABLE one less than the Minimum Channels OPERABLE, STARTUP and/or POWER OPERATION may continue provided the following conditions are satisfied:
: 1. Verify that one of the inoperable channels has been bypassed and place the other inoperable channel in the tripped condition within 1 hour.
: 2. All functional units affected by the bypassed/tripped channel shall also be placed in the bypassed/tripped condition.
With a channel process measurement circuit that affects multiple functional units inoperable or in test, bypass or trip all associated functional units as listed below:
(
Process Measurement Circuit                            Functional Unit Bypassed
: 1. Safety Channel - Nuclear Instrumentation Wide Range                                     Rate of Change of Power - High (RPS)
Linear Range                                  Variable Power Level - High (RPS)
Local Power Density - High (RPS)
Thermal Margin/Low Pressure (RPS)
: 2. Pressurizer Pressure -                          Pressurizer Pressure - High (RPS)
Thermal Margin/Low Pressure (RPS)
Pressurizer Pressure - Low (ESF)
: 3. Containment Pressure -                          Containment Pressure - High (RPS)
Containment Pressure - High (ESF)
: 4. Steam Generator Pressure -                      Steam Generator Pressure - Low (RPS)
Thermal Margin/Low Pressure (RPS)
AFAS-1 and AFAS-2 (AFAS)
Steam Generator Pressure - Low (ESF)
: 5. Steam Generator Level -                        Steam Generator Level - Low (RPS)
If SG-2A, then AFAS-1 (AFAS)
If SG-2B, then AFAS-2 (AFAS)
ST. LUCIE - UNIT 2                                   3/4 3-4 3/43-4                              4S,~,
Amendment No. +8, +-d, 149


==REFERENCES:==
or--
: 1. CWO 2998-B-327 SH 406, 50, 51 2. VTM 2998-14944
~~    )
: 3. Tech Specs. --:::0 o OJ --:::0 o >> 
o~
J~
TABLE 3.3-1 {Continued}
REACTOR PROTECTIVE INSTRUMENTATION MINIMUM TOTAL NO.      CHANNELS    CHANNELS      APPLICABLE FUNCTIONAL UNIT                      OF CHANNELS        TO TRIP    OPERABLE        MODES      ACTION
            ,X
        ,11. Wide Range Logarithmic Neutron Flux Monitor Monitor
: a. Startup and Operating --     4              2(d)        3            1,2 and
* 2#
Rate of Change of Power -
High
: b. Shutdown                      4              0            2            3,4,5          3
: 12. Reactor Protection System        4              2            4            1,2*          4 Logic
: 13. Reactor Trip Breakers            4              2            4            1,2*
1, 2*          4 ST. LUCIE - UNIT 1                                3/4 3-3                Amendment No. ~,
4-e, 27


TABLE 3.3-1 REACTOR PROTECTIVE INSTRUMENTATION MINIMUM TOTAL NO. CHANNELS CHANNELS APPLICABLE FUNCTIONAL UNIT OF CHANNELS TO TRIP OPERABLE MODES ACTION 1. Manual Reactor Trip 4 2 4 1,2 1 4 2 4 3*,4*,5* 5 2. Variable Power Level -High 4 2(a)(d) 3 1,2 2# 3. Pressurizer Pressure -High 4 2 3 1,2 2# 4. Thermal Margin/Low Pressure 4 2(a)(d) 3 1,2 2# 5. Containment Pressure -High 4 2 3 1,2 2# 6. Steam Generator Pressure -Low 4/SG 2/SG(b) 3/SG 1,2 2# 7. Steam Generator Pressure 4 2(a)(d) 3 1,2 2# Difference
TABLE 3.3-1 (Continued)
-High 8. Steam Generator Level -Low 4/SG 2/SG 3/SG 1,2 2# 9. Local Power Density -High 4 2(c)(d) 3 1 2# 10. Loss of Component Cooling Water 4 2 3 1,2 2# to Reactor Coolant Pumps 11. Reactor Protection System Logic 4 2 3 1,2 2# 3*,4*,5* 5 12. Reactor Trip Breakers 4 2(f) 4 1,2 4 3*,4*,5* 5 13. Wide Range Logarithmic Neutron Flux Monitor a. Startup and Operating
-Rate of Change of Power -4 2(e)(g) 3 1,2 2# High b. Shutdown 4 0 2 3,4,5 3 14. Reactor Coolant Flow -Low 4/SG 2/SG(a)(d) 3/SG 1,2 2# 15. Loss of Load (Turbine 4 2(c) 3 1 2# Hydraulic Fluid Pressure -Low) -;:::. ST. LUCIE -UNIT 2 3/4 3-2 Amendment No. 60 ':l:""<. -cr \" TABLE 3.3-1 REACTOR PROTECTIVE INSTRUMENTATION MINIMUM TOTAL NO. CHANNELS CHANNELS APPLICABLE FUNCTIONAL UNIT OF CHANNELS TO TRIP OPERABLE MODES ACTION 1. Manual Reactor Trip 4 2 4 1,2 1 4 2 4 3*,4*,5* 5 2. Variable Power Level -High 4 2(a)(d) 3 1,2 2# 3. Pressurizer Pressure -High 4 2 3 1,2 2# 4. Thermal Margin/Low Pressure 4 2(a)(d) 3 1,2 2# 5. Containment Pressure -High 4 2 3 1,2 2# 6. Steam Generator Pressure -Low 4/SG 2/SG(b) 3/SG 1,2 2# 7. Steam Generator Pressure 4 2(a)(d) 3 1,2 2# Difference
-High 8. Steam Generator Level -Low 4/SG 2/SG 3/SG 1,2 2# 9. Local Power Density -High 4 2(c)(d) 3 1 2# 10. Loss of Component Cooling Water 4 2 3 1,2 2# to Reactor Coolant Pumps 11. Reactor Protection System Logic 4 2 3 1,2 2# 3*,4*,5* 5 12. Reactor Trip Breakers 4 2(f) 4 1,2 4 3*,4*,5* 5 13. Wide Range Logarithmic Neutron Flux Monitor a. Startup and Operating
-Rate of Change of Power-4 2(e)(g) 3 1,2 2# High b. Shutdown 4 0 2 3,4,5 3 14. Reactor Coolant Flow -Low 4/SG 2/SG(a)(d) 3/SG 1,2 2# 15. Loss of Load (Turbine 4 2(c) 3 2# Hydraulic Fluid Pressure -Low) ST. LUCIE -UNIT 2 3/4 3-2 Amendment No. 60 ':t. .... <.. -c;r '. " 
( TABLE 3.3-1 (Continued)
ACTION STATEMENTS ACTION 2 -a. With the number of channels OPERABLE one less than the Total Number of Channels, STARTUP and/or POWER OPERATION may continue provided the inoperable channel is placed in the bypassed or tripped condition within 1 hour. The channel shall be returned to OPERABLE status no later than during the next COLD SHUTDOWN.
: b. With the number of channels OPERABLE one less than the Minimum Channels OPERABLE, STARTUP and/or POWER OPERATION may continue provided the following conditions are satisfied:
: 1. Verify that one of the inoperable channels has been bypassed and place the other inoperable channel in the tripped condition within 1 hour. 2. All functional units affected by the bypassed/tripped channel shall also be placed in the bypassed/tripped condition.
With a channel process measurement circuit that affects multiple functional units inoperable or in test, bypass or trip all associated functional units as listed below: Process Measurement Circuit 1. Safety Channel -Nuclear Instrumentation Wide Range Linear Range 2. Pressurizer Pressure -3. Containment Pressure -4. Steam Generator Pressure -5. Steam Generator Level -ST. LUCIE -UNIT 2 Functional Unit Bypassed Rate of Change of Power -High (RPS) Variable Power Level -High (RPS) Local Power Density -High (RPS) Thermal Margin/Low Pressure (RPS) Pressurizer Pressure -High (RPS) Thermal Margin/Low Pressure (RPS) Pressurizer Pressure -Low (ESF) Containment Pressure -High (RPS) Containment Pressure -High (ESF) Steam Generator Pressure -Low (RPS) Thermal Margin/Low Pressure (RPS) AFAS-1 and AFAS-2 (AFAS) Steam Generator Pressure -Low (ESF) Steam Generator Level -Low (RPS) If SG-2A, then AFAS-1 (AFAS) If SG-2B, then AFAS-2 (AFAS) 3/4 3-4 Amendment No.
149 ( TABLE 3.3-1 (Continued)
ACTION STATEMENTS ACTION 2 -a. With the number of channels OPERABLE one less than the Total Number of Channels, STARTUP and/or POWER OPERATION may continue provided the inoperable channel is placed in the bypassed or tripped condition within 1 hour. The channel shall be returned to OPERABLE status no later than during the next COLD SHUTDOWN.
: b. With the number of channels OPERABLE one less than the Minimum Channels OPERABLE, STARTUP and/or POWER OPERATION may continue provided the following conditions are satisfied:
: 1. Verify that one of the inoperable channels has been bypassed and place the other inoperable channel in the tripped condition within 1 hour. 2. All functional units affected by the bypassed/tripped channel shall also be placed in the bypassed/tripped condition.
With a channel process measurement circuit that affects multiple functional units inoperable or in test, bypass or trip all associated functional units as listed below: Process Measurement Circuit 1. Safety Channel -Nuclear Instrumentation Wide Range Linear Range 2. Pressurizer Pressure -3. Containment Pressure -4. Steam Generator Pressure -5. Steam Generator Level -ST. LUCIE -UNIT 2 Functional Unit Bypassed Rate of Change of Power -High (RPS) Variable Power Level -High (RPS) Local Power Density -High (RPS) Thermal Margin/Low Pressure (RPS) Pressurizer Pressure -High (RPS) Thermal Margin/Low Pressure (RPS) Pressurizer Pressure -Low (ESF) Containment Pressure -High (RPS) Containment Pressure -High (ESF) Steam Generator Pressure -Low (RPS) Thermal Margin/Low Pressure (RPS) AFAS-1 and AFAS-2 (AFAS) Steam Generator Pressure -Low (ESF) Steam Generator Level -Low (RPS) If SG-2A, then AFAS-1 (AFAS) If SG-2B, then AFAS-2 (AFAS) 3/43-4 Amendment No. +8, +-d, 149 or--) FUNCTIONAL UNIT , Wide Range Logarithmic Neutron ,X Monitor Startup and Operating
--Rate of Change of Power -High b. Shutdown 12. Reactor Protection System Logic 13. Reactor Trip Breakers ST. LUCIE -UNIT 1 TABLE 3.3-1 {Continued}
REACTOR PROTECTIVE INSTRUMENTATION MINIMUM TOTAL NO. CHANNELS CHANNELS APPLICABLE OF CHANNELS TO TRIP OPERABLE MODES ACTION 4 2(d) 3 1,2 and
* 2# 4 0 2 3,4,5 3 4 2 4 1,2* 4 4 2 4 1,2* 4 3/4 3-3 Amendment No. 27 TABLE 3.3-1 {Continued}
REACTOR PROTECTIVE INSTRUMENTATION MINIMUM TOTAL NO. CHANNELS CHANNELS APPLICABLE FUNCTIONAL UNIT OF CHANNELS TO TRIP OPERABLE MODES ACTION 11. Wide Range Logarithmic Neutron Flux Monitor a. Startup and Operating
--4 2(d) 3 1,2 and
* 2# Rate of Change of Power -High b. Shutdown 4 0 2 3,4,5 3 12. Reactor Protection System 4 2 4 1,2* 4 Logic 13. Reactor Trip Breakers 4 2 4 1, 2* 4 ST. LUCIE -UNIT 1 3/4 3-3 Amendment No. 4-e, 27 TABLE 3.3-1 (Continued)
TABLE NOTATION
TABLE NOTATION
* With the protective system trip breakers in the closed position and the CEA drive system capable of CEA withdrawal.  
* With the protective system trip breakers in the closed position and the CEA drive system capable of CEA withdrawal.
# The provisions of Specification 3.0.4 are not applicable. (a) Trip may be bypassed below 1% of RATED THERMAL POWER; bypass shall be automatically removed when Wide Range Logarithmic Neutron Flux power is 1 % of RATED THERMAL POWER. (b) Trip may be manually bypassed below 685 psig; bypass shall be automatically removed at or above 685 psig. (c) Trip may be bypassed below 15% of RATED THERMAL POWER; bypass shall be automatically removed when Power Range Neutron Flux power is 15% of RATED THERMAL POWER. (d) Trip may be bypassed below 10-4% and above 15% of RATED THERMAL POWER; bypass shall be automatically removed when Wide Range Logarithmic Neutron Flux power is 10-4% and Power Range Neutron Flux power 15% of RATED THERMAL POWER. (e) Deleted. (f) There shall be at least two decades of overlap between the Wide Range Logarithmic Neutron Flux Monitoring Channels and the Power Range Neutron Flux Monitoring Channels.
  # The provisions of Specification 3.0.4 are not applicable.
ACTION STATEMENTS ACTION 1 -With the number of channels OPERABLE one less than required by the Minimum Channels OPERABLE requirement, restore the inoperable channel to OPERABLE status within 48 hours or be in HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours and/or open the protective system trip breakers.
(a)   Trip may be bypassed below 1% of RATED THERMAL POWER; bypass shall be automatically removed when Wide Range Logarithmic Neutron Flux power is ~ 1% of RATED THERMAL POWER.
ACTION 2 With the number of OPERABLE channels one less than the Total Number of Channels, STARTUP and/or POWER OPERATION may proceed provided the following conditions are satisfied:  
(b)   Trip may be manually bypassed below 685 psig; bypass shall be automatically removed at or above 685 psig.
(c)   Trip may be bypassed below 15% of RATED THERMAL POWER; bypass shall be automatically removed when Power Range Neutron Flux power is ~ 15% of RATED THERMAL POWER.
4 (d)   Trip may be bypassed below 10-4 % and above 15% of RATED THERMAL POWER; bypass shall be automatically removed when Wide Range Logarithmic Neutron Flux power is ~ 10-4 %
4 power ~ 15% of RATED THERMAL POWER.
and Power Range Neutron Flux power.:s.
(e)   Deleted.
(
(f)   There shall be at least two decades of overlap between the Wide Range Logarithmic Neutron Flux Monitoring Channels and the Power Range Neutron Flux Monitoring Channels.
ACTION STATEMENTS ACTION 1 -       With the number of channels OPERABLE one less than required by the Minimum Channels OPERABLE requirement, restore the inoperable channel to OPERABLE status within 48 hours or be in HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours and/or open the protective system trip breakers.
ACTION 2         With the number of OPERABLE channels one less than the Total Number of Channels, STARTUP and/or POWER OPERATION may proceed provided the following conditions are satisfied:
: a. The inoperable channel is placed in either the bypassed or tripped condition within 1 hour. For the purposes of testing and maintenance, the inoperable channel may be bypassed for up to 48 hours from time of initial loss of OPERABILITY; however, the inoperable channel shall then be either restored to OPERABLE status or placed in the tripped condition.
: a. The inoperable channel is placed in either the bypassed or tripped condition within 1 hour. For the purposes of testing and maintenance, the inoperable channel may be bypassed for up to 48 hours from time of initial loss of OPERABILITY; however, the inoperable channel shall then be either restored to OPERABLE status or placed in the tripped condition.
ST. LUCIE -UNIT 1 3/4 3-4 Amendment No. 4a, 'B-, 4&sect;, 4@,159 ( ( TABLE 3.3-1 (Continued)
(
TABLE NOTATION
ST. LUCIE - UNIT 1                               3/4 3-4               Amendment No. +e, 4a, 'B,
* With the protective system trip breakers in the closed position and the CEA drive system capable of CEA withdrawal.
                                                                                                  'B-, 4&sect;,
# The provisions of Specification 3.0.4 are not applicable. (a) Trip may be bypassed below 1% of RATED THERMAL POWER; bypass shall be automatically removed when Wide Range Logarithmic Neutron Flux power is 1 % of RATED THERMAL POWER. (b) Trip may be manually bypassed below 685 psig; bypass shall be automatically removed at or above 685 psig. (c) Trip may be bypassed below 15% of RATED THERMAL POWER; bypass shall be automatically removed when Power Range Neutron Flux power is 15% of RATED THERMAL POWER. (d) Trip may be bypassed below 10-4% and above 15% of RATED THERMAL POWER; bypass shall be automatically removed when Wide Range Logarithmic Neutron Flux power is 10-4% and Power Range Neutron Flux power.:s.
46, 4@,159
15% of RATED THERMAL POWER. (e) Deleted. (f) There shall be at least two decades of overlap between the Wide Range Logarithmic Neutron Flux Monitoring Channels and the Power Range Neutron Flux Monitoring Channels.
                                                                              +00,159
ACTION STATEMENTS ACTION 1 -With the number of channels OPERABLE one less than required by the Minimum Channels OPERABLE requirement, restore the inoperable channel to OPERABLE status within 48 hours or be in HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours and/or open the protective system trip breakers.
 
ACTION 2 With the number of OPERABLE channels one less than the Total Number of Channels, STARTUP and/or POWER OPERATION may proceed provided the following conditions are satisfied:
Examination Outline Cross-reference:                           Level                              RO                      SRO Tier#
: a. The inoperable channel is placed in either the bypassed or tripped condition within 1 hour. For the purposes of testing and maintenance, the inoperable channel may be bypassed for up to 48 hours from time of initial loss of OPERABILITY; however, the inoperable channel shall then be either restored to OPERABLE status or placed in the tripped condition.
Tier   #                                                   2 Group #
ST. LUCIE -UNIT 1 3/4 3-4 Amendment No. +e, 'B, 46, +00,159 Examination Outline Cross-reference:
KIA #                             063A2.01 Importance Rating                                          3.2 DC Electrical Distribution: Ability to predict the impacts of the following malfunctions or operations on the DC electrical systems:
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO 063A2.01 SRO 2 3.2 DC Electrical Distribution:
based on those predictions, use procedures to correct, control or mitigate the consequences of those malfunctions or operations:
Ability to predict the impacts of the following malfunctions or operations on the DC electrical systems: based on those predictions, use procedures to correct, control or mitigate the consequences of those malfunctions or operations:
Grounds Proposed Question:                       SRO 89 Unit 1 has received the following alarms:
Grounds Proposed Question:
125V DC                                          125V DC BUS1B                                           BUS1AB GROUND                                          GROUND A-10                                           A-40 The 1AB DC Bus is cross-tied to the 1B DC Bus.
SRO 89 Unit 1 has received the following alarms: 125V DC BUS1B GROUND A-10 The 1 AB DC Bus is cross-tied to the 1 B DC Bus. 125V DC BUS1AB GROUND A-40 1) Which of the following procedures will be implemented FIRST in an attempt to determine the ground location?  
: 1) Which of the following procedures will be implemented FIRST in an attempt to determine
(          the ground location?
: 2) When the 125V DC Bus 1B and 1AB bus are separated, what Technical Specification equipment could be affected?
: 2) When the 125V DC Bus 1B and 1AB bus are separated, what Technical Specification equipment could be affected?
A. 1) 1-0NP-50.01 125V DC GROUND DIAGNOSTIC  
A. 1) 1-0NP-50.01 125V DC GROUND DIAGNOSTIC
: 2) 1 B I 1 BB Battery Charger B. 1) 1-0NP-50.01 125V DC GROUND DIAGNOSTIC  
: 2) 1B I 1BB Battery Charger B. 1) 1-0NP-50.01 125V DC GROUND DIAGNOSTIC
: 2) AFW PP 1C C. 1) 1-0NP-50.04125V DC BUS 1AB GROUND ISOLATION  
: 2) AFW PP 1C C. 1) 1-0NP-50.04125V 1-0NP-50.04 125V DC BUS 1AB GROUND ISOLATION
: 2) 1 B I 1 BB Battery Charger D. 1) 1-0NP-50.04125V DC BUS 1AB GROUND ISOLATION  
: 2) 1B I 1BB Battery Charger D. 1) 1-0NP-50.04125V 1-0NP-50.04 125V DC BUS 1AB GROUND ISOLATION
: 2) AFW PP 1C 177 ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
: 2) AFW PP 1C 177
Level Tier # Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO 063A2.01 SRO 2 3.2 DC Electrical Distribution:
 
Ability to predict the impacts of the following malfunctions or operations on the DC electrical systems: based on those predictions, use procedures to correct, control or mitigate the consequences of those malfunctions or operations:
( Proposed Answer:            B Explanation (Optional):
Grounds Proposed Question:
A. Incorrect: part one is correct, part two is incorrect. The 1B/1 BB battery charger is not removed form service in this procedure.
SRO 89 Unit 1 has received the following alarms: 125V DC BUS1B GROUND A-10 The 1 AB DC Bus is cross-tied to the 1 B DC Bus. 125V DC BUS1AB GROUND A-40 1) Which of the following procedures will be implemented FIRST in an attempt to determine the ground location?
B. Correct. Ground diagnostics procedure is implemented first to determine where the ground is located. Ground diagnostic procedure CAUTION states 1AB loads will be inoperable when removing 1    AB DC bus.
: 2) When the 125V DC Bus 1B and 1AB bus are separated, what Technical Specification equipment could be affected?
1AB C. Incorrect: both part one and part two are not correct. Part one going to 1-0NP-50.04 is plausible because it will be entered after a ground is determined by 1-0NP-50.01 APPENDIX-B.
A. 1) 1-0NP-50.01 125V DC GROUND DIAGNOSTIC
D. Incorrect: part one is not correct, part two is correct.
: 2) 1 B I 1 BB Battery Charger B. 1) 1-0NP-50.01 125V DC GROUND DIAGNOSTIC
Technical Reference(s):      1-0NP-50.01 125V DC Ground                      (Attach if not previously provided)
: 2) AFW PP 1C C. 1) 1-0NP-50.04 125V DC BUS 1AB GROUND ISOLATION
Diagnostic 1-ARP-01-A40 & Ai Bus/Batt CHGR 1AB Ground
: 2) 1 B I 1 BB Battery Charger D. 1) 1-0NP-50.04 125V DC BUS 1AB GROUND ISOLATION
                                                          &deg; A10 125V DC
: 2) AFW PP 1C 177 Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional):
( Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
A. Incorrect:
Learning Objective:       _0_7_0_2_86_3_-_08-,,_0_9_02_7_2_3_-0_2___
part one is correct, part two is incorrect.
_0_7_0_2_86_3_-_08--".,--"0_9_02_7_2_3_-0-'-2'---__ (As available) availab Ie)
The 1 B/1 BB battery charger is not removed form service in this procedure.
Question Source:            Bank#
B. Correct. Ground diagnostics procedure is implemented first to determine where the ground is located. Ground diagnostic procedure CAUTION states 1AB loads will be inoperable when removing 1 AB DC bus. C. Incorrect:
Bank #
both part one and part two are not correct. Part one going to 1-0NP-50.04 is plausible because it will be entered after a ground is determined by 1-0NP-50.01 APPENDIX-B.
Modified Bank #                                  (Note changes or attach parent)
D. Incorrect:
New                          X Question History:            Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:   Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis                              ------
part one is not correct, part two is correct. Technical Reference(s):
X 10 CFR Part 55 Content:    55.41      5 55.43      5 Comments:
1-0NP-50.01 125V DC Ground (Attach if not previously provided)
(
Diagnostic 1-ARP-01-A40
178
& Ai &deg; 125V DC Bus/Batt CHGR 1 AB Ground Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
 
Learning Objective:
REVISION NO.:           PROCEDURE TITLE:                                    PAGE:
_0_7_0_2_86_3_-_08-,,_0_9_02_7_2_3_-0_2___ (As available)
1E                    125V DC GROUND DIAGNOSTIC 7 of 14 PROCEDURE NO.:
Question Source: Bank# Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) -----X Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge X ------Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 5 ---55.43 5 ---Comments:
1-0NP-50.01                       ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 6.0        OPERATOR ACTIONS (continued)
178 ( ( ( Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional):
INSTRUCTIONS                          CONTINGENCY ACTIONS B
A. Incorrect:
lj          VERIFY annunciator A-40, 125V DC Bus 1AB Ground, is CLEAR.
part one is correct, part two is incorrect.
: 6.  !f annunciator A-40 is ALARMED, If and 125V DC Buses 1  1A A and 1 are cross-tied, Then PERFORM 1AB AB Appendix A, Determination of 125V DC Buses 1A 1A and 1AB 1AB Ground Location.
The 1 B/1 BB battery charger is not removed form service in this procedure.
                                                            !f annunciator A-40 is ALARMED, If and 125V DC Buses 1Band 1AB are cross-tied, Then PERFORM Appendix B, Determination of 125V DC Buses 1Band 1AB 1AB Ground Location.
B. Correct. Ground diagnostics procedure is implemented first to determine where the ground is located. Ground diagnostic procedure CAUTION states 1AB loads will be inoperable when removing 1AB DC bus. C. Incorrect:
11 125V DC
both part one and part two are not correct. Part one going to 1-0NP-50.04 is plausible because it will be entered after a ground is determined by 1-0NP-50.01 APPENDIX-B.
                                                            !f          Bus 1AB 1AB is NOT cross-tied to 125V DC Buses 1A
D. Incorrect:
(                                                          or 1B, 1B, Then GO TO 1-0NP-50.04, 125V DC Bus 1AB Ground Isolation.
part one is not correct, part two is correct. Technical Reference(s):
: 7.        VERIFY annunciator B-10, 125V DC Bus    7. 11 annunciator B-10
1-0NP-50.01 125V DC Ground (Attach if not previously provided)
                                                            !f                    is ALARMED 1A Ground, is CLEAR.                         Then GO TO 1-0NP-50.02, 125V DC Bus 1A Ground Isolation.
Diagnostic 1-ARP-01-A40
: 8.       VERIFY annunciator A-1  0, 125V DC Bus A-10,                8. If annunciator A-1 0 is 1B Ground, is CLEAR.                         ALARMED, Then GO TO 1-0NP-50.03, 125V DC Bus 1B  1B Ground Isolation.
& A10 125V DC Bus/Batt CHGR 1 AB Ground Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
END OF SECTION 6.0
Learning Objective:
 
_0_7_0_2_86_3_-_08--".,--"0_9_02_7_2_3_-0-'-2'---__ (As availab Ie) Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) -----X Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge X ----Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 5 ---55.43 5 ---Comments:
REVISION NO.:           PROCEDURE TITLE:                                    PAGE:
178 REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 1E 125V DC GROUND DIAGNOSTIC 7 of 14 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-0NP-50.01 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 6.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS (continued)
1E                    125V DC GROUND DIAGNOSTIC
INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS B VERIFY annunciator A-40, 125V DC Bus 6. !f annunciator A-40 is ALARMED, 1AB Ground, is CLEAR. and 125V DC Buses 1A and 1AB are cross-tied, Then PERFORM Appendix A, Determination of 125V DC Buses 1 A and 1 AB Ground Location.  
( PROCEDURE NO.:
!f annunciator A-40 is ALARMED, and 125V DC Buses 1 Band 1 AB are cross-tied, Then PERFORM Appendix B, Determination of 125V DC Buses 1 Band 1 AB Ground Location.
11 of 14 1-0NP-50.01                             ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 APPENDIX B DETERMINATION OF 125V DC BUSES 1              BAND 1B AND 1AB GROUND LOCATION (Page 1 of 3)
11 125V DC Bus 1AB is NOT cross-tied to 125V DC Buses 1A or 1 B, Then GO TO 1-0NP-50.04, 125V DC Bus 1AB Ground Isolation.  
INITIAL
: 7. VERIFY annunciator B-10, 125V DC Bus 7. 11 annunciator B-10 is ALARMED 1A Ground, is CLEAR. Then GO TO 1-0NP-50.02, 125V DC Bus 1A Ground Isolation.  
: 1.      ENSURE 1AB Battery Charger is in hot standby, in accordance with 1-NOP-50.01AB, 125V DC Bus 1AB (Class 1E)      1E) Normal Operation.
: 8. VERIFY annunciator A-10, 125V DC Bus 8. If annunciator A-1 0 is 1 B Ground, is CLEAR. ALARMED, Then GO TO 1-0NP-50.03, 125V DC Bus 1 B Ground Isolation.
US CAUTION Separating 125V DC Bus 1Band 1AB will render Bus 1AB loads inoperable, since no battery is connected to the bus.
END OF SECTION 6.0 REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 1E 125V DC GROUND DIAGNOSTIC 7 of 14 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-0NP-50.01 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 6.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS (continued)
: 2.       REFER TO the following Tech Spec sections for LCO and Action requirements:
INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS ..--.*.. lj VERIFY annunciator A-40, 125V DC Bus 6. If annunciator A-40 is ALARMED, 1AB Ground, is CLEAR. and 125V DC Buses 1 A and 1 AB are cross-tied, Then PERFORM Appendix A, Determination of 125V DC Buses 1A and 1AB Ground Location.
          **      Charging Pump 1C, Sections 3.1.2.1, 3.1.2.2, 3.1.2.3 and 3.1.2.4
If annunciator A-40 is ALARMED, and 125V DC Buses 1 Band 1 AB are cross-tied, Then PERFORM Appendix B, Determination of 125V DC Buses 1 Band 1AB Ground Location.  
          **      AFW PP 1C, Section 3.7.1.2
!f 125V DC Bus 1 AB is NOT cross-tied to 125V DC Buses 1A ( or 1B, Then GO TO 1-0NP-50.04, 125V DC Bus 1AB Ground Isolation.  
(
: 7. VERIFY annunciator B-10, 125V DC Bus 7. !f annunciator B-10 is ALARMED 1A Ground, is CLEAR. Then GO TO 1-0NP-50.02, 125V DC Bus 1A Ground Isolation.  
          **      CCW PP 1C , Section 3.7.3.1
: 8. VERIFY annunciator A-1 0, 125V DC Bus 8. If annunciator A-1 0 is 1 B Ground, is CLEAR. ALARMED, Then GO TO 1-0NP-50.03, 125V DC Bus 1B Ground Isolation.
          **      ICW PP 1  1C, C, Section 3.7.4.1 Separating 125V DC Bus 1      1B  and 1AB is authorized.
END OF SECTION 6.0 
Band US
( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 11 of 14 1E 125V DC GROUND DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE NO.: 1-0NP-50.01 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 APPENDIX B DETERMINATION OF 125V DC BUSES 1 BAND 1AB GROUND LOCATION (Page 1 of 3) 1. ENSURE 1AB Battery Charger is in hot standby, in accordance with 1-NOP-50.01AB, 125V DC Bus 1AB (Class 1E) Normal Operation.
: 3.      11J1 separating 125V DC Bus 1Band 1      AB is NOT authorized, Then 1AB PERFORM BOTH of the following:
CAUTION Separating 125V DC Bus 1 Band 1AB will render Bus 1AB loads inoperable, since no battery is connected to the bus. 2. REFER TO the following Tech Spec sections for LCO and Action requirements:
* GO TO 1-0NP-50.03, 125V DC Bus 1B      1 B Ground Isolation.
* Charging Pump 1 C, Sections 3.1.2.1, 3.1.2.2, 3.1.2.3 and 3.1.2.4
          **      GO TO 1-0NP-50.04, 125V DC Bus 1AB Ground Isolation.
* AFW PP 1 C, Section 3.7.1.2
: 4.      VERIFY at least ONE of the following:
* CCW PP 1 C , Section 3.7.3.1
A.      Battery Charger 1B is operable.
* ICW PP 1 C, Section 3.7.4.1 Separating 125V DC Bus 1 Band 1AB is authorized.
US B.       Battery Charger 1BB is operable.
: 3. 11 separating 125V DC Bus 1 Band 1 AB is NOT authorized, Then PERFORM BOTH of the following:
US
* GO TO 1-0NP-50.03, 125V DC Bus 1B Ground Isolation.
 
* GO TO 1-0NP-50.04, 125V DC Bus 1AB Ground Isolation.
REVISION NO.:        PROCEDURE TITLE:                                                                  PAGE:
: 4. VERIFY at least ONE of the following:
1E                              125V DC GROUND DIAGNOSTIC 14 of 14 PROCEDURE NO.:
A. Battery Charger 1 B is operable.
1-0NP-50.01                                  ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 FIGURE 1 DIAGNOSTIC FLOW CHART (Page 1 of 1)
B. Battery Charger 1 BB is operable.
CHECK                REQUEST                                    YES Local              EM      1--_<
INITIAL US US US US ( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 1E 125V DC GROUND DIAGNOSTIC 11 of 14 PROCEDURE NO.: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1-0NP-50.01 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 APPENDIX B DETERMINATION OF 125V DC BUSES 1B AND 1AB GROUND LOCATION (Page 1 of 3) INITIAL ENSURE 1AB Battery Charger is in hot standby, in accordance with 1-NOP-50.01AB, 125V DC Bus 1AB (Class 1 E) Normal Operation.
J..--e.<'                                      STOP Indication              Assistance r.::::.:::::.
US CAUTION Separating 125V DC Bus 1 Band 1AB will render Bus 1AB loads inoperable, since no battery is connected to the bus. REFER TO the following Tech Spec sections for LCO and Action requirements:
                  ~Y.:::E~S_            _______________
* Charging Pump 1 C, Sections 3.1.2.1, 3.1.2.2, 3.1.2.3 and 3.1.2.4
_______________                                -to-IGO
* AFW PP 1 C, Section 3.7.1.2
                                                                                          .......! GO TO TO 1*0NP*SO.05, 1*0NP*50.05, 125V DC Bus 1 1CC Ground Detection r:-;;.;;;.._______________
* CCW PP 1 C , Section 3.7.3.1
                  ;>-:-Y.:;;.E.;;;.S_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _+iGO                      ..,..jGO TO 1*0NP*SO.06,
* ICW PP 1C, Section 3.7.4.1 Separating 125V DC Bus 1B and 1AB is authorized.
                                                                                                            *!-ONP-50.06, 125V DC Bus 1 1DD Ground Detection
US J1 separating 125V DC Bus 1 Band 1AB is NOT authorized, Then PERFORM BOTH of the following:
(
* GO TO 1-0NP-50.03, 125V DC Bus 1 B Ground Isolation.
YES YES                          GO TO 1*0NP*SO.04, 1*0NP*50.04,
* GO TO 1-0NP-50.04, 125V DC Bus 1AB Ground Isolation.
                                                                      ~..;;;;;.;r------...J
VERIFY at least ONE of the following:
:>-:-.;;:::..;;:.----+-1        125V DC Bus 1AB Ground Detection
A. Battery Charger 1 B is operable.
                  >"">--Y_ES
US B. Battery Charger 1 BB is operable.
                      . ;.Y.; ; ;.E;_
US REVISION NO.: 1E PROCEDURE NO.: 1-0NP-50.01 PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: CHECK Local Indication 125V DC GROUND DIAGNOSTIC ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 FIGURE 1 DIAGNOSTIC FLOW CHART (Page 1 of 1) REQUEST EM J..--e.<'
                                    ;. S________ ___  ____  __  __ ______  __  __  _........,..jGO
Assistance 14 of 14 YES STOP r.::::.:::::.
                                                                                          ~          GO TO 1-0NP-50.02, 1-0NP*50.02, 125V DC Bus 1A Ground Detection
_______________ -to-IGO TO 1*0NP*SO.05, 125V DC Bus 1 C Ground Detection r:-;;.;;;..
                  '-Y          E_S_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _......!
_______________
                  '""'-Y..;.E..;.S
..,..jGO TO 1*0NP*SO.06, 125V DC Bus 1 D Ground Detection YES YES GO TO 1*0NP*SO.04, 125V DC Bus 1AB Ground Detection
                            .....                                                          .......! GO TO 1-0NP-50.03 1-0NP-5003
>..;.Y.;;;;;.E;;;..S
                  /'                                                                                  125V DC Bus 1B Ground Detection
_______________
 
........,..jGO TO 1-0NP-50.02, 125V DC Bus 1A Ground Detection
REVISION NO:          PROCEDURE TITLE:                                                    PANEL:
'""'-Y..;.E..;.S
OA                  ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE                                          A A
________________
( PROCEDURE NO:                                                                              WINDOW:
......! GO TO 1-0NP-50.03
1-ARP-01-A10                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 1                                      10 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL A 125V DC BUS1B GROUND A-10 DEVICE:                    LOCATION:                            SETPOINT:
". 125V DC Bus 1B Ground Detection REVISION NO.: 1E PROCEDURE NO.: 1-0NP-50.01 ( PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: CHECK Local Indication 125V DC GROUND DIAGNOSTIC ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 FIGURE 1 DIAGNOSTIC FLOW CHART (Page 1 of 1) REQUEST EM 1--_< Assistance 14 of 14 YES STOP
64P/1 002, 64N/1002 64P/1002,                  1B 125V DC Bus                       DC System Ground 30-1/1527                  RAB/RTG B-1 01 RAB/RTGB-101                          64P/64N Energized ALARM CONFIRMATION:
________________
.......! GO TO 1*0NP*50.05, 125V DC Bus 1C Ground Detection
;>-:-Y.:;;.E.;;;.S
________________
+iGO TO *!-ONP-50.06, 125V DC Bus 1D Ground Detection YES YES GO TO 1*0NP*50.04, :>-:-.;;:::..;;:.----+-1 125V DC Bus 1AB Ground Detection
">--Y_ES ________________ GO TO 1-0NP*50.02, " 125V DC Bus 1A Ground Detection
'-Y ..... E_S ________________
.......! GO TO 1-0NP-5003
/' 125V DC Bus 1B Ground Detection 
( REVISION NO: PROCEDURE TITLE: PANEL: OA ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE A PROCEDURE NO: 1-ARP-01-A10 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 WINDOW: 10 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL A DEVICE: 64P/1002, 64N/1002 30-1/1527 LOCATION: 1 B 125V DC Bus RAB/RTGB-101 ALARM CONFIRMATION:  
: 1. ANY/ALL of the following:
: 1. ANY/ALL of the following:
SETPOINT:
A. DISPATCH an operator to the 1B 125V DC Bus to verify the ground and to determine which pole of the DC Bus is grounded as follows:
125V DC BUS1B GROUND DC System Ground 64P/64N Energized A-10 A. DISPATCH an operator to the 1 B 125V DC Bus to verify the ground and to determine which pole of the DC Bus is grounded as follows: 1. MOVE the ground test toggle switch to the upward position and observe the brilliance of the positive and negative test lights. 2. The DIMMER of the two lights is the side that has the ground with the difference in brilliance indicating the severity of the ground. OPERATOR ACTIONS: 1. Corrective Actions: A. RECALL any DC equipment starts that occurred at or near the same time the ground annunciated and CONSIDER these loads as possible causes of the ground. B. GO TO ONOP 1-0NP-50.01, 125V DC Ground Diagnostic.
: 1. MOVE the ground test toggle switch to the upward position and observe the brilliance of the positive and negative test lights.
CAUSES: DC bus, cable, or equipment degradation has resulted in DC current leakage to ground.  
: 2. The DIMMER of the two lights is the side that has the ground with the difference in brilliance indicating the severity of the ground.
OPERATOR ACTIONS:
: 1. Corrective Actions:
A. RECALL any DC equipment starts that occurred at or near the same time the ground annunciated and CONSIDER these loads as possible causes of the ground.
B. GO TO ONOP 1-0NP-50.01, 125V DC Ground Diagnostic.
CAUSES: DC bus, cable, or equipment degradation has resulted in DC current leakage to ground.


==REFERENCES:==
==REFERENCES:==
: 1) CWO 8770-B-327 sheet 1527,1002 REVISION NO: PROCEDURE TITLE: PANEL: OA ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE A PROCEDURE NO: WINDOW: 1-ARP-01-A10 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL A DEVICE: 64P/1 002, 64N/1002 30-1/1527 LOCATION: 1 B 125V DC Bus RAB/RTG B-1 01 ALARM CONFIRMATION:
: 1) CWO 8770-B-327 sheet 1527,1002
: 1. ANY/ALL of the following:
ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 SETPOINT:
125V DC BUS1B GROUND DC System Ground 64P/64N Energized 10 A-10 A. DISPATCH an operator to the 1 B 125V DC Bus to verify the ground and to determine which pole of the DC Bus is grounded as follows: 1. MOVE the ground test toggle switch to the upward position and observe the brilliance of the positive and negative test lights. 2. The DIMMER of the two lights is the side that has the ground with the difference in brilliance indicating the severity of the ground. OPERATOR ACTIONS: 1. Corrective Actions: A. RECALL any DC equipment starts that occurred at or near the same time the ground annunciated and CONSIDER these loads as possible causes of the ground. B. GO TO ONOP 1-0NP-50.01, 125V DC Ground Diagnostic.
CAUSES: DC bus, cable, or equipment degradation has resulted in DC current leakage to ground.


==REFERENCES:==
REVISION NO:           PROCEDURE TITLE:                                                     PANEL:
: 1) CWO 8770-B-327 sheet 1527,1002 
OB                   ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE                                         A A
( '-( REVISION NO: PROCEDURE TITLE: PANEL: OB ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE A PROCEDURE NO: 1-ARP-01-A40 DEVICE: 64P, 64N/1003 30-2/1524 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 LOCATION:
(
1AB 125V DC Bus RAB/RTGB-101 ALARM CONFIRMATION:  
PROCEDURE NO:                                                                               WINDOW:
1-ARP-01-A40 1-AR P-O 1-A40                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 1                                      40 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL A 125V DC BUS1AB BUS 1AB GROUND A-40 DEVICE:                   LOCATION:                            SETPOINT:
64P, 64N/1003 64N/1 003            1AB 125V DC Bus                       1 AB DC System Ground 30-2/1524 30-211524                  RAB/RTGB-101                         64P/64N Energized ALARM CONFIRMATION:
: 1. ANY/ALL of the following:
: 1. ANY/ALL of the following:
WINDOW: 40 SETPOINT:
A. DISPATCH an operator to the 1AB 125V DC Bus to verify the ground and DETERMINE which pole of the DC bus is grounded as follows:
125V DC BUS1AB GROUND 1 AB DC System Ground 64P/64N Energized A-40 A. DISPATCH an operator to the 1AB 125V DC Bus to verify the ground and DETERMINE which pole of the DC bus is grounded as follows: 1. MOVE the ground test toggle switch to the upward position and OBSERVE the brilliance of the positive and negative test lights. 2. The DIMMER of the two lights is the side that has the ground with the difference in brilliance indicating the severity of the ground. OPERATOR ACTIONS: 1. Corrective Actions: A. RECALL any DC equipment starts that occurred at or near the same time the ground annunciated and CONSIDER these loads possible causes of the ground. B. GO TO 1-0NP-50.01, 125V DC Ground Diagnostic.
: 1. MOVE the ground test toggle switch to the upward position and OBSERVE the brilliance of the positive and negative test lights.
CAUSES: DC bus, cable, or equipment degradation has resulted in DC current leakage to ground.  
: 2. The DIMMER of the two lights is the side that has the ground with the difference in brilliance indicating the severity of the ground.
OPERATOR ACTIONS:
1. Corrective Actions:
A. RECALL any DC equipment starts that occurred at or near the same time the ground annunciated and CONSIDER these loads possible causes of the ground.
B. GO TO 1-0NP-50.01, 125V DC Ground Diagnostic.                                                       3J o
OJ CAUSES: DC bus, cable, or equipment degradation has resulted in DC current leakage to ground.


==REFERENCES:==
==REFERENCES:==
: 1) CWD 8770-B-327 sheet 1524, 1003 2) 1-EMP-50.02, 125V DC System Battery Charging 18 Month Maintenance ( REVISION NO: PROCEDURE TITLE: PANEL: OB ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE A PROCEDURE NO: 1-AR P-O 1-A40 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 WINDOW: 40 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL A DEVICE: 64P, 64N/1 003 30-211524 LOCATION:
: 1) CWD   CWO 8770-B-327 sheet 1524, 1003
1AB 125V DC Bus RAB/RTGB-101 ALARM CONFIRMATION:
: 2) 1-EMP-50.02, 125V DC System Battery Charging 18 Month Maintenance
: 1. ANY/ALL of the following:
(
SETPOINT:
125V DC BUS 1AB GROUND 1 AB DC System Ground 64P/64N Energized A-40 A. DISPATCH an operator to the 1AB 125V DC Bus to verify the ground and DETERMINE which pole of the DC bus is grounded as follows: 1. MOVE the ground test toggle switch to the upward position and OBSERVE the brilliance of the positive and negative test lights. 2. The DIMMER of the two lights is the side that has the ground with the difference in brilliance indicating the severity of the ground. OPERATOR ACTIONS: 1. Corrective Actions: A. RECALL any DC equipment starts that occurred at or near the same time the ground annunciated and CONSIDER these loads possible causes of the ground. B. GO TO 1-0NP-50.01, 125V DC Ground Diagnostic.
CAUSES: DC bus, cable, or equipment degradation has resulted in DC current leakage to ground.


==REFERENCES:==
Examination Outline Cross-reference:                           Level                             RO                  SRO Tier Tier##                                                2 Group #                                                 1 KIA #                             076A2.01 Importance Rating                                      3.7 Service Water: Ability to predict the impacts of the following malfunctions or operations on the SWS; and based on those predictions, use procedures to correct, control, or mitigate the consequences of those malfunctions or operations: Loss of SWS Proposed Question:                     SRO 90 Given the following conditions:
: 1) CWO 8770-B-327 sheet 1524, 1003 2) 1-EMP-50.02, 125V DC System Battery Charging 18 Month Maintenance 3J o OJ Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO 076A2.01 SRO 2 1 3.7 Service Water: Ability to predict the impacts of the following malfunctions or operations on the SWS; and based on those predictions, use procedures to correct, control, or mitigate the consequences of those malfunctions or operations:
Loss of SWS Proposed Question:
SRO 90 Given the following conditions:
* Unit 2 is at 100% power.
* Unit 2 is at 100% power.
* 2A and 2B Intake Cooling Water pumps are operating on their respective headers.
* 2A and 2B Intake Cooling Water pumps are operating on their respective headers.
* 2C Intake Cooling Water pump is in standby aligned to the A header.
* 2C Intake Cooling Water pump is in standby aligned to the A header.
* The 2B Intake Cooling Water pump trips unexpectedly.  
* The 2B Intake Cooling Water pump trips unexpectedly.
: 1) Which ONE of the following states the acceptability of an immediate attempt to restart the 2B Intake Cooling water pump? 2) If the 2C Intake Cooling Water pump valve alignment was configured to the B side but the electrical alignment remained to the A side, what would be the required actions if the pump started? A. 1) One restart attempt IS allowed for the stated conditions.  
: 1) Which ONE of the following states the acceptability of an immediate attempt to restart the 2B Intake Cooling water pump?
: 2) The respective offsite power source AND the 2B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service. B. 1) One restart attempt IS NOT allowed for the stated conditions.  
: 2) If the 2C Intake Cooling Water pump valve alignment was configured to the B side but the
: 2) ONLY the 2B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service. C. 1) One restart attempt IS allowed for the stated conditions.  
(      electrical alignment remained to the A side, what would be the required actions if the pump started?
: 2) ONLY the 2B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service. D. 1) One restart attempt IS NOT allowed for the stated conditions.  
A.         1) One restart attempt IS allowed for the stated conditions.
: 2) The respective offsite power source AND the 2B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service. 179 ( ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
: 2) The respective offsite power source AND the 2B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service.
Level Tier # Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO 076A2.01 SRO 2 1 3.7 Service Water: Ability to predict the impacts of the following malfunctions or operations on the SWS; and based on those predictions, use procedures to correct, control, or mitigate the consequences of those malfunctions or operations:
B.         1) One restart attempt IS NOT allowed for the stated conditions.
Loss of SWS Proposed Question:
: 2) ONLY the 2B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service.
SRO 90 Given the following conditions:
C.         1) One restart attempt IS allowed for the stated conditions.
* Unit 2 is at 100% power.
: 2) ONLY the 2B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service.
* 2A and 2B Intake Cooling Water pumps are operating on their respective headers.
D.         1) One restart attempt IS NOT allowed for the stated conditions.
* 2C Intake Cooling Water pump is in standby aligned to the A header.
: 2) The respective offsite power source AND the 2B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service.
* The 2B Intake Cooling Water pump trips unexpectedly.
(
: 1) Which ONE of the following states the acceptability of an immediate attempt to restart the 2B Intake Cooling water pump? 2) If the 2C Intake Cooling Water pump valve alignment was configured to the B side but the electrical alignment remained to the A side, what would be the required actions if the pump started? A. 1) One restart attempt IS allowed for the stated conditions.
179
: 2) The respective offsite power source AND the 2B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service. B. 1) One restart attempt IS NOT allowed for the stated conditions.
 
: 2) ONLY the 2B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service. C. 1) One restart attempt IS allowed for the stated conditions.
Proposed Answer:             B Explanation (Optional):
: 2) ONLY the 2B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service. D. 1) One restart attempt IS NOT allowed for the stated conditions.
A. Incorrect: Restart ONLY allowed if health and safety of the public is in jeopardy.
: 2) The respective offsite power source AND the 2B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service. 179 Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional):
Offsite power is not required to be declared out of service on Unit 2, only Unit 1.
A. Incorrect:
B. Correct C. Incorrect: Restart NOT allowed D. Incorrect: Offsite power not required to be declared out of service.
Restart ONLY allowed if health and safety of the public is in jeopardy.
Technical Reference(s):       2-0640030 Intake Cooling                   (Attach if not previously provided)
Offsite power is not required to be declared out of service on Unit 2, only Unit 1. B. Correct C. Incorrect:
Water System, U2 T.S. 3.7.4, OPS -503
Restart NOT allowed D. Incorrect:
(
Offsite power not required to be declared out of service. Technical Reference(s):
2-0640030 Intake Cooling Water System, U2 T.S. 3.7.4, OPS -503 (Attach if not previously provided)
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
Learning Objective:         _0_7_0_2_86_2_-_08-,,_0_9_0_27_2_3_-0_1___
_0_7_0_2_86_2_-_08-,,_0_9_0_27_2_3_-0_1___ (As available)
_0_7_0_2_8_6_2-_0_8-,--,0_9_0_2_7_2_3-_0_1___ (As available)
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # 2008 NRC Exam (see comment below) (Note changes or attach parent) New Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge X ---Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 5 -"-----55.43 5 --'---Comments:
Question Source:             Bank #
2008 NRC exam Ques. 90 was written for Unit 1. This question is written for Unit 2 which DOES NOT require offsite power to be declared out of service if two ICW trains electrically aligned and operating on the same train. (2008 Ques. 90 answer was D) 180 ( Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional):
Modified Bank #             2008 NRC Exam       (Note changes or attach (see comment        parent) below)
A. Incorrect:
New Question History:             Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:     Memory or Fundamental Knowledge                   -
Restart ONLY allowed if health and safety of the public is in jeopardy.
X
Offsite power is not required to be declared out of service on Unit 2, only Unit 1. B. Correct C. Incorrect:
                                                                                  -X- - -- -
Restart NOT allowed D. Incorrect:
Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content:       55.41       -
Offsite power not required to be declared out of service. Technical Reference(s):
5 55.43       -
2-0640030 Intake Cooling Water System, U2 T.S. 3.7.4, OPS -503 (Attach if not previously provided)
5 Comments: 2008 NRC exam Ques. 90 was written for Unit 1. This question is written for Unit 2 which DOES NOT require offsite power to be declared out of service if two ICW trains electrically aligned and operating on the same train. (2008 Ques. 90 answer was D) 180
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
 
Learning Objective:
St. Lucie HLC-18 NRC Exam
_0_7_0_2_8_6_2-_0_8-,--, 0_9_0_2_7_2_3-_0_1___ (As available)
                                /~8/'/thIJ        //C       EX~;
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # 2008 NRC Exam (see comment below) (Note changes or attach parent) New Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge X ----Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 5 ---55.43 5 ---Comments:
Question 90 I\
2008 NRC exam Ques. 90 was written for Unit 1. This question is written for Unit 2 which DOES NOT require offsite power to be declared out of service if two ICW trains electrically aligned and operating on the same train. (2008 Ques. 90 answer was D) 180 St. Lucie HLC-18 NRC Exam Question 90 Given the following conditions:
Given the following conditions:
* Unit 1 is at 100% power
* 1 A and 1 B Intake Cooling Water pumps are operating on their respective headers
* 1 C Intake Cooling Water pump is in standby aligned to the A header
* The 1 B Intake Cooling Water pump trips unexpectedly
: 1) Which ONE of the following states the acceptability of an immediate attempt to restart the 1 B Intake Cooling water pump? 2) If the 1 C Intake Cooling Water pump valve alignment was configured to the B side but the electrical alignment remained to the A side, what would be the required actions if the pump started? A. 1) One restart attempt IS allowed for the stated conditions.
: 2) The respective offsite power source AND the 1 B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service. B. 1) One restart attempt IS NOT allowed for the stated conditions.
: 2) ONLY the 1 B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service. C. 1) One restart attempt IS allowed for the stated conditions.
: 2) ONLY the 1 B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service. 1) One restart attempt IS NOT stated conditions.
: 2) The respective offsite power sourc N t e 1 B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service. U;tJ {r Ll I \ ( Question 90 St. Lucie HLC-18 NRC Exam
//C Given the following conditions:
* Unit 1 is at 100% power
* Unit 1 is at 100% power
* 1A and 1 B Intake Cooling Water pumps are operating on their respective headers
* 1A 1A and 1B Intake Cooling Water pumps are operating on their respective headers
* 1 C Intake Cooling Water pump is in standby aligned to the A header
* 1C Intake Cooling Water pump is in standby aligned to the A header
* The 1 B Intake Cooling Water pump trips unexpectedly  
* The 1B Intake Cooling Water pump trips unexpectedly
: 1) Which ONE of the following states the acceptability of an immediate attempt to restart the 1 B Intake Cooling water pump? 2) If the 1 C Intake Cooling Water pump valve alignment was configured to the B side but the electrical alignment remained to the A side, what would be the required actions if the pump started? A. 1) One restart attempt IS allowed for the stated conditions.  
: 1) Which ONE of the following states the acceptability of an immediate attempt to restart the 1B Intake Cooling water pump?
: 2) The respective offsite power source AND the 1 B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service. B. 1) One restart attempt IS NOT allowed for the stated conditions.  
: 2) If the 1C Intake Cooling Water pump valve alignment was configured to the B side but the electrical alignment remained to the A side, what would be the required actions if the pump started?
: 2) ONLY the 1 B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service. C. 1) One restart attempt IS allowed for the stated conditions.  
A. 1) One restart attempt IS allowed for the stated conditions.
: 2) ONLY the 1 B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service. D. 1) One restart attempt IS NOT stated conditions.  
: 2) The respective offsite power source AND the 1B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service.
: 2) The respective offsite power sourc N t e 1 B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service. u;U (1 e6  
(
( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 41A INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM .&deg;6 OJ 67 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-0640030 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 7.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS 7.1 Immediate Operator Actions: 1. None 7.2 Subsequent Operations Actions: INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS CAUTION If affected ICW header indicates 0 pressure, the standby pump discharge valve must be throttled prior to startin 1. !f an ICW pump indicates extremely high amps, OR an ICW pump trips unexpectedly, Then: c. !f the health and safety of the public is in jeopardy, Then ATTEMPT ONLY ONE restart. Place the pump control switch to PULL TO LOCK position.
B. 1) One restart attempt IS NOT allowed for the stated conditions.
Then align the standby pump to the header, lAW 2-NOP-21.03A(S)(C), 2A(S)(C) Intake Cooling Water System Operation, and start the standby pump. C. !f an ICW pump cannot be restored to a header, Then: 1. Reduce MVARS to minimum. 2. Monitor Main Generator Gas Temperatures.
: 2) ONLY the 1 B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service.
Refer to 2-0NP-53.01, Main Generator.
C. 1) One restart attempt IS allowed for the stated conditions.
: 3. Reduce turbine load as needed to within the heat removal capability of the TCWsystem.
: 2) ONLY the 1B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service.
: 4. Isolate S/G blowdown, then place the Open Slowdown heat exchanger TCVs in MANUAL and close. REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 41A INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM 6of67 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-0640030 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 7.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS 7.1 Immediate Operator Actions: 1. None 7.2 Subsequent Operations Actions: INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS CAUTION If affected ICW header indicates 0 pressure, the standby pump discharge valve must be throttled prior to starting.  
D. 1) One restart attempt IS NOT allowe~fo stated conditions.
: 1. if an ICW pump indicates extremely high amps, OR an ICW pump trips unexpectedly, Then: A. if the health and safety of the public is in jeopardy, Then ATTEMPT ONLY ONE restart. B. Place the pump control switch to PULL TO LOCK position.
: 2) The respective offsite power sourc   N t e 1B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service.
C. Then align the standby pump to the header, lAW 2-NOP-21.03A(B)(C), 2A(B)(C) Intake Cooling Water System Operation, and start the standby pump. C. 11 an ICW pump cannot be restored to a header, Then: 1. Reduce MVARS to minimum. 2. Monitor Main Generator Gas Temperatures.
u;U {r U;tJ (1     Ll e6 REVISION NO.:           PROCEDURE TITLE:                                     PAGE:
Refer to 2-0NP-53.01, Main Generator.
PAGE:
: 3. Reduce turbine load as needed to within the heat removal capability of the TCW system. 4. Isolate S/G blowdown, then place the Open Blowdown heat exchanger TCVs in MANUAL and close.
41A                   INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM                         OJ 67
41A INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE NO.: 1-0640030 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 7.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS 7.1 Immediate Operator Actions 1. None 7.2 Subsequent Operations Actions: INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS CAUTION .. If affected ICW header indicates 0 pressure, the standby pump discharge valve must be throttled prior to starting.
( PROCEDURE NO.:
In Modes 1 through 3 (SIAS NOT blocked), when two ICW Pumps are electrically aligned AND operating on the same electrical bus, the respective Off-site Power Source must be declared out of service, as two ICW Pumps could affect the load shed and resequencing loads b the Diesel. REFER to Technical S ecifications 3.8.1.1.a.
                                                                                  .&deg; 66of67 2-0640030                             ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 7.0   OPERATOR ACTIONS 7.1   Immediate Operator Actions:
: 1. !f an ICW pump indicates extremely high 1. amps, OR an ICW pump trips unexpectedly, Then: A. ,-r2 !f the health and safety of the public is in jeopardy, Then ATTEMPT ONLY ONE restart. B. Place the pump control switch to PULL TO LOCK position.
: 1.     None 7.2   Subsequent Operations Actions:
C. Then align the standby pump to the header, lAW 1-NOP-21.03A(8)(C), 1A(1 8)(1 C) Intake Cooling Water System Operation, and start the standby pump. C. !f an ICW pump cannot be restored to a header, Then: 1. Reduce MVARS to minimum. 2. Monitor Main Generator Gas Temperatures.
INSTRUCTIONS                         CONTINGENCY ACTIONS CAUTION If affected ICW header indicates 0 pressure, the standby pump discharge valve must be throttled prior to startin starting.
Refer to 1-0NP-53.01, Main Generator.
: 1.       if an ICW pump indicates extremely
: 3. Reduce turbine load as needed to within the heat removal capability of the TCW system. ( ( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: 41A INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE NO.: 1-0640030 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 7.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS 7.1 Immediate Operator Actions 1. None 7.2 Subsequent Operations Actions: INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS CAUTION
            !f high amps, OR an ICW pump trips unexpectedly, Then:
* If affected ICW header indicates 0 pressure, the standby pump discharge valve must be throttled prior to starting.
A.     if the health and safety of the
* In Modes 1 through 3 (SIAS NOT blocked), when two ICW Pumps are electrically aligned AND operating on the same electrical bus, the respective Off-site Power Source must be declared out of service, as two ICW Pumps could affect the load shed and resequencing loads b the Diesel. REFER to Technical S ecifications 3.8.1.1.a.
                    !f public is in jeopardy, Then ATTEMPT ONLY ONE restart.
: 1. If an ICW pump indicates extremely high amps, OR an ICW pump trips unexpectedly, Then: A. If the health and safety of the public is in jeopardy, Then A TTEM PT ONLY ONE restart. B. Place the pump control switch to PULL TO LOCK position.
B.     Place the pump control switch to PULL TO LOCK position.
C. Then align the standby pump to the header, lAW 1-NOP-21.03A(8)(C), 1A(1 8)(1 C) Intake Cooling Water System Operation, and start the standby pump. 1. C. If an ICW pump cannot be restored to a header, Then: 1. Reduce MVARS to minimum. 2. Monitor Main Generator Gas Temperatures.
c.
Refer to 1-0NP-53.01, Main Generator.  
C.     Then align the standby pump to         C. 11 an ICW pump cannot be
                                                              !f the header, lAW 2-NOP-                     restored to a header, Then:
21.03A(B)(C), 2A(S)(C) 21.03A(S)(C),   2A(B)(C) Intake Cooling Water System Operation, and start the standby pump.
: 1. Reduce MVARS to minimum.
: 2. Monitor Main Generator Gas Temperatures. Refer to 2-0NP-53.01, Main Generator.
: 3. Reduce turbine load as needed to within the heat removal capability of the TCW system.
: 3. Reduce turbine load as needed to within the heat removal capability of the TCW system.
Examination Outline Cross-reference:
TCWsystem.
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating Containment Iodine Removal: High temperature in the filter system Proposed Question:
: 4. Isolate S/G blowdown, then place the Open Slowdown Blowdown heat exchanger TCVs in MANUAL and close.
SRO 91 RO 027A2.01 Unit 2 has been in a Large Break LOCA for 48 hours with the following conditions:
 
* Containment Temperature is 120&deg;F. SRO 2 2 3.3 1) As Unit Supervisor, in accordance with 2-EOP-03 LOCA, when would you direct starting of Hydrogen Purge fans HVE-7A and lor HVE-7B? 2) If the Hydrogen Purge fans were started the following Annunciator illuminates, CONT CNTMTI H 2 PURGE ADSORBER TEMP HIGH X-1 What would be the most likely cause of this alarm? A. 1) Consultation with the TSC if the Hydrogen Recombiners CANNOT maintain H2 concentration less than 3.5% 2) Restricted air flow through the filter train B. 1) Consultation with the TSC if the Hydrogen Recombiners CANNOT maintain H2 concentration less than 3.5% 2) High Containment temperature C. 1) Any H2 concentration when the Hydrogen Recombiners are NOT available
REVISION NO.:                PROCEDURE TITLE:
: 2) Restricted air flow through the filter train D. 1) Any H2 concentration when the Hydrogen Recombiners are NOT available
41A                      INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE NO.:
: 2) High Containment temperature 181 ( ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
1-0640030                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 7.0    OPERATOR ACTIONS 7.1  Immediate Operator Actions
Level Tier # Group # KIA # Importance Rating Containment Iodine Removal: High temperature in the filter system Proposed Question:
: 1. None 7.2 Subsequent Operations Actions:
SRO 91 RO 027 A2.01 Unit 2 has been in a Large Break LOCA for 48 hours with the following conditions:
INSTRUCTIONS                          CONTINGENCY ACTIONS CAUTION
* Containment Temperature is 120&deg;F. SRO 2 2 3.3 1) As Unit Supervisor, in accordance with 2-EOP-03 LOCA, when would you direct starting of Hydrogen Purge fans HVE-7A and lor HVE-7B? 2) If the Hydrogen Purge fans were started the following Annunciator illuminates, CONT CNTMTI H 2 PURGE ADSORBER TEMP HIGH X-1 What would be the most likely cause of this alarm? A. 1) Consultation with the TSC if the Hydrogen Recombiners CANNOT maintain H2 concentration less than 3.5% 2) Restricted air flow through the filter train B. 1) Consultation with the TSC if the Hydrogen Recombiners CANNOT maintain H2 concentration less than 3.5% 2) High Containment temperature C. 1) Any H2 concentration when the Hydrogen Recombiners are NOT available  
          ..*   If affected ICW header indicates 0 pressure, the standby pump discharge valve must be throttled prior to starting.
: 2) Restricted air flow through the filter train D. 1) Any H2 concentration when the Hydrogen Recombiners are NOT available  
          *    ~1    In Modes 1 through 3 (SIAS NOT blocked), when two ICW Pumps are electrically aligned AND operating on the same electrical bus, the respective Off-site Power Source must be declared out of service, as two ICW Pumps could affect the load shed and resequencing loads b the Diesel. REFER to Technical S ecifications 3.8.1.1.a.
: 2) High Containment temperature 181 Proposed Answer: A Explanation (Optional):
(  1. If
A. Correct B. Incorrect; High containment temperature will not bring in alarm. Alarm setpoint is 200&deg;F. Outside air makeup should cool the filter train for any containment temperature.
        !f an ICW pump indicates extremely high            1.
amps, OR an ICW pump trips unexpectedly, Then:
A.      ,-r2
                  ~2     !f the health and safety of the If public is in jeopardy, Then A TTEM PT ONLY ONE restart.
ATTEMPT B.       Place the pump control switch to PULL TO LOCK position.
C.      Then align the standby pump to the             C. If
                                                                      !f an ICW pump cannot be header, lAW 1-NOP-21.03A(8)(C),                    restored to a header, Then:
1A(1 8)(1 C) Intake Cooling Water System Operation, and start the                     1. Reduce MVARS to standby pump.                                            minimum.
: 2. Monitor Main Generator Gas Temperatures.
Refer to 1-0NP-53.01, Main Generator.
: 3. Reduce turbine load as needed to within the heat removal capability
(                                                                           of the TCW system.
                                                                                                    ~
  ~------------------------------------------------------------~ ~
 
Examination Outline Cross-reference:                       Level            RO        SRO Tier#
Tier #                     2 Group #                     2 KIA #             027A2.01 027 A2.01 Importance Rating           3.3 Containment Iodine Removal: High temperature in the filter system Proposed Question:                 SRO 91 Unit 2 has been in a Large Break LOCA for 48 hours with the following conditions:
* Containment Temperature is 120&deg;F.
: 1) As Unit Supervisor, in accordance with 2-EOP-03 LOCA, when would you direct starting of Hydrogen Purge fans HVE-7A and lor HVE-7B?
: 2) If the Hydrogen Purge fans were started the following Annunciator illuminates, CONT CNTMTI H2 PURGE ADSORBER TEMP
(                                  HIGH X-1 What would be the most likely cause of this alarm?
A. 1) Consultation with the TSC if the Hydrogen Recombiners CANNOT maintain H2 concentration less than 3.5%
: 2) Restricted air flow through the filter train B. 1) Consultation with the TSC if the Hydrogen Recombiners CANNOT maintain H2 concentration less than 3.5%
: 2) High Containment temperature C. 1) Any H2 concentration when the Hydrogen Recombiners are NOT available
: 2) Restricted air flow through the filter train D. 1) Any H2 concentration when the Hydrogen Recombiners are NOT available
: 2) High Containment temperature
(
181
 
Proposed Answer:             A Explanation (Optional):
A. Correct B. Incorrect; High containment temperature will not bring in alarm. Alarm setpoint is 200&deg;F.
Outside air makeup should cool the filter train for any containment temperature.
C. Incorrect; containment combustible gas control safety function is met at 0.5% hydrogen.
C. Incorrect; containment combustible gas control safety function is met at 0.5% hydrogen.
Placing Hydrogen purge in service is last resort Hydrogen concentration control. D. Incorrect; both part 1 and part 2. Technical Reference( s): 2-EOP-03 LOCA (Attach if not previously provided)  
Placing Hydrogen purge in service is last resort Hydrogen concentration control.
-------------------------
D. Incorrect; both part 1 and part 2.
2-ARP-01-X1 Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Technical Reference( s):
Learning Objective:
Reference(s):      2-EOP-03 LOCA                                                                       (Attach if not previously provided) 2-ARP-01-X1
_0-,-7---,0_2_82_4_-_09--,,_0_7_0_26_0_2_-3_2
( Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
___ (As available)
Learning Objective:       _0~7-,,0_2...::..82.:.::..4-,--...::..09-,,--,,-,0,-,-7-,-0=26,,-0,--2_-3.:....:2,,--__
Question Source: Bank# Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) ------x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 5 ---55.43 5 ---Comments:
_0-,-7---,0_2_82_4_-_09--,,_0_7_0_26_0_2_-3_2_ _ _ (As available)                            ava ila b Ie)
x 182 ( ( Proposed Answer: A Explanation (Optional):
Question Source:             Bank#
A. Correct B. Incorrect; High containment temperature will not bring in alarm. Alarm setpoint is 200&deg;F. Outside air makeup should cool the filter train for any containment temperature.
Bank #
C. Incorrect; containment combustible gas control safety function is met at 0.5% hydrogen.
Modified Bank #                                                                     (Note changes or attach parent)
Placing Hydrogen purge in service is last resort Hydrogen concentration control. D. Incorrect; both part 1 and part 2. Technical Reference(s):
New                                                x Question History:             Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:     Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis                                                                   x 10 CFR Part 55 Content:       55.41               ---
2-EOP-03 LOCA (Attach if not previously provided) 2-ARP-01-X1 Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
5 55.43               -
Learning Objective: (As ava i la b Ie) Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) -----x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 5 ---55.43 5 ---Comments:
Comments:
x 182
(
( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: PROCEDURE NO.: 38 of 72 26 LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT 2-EOP-03 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 4.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS (continued)
182
INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS o 50. Operate H2 Purge System OPERATE the H2 purge system as directed by the Technical Support Center. REFER TO Appendix N, Hydrogen Purge System Operation.
 
o 51. Reset Safety Systems PERFORM BOTH of the following:
REVISION NO.:         PROCEDURE TITLE:                             PAGE:
26                    LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT
( PROCEDURE NO.:
38 of 72 2-EOP-03                           ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 4.0   OPERATOR ACTIONS (continued)
INSTRUCTIONS                         CONTINGENCY ACTIONS o     50. Operate H2 Purge System OPERATE the H2 purge system as directed by the Technical Support Center.
REFER TO Appendix N, Hydrogen Purge System Operation.
o     51. Reset Safety Systems PERFORM BOTH of the following:
A. ENSURE proper actuation of ESFAS components.
A. ENSURE proper actuation of ESFAS components.
REFER TO Tables 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 (SIAS, CIAS, CSAS, RAS and MSIS) AS NECESSARY.
REFER TO Tables 1,2,3,4 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 (SIAS, CIAS, CSAS, RAS and
B. If ANY ESFAS signals have actuated and are no longer needed, Then RESET the appropriate signals. REFER TO Appendix P, Restoration of Components Actuated by ESFAS. ( ( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 26 LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT 38 of 72 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-EOP-03 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 4.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS (continued)
(                MSIS) AS NECESSARY.
INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS o 50. Operate H2 Purge System OPERATE the H2 purge system as directed by the Technical Support Center. REFER TO Appendix N, Hydrogen Purge System Operation.
B. 11 ANY ESFAS signals have If actuated and are no longer needed, Then RESET the appropriate signals.
o 51. Reset Safety Systems PERFORM BOTH of the following:
REFER TO Appendix P, Restoration of Components Actuated by ESFAS.
A. ENSURE proper actuation of ESFAS components.
(
REFER TO Tables 1,2,3,4 and 5 (SIAS, CIAS, CSAS, RAS and MSIS) AS NECESSARY.
 
B. 11 ANY ESFAS signals have actuated and are no longer needed, Then RESET the appropriate signals. REFER TO Appendix P, Restoration of Components Actuated by ESFAS.
REVISION NO.:       PROCEDURE II"'I       TITLE:
REVISION NO.: II"'I JRETITLE:
JRETITLE:                                  IPAGE:
I PAGE: 26 PROCEDURE NO.: LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT 68 of 72 2-EOP-03 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 11 of 11) 9. CONTAINMENT COMBUSTIBLE GAS CONTROL SAFETY ACCEPTANCE FUNCTION CRITERIA CHECK -..j I A. Hydrogen Less than 0.5% I I I I I I Concentration OR B. Hydrogen ALL available I I I I I I I Recombiners operating AND Hydrogen Less Than 3.5% I I I I I I I .. Concentration
26                     LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT 68 of 72 PROCEDURE NO.:
; OR I C. Hydrogen Purge As recommended I I I I I I I System by the TSC END OF SAFETY FUNCTION 9 INITIALS RO / SRO / STA I I I I I I I END OF ATTACHMENT 1 ( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 26 PROCEDURE NO.: LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT 68 of 72 2-EOP-03 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 11 of 11) 9. CONTAINMENT COMBUSTIBLE GAS CONTROL SAFETY ACCEPTANCE FUNCTION CRITERIA CHECK -) A. Hydrogen Less than 0.5% I I I I I I I Concentration OR B. Hydrogen ALL available I I I I I I I Recombiners operating AND Hydrogen Less Than 3.5% I I I I I I I ( Concentration OR C. Hydrogen Purge As recommended I I I I I I I System by the TSC END OF SAFETY FUNCTION 9 INITIALS RO / SRO / STA I I I I I I I END OF ATTACHMENT 1
2-EOP-03                           ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 11 of 11)
ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE DEVICE: TR-25-3 Point 2 (TE-25-58)
: 9. CONTAINMENT COMBUSTIBLE GAS CONTROL SAFETY                       ACCEPTANCE FUNCTION                       CRITERIA             CHECK -..j
Point 3 (TE-25-59)
                                                                                -)
Point 4 (TE-25-60)
  ~
Point 5 (TE-25-61)
A. Hydrogen                   Less than 0.5%         I I I I I     I  I Concentration OR B. Hydrogen                     ALL available operating I I I I I I       I Recombiners AND Hydrogen                   Less Than 3.5%         I I I I I     I   I Concentration
.. ~
        ;                                             OR I
C. Hydrogen Purge             As recommended         I I I I I     I   I System                     by the TSC END OF SAFETY FUNCTION 9 INITIALS                         RO / SRO / STA         I I I I I     I   I END OF ATTACHMENT 1
(
 
REVISION:             PROCEDURE TITLE:                                                             PANEL:
OA                    ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE                                            x PROCEDURE NO:                                                                                       WINDOW:
2-ARP-01-X 1                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 CONT CNTMTI H2 PURGE ADSORBER TEMP HIGH X-1 J
DEVICE:                         LOCATION:                                  SETPOINT:
TR-25-3                         HVCB Panel                                Multiple UltiPle Inputs Point 2 (TE-25-58)              TR-25-3                                    200&deg;F rising (high)
Point 3 (TE-25-59)              TR-25-3                                    200&deg;F rising (high)
Point 4 (TE-25-60)              TR-25-3                                    200&deg;F rising (high)
Point 5 (TE-25-61)              TR-25-3                                    200&deg;F rising (high)
ALARM CONFIRMATION:
ALARM CONFIRMATION:
LOCATION:
: 1. TR-25-3 Points 2 through 5 (Cont Cntmt H2 Purge Sys HVE-7N7B HVE-7A/7B Charcoal Adsorb) indicate 200&deg;F and rising.
HVCB Panel TR-25-3 TR-25-3 TR-25-3 TR-25-3 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 CONT CNTMTI H 2 PURGE ADSORBER TEMP HIGH SETPOINT:
: 2. TR-25-3 Point 6 (TE-25-57, Cont Cntmt H2 Purge Sys HVE-7N7B HVE-7A/7B After Charcoal Adsorb) indicates 200&deg;F and rising.
J UltiPle Inputs 200&deg;F rising (high) 200&deg;F rising (high) 200&deg;F rising (high) 200&deg;F rising (high) X-1 1. TR-25-3 Points 2 through 5 (Cont Cntmt H2 Purge Sys HVE-7N7B Charcoal Adsorb) indicate 200&deg;F and rising. 2. TR-25-3 Point 6 (TE-25-57, Cont Cntmt H2 Purge Sys HVE-7N7B After Charcoal Adsorb) indicates 200&deg;F and rising. OPERATOR ACTIONS:
OPERATOR ACTIONS:
* 1. VERIFY proper operation of Continuous Containment/H 2 Purge, as follows:
(                                                    NOTE
* HVE-7A or HVE-7B, Continuous Containment/H 2 Purge Exhaust Fan, RUNNING.
          ** High charcoal temperatures are postulated to occur only as a result of restricted air flow rates less than 55 cfm.
* FCV-25-20, Cont Cntmt/H2 Purge Exhaust Isol, OPEN.
* Iodine desorption occurs at approximately 300&deg;F and charcoal ignition approximately 640&deg;F.
* FCV-25-21, Cont Cntmt/H 2 Purge Exhaust Isol, OPEN.
: 1. VERIFY proper operation of Continuous Containment/H ContainmentlH 2 Purge, as follows:
* HVE-7A or HVE-7B, Continuous ContainmentlH Containment/H 2 Purge Exhaust Fan, RUNNING.
* FCV-25-20, Cont CntmtlH Cntmt/H22 Purge Exhaust Isol, OPEN.
* FCV-25-21, Cont CntmtlH Cntmt/H 2 Purge Exhaust Isol, OPEN.
* FCV-25-9, Control Vlv Filter Inlet, OPEN.
* FCV-25-9, Control Vlv Filter Inlet, OPEN.
* FCV-25-35, Cont Cntmt/H 2 Purge Exhaust Valve, OPEN.
* FCV-25-35, Cont CntmtlH Cntmt/H 2 Purge Exhaust Valve, OPEN.
* FCV-25-28, Control Vlv Bypass, CLOSED.
* FCV-25-28, Control Vlv Bypass, CLOSED.
* UR-25-1, Point 6, HVAC/CNTMT Purge Flow/Pressure Recorder indicates greater than 55 cfm. 2. !f the problem is NOT immediately corrected, Then STOP the running H2 Purge Exhaust Fan. 3. NOTIFY Chemistry.
* UR-25-1, Point 6, HVAC/CNTMT Purge Flow/Pressure Recorder indicates greater than 55 cfm.
CAUSES: This annunciator may be caused by low air flow through the charcoal adsorber or by temperature instrumentation malfunction.  
: 2. !f the problem is NOT immediately corrected, Then STOP the running H2 Purge Exhaust Fan.
: 3. NOTIFY Chemistry.
CAUSES: This annunciator may be caused by low air flow through the charcoal adsorber or by temperature instrumentation malfunction.


==REFERENCES:==
==REFERENCES:==
: 1. CWD 2998-B-327 sheets 480 and 1145 2. P&ID 2998-G-879 sheet 3 3. TEDB ( REVISION:
: 1. CWD 2998-B-327 sheets 480 and 1145
PROCEDURE TITLE: PANEL: OA ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE x PROCEDURE NO: WINDOW: 2-ARP-01-X 1 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 CONT CNTMTI H 2 PURGE ADSORBER TEMP HIGH DEVICE: TR-25-3 Point 2 (TE-25-58)
: 2. P&ID 2998-G-879 sheet 3
Point 3 (TE-25-59)
: 3. TEDB
Point 4 (TE-25-60)
 
Point 5 (TE-25-61)
( Examination Outline Cross-reference:                     Level                              RO                      SRO Tier #                                                    2 Group #                                                    2 KIA #                              029G2.4.50 Importance Rating                                          4.0 Containment Purge System Ability to verify system alarm setpoints and operate controls identified in the alarm response manual.
ALARM CONFIRMATION:
Proposed Question:                   SRO 92 Unit 1 is in Mode 3 performing a Containment (Cntmt) Purge using HVE-8A when the following alarm is received:
LOCATION:
CNTMT VACUUM HIGH P-1 Which ONE of the following:
HVCB Panel TR-25-3 TR-25-3 TR-25-3 TR-25-3 SETPOINT:
: 1) Operator actions should be taken and
Multiple Inputs 200&deg;F rising (high) 200&deg;F rising (high) 200&deg;F rising (high) 200&deg;F rising (high) X-1 1. TR-25-3 Points 2 through 5 (Cont Cntmt H2 Purge Sys HVE-7A/7B Charcoal Adsorb) indicate 200&deg;F and rising. 2. TR-25-3 Point 6 (TE-25-57, Cont Cntmt H2 Purge Sys HVE-7A/7B After Charcoal Adsorb) indicates 200&deg;F and rising. OPERATOR ACTIONS: NOTE
: 2) Identifies the Technical Specification bases for Containment pressure?
* High charcoal temperatures are postulated to occur only as a result of restricted air flow rates less than 55 cfm.
STOP HVE-8A Cntmt Purge fan and:
* Iodine desorption occurs at approximately 300&deg;F and charcoal ignition approximately 640&deg;F. 1. VERIFY proper operation of Continuous ContainmentlH 2 Purge, as follows:
(
* HVE-7A or HVE-7B, Continuous ContainmentlH 2 Purge Exhaust Fan, RUNNING.
A. 1) manually OPEN FCV-25-1, 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves.
* FCV-25-20, Cont CntmtlH 2 Purge Exhaust Isol, OPEN.
: 2) Limit peak containment pressure during steam line break accident conditions. Limit negative pressure differential with respect to annulus atmosphere to prevent Containment structure from exceeding design negative pressure.
* FCV-25-21, Cont CntmtlH 2 Purge Exhaust Isol, OPEN.
B. 1) verify FCV-25-1, 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves have CLOSED
* FCV-25-9, Control Vlv Filter Inlet, OPEN.
: 2) Limit peak containment pressure during steam line break accident conditions. Limit negative pressure differential with respect to annulus atmosphere to prevent Containment structure from exceeding design negative pressure.
* FCV-25-35, Cont CntmtlH 2 Purge Exhaust Valve, OPEN.
C. 1) manually OPEN FCV-25-1, 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves.
* FCV-25-28, Control Vlv Bypass, CLOSED.
: 2) Limit peak containment pressure during loss of coolant accident conditions. Limit negative pressure differential with respect to outside atmosphere to prevent Containment structure from exceeding design negative pressure.
* UR-25-1, Point 6, HVAC/CNTMT Purge Flow/Pressure Recorder indicates greater than 55 cfm. 2. !f the problem is NOT immediately corrected, Then STOP the running H2 Purge Exhaust Fan. 3. NOTIFY Chemistry.
D. 1) verify FCV-25-1, 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves have CLOSED.
CAUSES: This annunciator may be caused by low air flow through the charcoal adsorber or by temperature instrumentation malfunction.
: 2) Limit peak containment pressure during loss of coolant accident conditions. Limit negative pressure differential with respect to outside atmosphere to prevent Containment structure from exceeding design negative pressure.
175
 
Proposed Answer:            B Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect: manually opening FCV-25-1,2 and 3 can not be performed from the control room. Control room INDICATION only. These valves operate from starting and stopping the Purge fans HVE-8A (B). T.S. basis is correct B. Correct: HVE-8A should have automatically stopped on negative pressure. When manually stopped, verification of makeup valves closing is performed.
C. Incorrect: manually opening FCV-25-1,2 and 3 can not be performed from the control room. T.S. basis D. Incorrect: T.S. basis Technical Reference(
Reference(s):
s):    1-ARP-0 1-P 1 1-ARP-01-P1                                (Attach if not previously provided) 0711602 Containment and Shield Building Ventilation Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
(
Learning Objective:        _PS_L_O_P_S_S_Y_S_60_2_-_16_LP_C        _
_P_S_L_O_P-,,-S_S_Y---,-S_6_0_2-_1_6_L_P_C___
_ (As available)
Question Source:            Bank #
Modified Bank #                            (Note changes or attach parent)
New                            x Question History:            Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:    Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis                          x 10 CFR Part 55 Content:      55.41        10 55.43        5- -
Comments:
176


==REFERENCES:==
SECTION NO.:                                                                         PAGE:
: 1. CWD 2998-B-327 sheets 480 and 1145 2. P&ID 2998-G-879 sheet 3 3. TEDB Examination Outline Cross-reference:
TITLE:       TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6                 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04                           4 oJ of 10
Level Tier # Group # KIA # RO SRO 2 2 029G2.4.50 Importance Rating 4.0 Containment Purge System Ability to verify system alarm setpoints and operate controls identified in the alarm response manual. Proposed Question:
( REVISION NO.:                           CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 5                               ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 3/4.6         CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
SRO 92 Unit 1 is in Mode 3 performing a Containment (Cntmt) Purge using HVE-8A when the following alarm is received:
BASES (continued) 3/4.6.1       CONTAINMENT VESSEL (continued) 3/4.6.1.4     INTERNAL PRESSURE The limitations on containment internal pressure ensure that 1) the containment structural is prevented from exceeding its design negative pressure differential with respect to the annulus atmosphere of 0.70 psi and 2) the containment peak pressure does not exceed the design pressure of 44 psig during steam line break accident conditions.
Which ONE of the following:
CNTMT VACUUM HIGH P-1 1) Operator actions should be taken and 2) Identifies the Technical Specification bases for Containment pressure?
STOP HVE-8A Cntmt Purge fan and: A. 1) manually OPEN FCV-25-1, 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves. 2) Limit peak containment pressure during steam line break accident conditions.
Limit negative pressure differential with respect to annulus atmosphere to prevent Containment structure from exceeding design negative pressure.
B. 1) verify FCV-25-1, 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves have CLOSED 2) Limit peak containment pressure during steam line break accident conditions.
Limit negative pressure differential with respect to annulus atmosphere to prevent Containment structure from exceeding design negative pressure.
C. 1) manually OPEN FCV-25-1, 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves. 2) Limit peak containment pressure during loss of coolant accident conditions.
Limit negative pressure differential with respect to outside atmosphere to prevent Containment structure from exceeding design negative pressure.
D. 1) verify FCV-25-1, 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves have CLOSED. 2) Limit peak containment pressure during loss of coolant accident conditions.
Limit negative pressure differential with respect to outside atmosphere to prevent Containment structure from exceeding design negative pressure.
175 ( ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Level Tier # Group # KIA # RO SRO 2 2 029G2.4.50 Importance Rating 4.0 Containment Purge System Ability to verify system alarm setpoints and operate controls identified in the alarm response manual. Proposed Question:
SRO 92 Unit 1 is in Mode 3 performing a Containment (Cntmt) Purge using HVE-8A when the following alarm is received:
Which ONE of the following:
CNTMT VACUUM HIGH P-1 1) Operator actions should be taken and 2) Identifies the Technical Specification bases for Containment pressure?
STOP HVE-8A Cntmt Purge fan and: A. 1) manually OPEN FCV-25-1, 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves. 2) Limit peak containment pressure during steam line break accident conditions.
Limit negative pressure differential with respect to annulus atmosphere to prevent Containment structure from exceeding design negative pressure.
B. 1) verify FCV-25-1, 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves have CLOSED 2) Limit peak containment pressure during steam line break accident conditions.
Limit negative pressure differential with respect to annulus atmosphere to prevent Containment structure from exceeding design negative pressure.
C. 1) manually OPEN FCV-25-1, 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves. 2) Limit peak containment pressure during loss of coolant accident conditions.
Limit negative pressure differential with respect to outside atmosphere to prevent Containment structure from exceeding design negative pressure.
D. 1) verify FCV-25-1, 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves have CLOSED. 2) Limit peak containment pressure during loss of coolant accident conditions.
Limit negative pressure differential with respect to outside atmosphere to prevent Containment structure from exceeding design negative pressure.
175 Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect:
manually opening FCV-25-1,2 and 3 can not be performed from the control room. Control room INDICATION only. These valves operate from starting and stopping the Purge fans HVE-8A (B). T.S. basis is correct B. Correct: HVE-8A should have automatically stopped on negative pressure.
When manually stopped, verification of makeup valves closing is performed.
C. Incorrect:
manually opening FCV-25-1,2 and 3 can not be performed from the control room. T.S. basis D. Incorrect:
T.S. basis Technical Reference( s): 1-ARP-01-P1 (Attach if not previously provided)
-------------------------
0711602 Containment and Shield Building Ventilation Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
_P_S_L_O_P-,,-S_S_Y---,-S_6_0_2-_1_6_L_P_C
__ (As available)
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 ----''----
55.43 5 ---Comments:
x 176 ( Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect:
manually opening FCV-25-1,2 and 3 can not be performed from the control room. Control room INDICATION only. These valves operate from starting and stopping the Purge fans HVE-8A (B). T.S. basis is correct B. Correct: HVE-8A should have automatically stopped on negative pressure.
When manually stopped, verification of makeup valves closing is performed.
C. Incorrect:
manually opening FCV-25-1,2 and 3 can not be performed from the control room. T.S. basis D. Incorrect:
T.S. basis Technical Reference(s):
1-ARP-0 1-P 1 (Attach if not previously provided) 0711602 Containment and Shield Building Ventilation Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
_PS_L_O_P_S_S_Y_S_60_2_-_16_LP_C
___ (As available)
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 ---'---55.43 5 ---Comments:
x 176 SECTION NO.: TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE: 3/4.6 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 4 oJ 10 REVISION NO.: 5 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.6.1 CONTAINMENT VESSEL (continued) 3/4.6.1.4 INTERNAL PRESSURE The limitations on containment internal pressure ensure that 1) the containment structural is prevented from exceeding its design negative pressure differential with respect to the annulus atmosphere of 0.70 psi and 2) the containment peak pressure does not exceed the design pressure of 44 psig during steam line break accident conditions.
The maximum peak pressure obtained from a steam line break accident is 41.6 psig. The limit of 2.4 psig for initial positive containment pressure will limit the total pressure to 44.0 psig which is the design pressure and is consistent with the accident analyses.
The maximum peak pressure obtained from a steam line break accident is 41.6 psig. The limit of 2.4 psig for initial positive containment pressure will limit the total pressure to 44.0 psig which is the design pressure and is consistent with the accident analyses.
3/4.6.1.5 AIR TEMPERATURE The limitation on containment air temperature ensures that the containment vessel temperature does not exceed the design temperature of 264&deg;F during LOCA conditions.
3/4.6.1.5     AIR TEMPERATURE The limitation on containment air temperature ensures that the
The containment temperature limit is consistent with the accident analyses.
(              containment vessel temperature does not exceed the design temperature of 264&deg;F during LOCA conditions. The containment temperature limit is consistent with the accident analyses.
3/4.6.1.6 CONTAINMENT VESSEL STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY The limitation ensures that the structural integrity of the containment steel vessel will be maintained comparable to the original design standards for the life of the facility.
3/4.6.1.6     CONTAINMENT VESSEL STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY The limitation ensures that the structural integrity of the containment steel vessel will be maintained comparable to the original design standards for the life of the facility. Structural integrity is required to ensure that the vessel will withstand the maximum pressure of 39.6 psig in the event of the limiting design basis loss of coolant accident. A visual inspection in accordance with the Containment Leakage Rate Testing Program is sufficient to demonstrate this capability.
Structural integrity is required to ensure that the vessel will withstand the maximum pressure of 39.6 psig in the event of the limiting design basis loss of coolant accident.
 
A visual inspection in accordance with the Containment Leakage Rate Testing Program is sufficient to demonstrate this capability. ( ( SECTION NO.: TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE: 3/4.6 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 4 of 10 REVISION NO.: 5 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
( Examination Outline Cross-reference:                     Level                              RO                      SRO Tier Tier# #                                                    2 Group #                                                    2 KIA #                              029G2.4.50 Importance Rating                                          4.0 Containment Purge System Ability to verify system alarm setpoints and operate controls identified in the alarm response manual.
BASES (continued) 3/4.6.1 CONTAINMENT VESSEL (continued) 3/4.6.1.4 INTERNAL PRESSURE 3/4.6.1.5 3/4.6.1.6 The limitations on containment internal pressure ensure that 1) the containment structural is prevented from exceeding its design negative pressure differential with respect to the annulus atmosphere of 0.70 psi and 2) the containment peak pressure does not exceed the design pressure of 44 psig during steam line break accident conditions.
Proposed Question:                  SRO 92 Unit 1 is in Mode 3 performing a Containment (Cntmt) Purge using HVE-SA                    HVE-8A when the following alarm is received:
The maximum peak pressure obtained from a steam line break accident is 41.6 psig. The limit of 2.4 psig for initial positive containment pressure will limit the total pressure to 44.0 psig which is the design pressure and is consistent with the accident analyses.
CNTMT VACUUM HIGH P-1 Which ONE of the following:
AIR TEMPERATURE The limitation on containment air temperature ensures that the containment vessel temperature does not exceed the design temperature of 264&deg;F during LOCA conditions.
: 1) Operator actions should be taken and
The containment temperature limit is consistent with the accident analyses.
: 2) what possible consequence could occur if Operator:          Operator ctions did NOT occur?
CONTAINMENT VESSEL STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY The limitation ensures that the structural integrity of the containment steel vessel will be maintained comparable to the original design standards for the life of the facility.
(
Structural integrity is required to ensure that the vessel will withstand the maximum pressure of 39.6 psig in the event of the limiting design basis loss of coolant accident.
STOP HVE-8A HVE-SA Cntmt Purge fan and:
A visual inspection in accordance with the Containment Leakage Rate Testing Program is sufficient to demonstrate this capability.
A. 1) manually OPEN FCV-25-1    FCV-25-1, and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves.
Examination Outline Cross-reference:
J
Level Tier# Group # KIA # RO SRO 2 2 029G2.4.50 Importance Rating 4.0 Containment Purge System Ability to verify system alarm setpoints and operate controls identified in the alarm response manual. Proposed Question:
: 2) Containment internal pre ure could exceed the Technical Specification limit of - 4.0 in. H2 0.
SRO 92 Unit 1 is in Mode 3 performing a Containment (Cntmt) Purge using HVE-8A when the following alarm is received:
B.                 FCV-25-1, 2 d 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves have CLOSED
Which ONE of the following:
: 1) verify FCV-25-1        J
CNTMT VACUUM HIGH P-1 1) Operator actions should be taken and 2) what possible consequence could occur if Operator:
: 2) Containment inter    inter: al pressure could exceed the Technical Specification limit of - 0.7 PS .
ctions did NOT occur? STOP HVE-8A Cntmt Purge fan and: A. 1) manually OPEN FCV-25-1 J and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves. 2) Containment internal pre ure could exceed the Technical Specification limit of -4.0 in. H 2 0. B. 1) verify FCV-25-1 J 2 d 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves have CLOSED 2) Containment inter: al pressure could exceed the Technical Specification limit of -0.7 PS . C. 1) manually OR N FCV-25-1 J 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves. 2) Containm t internal pressure could exceed the Technical Specification limit of -.7 PSIG. D. 1) verif CV-25-1 J 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves have CLOSED. 2) Co ainment internal pressure could exceed the Technical Specification Ii it of -4.0 in. H 2 0. 183 ( ( ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
C. 1) manually OR N FCV-25-1    FCV-25-1, 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves.
Level Tier # Group # KIA # RO SRO 2 2 029G2.4.50 Importance Rating 4.0 Containment Purge System Ability to verify system alarm setpoints and operate controls identified in the alarm response manual. Proposed Question:
J
SRO 92 Unit 1 is in Mode 3 performing a Containment (Cntmt) Purge using HVE-SA when the following alarm is received:
: 2) Containm t internal pressure could exceed the Technical Specification limit of - .7 PSIG.
Which ONE of the following:
D.                   CV-25-1, 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves have CLOSED.
CNTMT VACUUM HIGH P-1 1) Operator actions should be taken and 2) what possible consequence could occur if Operator ctions did NOT occur? STOP HVE-SA Cntmt Purge fan and: A. 1) manually OPEN FCV-25-1, and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves. 2) Containment internal pre ure could exceed the Technical Specification limit of -4.0 in. H 2 0. B. 1) verify FCV-25-1, 2 d 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves have CLOSED 2) Containment inter al pressure could exceed the Technical Specification limit of -0.7 PS C. 1) manually OR N FCV-25-1, 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves. 2) Containm t internal pressure could exceed the Technical Specification limit of -.7 PSIG. D. 1) verif>;: CV-25-1, 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves have CLOSED. 2) Co tainment internal pressure could exceed the Technical Specification Ii it of -4.0 in. H 2 0. 1S3 Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional):
verif>;: CV-25-1
A. Incorrect:
: 1) verif                  J
manually opening FCV-25-1,2 and 3 can not be performed from the control room. Control room INDICATION only. These valves operate from starting and stopping the Purge fans HVE-8A (B). Containment internal pressure of -4.0 in. H 2 0 is not correct but plausible due to annunciator setpoint is -4.0 in. H 2 0 B. Correct: HVE-8A should have automatically stopped on negative pressure.
: 2) Co tainment ainment internal pressure could exceed the Technical Specification Ii it of - 4.0 in. H2 0.
When manually stopped, verification of makeup valves closing is performed.
(
C. Incorrect:
183 1S3
manually opening FCV-25-1,2 and 3 can not be performed from the control room. Control room INDICATION only. These valves operate from starting and stopping the Purge fans HVE-8A (B). D. Incorrect:
 
Containment internal pressure of -4.0 in. H 2 0 is not correct but plausible due to annunciator setpoint is -4.0 in. H 2 0 Technical Reference(s):
Proposed Answer:              B Explanation (Optional):
1-ARP-01-P1 (Attach if not previously provided)
A. Incorrect: manually opening FCV-25-1,2 and 3 can not be performed from the control room. Control room INDICATION only. These valves operate from starting and stopping the Purge fans HVE-8A (B). Containment internal pressure of -4.0 in. H2 0 is not correct but plausible due to annunciator setpoint is -4.0 in. H2 0 B. Correct: HVE-8A should have automatically stopped on negative pressure. When manually stopped, verification of makeup valves closing is performed.
-------------------------
C. Incorrect: manually opening FCV-25-1,2 and 3 can not be performed from the control room. Control room INDICATION only. These valves operate from starting and stopping the Purge fans HVE-8A (B).
0711602 Containment and Shield Building Ventilation Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
D. Incorrect: Containment internal pressure of -4.0 in. H2 0 is not correct but plausible due to annunciator setpoint is -4.0 in. H2 0 Technical Reference(s):      1-ARP-01-P1                                            (Attach if not previously provided) 0711602 Containment and
Learning Objective:
(                              Shield Building Ventilation Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
P'-C-'=--__ (As ava i lab Ie) Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) -----x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 ---55.43 5 ---Comments:
Learning Objective:        _P,-S~L=-=O,-P-=S--,S~Y:....:S~60=.c::2~-,-16=-=L PSL OPS SYS 602-16 LPC
x 184 ( ( Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional):
                              - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -P'-C-'=--__-------
A. Incorrect:
available)
manually opening FCV-25-1,2 and 3 can not be performed from the control room. Control room INDICATION only. These valves operate from starting and stopping the Purge fans HVE-8A (B). Containment internal pressure of -4.0 in. H 2 0 is not correct but plausible due to annunciator setpoint is -4.0 in. H 2 0 B. Correct: HVE-8A should have automatically stopped on negative pressure.
(As ava i lab Ie)
When manually stopped, verification of makeup valves closing is performed.
Question Source:             Bank #
C. Incorrect:
Modified Bank #                                        (Note changes or attach parent)
manually opening FCV-25-1,2 and 3 can not be performed from the control room. Control room INDICATION only. These valves operate from starting and stopping the Purge fans HVE-8A (B). D. Incorrect:
New                                    x Question History:             Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:    Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis                                        x 10 CFR Part 55 Content:     55.41          -
Containment internal pressure of -4.0 in. H 2 0 is not correct but plausible due to annunciator setpoint is -4.0 in. H 2 0 Technical Reference(s):
10--   -
1-ARP-01-P1 (Attach if not previously provided)
55.43          --
--------------------------
5 --    -
0711602 Containment and Shield Building Ventilation Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Comments:
Learning Objective:
(
PSL OPS SYS 602-16 LPC ---------------------------(As available)
184
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) ---------x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 ---55.43 5 ---Comments:
 
x 184 0711602, Rev. t.&#xa9;. __
0711602,      t.&#xa9;. .'__ .**rD~i~t~d;5                          .........................................
FOR
                                                                                                              .--rD~i~t~d*;5***---"'**-*----***-*****-***-*"'***-**'-J 0711602, Rev.
... ,--._--{ Deleted: 4 j ( FCV-25-1, FCV-25-2, FCV-25-3, Containment Purge Makeup Valves These 48" air-operated, fail-closed, butterfly valves are operated from RTGB 106 [HVCB] by the control switches for Containment Purge Exhaust Fans HVE-8A or HVE-8B. Once HVE-8A or HVE-8B is started, and a vacuum of 0.5" water gauge (wg) between containment and ambient air exists, the valves will open. This ensures that unfiltered/un monitored backflow through the makeup air valves will not occur. Once open, the makeup valves seal in, and only close on fan shutdown, loss of instrument air, or CIS. Indication for open and close valve position is provided on RTGB 106 [HVCB). Refer to Figure 7. Leakage testing of containment purge valves is performed in accordance with the Containment Leakage Rate Testing program. Containment Purge Valve Travel Limit Stops
Rev. 1..9..
* Unit 1 Spring Side Restriction on the use of all of the Unit 1 containment purge valves require that travel limit stops be employed for Modes 1, 2, 3, 4 to prevent the valve from going beyond 40 degrees of travel open. This is an FSAR requirement.
FOR  TRAININ6a~~~ooo~~~
This stop is attached to the spring side of the actuator, which is positioned into the spring assembly and pins the travel limit screw at the 40 degrees position, as shown on Figure 9, thereby limiting full open travel. This opening has been designed such that critical valve parts will not be damaged by DBA-LOCA loads and that the valve will tend to close when dynamic forces are introduced.
Page 10 of 84 " .. "'{~D~e~le~te~d:~4~~~~~~=
During refueling operations, it is permissible to allow the travel limit stop, as shown in Figure 10, to be pinned in the full open position, thereby allowing for full open operation.
FOR TRAINING USE ONLY
Any positioning of these stops is performed by I&C Valve group personnel.
                                                                                                      ... ,--._--{ Deleted: 4                                                            j
* Unit 1 Air Side The air side of the containment purge valve actuator has a travel limiting stop as well. Its purpose is to maintain the valve fully open on a loss of instrument air. The valve is opened, and then the travel limit screw is run in to the full open position, with the pin on the screw closest to the handwheel as shown on Figure 10. This allows for maintenance personnel to have a backup safety means of keeping these valves ( ......................................... , 0711602, Rev. 1..9.. .'
( FCV-25-1, FCV-25-2, FCV-25-3, Containment Purge Makeup Valves These 48" air-operated, fail-closed, butterfly valves are operated from RTGB 106
Page 10 of 84 " ..
[HVCB] by the control switches for Containment Purge Exhaust Fans HVE-8A or HVE-8B. Once HVE-8A or HVE-8B is started, and a vacuum of 0.5" water gauge (wg) between containment and ambient air exists, the valves will open. This ensures that unfiltered/un monitored backflow through the makeup air valves will not occur. Once open, the makeup valves seal in, and only close on fan shutdown, loss of instrument air, or CIS. Indication for open and close valve position is provided on RTGB 106 [HVCB).[HVCB].
FOR TRAINING USE ONLY FCV-25-1, FCV-25-2, FCV-25-3, Containment Purge Makeup Valves These 48" air-operated, fail-closed, butterfly valves are operated from RTGB 106 [HVCB] by the control switches for Containment Purge Exhaust Fans HVE-8A or HVE-8B. Once HVE-8A or HVE-8B is started, and a vacuum of 0.5" water gauge (wg) between containment and ambient air exists, the valves will open. This ensures that unfiltered/un monitored backflow through the makeup air valves will not occur. Once open, the makeup valves seal in, and only close on fan shutdown, loss of instrument air, or CIS. Indication for open and close valve position is provided on RTGB 106 [HVCB]. Refer to Figure 7. Leakage testing of containment purge valves is performed in accordance with the Containment Leakage Rate Testing program. Containment Purge Valve Travel Limit Stops
Refer to Figure 7. Leakage testing of containment purge valves is performed in accordance with the Containment Leakage Rate Testing program.
* Unit 1 Spring Side Restriction on the use of all of the Unit 1 containment purge valves require that travel limit stops be employed for Modes 1, 2, 3, 4 to prevent the valve from going beyond 40 degrees of travel open. This is an FSAR requirement.
Containment Purge Valve Travel Limit Stops
This stop is attached to the spring side of the actuator, which is positioned into the spring assembly and pins the travel limit screw at the 40 degrees position, as shown on Figure 9, thereby limiting full open travel. This opening has been designed such that critical valve parts will not be damaged by DBA-LOCA loads and that the valve will tend to close when dynamic forces are introduced.
* Unit 1 Spring Side Restriction on the use of all of the Unit 1 containment purge valves require that travel limit stops be employed for Modes 1, 2, 3, 4 to prevent the valve from going beyond 40 degrees of travel open. This is an FSAR requirement. This stop is attached to the spring side of the actuator, which is positioned into the spring assembly and pins the travel limit screw at the 40 degrees position, as shown on Figure 9, thereby
During refueling operations, it is permissible to allow the travel limit stop, as shown in Figure 10, to be pinned in the full open position, thereby allowing for full open operation.
(     limiting full open travel. This opening has been designed such that critical valve parts will not be damaged by DBA-LOCA loads and that the valve will tend to close when dynamic forces are introduced. During refueling operations, it is permissible to allow the travel limit stop, as shown in Figure 10, to be pinned in the full open position, thereby allowing for full open operation. Any positioning of these stops is performed by I&C Valve group personnel.
* Unit 1 Air Side The air side of the containment purge valve actuator has a travel limiting stop as well. Its purpose is to maintain the valve fully open on a loss of instrument air. The valve is opened, and then the travel limit screw is run in to the full open position, with the pin on the screw closest to the handwheel as shown on Figure 10. This allows for maintenance personnel to have a backup safety means of keeping these valves
 
Rev.l"tL,.
0711602, Rev.                 '{D~i~i:~d:5 * * * * * * * * * ""-"J 1,&sect;. . __ .---rD~5--*"--"---------                                                                                          1 FOR  TRAININ~~~~ 100~~~
Page 11 of 84 """{ Deleted: 44 FOR TRAINING USE ONLY --------{~.Deleted:        ~~~~~~~~~~.
1 open for ductwork and butterfly elastomer inspections in the event of a loss of air.
Any positioning of these stops is performed by I&C Valve group personnel.
Any positioning of these stops is performed by I&C Valve group personnel.
* Unit 1 Air Side The air side of the containment purge valve actuator has a travel limiting stop as well. Its purpose is to maintain the valve fully open on a loss of instrument air. The valve is opened, and then the travel limit screw is run in to the full open position, with the pin on the screw closest to the handwheel as shown on Figure 10. This allows for maintenance personnel to have a backup safety means of keeping these valves 0711602, Rev. 1,&sect;. . __
* Unit 2 Unit 2 travel limit stop is only on the air side of the containment purge valve actuators. Normal on-line configuration is as shown in Figure 11. For maintenance purposes when allowed in refueling or cold shutdown conditions, the travel limit screw may be positioned in as shown in Figure 12. Any positioning of these stops is performed by I&C valve group personnel.
"-"J FOR
Although operations procedures refer to the travel limit stops as jacking stops, at no time should they be "jacked" in against air pressure or spring compression.       In Modes 1, 2, 3, and 4 the containment purge valves have their actuators pinned and control fuses removed because it could not be demonstrated that they would close in the required amount of time on a Containment Isolation Signal.
--------{
Containment Purge Fans, HVE-SA and HVE-S8 The containment purge fans are belt-driven fans that discharge to the plant vent stack.
Deleted: 4 1 open for ductwork and butterfly elastomer inspections in the event of a loss of air. Any positioning of these stops is performed by I&C Valve group personnel.
Each fan is rated for 42,000 cfm at 10.5 inches wg static pressure.
* Unit 2 Unit 2 travel limit stop is only on the air side of the containment purge valve actuators.
(
Normal on-line configuration is as shown in Figure 11. For maintenance purposes when allowed in refueling or cold shutdown conditions, the travel limit screw may be positioned in as shown in Figure 12. Any positioning of these stops is performed by I&C valve group personnel.
                                                                                                  +- .-_.... "-_.(j    Formatted: Indent: Left: OS',                                               0.5",                            i
Although operations procedures refer to the travel limit stops as jacking stops, at no time should they be "jacked" in against air pressure or spring compression.
* Fans HVE-8A / 8B are powered by MCC 1A5/1    1A5 / 1B5 [2A5/2B5]
In Modes 1, 2, 3, and 4 the containment purge valves have their actuators pinned and control fuses removed because it could not be demonstrated that they would close in the required amount of time on a Containment Isolation Signal. Containment Purge Fans, HVE-SA and HVE-S8 The containment purge fans are belt-driven fans that discharge to the plant vent stack. Each fan is rated for 42,000 cfm at 10.5 inches wg static pressure.
[2A5 / 2B5]                                  I, Bulleted + Level: 1 + Aligned at:                                                                   0"           !
* Fans HVE-8A / 8B are powered by MCC 1 A5 / 1 B5 [2A5 / 2B5] The fans are controlled by STOP/START switches that spring return to neutral on RTGB 106 [HVCB]. To start HVE-8A (8B), the following logic must be satisfied:
i + Tab after:                         0.25" + Indent at:                                                         I i 0.25", Tabs:                         0.75", List tab + Not at                                                   i i 0.25"                                                                                                           !
* CIS Train A and B must be reset.
The fans are controlled by STOP/START switches that spring return to neutral on RTGB                            1.....................                 ....................,.....................................................* J 106 [HVCB].
* Containment to annulus differential pressure must not be excessive (PDIS-25-11A and 11 B :s:; 4" wg [9" wg]). +-.-_ .. -_.( Formatted:
To start HVE-8A (8B), the following logic must be satisfied:
Indent: Left: OS', i I Bulleted + Level: 1 + Aligned at: 0" ! i + Tab after: 0.25" + Indent at: I i 0.25", Tabs: 0.75", List tab + Not at i i 0.25" ! 1..................... . ..................  
                                                                                                  ..........~ ---1
., .....................................................*
                                                                                                              --      Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5",                                                                               1
J .. ---1 Formatted:
* CIS Train A and B must be reset.                                                                          Bulleted + Level: 1 + Aligned at: 0" I I    + Tab after: 0.25" + Indent at:                                                                               ,
Indent: Left: 0.5", 1 I Bulleted + Level: 1 + Aligned at: 0" I + Tab after: 0.25" + Indent at: , I 0.25", Tabs: 0.75", List tab + Not at +.. '0.25" :
I 0.25", Tabs: 0.75", List tab + Not at
.... ''''''=< 1 Formatted:
                                                                                                  +..                 0.25"
Indent: Left: OS', ! I I Bulleted + Level: 1 + Aligned at: 0" i + Tab after: 0.25" + Indent at: i i 0.25", Tabs: 0.75", List tab + Not at i 10.25" I ,.--.. -.........
                                                                                                                  '0.25"                                                                                                             :
-...... -......
* Containment to annulus differential pressure must not be excessive (PDIS-                       ~', ~==;;""-="""="""""""""'''''''~                                                                    ....' ' ' =<
... -.... --....... -.-.... ..: ( 0711602, Rev.l"tL,.
                                                                                                                " 1 Formatted: Indent: Left: OS',                                                  0.5",                           !
*********"1 Page 11 of 84 """{ Deleted: 4 FOR TRAINING USE ONLY open for ductwork and butterfly elastomer inspections in the event of a loss of air. Any positioning of these stops is performed by I&C Valve group personnel.
I Bulleted + Level: 1 + Aligned at: 0" i 25-11A and 11 B :"::
* Unit 2 Unit 2 travel limit stop is only on the air side of the containment purge valve actuators.
:s:; 4" wg [9" wg]).                                                              I    + Tab after: 0.25" + Indent at:                                                                               i i 0.25", Tabs: 0.75", List tab + Not at i 0.25" 10.25"
Normal on-line configuration is as shown in Figure 11. For maintenance purposes when allowed in refueling or cold shutdown conditions, the travel limit screw may be positioned in as shown in Figure 12. Any positioning of these stops is performed by I&C valve group personnel.
                                                                                                                                                        -~----                                 ....--         .......-.-......:.
Although operations procedures refer to the travel limit stops as jacking stops, at no time should they be "jacked" in against air pressure or spring compression.
I
In Modes 1, 2, 3, and 4 the containment purge valves have their actuators pinned and control fuses removed because it could not be demonstrated that they would close in the required amount of time on a Containment Isolation Signal. Containment Purge Fans, HVE-SA and HVE-S8 The containment purge fans are belt-driven fans that discharge to the plant vent stack. Each fan is rated for 42,000 cfm at 10.5 inches wg static pressure.
* Fans HVE-8A / 8B are powered by MCC 1A5/1 B5 [2A5/2B5]
The fans are controlled by STOP/START switches that spring return to neutral on RTGB 106 [HVCB]. To start HVE-8A (8B), the following logic must be satisfied:
* CIS Train A and B must be reset.
* Containment to annulus differential pressure must not be excessive (PDIS-25-11A and 11 B :":: 4" wg [9" wg]). .. " j Formatted:
Indent: Left: 0.5", , Bulleted + Level: 1 + Aligned at: 0" + Tab after: 0.25" + Indent at: 0.25", Tabs: 0.75", List tab + Not at 0.25" ........ --Formatted:
Indent: Left: 0.5", Bulleted + Level: 1 + Aligned at: 0" + Tab after: 0.25" + Indent at: 0.25", Tabs: 0.75", List tab + Not at 0.25" " Formatted:
Indent: Left: 0.5", Bulleted + Level: 1 + Aligned at: 0" + Tab after: 0.25" + Indent at: 0.25", Tabs: 0.75", List tab + Not at 0.25" <--, , .............  
,,_ ........................ , ...................... . 
( o ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE PROCEDURE NO: 1-ARP-01-P1 DEVICE: 63XA1 PDIS-25-11A 63XB1 PDIS-25-11 B ALARM CONFIRMATION:
ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 LOCATION:
RTGB-106 RAB/24/N-RA2/w-RAE RTGB-106 RAB/24/N-RA2/RAF SETPOINT:
De-energized
-4 in. H 2 0 De-energized
-4 in. H 2 0 1. PDIS-25-1A, Containment A L'1P, indicates
-4 in. H 2 0 or more negative.  
: 2. PDIS-25-1B, Containment B L'1P, indicates
-4 in. H 2 0 or more negative.  
: 3. If Containment Purge was in progress, the following is indicated:
* HVE-8A and HVE-8B, Cntmt Purge Exhaust Fans, indicate STOPPED.
* FCV-25-7 and FCV-25-8, Vacuum Relief Valves, indicate OPEN.
* FCV-25-1, 2 and 3, Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves, indicate OPEN. , FCV-25-7, Vacuum Relief Valve. FCV-25-8, Vacuum Relief Valve. CNTMT VACUUM HIGH P-1 CAUSES: This annunciator may be caused by failure of the purge inlet dampers to open, failure of the containment vacuum relief valves to open, or a misaligned valve lineup.  


==REFERENCES:==
REVISION:             PROCEDURE TITLE:                                                       PANEL:
: 1. CWD 8770-B-327 sheets 366, 509, 510, 511 and 529 2. P&IDs 8770-G-862 and 8770-G-878 sheet 1 3. TEDB ( REVISION:
o                   ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE                                       P
PROCEDURE TITLE: o ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE PROCEDURE NO: 1-ARP-01-P1 DEVICE: 63XA1 PDIS-25-11A 63XB1 PDIS-25-11 B ALARM CONFIRMATION:
( PROCEDURE NO:                                                                               WINDOW:
ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 LOCATION:
1-ARP-01-P1                                 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1                                     1 CNTMT VACUUM HIGH P-1 DEVICE:                            LOCATION:                        SETPOINT:
RTGB-106 RAB/24/N-RA2!W-RAE RTGB-106 RAB/24/N-RA2/RAF SETPOINT:
63XA1                              RTGB-106                         De-energized PDIS-25-11A                      RAB/24/N-RA2!W-RAE RAB/24/N-RA2/w-RAE                -4 in. H2 0 63XB1                              RTGB-106                         De-energized PDIS-25-11 B                      RAB/24/N-RA2/RAF                   -4 in. H2 0 ALARM CONFIRMATION:
De-energized
6P, indicates -4 in. H2 0 or more negative.
-4 in. H 2 0 De-energized
: 1. PDIS-25-1A, Containment A L'1P,
-4 in. H 2 0 1. PDIS-25-1A, Containment A 6P, indicates
: 2. PDIS-25-1                   6P, indicates -4 in. H2 0 or more negative.
-4 in. H 2 0 or more negative.
B, Containment B L'1P, PDIS-25-1B,
: 2. PDIS-25-1 B, Containment B 6P, indicates  
-4 in. H 2 0 or more negative.  
: 3. If Containment Purge was in progress, the following is indicated:
: 3. If Containment Purge was in progress, the following is indicated:
* HVE-8A and HVE-8B, Cntmt Purge Exhaust Fans, indicate STOPPED.
* HVE-8A and HVE-8B, Cntmt Purge Exhaust Fans, indicate STOPPED.
* FCV-25-7 and FCV-25-8, Vacuum Relief Valves, indicate OPEN.
* FCV-25-7 and FCV-25-8, Vacuum Relief Valves, indicate OPEN.
* FCV-25-1, 2 and 3, Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves, indicate OPEN. OPERATOR ACTIONS: 1. If Containment Purge Fans areB,UNNING, Then STOP the r;unnihgfan: ..
* FCV-25-1, 2 and 3, Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves, indicate OPEN.
( OPERATOR ACTIONS:
: 1. If Containment Purge Fans areB,UNNING, Then STOP the r;unnihgfan: ~.
* HVE-8A, Cntmt Purge Exhal;jst Fan."
* HVE-8A, Cntmt Purge Exhal;jst Fan."
* HVE-8B, Cntmt Purge Exhaust Fan. CNTMT VACUUM HIGH PANEL: P WINDOW: 1 P-1 2. If Containment Vacuum Reliefs are CLO&sect;ED, Thenatthed.irection of the US,.OPEN valves; manually:  
* HVE-8B, Cntmt Purge Exhaust Fan.
-. -. ... . ... .
: 2. If Containment Vacuum Reliefs are CLO&sect;ED, Thenatthed.irection ofthe US,.OPEN th~ valves; manually:                                   -.-       . ...                 . ...       .
* FCV-25-7, Vacuum Relief Valve. e FCV-25-8, Vacuum Relief Valve. CAUSES: This annunciator may be caused by failure of the purge inlet dampers to open, failure of the containment vacuum relief valves to open, or a misaligned valve lineup.  
    ,* FCV-25-7, Vacuum Relief Valve.
e FCV-25-8, Vacuum Relief Valve.
CAUSES: This annunciator may be caused by failure of the purge inlet dampers to open, failure of the containment vacuum relief valves to open, or a misaligned valve lineup.


==REFERENCES:==
==REFERENCES:==
: 1. CWO 8770-B-327 sheets 366, 509, 510, 511 and 529 2. P&IDs 8770-G-862 and 8770-G-878 sheet 1 3. TEDB Examination Outline Cross-reference:
: 1. CWO CWD 8770-B-327 sheets 366, 509, 510, 511 and 529
Fuel Handling Equipment:
: 2. P&IDs 8770-G-862 and 8770-G-878 sheet 1
Overload protection Proposed Question:
: 3. TEDB
SRO 93 Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO 034K4.03 SRO 2 2 3.3 Unit 2 is performing refueling operations.
 
2-NOP-67.04 REFUELING MACHINE OPERATION is in use. Appendix F 'Troubleshooting An Overload Condition While Raising a Fuel Assembly' is being implemented due to an overload condition.
Examination Outline Cross-reference:             Level                      RO              SRO Tier#                                       2 Group #                                     2 KIA #                     034K4.03 Importance Rating                          3.3 Fuel Handling Equipment: Overload protection Proposed Question:                 SRO 93 Unit 2 is performing refueling operations. 2-NOP-67.04 REFUELING MACHINE OPERATION is in use. Appendix F 'Troubleshooting An Overload Condition While Raising a Fuel Assembly' is being implemented due to an overload condition.
f0/ V The Refueling Machine operator questions the Refueling SRO if Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) override can be used to override the overload and raise the fuel bundle. As the Refueling SRO, which ONE of the following responses would you give to the Refueling Machine operator and why? PLC override is: A. NOT allowed for the above conditions.
Xv!"
PLC override is only to be used to place a fuel bundle in a safe condition for specific equipment failures.
f0/
B. NOT allowed for the above conditions.
V The Refueling Machine operator questions the Refueling SRO if Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) override can be used to override the overload and raise the fuel bundle.
PLC override is only to be used for preoperational testing of the Refueling Machine interlocks prior to fuel movement.
As the Refueling SRO, which ONE of the following responses would you give to the Refueling Machine operator and why?
C. ALLOWED to be used for the above conditions.
PLC override is:
PLC override does not override the Technical Specification overload cut off limit. D. ALLOWED to be used for the above conditions but only after the Bridge and Trolley manual positioning is not successful in clearing the overload condition.
(
185 ( ( '. Examination Outline Cross-reference:
A. NOT allowed for the above conditions. PLC override is only to be used to place a fuel bundle in a safe condition for specific equipment failures.
Fuel Handling Equipment:
B. NOT allowed for the above conditions. PLC override is only to be used for preoperational testing of the Refueling Machine interlocks prior to fuel movement.
Overload protection Proposed Question:
C. ALLOWED to be used for the above conditions. PLC override does not override the Technical Specification overload cut off limit.
SRO 93 Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO 034K4.03 SRO 2 2 3.3 Unit 2 is performing refueling operations.
D. ALLOWED to be used for the above conditions but only after the Bridge and Trolley manual positioning is not successful in clearing the overload condition.
2-NOP-67.04 REFUELING MACHINE OPERATION is in use. Appendix F 'Troubleshooting An Overload Condition While Raising a Fuel Assembly' is being implemented due to an overload condition.
(
Xv!" V The Refueling Machine operator questions the Refueling SRO if Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) override can be used to override the overload and raise the fuel bundle. As the Refueling SRO, which ONE of the following responses would you give to the Refueling Machine operator and why? PLC override is: A. NOT allowed for the above conditions.
185
PLC override is only to be used to place a fuel bundle in a safe condition for specific equipment failures.
 
B. NOT allowed for the above conditions.
Proposed Answer:             A Explanation (Optional):
PLC override is only to be used for preoperational testing of the Refueling Machine interlocks prior to fuel movement.
A. Correct B. Incorrect; PLC override is used during pre-op testing but procedure guidance states override is to be used to place the fuel bundle in a safe condition in the event of a computer failure C. Incorrect; PLC override not allowed but it is true it does not override the T.S. limit on overload D. Incorrect; Appendix has manipulations to move the bridge and trolley, but PLC override not mentioned and not allowed.
C. ALLOWED to be used for the above conditions.
Technical Reference(s):       2-NOP-67.04 Refueling                                     (Attach if not previously provided)
PLC override does not override the Technical Specification overload cut off limit. D. ALLOWED to be used for the above conditions but only after the Bridge and Trolley manual positioning is not successful in clearing the overload condition.
Machine Operation 0711208 Refueling Equipment
185 Proposed Answer: A Explanation (Optional):
(
A. Correct B. Incorrect; PLC override is used during pre-op testing but procedure guidance states override is to be used to place the fuel bundle in a safe condition in the event of a computer failure C. Incorrect; PLC override not allowed but it is true it does not override the T.S. limit on overload D. Incorrect; Appendix has manipulations to move the bridge and trolley, but PLC override not mentioned and not allowed. Technical Reference(s):
2-NOP-67.04 Refueling Machine Operation (Attach if not previously provided) 0711208 Refueling Equipment Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
_0-=--7'---'0:......2-".2-=-.08-=---...::...0-=-.6
_______ (As available)
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) -----x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge
_X __ _ Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 6,7 Comments:
186 ( ( Proposed Answer: A Explanation (Optional):
A. Correct B. Incorrect; PLC override is used during pre-op testing but procedure guidance states override is to be used to place the fuel bundle in a safe condition in the event of a computer failure C. Incorrect; PLC override not allowed but it is true it does not override the T.S. limit on overload D. Incorrect; Appendix has manipulations to move the bridge and trolley, but PLC override not mentioned and not allowed. Technical Reference(s):
2-NOP-67.04 Refueling Machine Operation 0711208 Refueling Equipment (Attach if not previously provided)
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
Learning Objective:           0702208-06
Question Source: Question History: 0702208-06 Bank # Modified Bank # New Last NRC Exam (As available) (Note changes or attach parent) -----x Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge
_0-=--7'---'0:. . . 2-".2-=-.08-=---.. : . .0-=-.6_ _ _ _ _ _ _ (As available)
_X __ _ Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 6,7 Comments:
Question Source:               Bank #
186 REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 16A REFUELING MACHINE OPERATION 7 of 87 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-NOP-67.04 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 4.0 PRECAUTIONS  
Modified Bank #                                           (Note changes or attach parent)
/ LIMITATIONS
New                                                x Question History:              Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:     Memory or Fundamental Knowledge                                   _X Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content:       55.41 55.43                               6,7 Comments:
(
186
 
REVISION NO.:               PROCEDURE TITLE:                                         PAGE:
16A                         REFUELING MACHINE OPERATION 7 of 87 PROCEDURE NO.:
2-NOP-67.04                                 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 4.0     PRECAUTIONS / LIMITATIONS 4.1    General
: 1.          Do NOT take any unnecessary items into the refueling cavity.
: 2.          All personal items (glasses, pencils, personal monitors, etc.), shall be tied or taped to prevent them from falling into the cavity.
: 3.          Each person should inventory personal items they take into the refueling cavity.
: 4.          No loose items should be stored on the Refueling Machine unless tethered to a person or machine.
: 5.          A Radiation Work Permit (RWP) shall be in effect that covers the scope of the work to be performed.
: 6.          Health Physics should be notified and approval obtained for any use of the Refueling Machine.
(        7.          No articles shall be removed from the Refueling Cavity unless Health Physics is present to monitor radiation levels during the removal process.
: 8.          Prior to flooding the refueling cavity, check out all underwater equipment.
: 9.          The hoist shall never be raised above the Hoist Up Limit with a fuel bundle attached.
: 10.        Health Physics shall monitor any hoist movement above the Hoist Up Limit even without a fuel bundle attached.
11' 11  ~,
Operation with the COMPUTER OVERRIDE switch in OVRD bypasses all PLC interlocks. It is intended for emergency use only to allow a fuel bundle fi'  to be placed in a safe condition in the event of a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) failure.
: 12.        An SRO or refueling SRO shall be in containment to supervise fuel
                  ';}:movement vement and maintain oversight of activities in containment and the spent fuel pool.
: 13.        Rotation of the Refueling Machine mast while at up limit may cause loss of the Hoist Up Limit permissive. This may cause an automatic sequence to abort and may prevent the machine from performing functions that require the hoist to be at up limit.
 
REVISION NO.:          PROCEDURE TITLE:                                        PAGE:
16A                    REFUELING MACHINE OPERATION i
\
41 of 87 PROCEDURE NO.:
2-NOP-67.04                            ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 6.12    Abnormal Events (continued)
NOTE There is NO alarm associated with an 1/0 I/O system failure. If the machine halts unexpectedly while moving OR will not move on any axis, consider the possibility of an 1/0 I/O system failure.
: 7.      1/0 I/O System Failure Actions                                          INITIAL A. STOP all movement of the Fuel Transfer Machine.
B. NOTIFY the Refueling SRO I/ Refueling Center of the 1/0 I/O System failure.
NOTE The Refueling SRO may authorize a reboot to attempt to clear the fault table. Rebooting is accomplished by turning OFF then ON at the Operator Console.
C. REBOOT to Clear the fault table.
CAUTION Operation with the COMPUTER OVERRIDE switch in OVRD bypasses all PLC interlocks and the potential exists for equipment damage. It is intended for emergency use only to allow a fuel bundle to be placed in a safe condition in the event of a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) failure.
D. If rebooting does not reset the operation of the Refueling Machine AND a fuel assembly or load must be placed in a safe location, Then with Refueling SRO concurrence, PLACE the Computer Override keyswitch in OVRD.
E. CONTACT SCE (PSL Engineering) for assistance.
END OF SECTION 6.12
 
REFUELING OPERATIONS MANIPULATOR CRANE OPERABILITY LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.9.6      The manipulator crane shall be used for movement of CEAs or fuel assemblies and shall be OPERABLE with:
: a. A minimum capacity of 2000 pounds, and
: b.                              of ~ 3000 pounds.
An overload cut off limit of:::
APPLICABILITY: During movement of CEAs or fuel assemblies within the reactor pressure vessel.
ACTION:
With the requirements for crane OPERABILITY not satisfied, suspend use of any inoperable manipulator crane from operations involving the movement of CEAs and fuel assemblies within the reactor pressure vessel.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.9.6      The manipulator crane used for movement of CEAs or fuel assemblies within the reactor pressure vessel shall be demonstrated OPERABLE within 72 hours prior to the start of such operations by performing a load test of at least 2500 pounds and demonstrating an
(            automatic load cut off before the crane load exceeds 3000 pounds.
ST. LUCIE - UNIT 1                              3/4 9-6 3/49-6              Amendment No. 152


===4.1 General===
REVISION NO.:          PROCEDURE TITLE:                                        PAGE:
: 1. Do NOT take any unnecessary items into the refueling cavity. 2. All personal items (glasses, pencils, personal monitors, etc.), shall be tied or taped to prevent them from falling into the cavity. 3. Each person should inventory personal items they take into the refueling cavity. 4. No loose items should be stored on the Refueling Machine unless tethered to a person or machine. 5. A Radiation Work Permit (RWP) shall be in effect that covers the scope of the work to be performed.  
16A                  REFUELING MACHINE OPERATION
: 6. Health Physics should be notified and approval obtained for any use of the Refueling Machine. 7. No articles shall be removed from the Refueling Cavity unless Health Physics is present to monitor radiation levels during the removal process. 8. Prior to flooding the refueling cavity, check out all underwater equipment.
(  PROCEDURE NO.:
: 9. The hoist shall never be raised above the Hoist Up Limit with a fuel bundle attached.  
80 of 87 2-NOP-67.04                            ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 APPENDIX F TROUBLESHOOTING AN OVERLOAD CONDITION WHILE RAISING A FUEL ASSEMBLY (Page 1 of 2)
: 10. Health Physics shall monitor any hoist movement above the Hoist Up Limit even without a fuel bundle attached.
NOTE If several assemblies are consistently off by two or more tenths in the same direction, consider checking benchmarks to ensure proper Refueling Machine alignment.
11 Operation with the COMPUTER OVERRIDE switch in OVRD bypasses all PLC interlocks.
: 1.     DETERMINE if assembly being lowered into the core is slightly coming in contact with another assembly, using binoculars.
It is intended for emergency use only to allow a fuel bundle to be placed in a safe condition in the event of a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) failure. SRO or refueling SRO shall be in containment to supervise fuel vement and maintain oversight of activities in containment and the spent fuel pool. 13. Rotation of the Refueling Machine mast while at up limit may cause loss of the Hoist Up Limit permissive.
: 2.     1f If so, Then PERFORM the following:
This may cause an automatic sequence to abort and may prevent the machine from performing functions that require the hoist to be at up limit. ( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 16A REFUELING MACHINE OPERATION 7 of 87 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-NOP-67.04 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 4.0 PRECAUTIONS
A.     LOWER the hoist until the load cell reads between 1300 and 1400 Ibs.
/ LIMITATIONS
B.     ROTATE mast, as follows:
: 1. REMOVE the detent pin.
(
: 2. TURN the handwheel to move the mast approximately 10 degrees in either direction.
: 3. MONITOR the load cell.
C.     RAISE the hoist.
D.     MONITOR the load cell for indication of an overload condition.
(
"\


===4.1 General===
REVISION NO.:           PROCEDURE TITLE:                                       PAGE:
: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11' : 12. Do NOT take any unnecessary items into the refueling cavity. All personal items (glasses, pencils, personal monitors, etc.), shall be tied or taped to prevent them from falling into the cavity. Each person should inventory personal items they take into the refueling cavity. No loose items should be stored on the Refueling Machine unless tethered to a person or machine. A Radiation Work Permit (RWP) shall be in effect that covers the scope of the work to be performed.
16A                   REFUELING MACHINE OPERATION 81 of 87 PROCEDURE NO.:
Health Physics should be notified and approval obtained for any use of the Refueling Machine. No articles shall be removed from the Refueling Cavity unless Health Physics is present to monitor radiation levels during the removal process. Prior to flooding the refueling cavity, check out all underwater equipment.
2-NOP-67.04                             ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 APPENDIX F TROUBLESHOOTING AN OVERLOAD CONDITION WHILE RAISING A FUEL ASSEMBLY (Page 2 of 2)
The hoist shall never be raised above the Hoist Up Limit with a fuel bundle attached.
NOTE If another assembly is leaning excessively into the path of the assembly being withdrawn from the core, the RFM can be manually positioned in the direction away from the leaning assembly.
Health Physics shall monitor any hoist movement above the Hoist Up Limit even without a fuel bundle attached.
: 3.     11 another assembly is leaning excessively into the path of the assembly being withdrawn from the core, Then PERFORM the following:
Operation with the COMPUTER OVERRIDE switch in OVRD bypasses all PLC interlocks.
A.       LOWER the hoist until full assembly weight is shown on the load cell.
It is intended for emergency use only to allow a fuel bundle fi' to be placed in a safe condition in the event of a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) failure. An SRO or refueling SRO shall be in containment to supervise fuel ';}:movement and maintain oversight of activities in containment and the spent fuel pool. 13. Rotation of the Refueling Machine mast while at up limit may cause loss of the Hoist Up Limit permissive.
B.       OPERATE the RFM manually in accordance with Section 6.3, RFM Manual Indexing From RFM Console.
This may cause an automatic sequence to abort and may prevent the machine from performing functions that require the hoist to be at up limit.
C.       ADJUST the Bridge / Trolley position of the Refueling Machine 0.2 inches while monitoring the digital position indicator.
REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 41 of 87 REFUELING MACHINE OPERATION 16A PROCEDURE NO.: 2-NOP-67.04 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 6.12 Abnormal Events (continued)
(
NOTE There is NO alarm associated with an 1/0 system failure. If the machine halts unexpectedly while moving OR will not move on any axis, consider the possibility of an 1/0 system failure. 7. 1/0 System Failure Actions A. STOP all movement of the Fuel Transfer Machine. B. NOTIFY the Refueling SRO I Refueling Center of the 1/0 System failure. NOTE The Refueling SRO may authorize a reboot to attempt to clear the fault table. Rebooting is accomplished by turning OFF then ON at the Operator Console. C. REBOOT to Clear the fault table. CAUTION Operation with the COMPUTER OVERRIDE switch in OVRD bypasses all PLC interlocks and the potential exists for equipment damage. It is intended for emergency use only to allow a fuel bundle to be placed in a safe condition in the event of a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) failure. D. If rebooting does not reset the operation of the Refueling Machine AND a fuel assembly or load must be placed in a safe location, Then with Refueling SRO concurrence, PLACE the Computer Override keyswitch in OVRD. E. CONTACT SCE (PSL Engineering) for assistance.
END OF SECTION 6.12 INITIAL i \ REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 16A REFUELING MACHINE OPERATION 41 of 87 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-NOP-67.04 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 6.12 Abnormal Events (continued)
NOTE There is NO alarm associated with an I/O system failure. If the machine halts unexpectedly while moving OR will not move on any axis, consider the possibility of an I/O system failure. 7. I/O System Failure Actions A. STOP all movement of the Fuel Transfer Machine. B. NOTIFY the Refueling SRO / Refueling Center of the I/O System failure. NOTE The Refueling SRO may authorize a reboot to attempt to clear the fault table. Rebooting is accomplished by turning OFF then ON at the Operator Console. C. REBOOT to Clear the fault table. CAUTION Operation with the COMPUTER OVERRIDE switch in OVRD bypasses all PLC interlocks and the potential exists for equipment damage. It is intended for emergency use only to allow a fuel bundle to be placed in a safe condition in the event of a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) failure. D. If rebooting does not reset the operation of the Refueling Machine AND a fuel assembly or load must be placed in a safe location, Then with Refueling SRO concurrence, PLACE the Computer Override keyswitch in OVRD. E. CONTACT SCE (PSL Engineering) for assistance.
END OF SECTION 6.12 INITIAL 
( REFUELING OPERATIONS MANIPULATOR CRANE OPERABILITY LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.9.6 The manipulator crane shall be used for movement of CEAs or fuel assemblies and shall be OPERABLE with: a. A minimum capacity of 2000 pounds, and b. An overload cut off limit of 3000 pounds. APPLICABILITY:
During movement of CEAs or fuel assemblies within the reactor pressure vessel. ACTION: With the requirements for crane OPERABILITY not satisfied, suspend use of any inoperable manipulator crane from operations involving the movement of CEAs and fuel assemblies within the reactor pressure vessel. SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.9.6 The manipulator crane used for movement of CEAs or fuel assemblies within the reactor pressure vessel shall be demonstrated OPERABLE within 72 hours prior to the start of such operations by performing a load test of at least 2500 pounds and demonstrating an automatic load cut off before the crane load exceeds 3000 pounds. ST. LUCIE -UNIT 1 3/4 9-6 Amendment No. 152 ( REFUELING OPERATIONS MANIPULATOR CRANE OPERABILITY LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.9.6 The manipulator crane shall be used for movement of CEAs or fuel assemblies and shall be OPERABLE with: a. A minimum capacity of 2000 pounds, and b. An overload cut off limit of::: 3000 pounds. APPLICABILITY:
During movement of CEAs or fuel assemblies within the reactor pressure vessel. ACTION: With the requirements for crane OPERABILITY not satisfied, suspend use of any inoperable manipulator crane from operations involving the movement of CEAs and fuel assemblies within the reactor pressure vessel. SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.9.6 The manipulator crane used for movement of CEAs or fuel assemblies within the reactor pressure vessel shall be demonstrated OPERABLE within 72 hours prior to the start of such operations by performing a load test of at least 2500 pounds and demonstrating an automatic load cut off before the crane load exceeds 3000 pounds. ST. LUCIE -UNIT 1 3/49-6 Amendment No. 152 
( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 80 of 87 REFUELING MACHINE OPERATION 16A PROCEDURE NO.: 2-NOP-67.04 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 APPENDIX F TROUBLESHOOTING AN OVERLOAD CONDITION WHILE RAISING A FUEL ASSEMBLY (Page 1 of 2) NOTE If several assemblies are consistently off by two or more tenths in the same direction, consider checking benchmarks to ensure proper Refueling Machine alignment.
: 1. DETERMINE if assembly being lowered into the core is slightly coming in contact with another assembly, using binoculars.
: 2. 1f so, Then PERFORM the following:
A. LOWER the hoist until the load cell reads between 1300 and 1400 Ibs. B. ROTATE mast, as follows: 1. REMOVE the detent pin. 2. TURN the handwheel to move the mast approximately 10 degrees in either direction.
: 3. MONITOR the load cell. C. RAISE the hoist. D. MONITOR the load cell for indication of an overload condition. ( ( "\ REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 16A REFUELING MACHINE OPERATION 80 of 87 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-NOP-67.04 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 APPENDIX F TROUBLESHOOTING AN OVERLOAD CONDITION WHILE RAISING A FUEL ASSEMBLY (Page 1 of 2) NOTE If several assemblies are consistently off by two or more tenths in the same direction, consider checking benchmarks to ensure proper Refueling Machine alignment.
: 1. DETERMINE if assembly being lowered into the core is slightly coming in contact with another assembly, using binoculars.
: 2. If so, Then PERFORM the following:
A. LOWER the hoist until the load cell reads between 1300 and 1400 Ibs. B. ROTATE mast, as follows: 1. REMOVE the detent pin. 2. TURN the handwheel to move the mast approximately 10 degrees in either direction.
: 3. MONITOR the load cell. C. RAISE the hoist. D. MONITOR the load cell for indication of an overload condition. 
( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 16A PROCEDURE NO.: REFUELING MACHINE OPERATION 81 of 87 2-NOP-67.04 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 APPENDIX F TROUBLESHOOTING AN OVERLOAD CONDITION WHILE RAISING A FUEL ASSEMBLY (Page 2 of 2) NOTE If another assembly is leaning excessively into the path of the assembly being withdrawn from the core, the RFM can be manually positioned in the direction away from the leaning assembly.  
: 3. 11 another assembly is leaning excessively into the path of the assembly being withdrawn from the core, Then PERFORM the following:
A. LOWER the hoist until full assembly weight is shown on the load cell. B. OPERATE the RFM manually in accordance with Section 6.3, RFM Manual Indexing From RFM Console. C. ADJUST the Bridge / Trolley position of the Refueling Machine 0.2 inches while monitoring the digital position indicator.
NOTE If a hoist position where the original overload condition is reached and the overload no longer exists, the assembly has passed the obstruction.
NOTE If a hoist position where the original overload condition is reached and the overload no longer exists, the assembly has passed the obstruction.
D. LOWER the Hoist while watching load cell for an overload condition.
D.       LOWER the Hoist while watching load cell for an overload condition.
E. 11 a hoist pOSition where the original overload condition is reached and the overload no longer exists, Then PERFORM the following:  
E.     11 a hoist position pOSition where the original overload condition is reached and the overload no longer exists, Then PERFORM the following:
: 1. RETURN THE RFM to its original position for the assembly being withdrawn.  
: 1. RETURN THE RFM to its original position for the assembly being withdrawn.
: 2. RETURN the RFM to power operation in accordance with Section 6.3, RFM Manual Indexing From RFM Console. 3. RAISE the assembly while monitoring the load cell. F. 11 the overload persists, Then NOTIFY the Refueling Supervisor that additional adjustments may be required.
: 2. RETURN the RFM to power operation in accordance with Section 6.3, RFM Manual Indexing From RFM Console.
END OF APPENDIX F REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 16A REFUELING MACHINE OPERATION 81 of 87 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-NOP-67.04 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 APPENDIX F TROUBLESHOOTING AN OVERLOAD CONDITION WHILE RAISING A FUEL ASSEMBLY (Page 2 of 2) NOTE If another assembly is leaning excessively into the path of the assembly being withdrawn from the core, the RFM can be manually positioned in the direction away from the leaning assembly.  
: 3. RAISE the assembly while monitoring the load cell.
: 3. 11 another assembly is leaning excessively into the path of the assembly being withdrawn from the core, Then PERFORM the following:
F.     11 the overload   persists, Then NOTIFY the Refueling Supervisor that additional adjustments may be required.
A. LOWER the hoist until full assembly weight is shown on the load cell. B. OPERATE the RFM manually in accordance with Section 6.3, RFM Manual Indexing From RFM Console. C. ADJUST the Bridge / Trolley position of the Refueling Machine 0.2 inches while monitoring the digital position indicator.
END OF APPENDIX F
NOTE If a hoist position where the original overload condition is reached and the overload no longer exists, the assembly has passed the obstruction.
 
D. LOWER the Hoist while watching load cell for an overload condition.
0711208, Rev. 18 Page 50 of 120
E. 11 a hoist position where the original overload condition is reached and the overload no longer exists, Then PERFORM the following:
(                                                     FOR TRAINING USE ONLY CONTROL CONSOLE VERTICAL PANEL COMPONENT             POSITION   INDICATION               FUNCTION
: 1. RETURN THE RFM to its original position for the assembly being withdrawn.  
: 1. Heater On IighUTest               Red light               Auto on when power Pushbutton                                                 off. Pushbutton for lamp lam test.
: 2. RETURN the RFM to power operation in accordance with Section 6.3, RFM Manual Indexing From RFM Console. 3. RAISE the assembly while monitoring the load cell. F. 11 the overload persists, Then NOTIFY the Refueling Supervisor that additional adjustments may be required.
: 2. Hoist Overload light             Red   Ilight ht            Lit during overload Litd
END OF APPENDIX F
: 3. Hoist Underload light             Red   Ilight ht            Lit during underload Litdu
( ( 0711208, Rev. 18 Page 50 of 120 FOR TRAINING USE ONLY CONTROL CONSOLE VERTICAL PANEL 1. 2. Red I ht 3. Red I ht 4. Red light 5. Override Active Light Red light 6. Override Active OVRD Red light Keyswitch
: 4. Hoist Max Overload               Red   light             Lit when a pre-set light                                                     maximum overload setpoint has been exceeded (independent of PLC)
: 7. FLAT SCREEN Various refueling MONITOR functions/activities
: 5. Override Active Light             Red light               Lit Indicating that Override Keyswitch is in the OVRD position (PLC bypassed)
: 8. Cable load Digital Meter 9. Upender Vertical Green light ht 10. Travel Override Momentarily Red light Pushbutton/light depressed
: 6. Override Active       OVRD       Red light               Allows bypassing the Keyswitch                                                 PLC (emergency use only)
: 11. Main Power On Momentarily White light Pushbuttonllight depressed
( 7. FLAT SCREEN                       Various refueling       Information display MONITOR                           fu nctio ns/ activiti es functions/activities    including diagnostics and interactive command function capability
: 12. Main Power Off Momentarily None Auto on when power off. Pushbutton for lam test. Litd Litdu Lit when a pre-set maximum overload setpoint has been exceeded Information display including diagnostics and interactive command function Monitors load on fuel hoist cable ON when reactor side U er is vertical Lights when bridge or trolley violates a secure zone (pushbutton allows slow speed outside secure zone Supplies or secures refueling machine power including AlC unit (ON when power is on Secures power to machine 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. ( 0711208, Rev. 18 Page 50 of 120 FOR TRAINING USE ONLY CONTROL CONSOLE VERTICAL PANEL COMPONENT POSITION INDICATION FUNCTION Heater On IighUTest Red light Auto on when power Pushbutton off. Pushbutton for lamp test. Hoist Overload light Red light Lit during overload Hoist Underload light Red light Lit during underload Hoist Max Overload Red light Lit when a pre-set light maximum overload setpoint has been exceeded (independent of PLC) Override Active Light Red light Lit Indicating that Override Keyswitch is in the OVRD position (PLC bypassed)
: 8. Cable load                       Digital Meter           Monitors load on fuel hoist cable
Override Active OVRD Red light Allows bypassing the Keyswitch PLC (emergency use only) FLAT SCREEN Various refueling Information display MONITOR fu n ctio n s/ activiti es including diagnostics and interactive command function capability Cable load Digital Meter Monitors load on fuel hoist cable Upender Vertical Green light ON when reactor side light Upender is vertical Travel Override Momentarily Red light Lights when bridge or Pushbutton/light depressed trolley violates a secure zone (pushbutton allows slow speed outside secure zone) Main Power On Momentarily White light Supplies or secures Pushbuttonilight depressed refueling machine power including A/C unit (ON when power is on) Main Power Off Momentarily None Secures power to depressed machine Examination Outline Cross-reference:
: 9. Upender Vertical                 Green light             ON when reactor side light ht                                                      Upender U      er is vertical
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating Conduct of Operations:
: 10. Travel Override       Momentarily Red light               Lights when bridge or Pushbutton/light     depressed                           trolley violates a secure zone (pushbutton allows slow speed outside secure zone) zone
Knowledge of operations requirements Proposed Question:
: 11. Main Power On         Momentarily White light             Supplies or secures Pushbuttonilight Pushbuttonllight      depressed                           refueling machine power including A/C AlC unit (ON when power is on) on
SRO 94 RO G2.1.1 SRO 3 4.2 Unit 2 has tripped due to the loss of the 2A Main Feedwater Pump. Upon the trip a Main Steam Safety Valve (MSSV) on the 2A Steam Generator stuck open and has failed to reseat. A Steam Generator Tube leak on the 2B S/G was identified post trip. S/G Blowdown radiation monitors are in alarm. The crew has entered 2-EOP-15 Functional Recovery.
: 12. Main Power Off       Momentarily None                     Secures power to depressed                           machine
The MSIV's were closed and the following conditions exist:
(
 
Examination Outline Cross-reference:                   Level             RO          SRO Tier#                         3 Group #
KIA #
K/A#              G2.1.1 Importance Rating             4.2 Conduct of Operations: Knowledge of operations requirements Proposed Question:                 SRO 94 Unit 2 has tripped due to the loss of the 2A Main Feedwater Pump. Upon the trip a Main Steam Safety Valve (MSSV) on the 2A Steam Generator stuck open and has failed to reseat. A Steam Generator Tube leak on the 2B S/G was identified post trip. S/G Blowdown radiation monitors are in alarm. The crew has entered 2-EOP-15 Functional Recovery. The MSIV's were closed and the following conditions exist:
* 2A S/G pressure is 710 psia lowering.
* 2A S/G pressure is 710 psia lowering.
* 2B S/G pressure is 790 psia stable. 1) Which ONE of the following S/G's is considered the MOST AFFECTED S/G? 2) When is the faulted S/G considered NO LONGER FAULTED and what EOP will be utilized when the SG is no longer considered faulted? A. 1) 2B S/G. 2) When the MSSV is gagged. Remain in EOP-15 B. 1) 2B S/G 2) When EOP-99 Appendix R 'Steam Generator Isolation' is complete.
* 2B S/G pressure is 790 psia stable.
Exit to EOP-04 Steam Generator Tube Rupture. C. 1) 2A S/G 2) When the MSSV is gagged. Remain in EOP-15 D 1) 2A S/G 2) When EOP-99 Appendix R 'Steam Generator Isolation' is complete.
: 1) Which ONE of the following S/G's is considered the MOST AFFECTED S/G?
Exit to EOP-04 Steam Generator Tube Rupture. 187 ( ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
: 2) When is the faulted S/G considered NO LONGER FAULTED and what EOP will be utilized when the SG is no longer considered faulted?
Level Tier# Group # K/A# Importance Rating Conduct of Operations:
(                    A. 1) 2B S/G.
Knowledge of operations requirements Proposed Question:
: 2) When the MSSV is gagged. Remain in EOP-15 B. 1) 2B S/G
SRO 94 RO G2.1.1 SRO 3 4.2 Unit 2 has tripped due to the loss of the 2A Main Feedwater Pump. Upon the trip a Main Steam Safety Valve (MSSV) on the 2A Steam Generator stuck open and has failed to reseat. A Steam Generator Tube leak on the 2B S/G was identified post trip. S/G Blowdown radiation monitors are in alarm. The crew has entered 2-EOP-15 Functional Recovery.
: 2) When EOP-99 Appendix R 'Steam Generator Isolation' is complete. Exit to EOP-04 Steam Generator Tube Rupture.
The MSIV's were closed and the following conditions exist:
C. 1) 2A S/G
* 2A S/G pressure is 710 psia lowering.
: 2) When the MSSV is gagged. Remain in EOP-15 D 1) 2A S/G
* 2B S/G pressure is 790 psia stable. 1) Which ONE of the following S/G's is considered the MOST AFFECTED S/G? 2) When is the faulted S/G considered NO LONGER FAULTED and what EOP will be utilized when the SG is no longer considered faulted? A. 1) 2B S/G. 2) When the MSSV is gagged. Remain in EOP-15 B. 1) 2B S/G 2) When EOP-99 Appendix R 'Steam Generator Isolation' is complete.
: 2) When EOP-99 Appendix R 'Steam Generator Isolation' is complete. Exit to EOP-04 Steam Generator Tube Rupture.
Exit to EOP-04 Steam Generator Tube Rupture. C. 1) 2A S/G 2) When the MSSV is gagged. Remain in EOP-15 D 1) 2A S/G 2) When EOP-99 Appendix R 'Steam Generator Isolation' is complete.
(
Exit to EOP-04 Steam Generator Tube Rupture. 187 Proposed Answer: C Explanation (Optional):
187
A. Incorrect:
 
Most affected SG is 2A, part two is correct B. Incorrect:
Proposed Answer:             C Explanation (Optional):
Most affected SG is 2A, Ops Policy requires MSSV to be gagged to be considered NO LONGER FAULTED C. Correct D. Incorrect:
A. Incorrect: Most affected SG is 2A, part two is correct B. Incorrect: Most affected SG is 2A, Ops Policy requires MSSV to be gagged to be considered NO LONGER FAULTED C. Correct D. Incorrect: 2A SG is LEAST AFFECTED, part two incorrect, MSSV required to be gagged to be NO LONGER FAULTED Technical Reference(s):      Operations Department Policy:                     (Attach if not previously provided)
2A SG is LEAST AFFECTED, part two incorrect, MSSV required to be gagged to be NO LONGER FAULTED Technical Reference(s):
OPS-521 Emergency Operating Procedure Implementation 0702828 Functional Recovery
Operations Department Policy: (Attach if not previously provided)
( Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
OPS-521 Emergency Operating Procedure Implementation 0702828 Functional Recovery Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:      _0~7'-.:0:.-2....:.8=2-=-8-....:.0..:...7
Learning Objective:
_0-'-7-'0'-2_8_28          ___----'-0_7_ ____
_0-'-7-'0'-2_8_28
_ (As available)
___ ----'-0_7
Question Source:              Bank #
_______ (As available)
Modified Bank #                                    (Note changes or attach parent)
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) -----x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge X ---Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 ---55.43 5 ---Comments:
New                                        x Question History:            Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:    Memory or Fundamental Knowledge                            X
188 ( ( Proposed Answer: C Explanation (Optional):
_X Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content:      55.41                    -
A. Incorrect:
10 10  --  -
Most affected SG is 2A, part two is correct B. Incorrect:
55.43                        5 Comments:
Most affected SG is 2A, Ops Policy requires MSSV to be gagged to be considered NO LONGER FAULTED C. Correct D. Incorrect:
(
2A SG is LEAST AFFECTED, part two incorrect, MSSV required to be gagged to be NO LONGER FAULTED Technical Reference(s):
188
Operations Department Policy: (Attach if not previously provided)
 
OPS-521 Emergency Operating Procedure Implementation 0702828 Functional Recovery Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
ST. LUCIE PLANT                            OPS-S21 OPS-521 OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT POLICY                        Rev. 13 EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE                          Date  03/31/09 IMPLEMENTATION                            Page  11 of 16
Learning Objective:
: 1. J. (continued)
________ (As available)
(continued)
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) -----x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge
: 6.      Manual initiation of AFAS should NOT be done during other scenarios because it defeats the rupture identification circuit. This does NOT prevent a crew decision to manually operate AFW components, start pumps and open valves, if deemed necessary.
_X __ _ Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 ---55.43 5 ---Comments:
: 7.      ESFAS Actuation: Use of ESF Override features in EOPs
188 
: a.      When opening a valve that was closed by SIAS or CIAS, increased awareness / monitoring should be employed on that system to detect a release to the environment via that flow path.
: 1. ( J. ST. LUCIE PLANT EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE IMPLEMENTATION (continued)
: b.      Increasing RAB radiation indications, loss of Containment sump inventory and unexpected Containment depressurization are all examples of Containment boundary leakage which may have been created by operator action, and should be considered when taking these type of actions.
OPS-S21 Rev. 13 Date 03/31/09 Page 11 of 16 6. Manual initiation of AFAS should NOT be done during other scenarios because it defeats the rupture identification circuit. This does NOT prevent a crew decision to manually operate AFW components, start pumps and open valves, if deemed necessary.  
K. Manual Override of MFIV Following AFAS Actuation (Unit 2):
: 7. ESFAS Actuation:
: 1.     Do NOT override and open MFIV from within EOP-1. This overrides a safeguard signal prior to diagnosing the event.
Use of ESF Override features in EOPs a. When opening a valve that was closed by SIAS or CIAS, increased awareness
L. CCW to RCPs:
/ monitoring should be employed on that system to detect a release to the environment via that flow path. b. Increasing RAB radiation indications, loss of Containment sump inventory and unexpected Containment depressurization are all examples of Containment boundary leakage which may have been created by operator action, and should be considered when taking these type of actions. K. Manual Override of MFIV Following AFAS Actuation (Unit 2): 1. Do NOT override and open MFIV from within EOP-1. This overrides a safeguard signal prior to diagnosing the event. L. CCW to RCPs: 1. SPTAs take precedence over restoring CCW. 2. Restore CCW to RCPs when an RCa is available AND the attention required to restore does NOT adversely affect the maintenance or recovery of other safety functions.
: 1.      SPTAs SPT  As take precedence over restoring CCW.
M. Excess Steam Demand event guidance while implementing EOP-OS, Excess Steam Demand, and EOP-1S, Functional Recovery.
: 2.      Restore CCW to RCPs when an RCa  RCO is available AND the attention required to restore does NOT adversely affect the maintenance or recovery of other safety functions.
: 1. Regardless of the rate of ReS pressure and inventory reduction during an Excess Steam Demand, RCS pressure SHALL NOT be intentionally lowered to enhance inventory addition into the RCS unless the RCS Inventory Control Safety Function can NOT be maintained otherwise.  
M. Excess Steam Demand event guidance while implementing EOP-OS,  EOP-05, Excess Steam Demand, and EOP-1S, EOP-15, Functional Recovery.
: 2. If a Main Steam Safety Valve is stuck open, or was stuck open, causing entry into an EOP, Then the affected Steam Generator shall be considered faulted until the Safety Valve is gagged, even if the Safety Valve reseats. The Steam Generator shall NOT be unisolated until the Safety Valve is gagged. 1. J. K. ST. LUCIE PLANT OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT POLICY EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE IMPLEMENTATION ( continued)
: 1.      Regardless of the rate of ReS RCS pressure and inventory reduction during an Excess Steam Demand, RCS pressure SHALL NOT be intentionally lowered to enhance inventory addition into the RCS unless the RCS Inventory Control Safety Function can NOT be maintained otherwise.
OPS-521 Rev. 13 Date 03/31/09 Page 11 of 16 6. Manual initiation of AFAS should NOT be done during other scenarios because it defeats the rupture identification circuit. This does NOT prevent a crew decision to manually operate AFW components, start pumps and open valves, if deemed necessary.
: 2. If a Main Steam Safety Valve is stuck open, or was stuck open, causing entry into an EOP, Then the affected Steam Generator shall be considered faulted until the Safety Valve is gagged, even if the Safety Valve reseats. The Steam Generator shall NOT be unisolated until the Safety Valve is gagged.
: 7. ESFAS Actuation:
(
Use of ESF Override features in EOPs a. When opening a valve that was closed by SIAS or CIAS, increased awareness
: e. RCS and Core Heat Removal (HR)                When monitoring the RCS The success paths for RCS and core heat      temperature during forced removal contain some optimal guidance for    circulation conditions, THOT is SGTR, ESDE, and TLOF (Le., steps to          the heat indicator. During all initiate Once Through Cooling or guidance    other conditions CET indication not to initiate OTC if no HPSI is available). shows the most accurate state of the core fluid. (Le. during safety injection the Tc RDT's ROT's are influenced by injection water)
/ monitoring should be employed on that system to detect a release to the environment via that flow path. b. Increasing RAB radiation indications, loss of Containment sump inventory and unexpected Containment depressurization are all examples of Containment boundary leakage which may have been created by operator action, and should be considered when taking these type of actions. Manual Override of MFIV Following AFAS Actuation (Unit 2): 1. Do NOT override and open MFIV from within EOP-1. This overrides a safeguard signal prior to diagnosing the event. L. CCW to RCPs: 1. SPT As take precedence over restoring CCW. 2. Restore CCW to RCPs when an RCO is available AND the attention required to restore does NOT adversely affect the maintenance or recovery of other safety functions.
CEN-152.
M. Excess Steam Demand event guidance while implementing EOP-05, Excess Steam Demand, and EOP-15, Functional Recovery.
: f. Containment Isolation (CI)                    Explain that if a steam generator tube rupture exist, containment isolation can not be met until the most affected S/G is isolated.
: 1. Regardless of the rate of RCS pressure and inventory reduction during an Excess Steam Demand, RCS pressure SHALL NOT be intentionally lowered to enhance inventory addition into the RCS unless the RCS Inventory Control Safety Function can NOT be maintained otherwise.
: g. Containment Temperature and Pressure Control (CTPC)
: 2. If a Main Steam Safety Valve is stuck open, or was stuck open, causing entry into an EOP, Then the affected Steam Generator shall be considered faulted until the Safety Valve is gagged, even if the Safety Valve reseats. The Steam Generator shall NOT be unisolated until the Safety Valve is gagged. 
: h. Containment Combustible Gas Control          Explain: TSC must agree to H2 (CCGC)                                        purge success path prior to use.
: e. RCS and Core Heat Removal (HR) The success paths for RCS and core heat removal contain some optimal guidance for SGTR, ESDE, and TLOF (Le., steps to initiate Once Through Cooling or guidance not to initiate OTC if no HPSI is available).
: 7. Long Term Actions                                EO-2 These actions should be pursued
: f. Containment Isolation (CI) g. Containment Temperature and Pressure Control (CTPC) h. Containment Combustible Gas Control (CCGC) 7. Long Term Actions a. Determine Plant Status b. Cooldown necessary
(                                                        concurrently with the TSC.
: c. Coldown Feasible E. MULTIPLE EVENT STRATEGY 1. Simultaneous ESD and SGTR a. The Containment Isolation Safety Function will not be met for this dual event due to secondary activity and the most affected SG (ESD SG has yet to be isolated).
: a. Determine Plant Status
Assuming other safety functions are being met, the US implements CI-1 Success Path first. CI-1 will direct him to Heat Removal Success Path HR-1 or HR-2 as appropriate where he When monitoring the RCS temperature during forced circulation conditions, THOT is the heat indicator.
: b. Cooldown necessary                            Due to the event a standard cooldown may not be achievable.
During all other conditions CET indication shows the most accurate state of the core fluid. (Le. during safety injection the Tc RDT's are influenced by injection water) CEN-152. Explain that if a steam generator tube rupture exist, containment isolation can not be met until the most affected S/G is isolated.
: c. Coldown Feasible E. MULTIPLE EVENT STRATEGY
Explain: TSC must agree to H2 purge success path prior to use. EO-2 These actions should be pursued concurrently with the TSC. Due to the event a standard cooldown may not be achievable.
: 1. Simultaneous ESD and SGTR                        EO-7A
EO-7A Note: If the S/G with the SGTR is required to be steamed, then CI-1 will only be met when the ESD SG is isolated (no steam release) and the most affected SG pressure is <930 psia. 0702828, Rev. 10, Page 10 of 28 FOR TRAINING USE ONLY ( e. RCS and Core Heat Removal (HR) The success paths for RCS and core heat removal contain some optimal guidance for SGTR, ESDE, and TLOF (Le., steps to initiate Once Through Cooling or guidance not to initiate OTC if no HPSI is available).
: a. The Containment Isolation Safety Function    Note: If the S/G with the SGTR will not be met for this dual event due to    is required to be steamed, then secondary activity and the most affected SG  CI-1 will only be met when the (ESD SG has yet to be isolated). Assuming    ESD SG is isolated (no steam other safety functions are being met, the US  release) and the most affected implements CI-1 Success Path first. CI-1      SG pressure is <930 psia.
: f. Containment Isolation (CI) g. Containment Temperature and Pressure Control (CTPC) h. Containment Combustible Gas Control (CCGC) 7. Long Term Actions a. Determine Plant Status b. Cooldown necessary
will direct him to Heat Removal Success Path HR-1 or HR-2 as appropriate where he will isolate the most affected S/G (in this case it is the one with the ESD). He then returns to CI-1 and completes the procedure in the normal fashion.
: c. Coldown Feasible E. MULTIPLE EVENT STRATEGY 1. Simultaneous ESD and SGTR a. The Containment Isolation Safety Function will not be met for this dual event due to secondary activity and the most affected SG (ESD SG has yet to be isolated).
0702828, Rev. 10, Page 10 of 28 FOR TRAINING USE ONLY
Assuming other safety functions are being met, the US implements CI-1 Success Path first. CI-1 will direct him to Heat Removal Success Path HR-1 or HR-2 as appropriate where he will isolate the most affected S/G (in this case it is the one with the ESD). He then returns to CI-1 and completes the procedure in the normal fashion. When monitoring the RCS temperature during forced circulation conditions, THOT is the heat indicator.
 
During all other conditions CET indication shows the most accurate state of the core fluid. (Le. during safety injection the Tc ROT's are influenced by injection water) CEN-152. Explain that if a steam generator tube rupture exist, containment isolation can not be met until the most affected S/G is isolated.
( Examination Outline Cross-reference:                          Level                  RO    SRO Tier Tier# #                      3 Group #
Explain: TSC must agree to H2 purge success path prior to use. EO-2 These actions should be pursued concurrently with the TSC. Due to the event a standard cooldown may not be achievable.
KIA #                  G2.1.9 Importance Rating            4.5 Conduct of Operations: Ability to direct personnel activities inside the control room Proposed Question:                     SRO 95 Unit 2 has tripped from 100% power. A Loss Of Offsite Power (LOOP) occurred during the trip.
EO-7A Note: If the S/G with the SGTR is required to be steamed, then CI-1 will only be met when the ESD SG is isolated (no steam release) and the most affected SG pressure is <930 psia. 0702828, Rev. 10, Page 10 of 28 FOR TRAINING USE ONLY 
The following conditions were noted immediately after the trip:
( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating Conduct of Operations:
Ability to direct personnel activities inside the control room Proposed Question:
SRO 95 RO G2.1.9 SRO 3 4.5 Unit 2 has tripped from 100% power. A Loss Of Offsite Power (LOOP) occurred during the trip. The following conditions were noted immediately after the trip:
* 2A EDG is running with its output breaker closed.
* 2A EDG is running with its output breaker closed.
* 2B EDG is running but its breaker failed to close, no abnormal alarms noted.
* 26 2B EDG is running but its breaker failed to close, no abnormal alarms noted.
* Steam Generator pressures are 1000 psia.
* Steam Generator pressures are 1000 psia.
* RCS pressure is 2200 psiastable.
* RCS pressure is 2200 psiastable. psia stable.
* ONLY the 2A Charging pump is running.
* ONLY the 2A Charging pump is running.
* Pressurizer level is 35% slowly lowering.
* Pressurizer level is 35% slowly lowering.
* ONE CEA is at the Upper Electrical Limit (UEL).
* ONE CEA is at the Upper Electrical Limit (UEL).
Which ONE of the following directions can be given to the RCO's prior to formal entry into 1-EOP-01 Standard Post Trip Actions? A. Direct RCO to contact the field operator to perform Appendix X, direct RCO to close MSR TCV's. B. Direct RCS depressurized to between 1800-1850 psia, direct start of 2C Charging pump. C. Direct RCO to close the MSIV's, direct RCO to emergency borate. D. Direct ADV's operated to control Steam Generator pressure, direct one attempt to close the 2B EDG output breaker. 189 ( ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Which ONE of the following directions can be given to the RCO's prior to formal entry into 1-( EOP-01 Standard Post Trip Actions?
Level Tier # Group # KIA # Importance Rating Conduct of Operations:
A. Direct RCO to contact the field operator to perform Appendix X, direct RCO to close MSR TCV's.
Ability to direct personnel activities inside the control room Proposed Question:
: 6. Direct RCS depressurized to between 1800-1850 psia, direct start of 2C B.
SRO 95 RO G2.1.9 SRO 3 4.5 Unit 2 has tripped from 100% power. A Loss Of Offsite Power (LOOP) occurred during the trip. The following conditions were noted immediately after the trip:
Charging pump.
* 2A EDG is running with its output breaker closed.
C. Direct RCO to close the MSIV's, direct RCO to emergency borate.
* 26 EDG is running but its breaker failed to close, no abnormal alarms noted.
D. Direct ADV's operated to control Steam Generator pressure, direct one attempt to close the 2B       26 EDG output breaker.
* Steam Generator pressures are 1000 psia.
(
* RCS pressure is 2200 psia stable.
189
* ONLY the 2A Charging pump is running.
 
* Pressurizer level is 35% slowly lowering.
Proposed Answer:           D
* ONE CEA is at the Upper Electrical Limit (UEL).
(
Which ONE of the following directions can be given to the RCO's prior to formal entry into 1-EOP-01 Standard Post Trip Actions? A. Direct RCO to contact the field operator to perform Appendix X, direct RCO to close MSR TCV's. 6. Direct RCS depressurized to between 1800-1850 psia, direct start of 2C Charging pump. C. Direct RCO to close the MSIV's, direct RCO to emergency borate. D. Direct ADV's operated to control Steam Generator pressure, direct one attempt to close the 26 EDG output breaker. 189 Proposed Answer: D Explanation (Optional):
Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect:
A. Incorrect: US does not direct RCO to contact field operator. RCO announces unit trip and requests Field Operator call the control room. MSR TCV closure is performed by RCO as contingency actions if MSR block valves did not close.
US does not direct RCO to contact field operator.
B. Incorrect: RCS is depressurized to 1800-1850 in EOP-09 LOOP to protect RCP seals.
RCO announces unit trip and requests Field Operator call the control room. MSR TCV closure is performed by RCO as contingency actions if MSR block valves did not close. B. Incorrect:
2C Charging pump would not be started, Pressurizer level is within safety function range.
RCS is depressurized to 1800-1850 in EOP-09 LOOP to protect RCP seals. 2C Charging pump would not be started, Pressurizer level is within safety function range. C. Incorrect:
C. Incorrect: MSIV's are closed in EOP-09 LOOP to protect the main condenser.
MSIV's are closed in EOP-09 LOOP to protect the main condenser.
Emergency Borate not required with ONE CEA not fully inserted.
Emergency Borate not required with ONE CEA not fully inserted.
D. Correct: US will give direction post trip to stabilize the plant prior to formal entry into EOP-01 Standard Post Trip Actions. Technical Reference(s):
D. Correct: US will give direction post trip to stabilize the plant prior to formal entry into EOP-01 Standard Post Trip Actions.
Operations Department Policy (Attach if not previously provided)
Technical Reference(s):     Operations Department Policy         (Attach if not previously provided)
OPS-521 Emergency Operating Procedure Implementation 2-EOP-01 Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
OPS-521 Emergency Operating
Learning Objective: (As available)
(                             Procedure Implementation 2-EOP-01 Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
------------------------
Learning Objective:         0702822-09                             (As available)
0702822-09 Question Source: Bank# Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) ---------x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 ------55.43 5 ----Comments:
Question Source:           Bank #
x 190 ( ( Proposed Answer: D Explanation (Optional):
Bank#
A. Incorrect:
Modified Bank #                       (Note changes or attach parent)
US does not direct RCO to contact field operator.
New                   x Question History:           Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:   Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis                     x 10 CFR Part 55 Content:     55.41 55.43   ------
RCO announces unit trip and requests Field Operator call the control room. MSR TCV closure is performed by RCO as contingency actions if MSR block valves did not close. B. Incorrect:
10 5---- -
RCS is depressurized to 1800-1850 in EOP-09 LOOP to protect RCP seals. 2C Charging pump would not be started, Pressurizer level is within safety function range. C. Incorrect:
Comments:
MSIV's are closed in EOP-09 LOOP to protect the main condenser.
190
Emergency Borate not required with ONE CEA not fully inserted.
D. Correct: US will give direction post trip to stabilize the plant prior to formal entry into EOP-01 Standard Post Trip Actions. Technical Reference(s):
Operations Department Policy (Attach if not previously provided)
OPS-521 Emergency Operating Procedure Implementation 2-EOP-01 Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
0702822-09 (As available)  
---------------------------
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 ---'-'---55.43 5 ---Comments:
x 190 
: 1. H. ST. LUCIE PLANT OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT POLICY EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE IMPLEMENTATION (continued)
OPS-S21 Rev. 13 Date 03/31/09 Page 6 of 16 3. If a Safety Function is not being met or a contingency action must be taken, that information must be communicated to the US. The US will direct these contingency actions. This communication will utilize 4-parts. 4. Following completion of the Immediate Actions, the SM, US and RCOs should spend approximately one minute assessing plant status and acknowledging alarms. During this time the Desk RCO should: a. Announce on the Gaitronics "Attention all Plant Personnel, the Unit 1 (2) Reactor has tripped." b. NOTIFY the NPO to perform Appendix X, Section 1 of EOP-99 c. CONTACT the STA and Shift Communicator to report to the Control Room and d. Close the MSR TCV block and/or warm-up valves. e. While the US and BRCO are performing the Inventory and/or Pressure Control safety function, the DRCO should CLOSE MV-OS-S14.
The US / SM should: f. Mentally perform EOP-1 to quickly assess the status of the plant. g. Actions required to stabilize the plant may be taken at that time. (e.g., close an EDG breaker, start a charging pump, manually control S/G pressure)
: 1. H. ( ( ST. LUCIE PLANT OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT POLICY EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE IMPLEMENTATION (continued)
OPS-521 Rev. 13 Date 03/31/09 Page 6of16 3. If a Safety Function is not being met or a contingency action must be taken, that information must be communicated to the US. The US will direct these contingency actions. This communication will utilize 4-parts. 4. Following completion of the Immediate Actions, the SM, US and RCOs should spend approximately one minute assessing plant status and acknowledging alarms. During this time the Desk RCO should: a. Announce on the Gaitronics "Attention all Plant Personnel, the Unit 1 (2) Reactor has tripped." b. NOTIFY the NPO to perform Appendix X, Section 1 of EOP-99 c. CONTACT the ST A and Shift Communicator to report to the Control Room and d. Close the MSR TCV block and/or warm-up valves. e. While the US and BRCO are performing the Inventory and/or Pressure Control safety function, the DRCO should CLOSE MV-OS-S14.
The US / SM should: f. Mentally perform EOP-1 to quickly assess the status of the plant. g. Actions required to stabilize the plant may be taken at that time. (e.g., close an EDG breaker, start a charging pump, manually control S/G pressure)
Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO G2.2.17 Equipment Control: Knowledge of the process for managing maintenance activities during power operations Proposed Question:
SRO 96 Which ONE of the following work activities are examples that are controlled by: 1) O-ADM-80.01 CONTROL OF FIX IT NOW I MINOR MAINTENANCE WORK ACTIVITIES?
: 2) What work activities require the SRO I Shift SRO permission to start? SRO 3 3.8 A. 1) Adjusting packing on pumps that are Quality AND Safety Related. 2) Work that involves installed plant equipment within the power block. B. 1) Adjusting packing on pumps that are Quality Related equipment ONLY. 2) Work that involves installed plant equipment within the power block. C. 1) Minor welding on Quality Related OR Safety Related equipment.
: 2) Work activities that require a Equipment Clearance Order. D. 1) Minor welding on Quality Related equipment ONLY. 2) Work activities that require a Equipment Clearance Order. 191 ( ( \ Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO G2.2.17 Equipment Control: Knowledge of the process for managing maintenance activities during power operations Proposed Question:
SRO 96 Which ONE of the following work activities are examples that are controlled by: 1) O-ADM-80.01 CONTROL OF FIX IT NOW I MINOR MAINTENANCE WORK ACTIVITIES?
: 2) What work activities require the SRO I Shift SRO permission to start? SRO 3 3.8 A. 1) Adjusting packing on pumps that are Quality AND Safety Related. 2) Work that involves installed plant equipment within the power block. B. 1) Adjusting packing on pumps that are Quality Related equipment ONLY. 2) Work that involves installed plant equipment within the power block. C. 1) Minor welding on Quality Related OR Safety Related equipment.
: 2) Work activities that require a Equipment Clearance Order. D. 1) Minor welding on Quality Related equipment ONLY. 2) Work activities that require a Equipment Clearance Order. 191 Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect:
minor maintenance NOT permitted on Safety Related Pumps, although minor maintenance IS allowed on some Safety related equipment.
B. Correct: maintenance allowed on Quality Related. SRO required to approve power block work C. Incorrect:
minor welding NOT allowed on Safety related equipment.
D. Incorrect:
minor welding NOT allowed on Quality related equipment Technical Reference(s):
0-ADM-80.01 Control of Fix It Now / Minor Maintenance Work Activities. (Attach if not previously provided)
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
_0_9_0_4_7_24_-_02
________ (As available)
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) -----x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge X ----Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 ---55.43 5 ---Comments:
192 ( ( Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect:
minor maintenance NOT permitted on Safety Related Pumps, although minor maintenance IS allowed on some Safety related equipment.
B. Correct: maintenance allowed on Quality Related. SRO required to approve power block work C. Incorrect:
minor welding NOT allowed on Safety related equipment.
D. Incorrect:
minor welding NOT allowed on Quality related equipment Technical Reference(s):
0-ADM-80.01 Control of Fix It Now / Minor Maintenance Work Activities. (Attach if not previously provided)
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
_0_9_0_4_7_2_4-_0_2
________ (As available) Question Source:
Bank # Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) -----x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge X ----Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 ---'--''---
55.43 5 ---Comments:
192 
( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 22E CONTROL OF FIX IT NOW I MINOR MAINTENANCE 1--------4 PROCEDURE NO.: WORK ACTIVITIES 12 of 28 ADM-80.01 ST. LUCIE PLANT 7.3 Minor Maintenance Work Control Process: (continued)
: 6. (continued)
In addition to the above requirements, minor maintenance work orders which require an equipment clearance shall be reviewed by the Fin SRO prior to implementation to ensure there are no conflicts with scheduled POD activities or operational requirements.
: 7. Minor Maintenance work orders that involve the removal of grating clips shall include Supervisor I GML signoff for verification of the re-installation of grating clips. 8. The planned duration of any job worked under minor maintenance is normally limited to having the work completed on the same day but may be extended by the Supervisor.
: 9. Minor Maintenance Work Orders shall be reviewed and verified as Minor Maintenance by the specific departments Production Supervisor and the Verified Minor Maintenance Field signed and dated prior to commencement of field work. 10 t Fin SRO I Shift SRO permission to start work is required for any Minor Maintenance Work Order that involves work activities which could affect unit operation or involves installed plant equipment within the power block. A. The Fin SRO I Shift SRO I Shift Manager shall document permission to start work by signing and dating the Minor Maintenance Work Orders. Security shall be notified prior to work on security related equipment.
: 11. Work performed shall be summarized and parts documented in the Work Performed Section of the Minor Maintenance Work Order and the Journeyman I GML I Supervisor shall date and sign. 12. The Deficiency Tag shall be removed and EOOS sections shall be completed.
: 13. For work reports requiring more than one page, utilize a form similar to Attachment 2, Page 1 of 1. 14. The Work Performed section shall be reviewed by Supervisor I Foreman I Chief I GML. Security related work orders may require review by Security Shift SpeCialist. ( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: CONTROL OF FIX IT NOW / MINOR MAINTENANCE I-P-RO-C-E-D-UR-E-N-O-.:---t WO RK ACTIVITI ES 22E 12 of 28 ADM-80.01 ST. LUCIE PLANT 7.3 Minor Maintenance Work Control Process: (continued)
: 6. (continued) 6"t' In addition to the above requirements, minor maintenance work orders which require an equipment clearance shall be reviewed by the Fin SRO prior to implementation to ensure there are no conflicts with scheduled POD activities or operational requirements.
: 7. Minor Maintenance work orders that involve the removal of grating clips shall include Supervisor
/ GML signoff for verification of the re-installation of grating clips. 8. The planned duration of any job worked under minor maintenance is normally limited to having the work completed on the same day but may be extended by the Supervisor.
: 9. Minor Maintenance Work Orders shall be reviewed and verified as Minor Maintenance by the specific departments Production Supervisor and the Verified Minor Maintenance Field signed and dated prior to commencement of field work. 10 .. i Fin SRO / Shift SRO permission to start work is required for any Minor Maintenance Work Order that involves work activities which could affect unit operation or involves installed plant equipment within the power block. A. The Fin SRO / Shift SRO / Shift Manager shall document permission to start work by signing and dating the Minor Maintenance Work Orders. Security shall be notified prior to work on security related equipment.
: 11. Work performed shall be summarized and parts documented in the Work Performed Section of the Minor Maintenance Work Order and the Journeyman
/ GML / Supervisor shall date and sign. 12. The Deficiency Tag shall be removed and EOOS sections shall be completed.
: 13. For work reports requiring more than one page, utilize a form similar to Attachment 2, Page 1 of 1. 14. The Work Performed section shall be reviewed by Supervisor
/ Foreman / Chief / GML. Security related work orders may require review by Security Shift Specialist. 
( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 22E CONTROL OF FIX IT NOW / MINOR MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE NO.: WORK ACTIVITIES ADM-80.01
..............
--... , Need --)
// /Maintenance Supervisor
()( No FIN SROIShift SRO Determines FIN Ll Fi. It Now Cutegories:
'A" Priority PWC)'s "S" PrlorUy PWO's Eme'll"ntwor' that would cause POD togo IJUst ToolpouCh Mamte:n.aooo Criteria I-Non Power I Component Work l-Materials Handling
* Kool & Lite Line Work Minor Maintenance
* Short Duralion Jobs ,. No Detailed PWnnlng
* No Tech Spec LeO Work .
* No QC Involvement in Ihe planning stage
* Minimal Risk for ESF Actuations, Rad Exposure, Personnel Injury -No Weld/fig on SR ()r I OR Paris or Components I
TS'Il"ted Improvement
! Opporiunity:
! Evaluatec by I Operations II applicable disciplines supprn1ing, ST. LUCIE PLANT FIGURE 1 MINOR MAINTENANCE FLOW PROCESS (Page 1 of 1) Opef8tlons
& Maintenance RlWiewof .'!fork
/Workin ( Accordance " GMP*21 "'"--Toolpooch Maintenance -Non Power BIod< Component Work
* Materials
,. 1<001 & UtlJl Line Work ,. No Clearance Requirod Work/II Aet;()(c!snce with 'AA'PWOper
"-ADM 0010432 Minor Maintenance
-Short Duration Jobs -No DetAiled Planning -No T .. cI1 Spec LCO Work -No OC Involwment in Ihe stage ,. Minimal Risk for ESF Actuations, Rod Expos",,,,.
Personnel G WOrkin Acoordancll Win, ADM 80.01 .........
/ ............ (Completion of lAW ADM 0010432 or ADM.oo,01
--Plant Work Order Ca)agories
,. Focus i. Power Block ,. Fi"" Year Plan Work
* Preventive Maintenance
* Correcthffi Maintenance
* Installing PCMsiMEPs
""'''''' iPtAOIvIIADlvf.liO 011F1(,}, l!1'1EV.(J.
TlF) 17 of 28 c;;,;;;h:>
orWR Cancellatl ( REVISION NO.: 22E PROCEDURE NO.: ADM-80.01 Supervisor or FIN SROiShifl SRO PWO's "8'< Priority P\'IO's . Emergent wor';; that vvDUld G,,)US0 POD to go l)ust Minor M.linl"MOCP " Short puratK.\()
Jobs , No Detailed Planning -No Tech Spec LeO Work -No OC Irrvol'lemer,!
In stage RISk for ESF Rad Exposure, Flefsonn*l Injury No Welding on SR or OR Pans or Corilponents Targeted Improvement Opportunity:
Evaluated by Open)\tons apptk:{lble d1sc!phnes supporiiJ19 PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: CONTROL OF FIX IT NOW / MINOR MAINTENANCE WORK ACTIVITIES ST. LUCIE PLANT FIGURE 1 MINOR MAINTENANCE FLOW PROCESS (Page 1 of 1) 17 of 28 //"', /'"/",, " /. /'"" --.l"/ To.dpouch
\.'" No (/ Minor "" No /" Plant '. No
'. Mamtenance
/>-..:--_.
.. "'
)>'-'-__ .... "'r 'tv'*ork or I{vR ) " Activilv,,* " ,\C\.v.\)'
/ ", ACI!/Vil Y ./'
k1ti,?)/ " 7/ ' ? // " . . ' .-' :L :;/
1 -Non Po\lv'B( 8!ock i &#xa5; Focus IS POVlef Block Component Work MWlor Maintenance
;&#xa5; Fwc Year Plan Work ,. Materials HAndhng CntcHa > PreventIve Maintenance
-
& lit1u Lme VVork 1 Short Oun:1tion Jobs ! &#xa5; CorrectIVe Maintenance No Oetailed Planmf1g l&#xa5; Installing PCMsfMEPs
* No Tech Spec LeO Work &#xa5; No QC lnvo!vem-ent In the planning:
stage -MInimal for ESF lions, Rad Exposure, Personnel , Injury . ." -No SRo( QR Parts or Components Work Accordan.ce
\>Vlth)' ADM B(\()1 ..
REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 22E CONTROL OF FIX IT NOW / MINOR MAINTENANCE I-P-RO-C-E-D-UR-E-N-O-.:---f WORK ACTIVITI ES 21 of 28 ADM-80.01 ST. LUCIE PLANT APPENDIX A CHECKLIST TO DETERMINE MINOR MAINTENANCE (Page 3 of 4) EQUIPMENT
>>n AC*llvll Y LIMITATIONS I Motors I Pumps X IX IX Draw oil samples Compressors I Fans X IX IX Add oil X IX IX filters IX IX IX Lubricate Motors X Disconnect I Reconnect N/A for EO (75 HP or less) Panels I Consoles IX X X Replace missing covers I screws' Piping I Fittings IX X Replace caps' I Repair pipe thread I Replace fittings' Pneumatic circuits I X X Troubleshoot Use GMP-21 or specific instructions-loops for SR equip. IX I Repair I IX IX I Calibration check IX I Calibrate ps I Cooling IX Replace packing I Minor repair I Simple alignment I Coupling repair I replace, complete pump replacement Security Equipment X N/A N/A Repair Doors and Gates Notify Fire Protection for impact of work to be performed on security fire barrier doors to determine if fire breach permit will be needed. No modification to door or its mounting hardware may be performed under minor maintenance.
X N/A N/A Repair Equipment and Building Systems Strainers X X Install I Remove I Replace I Repair I Clean' I Indicators X IX Calibrate I Replar.e I Repair' Temporary Pipe Caps X IX IX Install I Remove I Replace* Terminal I Pull Boxes X IX IX Replace missing covers I screws* NOTES: Minor Maintenance may not be performed on Equipment with Safety Classifications blacked out. N/A indicates Safety Classification is not applicable.
Use Minor Maintenance.
'Replacement parts shall be consistent with component quality group, parts application, and specified component configuration.
Welding permitted on non-safety related, non-quality related, non-seismic structural or piping categories 6,7,8 when final V.T. inspection is required.
Fire Impairments or Barrier Breach Requests will be documented PRIOR to any plant breach. REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 22E CONTROL OF FIX IT NOW / MINOR MAINTENANCE 21 of 28 PROCEDURE NO.: WORK ACTIVITIES ADM-80.01 ST LUCIE PLANT APPENDIX A CHECKLIST TO DETERMINE MINOR MAINTENANCE (Page 3 of 4) EQUIPMENT "fQNS QR SR ACTIVITY LIMITATIONS Motors I Pumps X X X Draw oil samples Compressors I Fans X X X Add oil X X X Replace filters X X X Lubricate Motors X Disconnect I Reconnect N/A for EQ (75 HP or less) Panels I Consoles X X X Replace missing covers I screws' Piping I Fittings X X Replace caps' I Repair pipe thread I Replace fittings*
Pneumatic circuits I X X Troubleshoot Use GMP-21 or specific instructions loops for SR equip. X Repair I Replace X X Calibration check X Calibrate Pumps X J ' Adjust packWlg I Cooling Water Flow X Replace packing I Minor repair I Simple alignment I Coupling repair I replace, complete pump replacement Security Equipment X N/A N/A Repair Doors and Gates Notify Fire Protection for impact of work to be performed on security fire barrier doors to determine if fire breach permit will be needed. No modification to door or its mounting hardware may be performed under minor maintenance.
X N/A N/A Repair Equipment and Building Systems Strainers X X Install I Remove I Replace I Repair I Clean' Temperature Indicators X X Calibrate I Replace I Repair* Temporary Pipe Caps X X X Install I Remove I Replace* Terminal I Pull Boxes X X X Replace missing covers I screws* NOTES Minor Maintenance may not be performed on Equipment with Safety Classifications blacked out. N/A indicates Safety Classification is not applicable.
Use Minor Maintenance.
*Replacement parts shall be consistent with component quality group, parts application, and specified component configuration.
Welding permitted on non-safety related, non-quality related, non-seismic structural or piping categories 6,7,8 when final VT inspection is required.
Fire Impairments or Barrier Breach Requests will be documented PRIOR to any plant breach.
Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating Equipment Control: Knowledge of the process used to track inoperable alarms Proposed Question:
SRO 97 RO G2.2.43 SRO 3 3.3 Unit 1 is at 100% power steady state. The following annunciator was alarming approximately every 30 minutes for the past 8 hours. IIC has determined a faulty circuit is causing the alarm. The annunciator has been defeated for 10 days. 1) The above annunciator was: 2) The annuncaitor is tracked by: STEAM BYPASS DEMAND K-6 A. 1) CONSIDERED a nuisance annunciator.
: 2) ADM-17.18
'Temporary System Alteration' B. 1) CONSIDERED a nuisance annunciator
: 2) ADM-09.03
'Administrative Control Of Defeated Annunciators' C. 1) NOT CONSIDERED a nuisance annunciator.
: 2) ADM-17 .18 'Temporary System Alteration' D. 1) NOT CONSIDERED a nuisance annunciator.
: 2) ADM-09.03
'Administrative Control Of Defeated Annunciators' Proposed Answer: A Explanation (Optional):
193 ( ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Level Tier # Group # KIA # Importance Rating Equipment Control: Knowledge of the process used to track inoperable alarms Proposed Question:
SRO 97 RO G2.2.43 SRO 3 3.3 Unit 1 is at 100% power steady state. The following annunciator was alarming approximately every 30 minutes for the past 8 hours. IIC has determined a faulty circuit is causing the alarm. The annunciator has been defeated for 10 days. 1) The above annunciator was: 2) The annuncaitor is tracked by: STEAM BYPASS DEMAND K-6 A. 1) CONSIDERED a nuisance annunciator.
: 2) ADM-17.18
'Temporary System Alteration' B. 1) CONSIDERED a nuisance annunciator
: 2) ADM-09.03
'Administrative Control Of Defeated Annunciators' C. 1) NOT CONSIDERED a nuisance annunciator.
: 2) ADM-17.18
'Temporary System Alteration' D. 1) NOT CONSIDERED a nuisance annunciator.
: 2) ADM-09.03
'Administrative Control Of Defeated Annunciators' Proposed Answer: A Explanation (Optional):
193 A. Correct: Annunciator is considered a nuisance annunciator that alarms greater than or equal to 8 times in a consecutive 8 hour period. Transfer of tracking defeated annunciator must be performed by ADM-17.18 Temporary System Alteration if annunciator defeated greater than 7 days. B. Incorrect:
Control of defeated annunciator performed by ADM-09.03 Administrative Control of Defeated Annunciators for a MAXIMUM of 7 days. C. Incorrect:
Annunciator is a nuisance annunciator due to alarming greater than 8 times in a consecutive 8 hour period D. Incorrect:
Annunciator is a nuisance annunciator due to alarming greater than 8 times in a consecutive 8 hour period Technical Reference(s):
ADM-09.03 Administrative Control of Defeated Annunciators (Attach if not previously provided)
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
_0-'-9=-:0'-4_7_24_--'-0_2
_______ (As available)
Question Source: Bank# Modified Bank # New (Note changes or attach parent) -----X Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge X ----Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 ---55.43 5 ---Comments:
194 ( ( A. Correct: Annunciator is considered a nuisance annunciator that alarms greater than or equal to 8 times in a consecutive 8 hour period. Transfer of tracking defeated annunciator must be performed by ADM-17.18 Temporary System Alteration if annunciator defeated greater than 7 days. B. Incorrect:
Control of defeated annunciator performed by ADM-09.03 Administrative Control of Defeated Annunciators for a MAXIMUM of 7 days. C. Incorrect:
Annunciator is a nuisance annunciator due to alarming greater than 8 times in a consecutive 8 hour period D. Incorrect:
Annunciator is a nuisance annunciator due to alarming greater than 8 times in a consecutive 8 hour period Technical Reference(s):
ADM-09.03 Administrative Control of Defeated Annunciators (Attach if not previously provided)
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
Question Source: Question History: 0904724-02
---------------------------
Bank # Modified Bank # New Last NRC Exam X (As available) (Note changes or attach parent) Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge
_X __ _ Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 ---55.43 5 ---Comments:
194 REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 7C PROCEDURE NO.: ADM-09.03 ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROL OF DEFEATED ANNUNCIATORS ST. LUCIE PLANT 3.0 RESPONSIBILITIES


===3.1 Requestor===
ST. LUCIE PLANT                          OPS-S21 OPS-521 OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT POLICY                      Rev. 13 EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE                        Date    03/31/09 IMPLEMENTATION                        Page 6of16 6 of 16
: 1. H. (continued)
: 3.     If a Safety Function is not being met or a contingency action must be taken, that information must be communicated to the US. The US will direct these contingency actions. This communication will utilize 4-parts.
: 4.      Following completion of the Immediate Actions, the SM, US and RCOs should spend approximately one minute assessing plant status and acknowledging alarms.
During this time the Desk RCO should:
: a.      Announce on the Gaitronics "Attention all Plant Personnel, the Unit 1 (2) Reactor has tripped."
: b.      NOTIFY the NPO to perform Appendix X, Section 1 of EOP-99
: c.      CONTACT the STA ST A and Shift Communicator to report to the Control Room and
(
: d.      Close the MSR TCV block and/or warm-up valves.
: e.      While the US and BRCO are performing the Inventory and/or Pressure Control safety function, the DRCO should CLOSE MV-OS-S14.
The US / SM should:
: f.      Mentally perform EOP-1 to quickly assess the status of the plant.
: g.      Actions required to stabilize the plant may be taken at that time.
(e.g., close an EDG breaker, start a charging pump, manually control S/G pressure)
(


/ Originator 4 of 21 Each individual requesting that an annunciator be defeated shall be responsible for the following:  
Examination Outline Cross-reference:                   Level                            RO            SRO Tier#                                          3 Group #
: 1. Ensure NPWO(s) submitted to correct nuisance condition.  
KIA #                            G2.2.17 Importance Rating                              3.8 Equipment Control: Knowledge of the process for managing maintenance activities during power operations Proposed Question:                  SRO 96 Which ONE of the following work activities are examples that are controlled by:
: 2. Recommendation that an annunciator is a nuisance annunciator.  
: 1) O-ADM-80.01 CONTROL OF FIX IT NOW I MINOR MAINTENANCE WORK ACTIVITIES?
: 3. Recommendation of the method for defeating the annunciator's input process signal that causes the nuisance condition.
: 2) What work activities require the SRO I Shift SRO permission to start?
: 4. Recommendation of the compensatory monitoring measures necessary to monitor the defeated input process signal while the annunciator is defeated.  
A. 1) Adjusting packing on pumps that are Quality AND Safety Related.
: 5. Recommendation of the restoration and testing method for restoring the defeated annunciator to service. 3.2 Shift Manager (SM) 111::iIUIt::
: 2) Work that involves installed plant equipment within the power block.
lUI lilt:: Iullowlng:
B. 1) Adjusting packing on pumps that are Quality Related equipment ONLY.
>, *
: 2) Work that involves installed plant equipment within the power block.
* Determination that an annunciator is a valid nuisance annunciator.  
(                    C. 1) Minor welding on Quality Related OR Safety Related equipment.
'i!&sect;fftJtlJ;C!!'
: 2) Work activities that require a Equipment Clearance Order.
: 2. Determination that defeating the nuisance annunciator is appropriate.  
D. 1) Minor welding on Quality Related equipment ONLY.
: 3. Approval of the method used to defeat the nuisance annunciator input process signal. 4. Approval of the compensatory monitoring measures utilized to monitor the defeated input process signal while the annunciator is defeated.  
: 2) Work activities that require a Equipment Clearance Order.
: 5. Approval of the restoration and testing methods for defeated annunciators.  
(
: 6. Ensure the defeated annunciator is entered in the Equipment Out of Service Log. 7. Ensuring that defeating the annunciator does NOT require a License Amendment Request. 8. Ensuring that compensatory monitoring measures are performed for all defeated annunciators.  
\
: 9. Ensuring that the time limit for defeating annunciators is NOT exceeded.  
191
: 10. Ensuring that defeated annunciators are returned to normal operation in a timely manner. REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 7C 4 of 21 PROCEDURE NO.: ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROL OF DEFEATED ANNUNCIATORS ADM-09.03 ST. LUCIE PLANT 3.0 RESPONSIBILITIES


===3.1 Requestor===
Proposed Answer:            B Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect: minor maintenance NOT permitted on Safety Related Pumps, although minor maintenance IS allowed on some Safety related equipment.
B. Correct: maintenance allowed on Quality Related. SRO required to approve power block work C. Incorrect: minor welding NOT allowed on Safety related equipment.
D. Incorrect: minor welding NOT allowed on Quality related equipment Technical Reference(s):    0-ADM-80.01 Control of Fix It    (Attach if not previously provided)
Now / Minor Maintenance Work Activities.
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:      _0_9_0_4_7_2_4-_0_2
_0_9_0_4_7_24_-_02_ __ __ __
___ _ (As available)
(
Question Source:            Bank #
Modified Bank #                    (Note changes or attach parent)
New                      x Question History:          Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:  Memory or Fundamental Knowledge          X Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content:    55.41        10 55.43        5 Comments:
(
192


/ Originator 3.2 Each individual requesting that an annunciator be defeated shall be responsible for the following:  
REVISION NO.:                PROCEDURE TITLE:                                      PAGE:
: 1. Ensure NPWO(s) submitted to correct nuisance condition.
22E              CONTROL OF FIX IT NOW I/ MINOR MAINTENANCE
: 2. Recommendation that an annunciator is a nuisance annunciator.  
( 1--------4 I-P-RO-C-E-D-UR-E-N-O-.:---t PROCEDURE NO.:                                 WO RK ACTIVITI WORK            ES ACTIVITIES 12 of 28 ADM-80.01                                ST. LUCIE PLANT 7.3    Minor Maintenance Work Control Process: (continued)
: 3. Recommendation of the method for defeating the annunciator's input process signal that causes the nuisance condition.  
: 6.     (continued) 6"t'        In addition to the above requirements, minor maintenance work orders which require an equipment clearance shall be reviewed by the Fin SRO prior to implementation to ensure there are no conflicts
: 4. Recommendation of the compensatory monitoring measures necessary to monitor the defeated input process signal while the annunciator is defeated.  
                  ~          with scheduled POD activities or operational requirements.
: 5. Recommendation of the restoration and testing method for restoring the defeated annunciator to service. Shift Manager (SM) The SM is responsible for the following:
: 7.     Minor Maintenance work orders that involve the removal of grating clips shall include Supervisor I/ GML signoff for verification of the re-installation of grating clips.
: 1. Determination that an annunciator is a valid nuisance annunciator.
: 8.     The planned duration of any job worked under minor maintenance is normally limited to having the work completed on the same day but may be extended by the Supervisor.
: 2. Determination that defeating the nuisance annunciator is appropriate.  
: 9.     Minor Maintenance Work Orders shall be reviewed and verified as Minor Maintenance by the specific departments Production Supervisor and the Verified Minor Maintenance Field signed and dated prior to commencement of field work.
: 3. Approval of the method used to defeat the nuisance annunciator input process signal. 4. Approval of the compensatory monitoring measures utilized to monitor the defeated input process signal while the annunciator is defeated.  
(
: 5. Approval of the restoration and testing methods for defeated annunciators.
t 10 ..i  Fin SRO I/ Shift SRO permission to start work is required for any Minor Maintenance Work Order that involves work activities which could affect unit operation or involves installed plant equipment within the power block.
: 6. Ensure the defeated annunciator is entered in the Equipment Out of Service Log. 7. Ensuring that defeating the annunciator does NOT require a License Amendment Request. 8. Ensuring that compensatory monitoring measures are performed for all defeated annunciators.  
A.         The Fin SRO I/ Shift SRO I/ Shift Manager shall document permission to start work by signing and dating the Minor Maintenance Work Orders. Security shall be notified prior to work on security related equipment.
: 9. Ensuring that the time limit for defeating annunciators is NOT exceeded.  
: 11. Work performed shall be summarized and parts documented in the Work Performed Section of the Minor Maintenance Work Order and the Journeyman I/ GML I/ Supervisor shall date and sign.
: 10. Ensuring that defeated annunciators are returned to normal operation in a timely manner.
: 12. The Deficiency Tag shall be removed and EOOS sections shall be completed.
( REVISION NO.: 7C PROCEDURE NO.: ADM-09.03 PROCEDURE TITLE: ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROL OF DEFEATED ANNUNCIATORS ST. LUCIE PLANT 3.3 Appropriate Engineer PAGE: 5 of 21 The Appropriate Engineer for the system associated with the defeated annunciator is responsible for the following:
: 13. For work reports requiring more than one page, utilize a form similar to Attachment 2, Page 1 of 1.
: 1. Evaluating the request to ensure that the recommended defeated input process signal alters only the defeated annunciator.  
: 14. The Work Performed section shall be reviewed by Supervisor I/ Foreman I/
: 2. Evaluating the request to ensure that the recommended defeated input process signal compensatory monitoring measures are adequate.
Chief I/ GML. Security related work orders may require review by Security Specialist.
: 3. Evaluating the request to ensure that defeating the annunciator will NOT result in a required License Amendment Request. 4.0 DEFINITIONS
Shift SpeCialist.


===4.1 Appendix===
REVISION NO.:                                                PROCEDURE TITLE:                                                                                                                      PAGE:
A, Defeated Annunciator Worksheet Appendix A, Defeated Annunciator Worksheet is any form similar to that of Appendix A that contains the same or more information pertaining to the process of defeating an annunciator.  
22E                          CONTROL OF FIX IT NOW / MINOR MAINTENANCE
( I------~~~----~
I-------------------~
PROCEDURE NO.:                                                                                WORK ACTIVITIES 17 of 28 ADM-80.01                                                                            ST. LUCIE PLANT FIGURE 1 MINOR MAINTENANCE FLOW PROCESS (Page 1 of 1)
            /"Main!enan~
                              --...  ~
            ,              Need -- )
            \'...Ldenlifi~
                          '~,.C                                                                                                        /'"/",,
                                    ~
                                                                                                /"',
                                                                                            /
                                                                                                                            /.                                                /'""                                --
                                                                                                                                                                                                            /~'C;ntr"G;~""'"
                  //
            /Maintenance Supervisor ()(
SROiShifl SRO FIN SROIShift or          No Opef8tlons &
Maintenance
                                                                                    .l"/To.dpouch \.'" No
                                                                                    '. Mamtenance />-..:--_.
(/            Minor " " No
                                                                                                                    .."' r',.!lo!nt~n,e.Jnce )>'-'-__...."'r 'tv'*ork Order'~
                                                                                                                                                                            /"      Plant          '. No      c;;,;;;h:>
orWR or I{vR      )
Determines FIN RlWiewof
                                                                                      "        Activilv,,*                "          ,\C\.v.\)'            /              " , ACI!/VilY . / '              "'~~".C.el_
Cancellatlk1ti,?)/
:L :;/
                                                          .'!fork Reg~!!st1l            " 7/                                '            ?        //                          "    .          .              '      .-'
Ll        Fi. It Now Cutegories:
            'A" Priority                                                      -Non Power Toolpooch
                                                                                  ~~,~:.~.~~n.~!.~E~,g!:!.~~.~.!~
Maintenance <':~l?,ia Po\lv'B( BIod<
8!ock r.'Pi~':.~~1 1
Plant Work Order
                                                                                                                                                                                  ~Qt~Q::?:j~,~
Ca)agories i,. Focus i.IS Power
                                                                                                                                                                        &#xa5;            POVlef Block PWC)'s PWO's                                                                Component Work Component        Work                MWlor Maintenance                            ;&#xa5;,. Fi""
Fwc Year Year Plan Plan Work Work "8'< PrlorUy "S"  Priority                                                                        Ii"noh~
                                                                              ,.* Materials HAndhng Minor        Maintenance CntcHa 9fj~ Jobs
                                                                                                                                                                      >
* Preventive PreventIve Maintenance P\'IO's .
PWO's                                                                I'~co! & lit1u Lme Work
                                                                              ,.- 1<001  &  UtlJl Line  VVork 1  ~ Short Oun:1tion
                                                                                                                    - Short Duration Jobs
                                                                                                                                                                      !
* CorrectIVe
                                                                                                                                                                        &#xa5; Correcthffi Maintenance Maintenance Emergent wor';;
Eme'll"ntwor'                                                    ,:u~::~~,~~~~,~,l~N~~!,~,:~~,~:~~,~J
                                                                              ,. No Clearance Requirod
                                                                                                                    -~ No No DetAiled Oetailed Planning  Planmf1g              l&#xa5;*.--~"
Installing PCMsiMEPs Installing PCMsfMEPs would cause that vvDUld          G,,)US0 POD togo  to go IJUst  l)ust                                                                          *- No T  Tech
                                                                                                                            ..cI1 Spec LCO          LeO Work
                                                                                                                    - No OC
                                                                                                                    &#xa5;      QC Involwment lnvo!vem-ent In          in Ihe the planning:
planni~          stage
                                                                                                                  ,.- Minimal MInimal Risk    Ris~~ for ESF ToolpouCh Mamte:n.aooo Criteria                                                                                      Actuations, ACh.lt~  lions, Rad    Rod l-I-Non Power BIoCk"-                                                                                                Exposure, Personnel Expos",,,,.
(  I Component Work                                                                                              , Injury
                                                                                                                    - No \,V(~ldlr'lg Ot~
SRo(
Materials Handling QR Parts or Components
* Kool & Lite Line Work
:.:'.:'~Ie"ran,:,,~~~~ired Minor Maintenance M.linl"MOCP
                    .~t!".!'!~.
                      ~:!!~L!9<
      *" Short Duralion puratK.\() Jobs G
    ,,. No Detailed PWnnlng      Planning
      *- No Tech Spec LeO Work Work                        .                                                                                              Work WOrkin        ~-'"""-',,\
      *- No OCQC Involvement Irrvol'lemer,! In    in Ihe                                                                        Acoordancll Win, Accordan.ce                \>Vlth)'
planning stage                                                                                                        ADM 80.01  B(\()1
* Minimal Risk      RISk for ESF                                                                                                        .. ,,~...-"-'"~
Actu3~!Ons, Actuations, Rad
                                                                                                                              .........-"""'".~-
Exposure, Personnel    Flefsonnl Injury
    -~ No Weld/fig Welding on SR ()r            or     I OR Paris Pans or Components Corilponents I
              ~~"~e~r-".......J TS'Il"ted Targeted Improvement                  !                                                                          / . . . . .w;;;;-~
Opporiunity:
Opportunity:                            !
Evaluated by Evaluatec                              I                                                                        (Completion of                     P~O II Open)\tons                                                                                                          lAW ADM 0010432 Operations apptk:{lble disciplines applicable            d1sc!phnes                                                                                          or ADM.oo,01 supprn1ing, supporiiJ19 Work/II
                                                          /Workin                          Aet;()(c!snce with
(      Accordance                    'AA'PWOper
                                                        "    W~h GMP*21              "-ADM 0010432 iPtAOIvIIADlvf.liO 011F1(,}, l!1'1EV.(J. TlF)
                                                              "'"--                        ~


===4.2 Appendix===
REVISION NO.:                    PROCEDURE TITLE:                                                                PAGE:
B, Defeated Annunciator Log Sheet Appendix B, Defeated Annunciator Log Sheet is any form similar to that of Appendix B that contains the same or more information pertaining to the process of administratively tracking a defeated annunciator.  
22E                CONTROL OF FIX IT NOW / MINOR MAINTENANCE I-P-RO-C-E-D-UR-E-N-O-.:---f                              WORK ACTIVITIES ACTIVITI ES                                    21 of 28 PROCEDURE NO.:                                          WORK ADM-80.01                                          ST ST. LUCIE PLANT APPENDIX A CHECKLIST TO DETERMINE MINOR MAINTENANCE (Page 3 of 4)
EQUIPMENT            "fQNS  QR  SR
                                                  >>n                AC*llvll ACTIVITY  Y                        LIMITATIONS IMotors I Pumps              X      X IX    X IX      Draw oil samples Compressors I Fans          X      X    X      Add oil IX  IX X      X IX    X IX      r:;~I""~~~ filters Replace IXX      X IX    X IX      Lubricate Motors                      X                  Disconnect I Reconnect            N/A for EQ EO (75 HP or less)
Panels I Consoles            X IX      X    X      Replace missing covers I screws' Piping I Fittings            X IX      X          Replace caps' I Repair pipe thread I Replace fittings*
fittings' Pneumatic circuits I        X      X          Troubleshoot                                                instructions Use GMP-21 or specific instructions-loops                                                                              for SR equip.
X IX                I            Wl""~~~
Repair I Replace X
IX      X IX        ICalibration check X
IX                ICalibrate Pumps  ps                    X      J      ~'~
                                                    ' Adjust packWlg II Cooling Cooling Water Flow X
IX                  Replace packing I Minor repair I Simple alignment I Coupling repair I replace, complete pump replacement Security Equipment          X      N/A N/A Repair Doors and Gates                Notify Fire Protection for impact of work to be performed on security fire barrier doors to determine if fire breach permit will be needed. No modification to door or its mounting hardware may be performed under minor maintenance.
X      N/A N/A Repair Equipment and Building Systems Strainers                    X      X          Install I Remove I Replace I Repair I Clean' I ~lIlfJ~rature Indicators X Temperature                        X IX                          Replar.e I Repair*
Calibrate I Replace        Repair' Temporary Pipe Caps          X      X IX    X IX      Install I Remove I Replace*
Terminal I Pull Boxes        X      X IX    X IX      Replace missing covers I screws*
NOTES NOTES:
Minor Maintenance may not be performed on Equipment with Safety Classifications blacked out.
N/A indicates Safety Classification is not applicable. Use Minor Maintenance.
*Replacement parts shall be consistent with component quality group, parts application, and specified component
'Replacement configuration.
Welding permitted on non-safety related, non-quality related, non-seismic structural or piping categories 6,7,8 when final VT inspection is required.
V.T.
Fire Impairments or Barrier Breach Requests will be documented PRIOR to any plant breach.


===4.3 Compensatory===
Examination Outline Cross-reference:                    Level              RO          SRO Tier #
Tier#                          3 Group #
KIA #              G2.2.43 Importance Rating              3.3 Equipment Control: Knowledge of the process used to track inoperable alarms Proposed Question:                  SRO 97 Unit 1 is at 100% power steady state. The following annunciator was alarming approximately every 30 minutes for the past 8 hours. IIC has determined a faulty circuit is causing the alarm.
The annunciator has been defeated for 10 days.
STEAM BYPASS DEMAND K-6
: 1) The above annunciator was:
: 2) The annuncaitor is tracked by:
(
A. 1) CONSIDERED a nuisance annunciator.
: 2) ADM-17.18 'Temporary System Alteration' B. 1) CONSIDERED a nuisance annunciator
: 2) ADM-09.03 'Administrative Control Of Defeated Annunciators' C. 1) NOT CONSIDERED a nuisance annunciator.
ADM-17.18
: 2) ADM-17      .18 'Temporary System Alteration' D. 1) NOT CONSIDERED a nuisance annunciator.
: 2) ADM-09.03 'Administrative Control Of Defeated Annunciators' Proposed Answer:                    A Explanation (Optional):
(
193


Monitoring Measures Compensatory monitoring measures are increased surveillances of the defeated input process signal parameter(s) required to adequately monitor the affected system. 4.4 Defeated Annunciator An annunciator which is prevented from providing visual and/or audible indication of the input process signal's relationship to an alarm setpoint.
A. Correct: Annunciator is considered a nuisance annunciator that alarms greater than or equal to 8 times in a consecutive 8 hour period. Transfer of tracking defeated annunciator must be performed by ADM-17.18 Temporary System Alteration if annunciator defeated greater than 7 days.
 
B. Incorrect: Control of defeated annunciator performed by ADM-09.03 Administrative Control of Defeated Annunciators for a MAXIMUM of 7 days.
===4.5 Nuisance===
C. Incorrect: Annunciator is a nuisance annunciator due to alarming greater than 8 times in a consecutive 8 hour period D. Incorrect: Annunciator is a nuisance annunciator due to alarming greater than 8 times in a consecutive 8 hour period Technical Reference(s):      ADM-09.03 Administrative            (Attach if not previously provided)
Alarm A nuisance annunciator is an annunciator that alarms greater than or equal to eight (8) times in a consecutive eight (8) hour period. REVISION NO.: 7C PROCEDURE NO.: ADM-09.03 PROCEDURE TITLE: ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROL OF DEFEATED ANNUNCIATORS ST. LUCIE PLANT 3.3 Appropriate Engineer PAGE: 5 of 21 The Appropriate Engineer for the system associated with the defeated annunciator is responsible for the following:  
Control of Defeated Annunciators Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
: 1. Evaluating the request to ensure that the recommended defeated input process signal aJters only the defeated annunciator.
(
: 2. Evaluating the request to ensure that the recommended defeated input process signal compensatory monitoring measures are adequate.  
Learning Objective:        _0-'0904724-02
: 3. Evaluating the request to ensure that defeating the annunciator will NOT result in a required License Amendment Request. 4.0 DEFINITIONS
                                -9=-:0'-4_7_24_--'-0_2_ _ _ _ _ _ _ (As available)
Question Source:             Bank#
Bank #
Modified Bank #                      (Note changes or attach parent)
New                          X X
Question History:           Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:    Memory or Fundamental Knowledge              X
_X Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content:     55.41          ---
10 55.43          -
5 5- -  -
Comments:
(
194


===4.1 Appendix===
REVISION NO.:                            PROCEDURE TITLE:                                      PAGE:
A, Defeated Annunciator Worksheet Appendix A, Defeated Annunciator Worksheet is any form similar to that of ( Appendix A that contains the same or more information pertaining to the process of , defeating an annunciator. ( 4.2 Appendix B, Defeated Annunciator Log Sheet Appendix B, Defeated Annunciator Log Sheet is any form similar to that of Appendix B that contains the same or more information pertaining to the process of administratively tracking a defeated annunciator.  
7C                        ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROL OF DEFEATED 4 of 21 PROCEDURE NO.:                                                        ANNUNCIATORS ADM-09.03                                                        ST. LUCIE PLANT 3.0          RESPONSIBILITIES 3.1           Requestor / Originator Each individual requesting that an annunciator be defeated shall be responsible for the following:
: 1.                  Ensure NPWO(s) submitted to correct nuisance condition.
: 2.                  Recommendation that an annunciator is a nuisance annunciator.
: 3.                  Recommendation of the method for defeating the annunciator's input process signal that causes the nuisance condition.
: 4.                  Recommendation of the compensatory monitoring measures necessary to monitor the defeated input process signal while the annunciator is defeated.
: 5.                  Recommendation of the restoration and testing method for restoring the defeated annunciator to service.
3.2           Shift Manager (SM)
The
        "~'"''      ~ SM  ~      is responsible
                                    '~~~t' 111::iIUIt:: for lUI the    Iullowlng:
lilt:: following: >, *
    * 'iffi;&#xa3;~!l~~~<~&B!\,M)lf;;
1.
    'i!&sect;fftJtlJ;C!!'
Determination that an annunciator is a valid nuisance annunciator.
: 2.                  Determination that defeating the nuisance annunciator is appropriate.
: 3.                  Approval of the method used to defeat the nuisance annunciator input process signal.
: 4.                  Approval of the compensatory monitoring measures utilized to monitor the defeated input process signal while the annunciator is defeated.
: 5.                  Approval of the restoration and testing methods for defeated annunciators.
: 6.                  Ensure the defeated annunciator is entered in the Equipment Out of Service Log.
: 7.                  Ensuring that defeating the annunciator does NOT require a License Amendment Request.
: 8.                  Ensuring that compensatory monitoring measures are performed for all defeated annunciators.
: 9.                  Ensuring that the time limit for defeating annunciators is NOT exceeded.
: 10.                Ensuring that defeated annunciators are returned to normal operation in a timely manner.


===4.3 Compensatory===
REVISION NO.:            PROCEDURE TITLE:                                      PAGE:
7C              ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROL OF DEFEATED
( PROCEDURE NO.:                              ANNUNCIATORS 5 of 21 ADM-09.03                              ST. LUCIE PLANT 3.3      Appropriate Engineer The Appropriate Engineer for the system associated with the defeated annunciator is responsible for the following:
: 1.      Evaluating the request to ensure that the recommended defeated input process signal alters aJters only the defeated annunciator.
: 2.      Evaluating the request to ensure that the recommended defeated input process signal compensatory monitoring measures are adequate.
: 3.      Evaluating the request to ensure that defeating the annunciator will NOT result in a required License Amendment Request.
4.0      DEFINITIONS 4.1      Appendix A, Defeated Annunciator Worksheet Appendix A, Defeated Annunciator Worksheet is any form similar to that of
(          Appendix A that contains the same or more information pertaining to the process of
,          defeating an annunciator.
4.2      Appendix B, Defeated Annunciator Log Sheet Appendix B, Defeated Annunciator Log Sheet is any form similar to that of Appendix B that contains the same or more information pertaining to the process of administratively tracking a defeated annunciator.
4.3     Compensatory Monitoring Measures Compensatory monitoring measures are increased surveillances of the defeated input process signal parameter(s) required to adequately monitor the affected system.
4.4      Defeated Annunciator An annunciator which is prevented from providing visual and/or audible indication of the input process signal's relationship to an alarm setpoint.
4.5      Nuisance Alarm
        ~ A nuisance annunciator is an annunciator that alarms greater than or equal to eight (8) times in a consecutive eight (8) hour period.
(


Monitoring Measures Compensatory monitoring measures are increased surveillances of the defeated input process signal parameter(s) required to adequately monitor the affected system. 4.4 Defeated Annunciator An annunciator which is prevented from providing visual and/or audible indication of the input process signal's relationship to an alarm setpoint.  
REVISION NO.:          PROCEDURE TITLE:                                      PAGE:
7C                ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROL OF DEFEATED 7 of 21 PROCEDURE NO.:                          ANNUNCIATORS ADM-09.03                          ST. LUCIE PLANT 6.0    INSTRUCTIONS 6.1    Identification of Nuisance Annunciators
: 1.                                                                    annunciator.
Operations Department Watchstanders will identify a nuisance annunciator.
2.
The Shift Manager shall determine if the suspected annunciator is a nuisance annunciator.
: 3.      Maintenance Disciplines shall be notified by Nuclear Plant Work Order (NPWO) of the existence of nuisance annunciators.
END OF SECTION 6.1


===4.5 Nuisance===
REVISION NO.:        PROCEDURE TITLE:                                              PAGE:
Alarm A nuisance annunciator is an annunciator that alarms greater than or equal to eight (8) times in a consecutive eight (8) hour period.
7C            ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROL OF DEFEATED 13 of 21 PROCEDURE NO.:                            ANNUNCIATORS ADM-09.03                            ST. LUCIE PLANT 6.4     Tracking of Defeated Annunciators
REVISION NO.: 7C PROCEDURE NO.: ADM-09.03 PROCEDURE TITLE: ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROL OF DEFEATED ANNUNCIATORS ST. LUCIE PLANT 6.0 INSTRUCTIONS
: 1. Following Shift Manager's approval to defeat an annunciator, Appendix A, Defeated Annunciator Worksheet, and Appendix B,        S, Defeated Annunciator Log Sheet, shall be maintained in the Unit's Equipment Out of Service Log.
: 2. Each shift, the Shift Manager shall review all defeated annunciators to determine if any defeated annunciator may be returned to service.
A. The Shift Manager shall expedite efforts to correct problems with the defeated annunciator such that the annunciator may be returned to service as soon as possible.
B. Actions in progress to correct problems associated with the defeated annunciator should be communicated to the Unit Supervisor (US).
c.
C. Compensatory monitoring measures shall be reviewed and communicated to the Unit Supervisor (US).
I
: 3. ' A A defeated annunciator shall NOT be administratively controlled under this procedure for more than seven (7) consecutive days.
(
A. The annunciator shall be considered defeated at the date and time of Shift Manager Approval to defeat the annunciator.
B.I B'I    Prior to exceeding the seven (7) day time limit, one of the following measures shall be satisfied:
                    .. 1.      Restore the annunciator to normal operation, including testing of the annunciator. (Ref 3.C.1 )
OR
: 2.      Temporary circuit modifications to be installed on components that are out of service, i.e., in the Out of Service Log, may be excluded from the TSA process and controlled under a Work        ;0
                                                                                                  -...j Order using IMP-1 00.01, I&C Department Forms, Appendix 4.        o (Ref 3.C.2)
OR
: 3.       Implement ADM-17.18, Temporary System Alteration, and transfer administrative control of the defeated annunciator from ADM-09.03, Administrative Control of Defeated Annunciators to ADM-17.18, Temporary System Alteration.
(Ref 3.C.3)
                            .~~


===6.1 Identification===
Examination Outline Cross-reference:                     Level                RO              SRO Tier#                                3 Group #
 
KIA #                G2.2.11 Importance Rating                    4.3 Radiation Control: Ability to control radiation releases Proposed Question:                       SRO 98 Unit 1 is operating at full power. Given the following events and conditions:
of Nuisance Annunciators PAGE: 7 of 21 1. Operations Department Watchstanders will identify a nuisance annunciator . ... .. 3. Maintenance Disciplines shall be notified by Nuclear Plant Work Order (NPWO) of the existence of nuisance annunciators.
* A radioactive liquid release is in progress from the 1B waste monitor storage tank.
END OF SECTION 6.1 REVISION NO.: 7C PROCEDURE NO.: ADM-09.03 PROCEDURE TITLE: ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROL OF DEFEATED ANNUNCIATORS ST. LUCIE PLANT 6.0 INSTRUCTIONS
 
===6.1 Identification===
 
of Nuisance Annunciators PAGE: 7 of 21 1. Operations Department Watchstanders will identify a nuisance annunciator.
: 2. The Shift Manager shall determine if the suspected annunciator is a nuisance annunciator.
: 3. Maintenance Disciplines shall be notified by Nuclear Plant Work Order (NPWO) of the existence of nuisance annunciators.
END OF SECTION 6.1 
( REVISION NO.: 7C PROCEDURE NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROL OF DEFEATED ANNUNCIATORS PAGE: 13 of 21 ADM-09.03 ST. LUCIE PLANT 6.4 Tracking of Defeated Annunciators
: 1. Following Shift Manager's approval to defeat an annunciator, Appendix A, Defeated Annunciator Worksheet, and Appendix S, Defeated Annunciator Log Sheet, shall be maintained in the Unit's Equipment Out of Service Log. 2. Each shift, the Shift Manager shall review all defeated annunciators to determine if any defeated annunciator may be returned to service. A. The Shift Manager shall expedite efforts to correct problems with the defeated annunciator such that the annunciator may be returned to service as soon as possible.
B. Actions in progress to correct problems associated with the defeated annunciator should be communicated to the Unit Supervisor (US). c. Compensatory monitoring measures shall be reviewed and communicated to the Unit Supervisor (US). 3. 'A defeated annunciator shall NOT be administratively controlled under this procedure for more than seven (7) consecutive days. A. The annunciator shall be considered defeated at the date and time of Shift Manager Approval to defeat the annunciator.
B.I Prior to exceeding the seven (7) day time limit, one of the following measures shall be satisfied:
: 1. Restore the annunciator to normal operation, including testing of the annunciator. (Ref 3.C.1 ) 2. OR Temporary circuit modifications to be installed on components that are out of service, i.e., in the Out of Service Log, may be excluded from the TSA process and controlled under a Work Order using IMP-1 00.01, I&C Department Forms, Appendix 4. (Ref 3.C.2) OR 3. Implement ADM-17.18, Temporary System Alteration, and transfer administrative control of the defeated annunciator from ADM-09.03, Administrative Control of Defeated Annunciators to ADM-17.18, Temporary System Alteration. (Ref 3.C.3) -.. ;0 -...j o ( REVISION NO.: 7C PROCEDURE NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROL OF DEFEATED ANNUNCIATORS PAGE: 13 of 21 ADM-09.03 ST. LUCIE PLANT 6.4 Tracking of Defeated Annunciators
: 1. Following Shift Manager's approval to defeat an annunciator, Appendix A, Defeated Annunciator Worksheet, and Appendix B, Defeated Annunciator Log Sheet, shall be maintained in the Unit's Equipment Out of Service Log. 2. Each shift, the Shift Manager shall review all defeated annunciators to determine if any defeated annunciator may be returned to service. A. The Shift Manager shall expedite efforts to correct problems with the defeated annunciator such that the annunciator may be returned to service as soon as possible.
B. Actions in progress to correct problems associated with the defeated annunciator should be communicated to the Unit Supervisor (US). C. Compensatory monitoring measures shall be reviewed and communicated to the Unit Supervisor (US). 3. I A defeated annunciator shall NOT be administratively controlled under this procedure for more than seven (7) consecutive days. A. The annunciator shall be considered defeated at the date and time of Shift Manager Approval to defeat the annunciator.
B'I Prior to exceeding the seven (7) day time limit, one of the following measures shall be satisfied:
.. 1. Restore the annunciator to normal operation, including testing of the annunciator. (Ref 3.C.1 ) 2. OR Temporary circuit modifications to be installed on components that are out of service, i.e., in the Out of Service Log, may be excluded from the TSA process and controlled under a Work Order using IMP-1 00.01, I&C Department Forms, Appendix 4. (Ref 3.C.2) OR 3. Implement ADM-17.18, Temporary System Alteration, and transfer administrative control of the defeated annunciator from ADM-09.03, Administrative Control of Defeated Annunciators to ADM-17.18, Temporary System Alteration. (Ref 3.C.3)
Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Radiation Control: Ability to control radiation releases Proposed Question:
SRO 98 Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO G2.2.11 Unit 1 is operating at full power. Given the following events and conditions:
SRO 3 4.3
* A radioactive liquid release is in progress from the 1 B waste monitor storage tank.
* Liquid Release Permit # 09-36 was issued to authorize this release.
* Liquid Release Permit # 09-36 was issued to authorize this release.
* After 30 minutes, liquid radwaste discharge radiation monitor channel R-6627 (channel #43) alarms, the monitor indicates off-scale HIGH.
* After 30 minutes, liquid radwaste discharge radiation monitor channel R-6627 (channel #43) alarms, the monitor indicates off-scale HIGH.
* The Desk RCO reports that all the actions of ONP 1-0510030, Uncontrolled Release of Radioactive Liquids, have been completed.
* The Desk RCO reports that all the actions of ONP 1-0510030, Uncontrolled Release of Radioactive Liquids, have been completed.
* I&C reports that Channel R-6627 has failed HIGH and will be out of service for at least 60 days. Which ONE of the following statements correctly describes the required actions to properly complete the discharge from the 1 B Waste Monitor Storage Tank? A. Restart the release using permit #09-36 with periodic grab samples in lieu of an OPERABLE radiation monitor. B. Issue a new release permit with independent sample and valve lineup verifications.
* I&C reports that Channel R-6627 has failed HIGH and will be out of service for at least 60 days.
Which ONE of the following statements correctly describes the required actions to properly complete the discharge from the 1B Waste Monitor Storage Tank?
(
A. Restart the release using permit #09-36 with periodic grab samples in lieu of an OPERABLE radiation monitor.
B. Issue a new release permit with independent sample and valve lineup verifications.
C. Restart the release using permit #09-36, after independently verifying the release rate calculations.
C. Restart the release using permit #09-36, after independently verifying the release rate calculations.
D. Issue a new release permit using periodic grab samples in lieu of an OPERABLE radiation monitor. 195 ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
D. Issue a new release permit using periodic grab samples in lieu of an OPERABLE radiation monitor.
Radiation Control: Ability to control radiation releases Proposed Question:
195
SRO 98 Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO G2.2.11 Unit 1 is operating at full power. Given the following events and conditions:
 
SRO 3 4.3
Proposed Answer:             B Explanation (Optional):
* A radioactive liquid release is in progress from the 1 B waste monitor storage tank.
A. Incorrect: New release permit must be issued. Independent sample and valve lineup required. Periodic grab samples not acceptable B. Correct: New release and independent sample and valve lineup required.
* Liquid Release Permit # 09-36 was issued to authorize this release.
C. Incorrect: New permit required D. Incorrect: Periodic grab samples not acceptable.
* After 30 minutes, liquid radwaste discharge radiation monitor channel R-6627 (channel #43) alarms, the monitor indicates off-scale HIGH.
Technical Reference(s):     1-NOP-06.01 Controlled Liquid         (Attach if not previously provided)
* The Desk RCO reports that all the actions of ONP 1-0510030, Uncontrolled Release of Radioactive Liquids, have been completed.
* I&C reports that Channel R-6627 has failed HIGH and will be out of service for at least 60 days. Which ONE of the following statements correctly describes the required actions to properly complete the discharge from the 1 B Waste Monitor Storage Tank? A. Restart the release using permit #09-36 with periodic grab samples in lieu of an OPERABLE radiation monitor. B. Issue a new release permit with independent sample and valve lineup verifications.
C. Restart the release using permit #09-36, after independently verifying the release rate calculations.
D. Issue a new release permit using periodic grab samples in lieu of an OPERABLE radiation monitor. 195 Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect:
New release permit must be issued. Independent sample and valve lineup required.
Periodic grab samples not acceptable B. Correct: New release and independent sample and valve lineup required.
C. Incorrect:
New permit required D. Incorrect:
Periodic grab samples not acceptable.
Technical Reference(s):
1-NOP-06.01 Controlled Liquid (Attach if not previously provided)
Release to the Circulating Water Discharge.
Release to the Circulating Water Discharge.
1-0510030 Uncontrolled Release of Radioactive Liquids Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
1-0510030 Uncontrolled Release of Radioactive Liquids
_________
(
_ Learning Objective:
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
_0_7_'0_2_8_56
Learning Objective:       _0_7_'0_2_8_56 0702856-07 __-_'_07_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (As available)
__ -_'_07 ________ (As available)
                            ~~~~~~~~~~~~---
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # New Question History: Last NRC Exam X (2004 NRC EXAM) (Note changes or attach parent) Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge X ----Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 11 ---55.43 4 ---Comments:
Question Source:             Bank #                   X (2004 NRC EXAM)
196 ( Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional):
Modified Bank #                          (Note changes or attach parent)
A. Incorrect:
New Question History:            Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:   Memory or Fundamental Knowledge               X
New release permit must be issued. Independent sample and valve lineup required.
                                                                            ~---
Periodic grab samples not acceptable B. Correct: New release and independent sample and valve lineup required.
Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content:     55.41       --
C. Incorrect:
11 -- -
New permit required D. Incorrect:
55.43         4 Comments:
Periodic grab samples not acceptable.
196
Technical Reference(s):
 
1-NOP-06.01 Controlled Liquid Release to the Circulating Water Discharge.
b~6ltc*
1-0510030 Uncontrolled Release of Radioactive Liquids (Attach if not previously provided)
II/'i/>> (
REVISION NO.:                  PROCEDURE TITLE:                                                    PAGE:
15A                CONTROLLED LIQUID RELEASE TO THE 4 of22 of 22 PROCEDURE NO.:                         CIRCULATING WATER DISCHARGE 1-NOP-06.01                                    ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 3.0            PREREQUISITES                                                                              INITIAL 3.1            Electrical power is available to the following pumps:
: 1.      1A 1A Waste Monitor Pump Bkr. 1-40948
: 2.      1B Waste Monitor Pump Bkr. 1-41756
: 3.      Liquid Waste Control Panel (LWCP) PP-109, Ckt. 18 4.0            PRECAUTIONS / LIMITATIONS 4.1            Prior to release, the tank contents shall be sampled, analyzed and a Liquid Release Permit (LRP) prepared and approved. Once a sample has been drawn for release purposes, radioactive waste shall NOT be added to the tank.
4.2            The Operator shall perform a release only after receipt of an approved Liquid Release Permit. Form similar to Figure 1.
4.3~ The      The Liquid LiqUdid Waste Waste Monitor    shall be Mohnitohr shall    intS~rvbicel be in            dUtrhingt~
service during        rele~Ste and a release          frequently atnt.d frequenttlY
(                observe to assure tthat
      ., observed                      at tthe e count rate ra e is IS below e ow thee trip riP point pOln settings se Ings as no  noted ed on
      }.:/..;~,. the Release Permit. If the Liquid Waste Monitor is determined to be inoperable, Sf'" refer to C-200, Offsite Dose Calculation Manual (ODCM), Section 3.3.3.9 for provisions to proceed with the release.
required actions and proVisions 4.4            If activity reaches the high rate trip setpoint as indicated on the Release Permit, an arm is activated in the Control Room and Flow Control Valve FCV-6627X trips larm osed. FCV-6627X may be closed from RTGB-105 closed.                                          RTGB-1 05 to terminate the release at the Operator's perator's discretion. Do not re-initiate a liquid release that has been terminated by a monitor alarm until authorized by the Chemistry Department.
4.5            The minimum number of circulating water (CWP) and/or Intake Cooling Water Pumps (ICWP) should be in service during a release as specified by the Liquid Release Permit. Even though not desirable, a release may be made with only ICW pumps for dilution if administrative limits are not exceeded.
4.6            NORMAL/CUTOUT Switches bypass (cutout) the Tank low level switch that stops the associated Pump on low level. This may be desirable when pumping down a tank for maintenance or inspection. When in this configuration, an Operator should remain on location to stop the Pump when the desired level is reached and to prevent damage to the Pump. The Switches for the Waste Monitor Pumps/Tanks are interconnected. If one Tank reaches its respective low level cutout, the NORMAL/CUTOUT Switch for its associated Pump must be placed in the CUTOUT position in order for either Pump to operate. When level in the affected tank has been restored, the switch should be restored to the NORMAL position to prevent damage to the Pump. Manipulation of these Switches on the Liquid Waste Control Panel should be performed with the concurrence of the NWE/US.
 
REVISION NO.
NO.:            PROCEDURE TITLE:                                    PAGE:
15A                  CONTROLLED LIQUID RELEASE TO THE 6 of 22 6of22 PROCEDURE NO.:                    CIRCULATING WATER DISCHARGE 1-NOP-06.01 1-'NOP-06.01                            ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 6.0    INSTRUCTIONS                                                                INITIAL 6.1    Initial Conditions
: 1.      ENSURE Section 3.0, Prerequisites, completed.
: 2.      REVIEW Section 4.0, Precautions / Limitations.
: 3.      IF diving operations are in progress in the discharge canal, NOTIFY the diving operations supervisor to ensure that divers are out of the water before starting the release and DO NOT re-enter into the water before the end of the liquid release.
: 4.      REVIEW the Liquid Release Permit for appropriate signatures under AUTHORIZATION.
Permit Number_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
releasing. ________________
Tank releasing    ________              __
CAUTION If the Liquid Waste Monitor is Out of Service, C-200, ODCM Control 3.3.3.9 requires two independent tank sample / analysis and two independent valve alignments to verify the discharge line valving.
: 5.      ,-r1  REVIEW the Equipment Out of Service Log and determine if Channel R-6627, Liquid Waste Monitor has been declared Out of Service.
If if Channel    R-6627 is Out of Service OR the affected Waste Monitor Tank is to be drained completely, Then PERFORM the following:
YES    NO A.      Has Chemistry attached two independent Radioactivity analysis of the tank to the Release Permit?
B.     Has Chemistry attached two independent Release Rate Calculations for the tank on the Release Permit?
C.     Have you arranged for independent verification of the discharge valve alignment?    __      __
If if the answer to any of the above questions is "No", Then STOP, do not approve the Liquid Release Permit.
END OF SECTION 6.1
 
( Examination Outline Cross-reference:                 Level                RO          SRO Tier#
Tier #                          3 Group #
KIA #                G2.4.19 Importance Rating                4.1 Emergency Procedures/Plans: Knowledge of EOP layout, symbols and icons Proposed Question:               SRO 99 ATTACHMENT 3 Checkoffs Safety Functions                            Success Paths          1    2 Reactivity Control                    RC-1, CEA Insertion                X      X RC-2, Boration via CVCS RC-3, Boration via SIAS Maint. of Vital Aux. DC                MVA-OC-1, MVA-DC-1, Batteries/Chargers        X      X Maint. of Vital Aux. AC                MVA-AC-1, Startup Transformers MVA-AC-2, EOG's EDG's                X      X MVA-AC-3, Unit Crosstie RCS Inventory Control                  IC-1, CVCS IC-2, Safety Injection              X      X RCS Pressure Control                  PC-1, Subcooled                            X
(                                          PC-2, PORV's/PZR Vent PC-3, Saturated Control            X RCS & Core Heat                        HR-1, S/G Without SIAS HR-2, S/G With SIAS                X      X HR-3, Once Through Cooling Containment Isol                      CI-1, Automatic/Manual Isol  1501  X      X Cntmt. Press & Temp                    CTPC-1, Normal Cntmt Fans CTPC-2, Cntmt Coolers                      X CTPC-3, Cntmt Spray                0 Cnmt. Comb Gas                          CCGC-1 Hydrogen <3.5%              X      X CCGC-1 Hydrogen >3.5%
Unit 1 is in 1-EOP-15 FUNCTIONAL RECOVERY. The above safety functions and success paths were evaluated over a period of 30 minutes. Based on the above, what success path instructions would be performed FIRST for Checkoff #1 and Checkoff #27      #2?
197
 
A. 1) Maint. of Vital Aux. AC, success path MVA-AC-2, EOG's
: 2) Maint. of Vital Aux. AC, success path MVA-AC-2, EOG's B. 1) Cntmt. Press & Temp, success path CTPC-3, Cntmt Spray
: 2) Reactivity Control, success path RC-1, CEA Insertion C. 1) Reactivity Control, success path RC-1, CEA Insertion
: 2) Reactivity Control, success path RC-1, CEA Insertion D. 1) Cntmt. Press & Temp, success path CTPC-3, Cntmt Spray
: 2) Maint. of Vital Aux. AC, success path MVA-AC-2, EOG's Proposed Answer:              D Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect: Cntmt. Press & Temp, not met by ANY success path. Should be implemented first.
Applicant may pick Maint. of Vital Aux. AC if applicant doesn't know the first safety function that is not met by ANY success path is the success path that should be implemented first.
B. Incorrect: part one correct, part two incorrect.
C. Incorrect: this safety function is met by success path 1, not to be implemented first.
D. Correct. CTPC-3 is success path that should be implemented to meet the safety function, checkoff 2 MVA-AC-2 EDG's is the success path that should be implemented.
( Technical Reference(s):      1-EOP-15                              (Attach if not previously provided)
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
Learning Objective:         _0_7_0_2_8_2_8-_0_6_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (As available)
Question Source: Question History: 0702856-07 Bank # Modified Bank # New Last NRC Exam X (2004 NRC EXAM) (As available) (Note changes or attach parent) Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge X Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 11 ---55.43 4 ---Comments:
Question Source:             Bank #
196 REVISION NO.: 15A PROCEDURE NO.: 1-NOP-06.01 PROCEDURE TITLE: CONTROLLED LIQUID RELEASE TO THE CIRCULATING WATER DISCHARGE ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 3.0 PREREQUISITES
Modified Bank #             Last NRC (Note changes or attach parent)
Exam New Question History:            Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:     Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis                       x 10 CFR Part 55 Content:       55.41         10
                                            -..-:....:=-----
55.43       ---
5 Comments:
198


===3.1 Electrical===
St. Lucie HLC-18 NRC Exam Question 74 Unit 1 is in 1-EOP-15, "Functional Recovery," with the following Safety Function status:
SAFETY FUNCTION                          SUCCESS PATH Reactivity control            RC-1 CEA Insertion                      X RC-2 Boration via CVCS RC-3 Boration via SIAS Maint. Of Vital Aux - DC      MVA - DC - 1 Batteries/Charger          X Maint. Of Vital Aux - AC      MVA - AC - 1 Startup Transformers MVA - AC - 2 EDG's                      X MVA - AC - 3 Unit Crosstie RCS Inventory Control          IC -1 CVCS IC - 2 Safety Injection                0 RCS Pressure Control          PC - 1 Subcooled Controlled PC - 2 PORV's / Pzr Vent PC - 3 Saturated Control                X RCS && Core Heat              HR - 1 S/G Without SIAS HR - 2 S/G With SIAS                    0 HR - 3 Once Through Cooling Containment Isol              CI - 1 Automatic / Manual Isol          0
(  Cntmt Press & & Temp          CTPC - 1 Normal Cntmt Fans CTPC - 2 Cntmt Coolers CTPC - 3 Cntmt Spray                    X Cntmt Comb Gas                CCGC - 1 Hydrogen <3.5%                X CCGC - 2 Hydrogen >3.5%
o  Not Met I X Met What Success Path should be addressed first and the reason?
A. Implement MVA-AC-2, EDGs.
Reason: the EDG success path is evaluated to ensure power will be maintained to the equipment needed to support other safety functions.
B. Implement IC-2, Safety Injection.
Reason: without adequate RCS inventory, core cooling will be challenged.
C. Implement HR-2, S/G with SIAS:
Reason: RCS saturation margin needs to be maintained to ensure adequate core cooling.
D. Implement CI-1, Automatic / Manual Isol.
Reason: Containment integrity ensures release to the public is minimized.
REVISION NO.:            PROCEDURE TITLE:                              PAGE:
27 27A A                        FUNCTIONAL RECOVERY 11 of 205 PROCEDURE NO.:
1-EOP-15                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 4.0 OPERATOR INITIAL ACTIONS (continued)
INSTRUCTIONS                          CONTINGENCY ACTIONS
&deg;12.
012.
    .I    Perform Success Path Instructions I
PERFORM ALL the following IN THE ORDER LISTED:
                . Instructions for a success path MOST LIKELY to be met for safety functions that are NOT met by ANY success path.path .
              *,' Instructions for success paths for safety functions that are NOT met by Success Path 1.
              ,. Instructions for ALL other I  success paths for safety functions met by Success Path 1.
o    13. Perform Long Term Actions When ALL Safety Function Status Check acceptance criteria are being satisfied, Then PERFORM Long Term Actions.
REFER TO Section 4.10, Long Term Actions.
END OF INITIAL ACTIONS


power is available to the following pumps: 1. 1A Waste Monitor Pump Bkr. 1-40948 2. 1 B Waste Monitor Pump Bkr. 1-41756 3. Liquid Waste Control Panel (LWCP) PP-109, Ckt. 18 4.0 PRECAUTIONS
REVISION NO.:      PROCEDURE TITLE:                              PAGE; PAGE:
/ LIMITATIONS II/'i/>> ( PAGE: 4 of22 INITIAL 4.1 Prior to release, the tank contents shall be sampled, analyzed and a Liquid Release Permit (LRP) prepared and approved.
27A                      FUNCTIONAL RECOVERY 205 of 205 PROCEDURE NO.:
Once a sample has been drawn for release purposes, radioactive waste shall NOT be added to the tank. 4.2 The Operator shall perform a release only after receipt of an approved Liquid Release Permit. Form similar to Figure 1. The Liquid Waste Monitor shall be in service during a release and frequently observed to assure that the count rate is below the trip point settings as noted on the Release Permit. If the Liquid Waste Monitor is determined to be inoperable, refer to C-200, Offsite Dose Calculation Manual (ODCM), Section 3.3.3.9 for required actions and proVisions to proceed with the release. 4.4 If activity reaches the high rate trip setpoint as indicated on the Release Permit, an larm is activated in the Control Room and Flow Control Valve FCV-6627X trips osed. FCV-6627X may be closed from RTGB-105 to terminate the release at the perator's discretion.
1-EOP-15                        ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT 3 FUNCTIONAL RECOVERY SUCCESS PATHS (Page 1 of 1)
Do not re-initiate a liquid release that has been terminated a monitor alarm until authorized by the Chemistry Department.
Checkoffs Safety Functions              Success Paths 1 2  3    4   5    6 Reactivity Control      RC-1, CEA Insertion RC-2, Boration via CVCS RC-3, Boration via SIAS Maint of Vital Aux - DC  MVA-DC-1, Batteries/Chargers Maint of Vital Aux - AC  MVA-AC-1, Startup Transformers MVA-AC-2, EDGs MVA-AC-3, Unit Crosstie RCS Inventory Control   IC-1, CVCS IC-2, Safety Injection RCS Pressure Control    PC-1, Subcooled Control PC-2, PORVs/Pzr Vent PC-3, Saturated Control
4.5 The minimum number of circulating water (CWP) and/or Intake Cooling Water Pumps (ICWP) should be in service during a release as specified by the Liquid Release Permit. Even though not desirable, a release may be made with only ICW pumps for dilution if administrative limits are not exceeded.
(   RCS & Core Heat          HR-1, S/G Without SIAS HR-2, S/G With SIAS HR-3, Once Through Cooling Containment Isol        CI-1, Automatic/Manual Isol Cntmt Press & Temp      CTPC-1, Normal Cntmt Fans CTPC-2, Cntmt Coolers CTCP-3, Cntmt Spray Cntmt Comb Gas          CCGC-1, Hydrogen <3.5%
4.6 NORMAL/CUTOUT Switches bypass (cutout) the Tank low level switch that stops the associated Pump on low level. This may be desirable when pumping down a tank for maintenance or inspection.
CCGC-2, Hydrogen >3.5%
When in this configuration, an Operator should remain on location to stop the Pump when the desired level is reached and to prevent damage to the Pump. The Switches for the Waste Monitor Pumps/Tanks are interconnected.
END OF ATTACHMENT 3
If one Tank reaches its respective low level cutout, the NORMAL/CUTOUT Switch for its associated Pump must be placed in the CUTOUT position in order for either Pump to operate. When level in the affected tank has been restored, the switch should be restored to the NORMAL position to prevent damage to the Pump. Manipulation of these Switches on the Liquid Waste Control Panel should be performed with the concurrence of the NWE/US. ( REVISION NO.: 15A PROCEDURE NO.: 1-NOP-06.01 PROCEDURE TITLE: CONTROLLED LIQUID RELEASE TO THE CIRCULATING WATER DISCHARGE ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 3.0 PREREQUISITES


===3.1 Electrical===
Examination Outline Cross-reference:                        Level                            RO                  SRO Tier #                                                3 Group #
 
KIA #                            G2.4.30 Importance Rating                                    4.1 Emergency Procedures/Plans: Knowledge of events related to system operation/status that must be reported to internal organizations or external agencies, such as the State, the NRC, or the transmission system operator.
power is available to the following pumps: 1. 1 A Waste Monitor Pump Bkr. 1-40948 2. 1 B Waste Monitor Pump Bkr. 1-41756 3. Liquid Waste Control Panel (LWCP) PP-109, Ckt. 18 4.0 PRECAUTIONS
Proposed Question:                    SRO 100 Which ONE of the following events is required to be reported and who are the agencies that will be notified?
/ LIMITATIONS PAGE: 4 of 22 INITIAL 4.1 Prior to release, the tank contents shall be sampled, analyzed and a Liquid Release Permit (LRP) prepared and approved.
A. Two dead raccoons with apparent rabies have been discovered within the protected area. Notify Florida Fish and Wildlife Conservation Commission.
Once a sample has been drawn for release purposes, radioactive waste shall NOT be added to the tank. 4.2 The Operator shall perform a release only after receipt of an approved Liquid Release Permit. Form similar to Figure 1.
B. Loss of 50% of the backup notification method used to notify the State and NRC. Notify State Watch Office and the NRC.
The LiqUdid Waste Mohnitohr shall be atnt.d frequenttl Y d ., observe to assure t at t e count ra e IS e ow e riP pOln se Ings as no e on
C. A Tornado is sighted in the Met Tower parking lot area. Notify State Watch Office and the NRC.
.. ;,. the Release Permit. If the Liquid Waste Monitor is determined to be inoperable, Sf'" refer to C-200, Offsite Dose Calculation Manual (ODCM), Section 3.3.3.9 for required actions and provisions to proceed with the release. 4.4 If activity reaches the high rate trip setpoint as indicated on the Release Permit, an arm is activated in the Control Room and Flow Control Valve FCV-6627X trips closed. FCV-6627X may be closed from RTGB-1 05 to terminate the release at the Operator's discretion.
(
Do not re-initiate a liquid release that has been terminated by a monitor alarm until authorized by the Chemistry Department.
D. A major automobile accident has blocked A                  A1A 1A south of the plant prohibiting southbound evacuation of the site, if needed. Notify State Watch Office and the NRC.
4.5 The minimum number of circulating water (CWP) and/or Intake Cooling Water Pumps (ICWP) should be in service during a release as specified by the Liquid Release Permit. Even though not desirable, a release may be made with only ICW pumps for dilution if administrative limits are not exceeded.
(
4.6 NORMAL/CUTOUT Switches bypass (cutout) the Tank low level switch that stops the associated Pump on low level. This may be desirable when pumping down a tank for maintenance or inspection.
199
When in this configuration, an Operator should remain on location to stop the Pump when the desired level is reached and to prevent damage to the Pump. The Switches for the Waste Monitor Pumps/Tanks are interconnected.
If one Tank reaches its respective low level cutout, the NORMAL/CUTOUT Switch for its associated Pump must be placed in the CUTOUT position in order for either Pump to operate. When level in the affected tank has been restored, the switch should be restored to the NORMAL position to prevent damage to the Pump. Manipulation of these Switches on the Liquid Waste Control Panel should be performed with the concurrence of the NWE/US.
REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 15A PROCEDURE NO.: 1-'NOP-06.01 CONTROLLED LIQUID RELEASE TO THE CIRCULATING WATER DISCHARGE ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 6.0 INSTRUCTIONS


===6.1 Initial===
Proposed Answer:             C Explanation (Optional):
Conditions
A. Incorrect: There are reporting requirements for bird kill and fish kills as a result of plant operation but not minor kill of animal life due to natural causes.
: 1. ENSURE Section 3.0, Prerequisites, completed.
B. Incorrect: Reporting requirement is loss of all primary and backup communication methods.
: 2. REVIEW Section 4.0, Precautions
C. Correct: Met tower is not in the power block but is in the owner controlled area North of Unit 1. This is classified as Unusual Event. EPIP will require notification of NRC and SWO.
/ Limitations.  
D. Incorrect: Reporting required if the island was not able to be evacuated from North AND South routes.
: 3. IF diving operations are in progress in the discharge canal, NOTIFY the diving operations supervisor to ensure that divers are out of the water before starting the release and DO NOT re-enter into the water before the end of the liquid release. 4. REVIEW the Liquid Release Permit for appropriate signatures under AUTHORIZATION.
Technical Reference(s):      EPIP-01 Classification of           (Attach if not previously provided)
Permit Number _________
Emergencies Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
_ Tank releasing.
Learning Objective:          0902702-02 Classification of         (As available)
________ _ CAUTION 6of22 INITIAL If the Liquid Waste Monitor is Out of Service, C-200, ODCM Control 3.3.3.9 requires two independent tank sample / analysis and two independent valve alignments to verify the discharge line valving. 5. ,-r1 REVIEW the Equipment Out of Service Log and determine if Channel R-6627, Liquid Waste Monitor has been declared Out of Service. if Channel R-6627 is Out of Service OR the affected Waste Monitor Tank is to be drained completely, Then PERFORM the following:
(                              Emergencies.
A. Has Chemistry attached two independent Radioactivity analysis of the tank to the Release Permit? B. Has Chemistry attached two independent Release Rate Calculations for the tank on the Release Permit? C. Have you arranged for independent verification of the discharge valve alignment?
Question Source:              Bank #
YES NO if the answer to any of the above questions is "No", Then STOP, do not approve the Liquid Release Permit. END OF SECTION 6.1 REVISION N
Modified Bank #                    (Note changes or attach parent)
New                  x Question History:            Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level:    Memory or Fundamental Knowledge            -
X Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content:      55.41    10 Comments:
55.43 5
200


==O. PROCEDURE==
                                                                                                                                                                                    ~..
REVISION NO.:        PROCEDURE TITLE:                                                                                                                                PAGE:
16                                                      CLASSIFICATION OF EMERGENCIES 27 of 39 PROCEDURE NO.:
EPIP-01                                                                  ST. LUCIE PLANT ATTACHMENT 1 EMERGENCY CLASSIFICATION TABLE (Page 13 of21)
EVENT/CLASS                UNUSUAL EVENT                                  ALERT                          SITE AREA EMERGENCY                    GENERAL EMERGENCY
: 12. TORNADO            A. Notification ofa tornado sighted in the .Owner Controfred Area B. &sect;2  An~ tornado striking the Any Power Block.
I              NOTE NOTE Refer to Potential Core Melt Event /I I
                                      ~          ~
Class 14.
14 .
: 13. ABNORMAL WATER    A. Abnormal water level conditions        B. Flood, low water.
Flood. water, hurricane surge    C. Flood.
Flood, low water.
water, hurricane LEVEL                      eXl2ected or occurring are expected                              or other abnormal water level            surge or other abnormal water
* Low intake canal level of -1 0.5 ft.
ft .
conditions                              level conditions causing failure of vital equipment eguil2ment ML W for 1 hour or more.
MLWfor OR Visual sightings by station The storm drain capacity is exceeded during hurricane surge or known flood conditions.
                                                                                                              . Flood/surge water level reaching elevation +19.5 ft. (turbine personnel that water levels are approaching storm drain system capacity.
                                                                      .              OR Low intake canal level of -1 0.5 ft.
MLW for 1 hour or more with MLWfor ft .
building / RAB ground floor).
OR Low intake canal level has emergency barrier valves open.          caused the loss of alllCW all ICW flow.
: 12. TORNADO
: 13. ABNORMAL WATER LEVEL FTER CLASSIFYING, GO TO EPIP-02, DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE EMERGENCY COORDINATOR
!AFTER
                                                                                                                                                                                                ..:::c..~
                                                                                                                                                                                              ~-      ';
                                                                                                                                                                                              ~ ..tL c::3
                                                                                                                                                                                                  ~~


TITLE: PAGE: 15A PROCEDURE NO.: 1-NOP-06.01 CONTROLLED LIQUID RELEASE TO THE CIRCULATING WATER DISCHARGE ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 6.0 INSTRUCTIONS
fl>--. 6l,<'-
fl.>-... Yj 1,<-
rlfi/('}
Y//{/(f!J e...J e>.....J NO,:
REVISION NO:              PROCEDURE TITLE:                                     PAGE:
650              NRC REQUIRED NON-ROUTINE NOTIFICATIONS I--------i                                                                          14 of 43 NO,:
PROCEDURE NO.:                             AND REPORTS 0010721                            ST ST. LUCIE PLANT 8.12      (continued)
Upon notification that the 12 month cumulative running siren availability decreased to less than 90 percent, or the siren availability during any 2 week period is determined to be less than 75 percent, a NRC notification will be made as a major loss of communication capability, The loss of all primary and backup communication channels to a state or local government agency or emergency response facility [Control Room, Technical Support Center (TSC), Operational Support Center (OSC), Emergency Operations Facility (EOF)] meets the EPIP-01 requirements for the declaration of an unusual event event. The communication channels include dedicated telephone communication (i.e., Florida State Watch Office), commercial telephone lines, and offsite links (i,e" emergency radio communication system.system, If a dedicated NRC primary communication channel is lost (i.e., either the ENS, HPN, or EROS data link hardware (modem or phone line) for any amount of time, then the event is considered to be a major loss of emergency communication capability.
In addition to the off-site communications above, the total loss of the in-plant
(
paging, and in-plant radio systems required for safe plant operation would be reportable as a major loss of emergency communication capability.


===6.1 Initial===
REVISION NO.:           PROCEDURE TITLE:                                       PAGE:
Conditions
20              OFF-SITE NOTIFICATIONS AND PROTECTIVE
: 1. ENSURE Section 3.0, Prerequisites, completed.
(                                                                                       4 of 56 PROCEDURE NO.:                     ACTION RECOMMENDATIONS EPIP-08                            S1. LUCIE PLANT ST.
: 2. REVIEW Section 4.0, Precautions
1.1     Discussion (continued) 7.
/ Limitations.
: 7.     (continued)
: 3. IF diving operations are in progress in the discharge canal, NOTIFY the diving operations supervisor to ensure that divers are out of the water before starting the release and DO NOT re-enter into the water before the end of the liquid release. 4. REVIEW the Liquid Release Permit for appropriate signatures under AUTHORIZATION.
Permit Number --------------------
Tank releasing
________________
_ CAUTION 6 of 22 INITIAL If the Liquid Waste Monitor is Out of Service, C-200, ODCM Control 3.3.3.9 requires two independent tank sample / analysis and two independent valve alignments to verify the discharge line valving. 5. ,-r1 REVIEW the Equipment Out of Service Log and determine if Channel R-6627, Liquid Waste Monitor has been declared Out of Service. If Channel R-6627 is Out of Service OR the affected Waste Monitor Tank is to be drained completely, Then PERFORM the following:
A. Has Chemistry attached two independent Radioactivity analysis of the tank to the Release Permit? B. Has Chemistry attached two independent Release Rate Calculations for the tank on the Release Permit? C. Have you arranged for independent YES NO verification of the discharge valve alignment?
__ __ If the answer to any of the above questions is "No", Then STOP, do not approve the Liquid Release Permit. END OF SECTION 6.1 
( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Level Tier# Group # KIA # Importance Rating Emergency Procedures/Plans:
Knowledge of EOP layout, symbols and icons Proposed Question:
SRO 99 ATTACHMENT 3 Safety Functions Success Paths Reactivity Control RC-1, CEA Insertion RC-2, Boration via CVCS RC-3, Boration via SIAS Maint. of Vital Aux. DC MVA-OC-1, Batteries/Chargers Maint. of Vital Aux. AC MVA-AC-1, Startup Transformers MVA-AC-2, EOG's MVA-AC-3, Unit Crosstie RCS Inventory Control IC-1, CVCS IC-2, Safety Injection RCS Pressure Control PC-1, Subcooled PC-2, PORV's/PZR Vent PC-3, Saturated Control RCS & Core Heat HR-1, S/G Without SIAS HR-2, S/G With SIAS HR-3, Once Through Cooling Containment Isol CI-1, Automatic/Manual 1501 Cntmt. Press & Temp CTPC-1, Normal Cntmt Fans CTPC-2, Cntmt Coolers CTPC-3, Cntmt Spray Cnmt. Comb Gas CCGC-1 Hydrogen <3.5% CCGC-1 Hydrogen >3.5% RO G2.4.19 Checkoffs 1 2 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 X X SRO 3 4.1 Unit 1 is in 1-EOP-15 FUNCTIONAL RECOVERY.
The above safety functions and success paths were evaluated over a period of 30 minutes. Based on the above, what success path instructions would be performed FIRST for Checkoff #1 and Checkoff #2? 197 ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Level Tier # Group # KIA # Importance Rating Emergency Procedures/Plans:
Knowledge of EOP layout, symbols and icons Proposed Question:
SRO 99 ATTACHMENT 3 Safety Functions Success Paths Reactivity Control RC-1, CEA Insertion RC-2, Boration via CVCS RC-3, Boration via SIAS Maint. of Vital Aux. DC MVA-DC-1, Batteries/Chargers Maint. of Vital Aux. AC MVA-AC-1, Startup Transformers MVA-AC-2, EDG's MVA-AC-3, Unit Crosstie RCS Inventory Control IC-1, CVCS IC-2, Safety Injection RCS Pressure Control PC-1, Subcooled PC-2, PORV's/PZR Vent PC-3, Saturated Control RCS & Core Heat HR-1, S/G Without SIAS HR-2, S/G With SIAS HR-3, Once Through Cooling Containment Isol CI-1, Automatic/Manual Isol Cntmt. Press & Temp CTPC-1, Normal Cntmt Fans CTPC-2, Cntmt Coolers CTPC-3, Cntmt Spray Cnmt. Comb Gas CCGC-1 Hydrogen <3.5% CCGC-1 Hydrogen >3.5% RO G2.4.19 Checkoffs 1 2 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 X X SRO 3 4.1 Unit 1 is in 1-EOP-15 FUNCTIONAL RECOVERY.
The above safety functions and success paths were evaluated over a period of 30 minutes. Based on the above, what success path instructions would be performed FIRST for Checkoff #1 and Checkoff #27 197 A. 1) Maint. of Vital Aux. AC, success path MVA-AC-2, EOG's 2) Maint. of Vital Aux. AC, success path MVA-AC-2, EOG's B. 1) Cntmt. Press & Temp, success path CTPC-3, Cntmt Spray 2) Reactivity Control, success path RC-1, CEA Insertion C. 1) Reactivity Control, success path RC-1, CEA Insertion
: 2) Reactivity Control, success path RC-1, CEA Insertion D. 1) Cntmt. Press & Temp, success path CTPC-3, Cntmt Spray 2) Maint. of Vital Aux. AC, success path MVA-AC-2, EOG's Proposed Answer: D Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect:
Cntmt. Press & Temp, not met by ANY success path. Should be implemented first. Applicant may pick Maint.
of Vital Aux. AC if applicant doesn't know the first safety function that is not met by ANY success path is the success path that should be implemented first. B. Incorrect:
part one correct, part two incorrect.
C. Incorrect:
this safety function is met by success path 1, not to be implemented first. D. Correct. CTPC-3 is success path that should be implemented to meet the safety function, checkoff 2 MVA-AC-2 EDG's is the success path that should be implemented.
Technical Reference(s):
1-EOP-15 (Attach if not previously provided)
--------------------------
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
_0_7_0_2_8_2_8-_0_6
________ (As available)
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # Last NRC (Note changes or attach parent) Exam New Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 ---55.43 5 ---Comments:
x 198 ( A. 1) Maint. of Vital Aux. AC, success path MVA-AC-2, EOG's 2) Maint. of Vital Aux. AC, success path MVA-AC-2, EOG's B. 1) Cntmt. Press & Temp, success path CTPC-3, Cntmt Spray 2) Reactivity Control, success path RC-1, CEA Insertion C. 1) Reactivity Control, success path RC-1, CEA Insertion
: 2) Reactivity Control, success path RC-1, CEA Insertion D. 1) Cntmt. Press & Temp, success path CTPC-3, Cntmt Spray 2) Maint. of Vital Aux. AC, success path MVA-AC-2, EOG's Proposed Answer: D Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect:
Cntmt. Press & Temp, not met by ANY success path. Should be implemented first. Applicant may pick Maint. of Vital Aux. AC if applicant doesn't know the first safety function that is not met by ANY success path is the success path that should be implemented first. B. Incorrect:
part one correct, part two incorrect.
C. Incorrect:
this safety function is met by success path 1, not to be implemented first. D. Correct. CTPC-3 is success path that should be implemented to meet the safety function, checkoff 2 MVA-AC-2 EDG's is the success path that should be implemented.
Technical Reference(s):
1-EOP-15 (Attach if not previously provided)
--------------------------
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
_0_7_0_2_8_2_8-_0_6
________ (As available)
Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # Last NRC (Note changes or attach parent) Exam New Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 -..-:....:=-----
55.43 5 ---Comments:
x 198 St. Lucie HLC-18 NRC Exam Question 74 Unit 1 is in 1-EOP-15, "Functional Recovery," with the following Safety Function status: SAFETY FUNCTION SUCCESS PATH Reactivity control RC-1 CEA Insertion X RC-2 Boration via CVCS RC-3 Boration via SIAS Maint. Of Vital Aux -DC MVA -DC -1 Batteries/Charger X Maint. Of Vital Aux -AC MVA -AC -1 Startup Transformers MVA -AC -2 EDG's X MVA -AC -3 Unit Crosstie RCS Inventory Control IC -1 CVCS IC -2 Safety Injection 0 RCS Pressure Control PC -1 Subcooled Controlled PC -2 PORV's / Pzr Vent PC -3 Saturated Control X RCS & Core Heat HR -1 S/G Without SIAS HR -2 S/G With SIAS 0 HR -3 Once Through Cooling Containment Isol CI -1 Automatic
/ Manual Isol 0 Cntmt Press & Temp CTPC -1 Normal Cntmt Fans CTPC -2 Cntmt Coolers CTPC -3 Cntmt Spray X Cntmt Comb Gas CCGC -1 Hydrogen <3.5%
X CCGC -2 Hydrogen >3.5%
o Not Met I X Met What Success Path should be addressed first and the reason? A. Implement MVA-AC-2, EDGs. Reason: the EDG success path is evaluated to ensure power will be maintained to the equipment needed to support other safety functions.
B. Implement IC-2, Safety Injection.
Reason: without adequate RCS inventory, core cooling will be challenged.
C. Implement HR-2, S/G with SIAS: Reason: RCS saturation margin needs to be maintained to ensure adequate core cooling. D. Implement CI-1, Automatic
/ Manual Isol. Reason: Containment integrity ensures release to the public is minimized.  ( St. Lucie HLC-18 NRC Exam Question 74 Unit 1 is in 1-EOP-15, "Functional Recovery," with the following Safety Function status: SAFETY FUNCTION SUCCESS PATH Reactivity control RC-1 CEA Insertion X RC-2 Boration via CVCS RC-3 Boration via SIAS Maint. Of Vital Aux -DC MVA -DC -1 Batteries/Charger X Maint. Of Vital Aux -AC MVA -AC -1 Startup Transformers MVA -AC -2 EDG's X MVA -AC -3 Unit Crosstie RCS Inventory Control IC -1 CVCS IC -2 Safety Injection 0 RCS Pressure Control PC -1 Subcooled Controlled PC -2 PORV's / Pzr Vent PC -3 Saturated Control X RCS & Core Heat HR -1 S/G Without SIAS HR -2 S/G With SIAS 0 HR -3 Once Through Cooling Containment Isol CI -1 Automatic
/ Manual Isol 0 Cntmt Press & Temp CTPC -1 Normal Cntmt Fans CTPC -2 Cntmt Coolers CTPC -3 Cntmt Spray X Cntmt Comb Gas CCGC -1 Hydrogen <3.5% X CCGC -2 Hydrogen >3.5% o Not Met I X Met What Success Path should be addressed first and the reason? A. Implement MVA-AC-2, EDGs. Reason: the EDG success path is evaluated to ensure power will be maintained to the equipment needed to support other safety functions.
B. Implement IC-2, Safety Injection.
Reason: without adequate RCS inventory, core cooling will be challenged.
C. Implement HR-2, S/G with SIAS: Reason: RCS saturation margin needs to be maintained to ensure adequate core cooling. D. Implement CI-1, Automatic
/ Manual Isol. Reason: Containment integrity ensures release to the public is minimized.
NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: 27 A FUNCTIONAL RECOVERY PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-15 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 4.0 OPERATOR INITIAL ACTIONS (continued)
INSTRUCTIONS
&deg;12. Perform Success Path Instructions I PERFORM ALL the following IN THE ORDER LISTED: . . Instructions for a success path MOST LIKELY to be met for safety functions that are NOT met by ANY success path. Instructions for success paths for safety functions that are NOT met by Success Path 1. Instructions for ALL other success paths for safety functions met by Success Path 1. o 13. Perform Long Term Actions When ALL Safety Function Status Check acceptance criteria are being satisfied, Then PERFORM Long Term Actions. REFER TO Section 4.10, Long Term Actions. CONTINGENCY ACTIONS END OF INITIAL ACTIONS REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: PROCEDURE NO.: 27A 11 of 205 FUNCTIONAL RECOVERY 1-EOP-15 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 .. 4.0 OPERATOR INITIAL ACTIONS (continued)
INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS 012. Perform Success Path Instructions . I PERFORM ALL the following IN THE ORDER LISTED: . Instructions for a success path MOST LIKELY to be met for safety functions that are NOT met by ANY success path . * ,' Instructions for success paths for safety functions that are NOT met by Success Path 1. ,. Instructions for ALL other I success paths for safety functions met by Success Path 1. o 13. Perform Long Term Actions When ALL Safety Function Status Check acceptance criteria are being satisfied, Then PERFORM Long Term Actions. REFER TO Section 4.10, Long Term Actions. END OF INITIAL ACTIONS REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE; 27A FUNCTIONAL RECOVERY PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-15 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT 3 FUNCTIONAL RECOVERY SUCCESS PATHS (Page 1 of 1) Safety Functions Success Paths Checkoffs 1 2 3 4 5 6 Reactivity Control RC-1, CEA Insertion RC-2, Boration via CVCS RC-3, Boration via SIAS Maint of Vital Aux -DC MVA-DC-1, Batteries/Chargers Maint of Vital Aux -AC MVA-AC-1, Startup Transformers MVA-AC-2, EDGs MVA-AC-3, Unit Crosstie RCS Inventory Control IC-1, CVCS IC-2, Safety Injection RCS Pressure Control PC-1, Subcooled Control PC-2, PORVs/Pzr Vent PC-3, Saturated Control ( RCS & Core Heat HR-1, S/G Without SIAS HR-2, S/G With SIAS HR-3, Once Through Cooling Containment Isol CI-1, Automatic/Manual Isol Cntmt Press & Temp CTPC-1, Normal Cntmt Fans CTPC-2, Cntmt Coolers CTCP-3, Cntmt Spray Cntmt Comb Gas CCGC-1, Hydrogen <3.5% CCGC-2, Hydrogen >3.5% END OF ATTACHMENT 3 REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 27A FUNCTIONAL RECOVERY 205 of 205 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-15 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT 3 FUNCTIONAL RECOVERY SUCCESS PATHS (Page 1 of 1) Safety Functions Success Paths Checkoffs 1 2 3 4 5 6 Reactivity Control RC-1, CEA Insertion RC-2, Boration via CVCS RC-3, Boration via SIAS Maint of Vital Aux -DC MVA-DC-1, Batteries/Chargers Maint of Vital Aux -AC MVA-AC-1, Startup Transformers MVA-AC-2, EDGs MVA-AC-3, Unit Crosstie RCS Inventory Control IC-1, CVCS IC-2, Safety Injection RCS Pressure Control PC-1, Subcooled Control PC-2, PORVs/Pzr Vent PC-3, Saturated Control ( RCS & Core Heat HR-1, S/G Without SIAS HR-2, S/G With SIAS HR-3, Once Through Cooling Containment Isol CI-1, Automatic/Manual Isol Cntmt Press & Temp CTPC-1, Normal Cntmt Fans CTPC-2, Cntmt Coolers CTCP-3, Cntmt Spray Cntmt Comb Gas CCGC-1, Hydrogen <3.5% CCGC-2, Hydrogen >3.5% END OF ATTACHMENT 3
Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Level Tier # Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO G2.4.30 SRO 3 4.1 Emergency Procedures/Plans:
Knowledge of events related to system operation/status that must be reported to internal organizations or external agencies, such as the State, the NRC, or the transmission system operator.
Proposed Question:
SRO 100 Which ONE of the following events is required to be reported and who are the agencies that will be notified?
A. Two dead raccoons with apparent rabies have been discovered within the protected area. Notify Florida Fish and Wildlife Conservation Commission.
B. Loss of 50% of the backup notification method used to notify the State and NRC. Notify State Watch Office and the NRC. C. A Tornado is sighted in the Met Tower parking lot area. Notify State Watch Office and the NRC. D. A major automobile accident has blocked A1A south of the plant prohibiting southbound evacuation of the site, if needed. Notify State Watch Office and the NRC. 199 ( ( Examination Outline Cross-reference:
Level Tier # Group # KIA # Importance Rating RO G2.4.30 SRO 3 4.1 Emergency Procedures/Plans:
Knowledge of events related to system operation/status that must be reported to internal organizations or external agencies, such as the State, the NRC, or the transmission system operator.
Proposed Question:
SRO 100 Which ONE of the following events is required to be reported and who are the agencies that will be notified?
A. Two dead raccoons with apparent rabies have been discovered within the protected area. Notify Florida Fish and Wildlife Conservation Commission.
B. Loss of 50% of the backup notification method used to notify the State and NRC. Notify State Watch Office and the NRC. C. A Tornado is sighted in the Met Tower parking lot area. Notify State Watch Office and the NRC. D. A major automobile accident has blocked A 1 A south of the plant prohibiting southbound evacuation of the site, if needed. Notify State Watch Office and the NRC. 199 Proposed Answer: C Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect:
There are reporting requirements for bird kill and fish kills as a result of plant operation but not minor kill of animal life due to natural causes. B. Incorrect:
Reporting requirement is loss of all primary and backup communication methods. C. Correct: Met tower is not in the power block but is in the owner controlled area North of Unit 1. This is classified as Unusual Event. EPIP will require notification of NRC and SWO. D. Incorrect:
Reporting required if the island was not able to be evacuated from North AND South routes. Technical Reference(s):
EPIP-01 Classification of Emergencies (Attach if not previously provided)
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
Question Source: Question History: 0902702-02 Classification of Emergencies.
Bank # Modified Bank # New Last NRC Exam -----x (As available) (Note changes or attach parent) Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge X ----Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 ---55.43 5 -----Comments:
200 ( Proposed Answer: C Explanation (Optional):
A. Incorrect:
There are reporting requirements for bird kill and fish kills as a result of plant operation but not minor kill of animal life due to natural causes. B. Incorrect:
Reporting requirement is loss of all primary and backup communication methods. C. Correct: Met tower is not in the power block but is in the owner controlled area North of Unit 1. This is classified as Unusual Event. EPIP will require notification of NRC and SWO. D. Incorrect:
Reporting required if the island was not able to be evacuated from North AND South routes. Technical Reference(s):
EPIP-01 Classification of Emergencies (Attach if not previously provided)
Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination:
Learning Objective:
Question Source: Question History: 0902702-02 Classification of Emergencies.
Bank # Modified Bank # New Last NRC Exam x (As available) (Note changes or attach parent) Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge X ----Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 ---55.43 5 ---Comments:
200 REVISION NO.: 16 PROCEDURE NO.: EPIP-01 EVENT/CLASS
: 12. TORNADO 13. ABNORMAL WATER LEVEL 12. TORNADO 13. ABNORMAL WATER LEVEL PROCEDURE TITLE: CLASSIFICATION OF EMERGENCIES ST. LUCIE PLANT ATTACHMENT 1 EMERGENCY CLASSIFICATION TABLE (Page 13 of21) A. Abnormal water level conditions are expected or occurring
* Low intake canal level of -1 0.5 ft. MLWfor 1 hour or more. OR
* Visual sightings by station personnel that water levels are approaching storm drain system capacity.
ALERT B. &sect;2 Any tornado striking the Power Block. B. Flood. low water. hurricane surge or other abnormal water level conditions The storm drain capacity is exceeded during hurricane surge or known flood conditions.
OR Low intake canal level of -1 0.5 ft. MLWfor 1 hour or more with emergency barrier valves open. SITE AREA EMERGENCY C. Flood. low water. hurricane surge or other abnormal water level conditions causing failure of vital equipment Flood/surge water level reaching elevation
+19.5 ft. (turbine building / RAB ground floor). OR Low intake canal level has caused the loss of alllCW flow. FTER CLASSIFYING, GO TO EPIP-02, DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE EMERGENCY COORDINATOR .. GENERAL EMERGENCY NOTE Refer to Potential Core Melt Event / Class 14. '; ..tL c::3 REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 16 CLASSIFICATION OF EMERGENCIES 27 of 39 PROCEDURE NO.: EPIP-01 ST. LUCIE PLANT ATTACHMENT 1 EMERGENCY CLASSIFICATION TABLE (Page 13 of21) EVENT/CLASS UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT SITE AREA EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY
: 12. TORNADO A. Notification ofa tornado sighted B. &sect;2 tornado striking the I NOTE I in the Owner Controfred Area Power Block. Refer to Potential Core Melt Event I . ".-.-. Class 14 . 13. ABNORMAL WATER A. Abnormal water level conditions B. Flood, low water, hurricane surge C. Flood, low water, hurricane LEVEL are eXl2ected or occurring or other abnormal water level surge or other abnormal water conditions level conditions causing failure of . Low intake canal level of -1 0.5 ft . vital eguil2ment ML W for 1 hour or more. . The storm drain capacity is OR exceeded during hurricane surge . Flood/surge water level reaching . Visual sightings by station or known flood conditions.
elevation
+19.5 ft. (turbine personnel that water levels are OR building / RAB ground floor). approaching storm drain system . Low intake canal level of -1 0.5 ft . OR capacity.
MLW for 1 hour or more with . Low intake canal level has emergency barrier valves open. caused the loss of all ICW flow. 12. TORNADO 13. ABNORMAL WATER LEVEL !AFTER CLASSIFYING, GO TO EPIP-02, DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE EMERGENCY COORDINATOR REVISION NO: PROCEDURE TITLE: PROCEDURE NO.: 650 NRC REQUIRED NON-ROUTINE NOTIFICATIONS I--------i AND REPORTS 0010721 ST. LUCIE PLANT 8.12 (continued)
PAGE: fl>--. Yj rlfi/('} e>.....J 14 of 43 Upon notification that the 12 month cumulative running siren availability decreased to less than 90 percent, or the siren availability during any 2 week period is determined to be less than 75 percent, a NRC notification will be made as a major loss of communication capability, The loss of all primary and backup communication channels to a state or local government agency or emergency response facility [Control Room, Technical Support Center (TSC), Operational Support Center (OSC), Emergency Operations Facility (EOF)] meets the EPIP-01 requirements for the declaration of an unusual event. The communication channels include dedicated telephone communication links (i.e., Florida State Watch Office), commercial telephone lines, and offsite emergency radio communication system. If a dedicated NRC primary communication channel is lost (i.e., either the ENS, HPN, or EROS data link hardware (modem or phone line) for any amount of time, then the event is considered to be a major loss of emergency communication capability.
In addition to the off-site communications above, the total loss of the in-plant paging, and in-plant radio systems required for safe plant operation would be reportable as a major loss of emergency communication capability. ( REVISION NO,: 650 PROCEDURE NO,: 0010721 8.12 (continued)
PROCEDURE TITLE: NRC REQUIRED NON-ROUTINE NOTIFICATIONS AND REPORTS ST LUCIE PLANT PAGE: fl.>-... Y//{/(f!J e...J 14 of 43 Upon notification that the 12 month cumulative running siren availability decreased to less than 90 percent, or the siren availability during any 2 week period is determined to be less than 75 percent, a NRC notification will be made as a major loss of communication capability, The loss of all primary and backup communication channels to a state or local government agency or emergency response facility [Control Room, Technical Support Center (TSC), Operational Support Center (OSC), Emergency Operations Facility (EOF)] meets the EPIP-01 requirements for the declaration of an unusual event The communication channels include dedicated telephone communication links (i,e" Florida State Watch Office), commercial telephone lines, and offsite emergency radio communication system, If a dedicated NRC primary communication channel is lost (i.e., either the ENS, HPN, or EROS data link hardware (modem or phone line) for any amount of time, then the event is considered to be a major loss of emergency communication capability.
In addition to the off-site communications above, the total loss of the in-plant paging, and in-plant radio systems required for safe plant operation would be reportable as a major loss of emergency communication capability. 
( ( REVISION NO.: 20 PROCEDURE NO.: EPIP-08 PROCEDURE TITLE: OFF-SITE NOTIFICATIONS AND PROTECTIVE ACTION RECOMMENDATIONS ST. LUCIE PLANT PAGE: 4 of 56 1.1 Discussion (continued)
: 7. (continued)
NOTE The State Department of Health (Bureau of Radiation Control) may not have their office staffed on a 24-hour basis. In the event that they do not answer the Hot Ring Down (HRD) telephone, the State Watch Office (SWO) assumes responsibility for notifying their duty officer. However, the EC/RM shall verify that the Bureau of Radiation Control has been notified.
NOTE The State Department of Health (Bureau of Radiation Control) may not have their office staffed on a 24-hour basis. In the event that they do not answer the Hot Ring Down (HRD) telephone, the State Watch Office (SWO) assumes responsibility for notifying their duty officer. However, the EC/RM shall verify that the Bureau of Radiation Control has been notified.
B. Who Shall Be Notified
B.     Who Shall Be Notified
* State Division of Emergency Management
* State Division of Emergency Management
* State Department of Health (Bureau of Radiation Control)
* State Department of Health (Bureau of Radiation Control)
* St. Lucie County Emergency Operations Center
* St. Lucie County Emergency Operations Center
* Martin County Emergency Operations Center
* Martin County Emergency Operations Center
* NRC State and County Notification
((
: a. State and local agencies are notified by using the Hot Ring Down (HRD) telephone.
* NRC
The HRD rings the State Watch Office (SWO). The SWO puts the other agencies on line and reduces the need for individual calls. NRC Notification
: 1. State and County Notification
: a. The NRC is notified using the Emergency Notification System (ENS) telephone.
: a.     State and local agencies are notified by using the Hot Ring Down (HRD) telephone. The HRD rings the State Watch Office (SWO). The SWO puts the other agencies on line and reduces the need for individual calls.
: b. NRC notifications occur through an open line of communication in the TSC and, when operational, the EOF. ( REVISION NO.: 20 PROCEDURE NO.: EPIP-08 PROCEDURE TITLE: OFF-SITE NOTIFICATIONS AND PROTECTIVE ACTION RECOMMENDATIONS S1. LUCIE PLANT PAGE: 4 of 56 1.1 Discussion (continued) 7 . (continued)
: 2. :   NRC Notification
NOTE The State Department of Health (Bureau of Radiation Control) may not have their office staffed on a 24-hour basis. In the event that they do not answer the Hot Ring Down (HRD) telephone, the State Watch Office (SWO) assumes responsibility for notifying their duty officer. However, the EC/RM shall verify that the Bureau of Radiation Control has been notified.
: a.     The NRC is notified using the Emergency Notification System (ENS) telephone.
B. Who Shall Be Notified
* State Division of Emergency Management
* State Department of Health (Bureau of Radiation Control)
* St. Lucie County Emergency Operations Center
* Martin County Emergency Operations Center
* NRC 1. State and County Notification  
: a. State and local agencies are notified by using the Hot Ring Down (HRD) telephone.
The HRD rings the State Watch Office (SWO). The SWO puts the other agencies on line and reduces the need for individual calls. 2. : NRC Notification  
: a. The NRC is notified using the Emergency Notification System (ENS) telephone.  
: b. NRC notifications occur through an open line of communication in the TSC and, when operational, the EOF.
: b. NRC notifications occur through an open line of communication in the TSC and, when operational, the EOF.
REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: OC SITE ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN 10 of 20 PROCEDURE NO.: 4. ADM-27.14 ST. LUCIE PLANT APPENDIX A SPECIFIC CONDITIONS OF THE UNIT 1 EPP (Page 5 of 13) &sect; 3 Environmental Conditions 1, A. Unusual or Important Environmental Events 1. Any occurrence of an unusual or important event that indicates or could result in significant environmental impact causally related to station operation shall be recorded and promptly reported to the NRC Operations Center within 72 hours via Emergency Notification System described in 10 CFR 50.72 for environmental protection issues. In addition, the reporting requirement time frame shall be consistent with 10 CFR 50.72 for environmental protection issues. The initial report shall be followed by a written report as described in Section 5.0.2. No routine monitoring programs are required to implement this condition.
 
Events covered by Section 3.B of this Appendix will be subject to reporting requirements as defined in that section and not subject to these requirements.
REVISION NO.:         PROCEDURE TITLE:                                           PAGE:
: 2. The following are examples of unusual or important events: excessive bird impaction events; onsite plant or animal disease outbreaks; mortality (causally related to station operation), or unusual occurrence of any species protected by the Endangered Species Act of 1973; unusual fish kills; increase in nuisance organisms or conditions; and unanticipated or emergency discharges of waste water or chemical substances.
OC             SITE ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN 10 of 20 PROCEDURE NO.:
B. Terrestrial/Aquatic Issues The certifications and permits required under the Clean Water Act provide mechanisms for protecting water quality and indirectly, aquatic biota. The NRC will rely on the decisions made by the State of Florida under the authority of the Clean Water Act and, in the case of sea turtles, decisions made by the NMFS under the authority of the Endangered Species Act, for any requirements pertaining to terrestrial and aquatic monitoring. ( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: OC SITE ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN 10 of 20 PROCEDURE NO.: 4. AOM-27.14 ST. LUCIE PLANT APPENDIX A SPECIFIC CONDITIONS OF THE UNIT 1 EPP (Page 5 of 13) &sect; Environmental Conditions 1,3 A. Unusual or Important Environmental Events 1. Any occurrence of an unusual or important event that indicates or could result in significant environmental impact causally related to station operation shall be recorded and promptly reported to the NRC Operations Center within 72 hours via Emergency Notification System described in 10 CFR 50.72 for environmental protection issues. In addition, the reporting requirement time frame shall be consistent with 10 CFR 50.72 for environmental protection issues. The initial report shall be followed by a written report as described in Section 5.0.2. No routine monitoring programs are required to implement this condition.
AOM-27.14 ADM-27.14                             ST. LUCIE PLANT APPENDIX A SPECIFIC CONDITIONS OF THE UNIT 1 EPP (Page 5 of 13)
Events covered by Section 3.B of this Appendix will be subject to reporting requirements as defined in that section and not subject to these requirements.  
: 4.       1, 3 Environmental Conditions
: 2. The following are examples of unusual or important events: excessive bird impaction events; onsite plant or animal disease outbreaks; mortality (causally related to station operation), or unusual occurrence of any species protected by the Endangered Species Act of 1973; unusual fish kills; increase in nuisance organisms or /: conditions; and unanticipated or emergency discharges of waste water or chemical substances.
          &sect; 1,3 A.     Unusual or Important Environmental Events
B. Terrestrial/Aquatic Issues The certifications and permits required under the Clean Water Act provide mechanisms for protecting water quality and indirectly, aquatic biota. The NRC will rely on the decisions made by the State of Florida under the authority of the Clean Water Act and, in the case of sea turtles, decisions made by the NMFS under the authority of the Endangered Species Act, for any requirements pertaining to terrestrial and aquatic monitoring.}}
: 1. Any occurrence of an unusual or important event that indicates or could result in significant environmental impact causally related to station operation shall be recorded and promptly reported to the NRC Operations Center within 72 hours via Emergency Notification System described in 10 CFR 50.72 for environmental protection issues. In addition, the reporting requirement time frame shall be consistent with 10 CFR 50.72 for environmental protection issues.
The initial report shall be followed by a written report as described in Section 5.0.2. No routine monitoring programs are required to implement this condition. Events covered by Section 3.B of this Appendix will be subject to reporting requirements as defined in that section and not subject to these requirements.
(                2. The following are examples of unusual or important events:
excessive bird impaction events; onsite plant or animal disease outbreaks; mortality (causally related to station operation), or unusual occurrence of any species protected by the Endangered Species Act of 1973; unusual fish kills; increase in nuisance organisms or
                      /: conditions; and unanticipated or emergency discharges of waste water or chemical substances.
B.     Terrestrial/Aquatic Issues The certifications and permits required under the Clean Water Act provide mechanisms for protecting water quality and indirectly, aquatic biota. The NRC will rely on the decisions made by the State of Florida under the authority of the Clean Water Act and, in the case of sea turtles, decisions made by the NMFS under the authority of the Endangered Species Act, for any requirements pertaining to terrestrial and aquatic monitoring.}}

Latest revision as of 03:54, 12 March 2020

Initial Exam 2009-301 Draft SRO Written Exam
ML100620127
Person / Time
Site: Saint Lucie  NextEra Energy icon.png
Issue date: 02/09/2010
From:
NRC/RGN-II
To:
References
Download: ML100620127 (145)


Text

{{#Wiki_filter:FACILITY NAME: _ _...;;;;;S-=t.-=L;;..;;;;u~c.;;.;;;ie~ _ _ __

                       -=S..:.:.t.-=L::.::u:.=,c.:.;::ie:....-_             Section 3 REPORTNUMBER:_~2~OO~9~-3~O~1                             _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____

DRAFT SRO WRITTEN EXAM CONTENTS: o Draft SRO Written Exam (2SQ with ES-401-S Information) Location of Electronic Files: Submitted By: ~~-**-":'::-

             .~~        ~                          Verified By: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier# 1 Group # 1 KIA # 007EG2.4.20 Importance Rating 4.3 Reactor Trip Stabilization - Recovery: Knowledge of operational implications of EOP warnings, cautions and notes Proposed Question: SRO 76 I/C was performing a AFAS surveillance on Unit 2 while at 100% power when an inadvertent IIC AFAS-1 occurred. The crew is implementing 2-EOP-01 Standard Post Trip Actions with the following:

  • The 2B3 4.16KVAC bus did NOT transfer to the startup transformers and the 2B Diesel Generator did NOT start.
  • RCSsubcooling RCS subcooling is 15°F.
  • RCS pressure is 1780 psia and lowering.

While performing 2-EOP-01 which of the following directions CAN be given to the crew and why? ( A. Override and open Main Feedwater isolation valves on the 'A' side. Actions are to be taken to maintain or regain safety functions. B. Manually start the 2B Diesel Generator from the RTGB. To ensure redundant power available in the event of single train failure of equipment and lor components. C. Cooldown the RCS to regain minimum subcooling. Actions are to be taken to maintain or regain safety functions. D. Manually actuating SIAS. If actuation setpoint inevitable, manual actuation will ensure SIAS and all its components have actuated prior to setpoint. 151

Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional): A. Incorrect: can be overridden AFTER 2-EOP-01 but not while in 2-EOP-01 B. Correct C. Incorrect: this was a recent procedure change that doe not allow a cooldown while in 2-EOP-01. D. Incorrect: manual actuation of any ESFAS in not allowed at PSL. Most other utilities allow and expect manual actuation if reaching setpoint is inevitable. Technical Reference(s): OPS-521 Emergency Operating (Attach if not previously provided) Procedure Implementation Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: Learning Objective: 0702822-04, 0702822-08 (As available)

                            --------~----------------
                            ----------~------------~

( Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis x 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 55.43 - 5 -- Comments: ( 152

ST. LUCIE PLANT OPS-521 \. OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT POLICY Rev. 13 EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE Date 03/31/09 03/31109 IMPLEMENTATION Page 6of16 6 of 16

1. H. (continued)
3. If a Safety Function is not being met or a contingency action must be taken, that information must be communicated to the US. The US will direct these contingency actions. This communication will utilize 4-parts.
4. Following completion of the Immediate Actions, the SM, US and RCOs should spend approximately one minute assessing plant status and acknowledging alarms.

During this time the Desk RCO should:

a. Announce on the Gaitronics "Attention all Plant Personnel, the Unit 1 (2) Reactor has tripped."
b. NOTIFY the NPO to perform Appendix X, Section 1 of EOP-99
c. CONTACT the STA and Shift Communicator to report to the Control Room and

(

d. Close the MSR TCV block and/or warm-up valves.
e. While the US and BRCO are performing the Inventory and/or Pressure Control safety function, the DRCO should CLOSE MV-OS-S14.

The US / SM should:

f. Mentally perform EOP-1 to quickly assess the status of the plant.
g. "~.'iI\'@MrnQ@ 1I:b pl~¥1;@Ji;h~.~lIStI!b.l>tIt4ip" Actions required to stabilize the plant may be taken at that time.
                               * *zazes@

(e.g.,close fI(Mtg I p. . . .start an EDG breaker, IfPI.Miifi"'+1iJ8MPfMaMfMl a eharging pump, manually y _~control S/G... ;giiPi8J 'Iii pressure)

( ST. LUCIE PLANT OPS-521 \ OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT POLICY Rev. 13 EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE Date 03/31/09 IMPLEMENTATION Page 11 of 16

1. J. (continued)

(continued) _~~~'~~~~t~tt~:~~iif~~*J~~;:tr;:~~~~i~ri~~i~t~!::C~~~ios

6. Manual initiation of AFAS should NOT be done during other scenarios because it defeats the rupture identification circuit. This does NOT prevent a crew decision to manually operate AFW components, start pumps and open valves, if deemed necessary.
7. ESFAS Actuation: Use of ESF Override features in EOPs
a. When opening a valve that was closed by SIAS or CIAS, increased awareness / monitoring should be employed on that system to detect a release to the environment via that flow path.
b. Increasing RAB radiation indications, loss of Containment sump inventory and unexpected Containment depressurization are all examples of Containment boundary leakage which may have been created by operator action, and should be considered when taking these type of actions.

K. II ,.1\\114 Manual Override-'f"'WjI o'f MFIV ... -!q----IIIIt'I(~ Following AFAS Actuation (l:::Jnit 2~: 1 1.. Dot,~*q;*~v~rrt~*~i*Wnct'6~~*~"ij'F1V;fr({mWiftlfn*E0P-1; Do NOT override and open MFIV from within EOP-1. ThisoV'erridesa This overrides a

              ..~ikE1:fll;!\I,,~t<'l())S~Qll\ial*i~ri'6r:f6*)er,~gRos\irn9) safeguard signal prior to diagnosing t:t:re~vent.           the event.

L. CCW to RCPs:

1. SPTAs SPTAs take precedence over restoring CCW.
2. Restore CCWtoCCW to RCPs when an RCO is available AND the attention required to restore does NOT adversely affect the maintenance or recovery of other safety functions.

M. Excess Steam Demand event guidance while implementing EOP-05, Excess Steam Demand, and EOP-15, Functional Recovery.

1. Regardless of the rate of RCS pressure and inventory reduction during an Excess Steam Demand, RCS pressure SHALL NOT be intentionally lowered to enhance inventory addition into the RCS unless the RCS Inventory Control Safety Function can NOT be maintained otherwise.
2. 11 a Main Steam Safety Valve is stuck open, or was stuck open, causing entry into an EOP, Then the affected Steam Generator shall be considered faulted until the Safety Valve is gagged, even if the Safety Valve reseats. The Steam Generator shall NOT be unisolated until the Safety Valve is gagged.

Procedure.. No. ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 2-EOP-01 EMERGENCY OPERATING Current Revi . No. c PROCEDURE

       .Q ......;
       -2 cw c E w ::l FPL                                SAFETY RELATED                                  Effective Date E u                                                      CONTINUOUS USE                                          11/18/07
 >-      ::l    0

Title:

...Jg~ Z -0 0 ....J o ~ ~ c-oi= Z C'O c Z

                    <<                      STANDARD POST TRIP ACTIONS O..c .-

_u-o I--o~

 <<co o:::;:C'O,t:;

0=:; 0:: .Q 8 C c SPTA o*~ C'O Responsible Department: OPERATIONS LL W..c z ... ~ 0

 -~~W                     REVISION 

SUMMARY

0:: .;:: ~ - o ~~ !:!: LL w u

             -{;3 0:::

W Revision 25 - Incorporated PCR 07-3408 for CR 2007-9375 to'!ll~sl!~'trf!l~rett~~~~~il~~~!~l~~~'~lm~~~l~' 2007 -9375 to delete direction to cool down

         ~ '3. >          ~:@~fI~~~i~m!~t~$'J~~\~~:~~'~~~~l~l\r&)

RCS based on losing subcooling. (Joe Hessling, Hess ling, 11/06/07) wn.W

         ..... C'O  I-0 .....

Qj;;::.. 0 ro Revision 24 - Incorporated PCR 05-2946 to update revision based upon PSTG revision. NO WORD CHANGES MADE. (Joe Hessling, 10/12/05) ( Revision 23 - Incorporated PCR 03-2800 to incorporate operator feedback issues. (J. Martin, 11/18/03) Revision 22 - Incorporated CEN-152, rev 5.2 and allowed procedure to conform with writer's guide. (J. R. Martin, 08/08102) 08/08/02) Revision 21 - Made grammatical and formatting changes and changed SIG S/G pressure. (Steve Napier, 10/03/01) AND THIS PROCEDURE HAS BEEN COMPLETELY REWRITTEN. This procedure has been rewritten to meet CEN 152 Revision 5.1 criteria. (Steve Napier, 08/10/01) Revision FRG Review Date Approved By Approval Date SLOPS S-LOPS 0 12/23/85 D. A. Sager 12/23/85 DATE Plant General Man Ma DOCT Revision FRG Review Date Approved By Approval Date DOCN 25 11/06/07 C. Costanzo 11/06/07 SYS Plant General Manager COM N/A ITM Authorized Approver N/A Authorized Approver nor Correction

( Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier# 1 Group # 1 KIA # K/A# 009EA2.14 Importance Rating 4.4 Small Break LOCA: Actions to be taken if PTS limits are violated Proposed Question: SRO 77 Unit 1 is experiencing a SBLOCA. While in 1-EOP-03 'LOCA', the leak was isolated at 0400. The following timeline and conditions exist: Time 0422 0432 0442 0452 RCS Pressure psi a 1720 psia 1750 psia 1820 psia 1830 psia RCS temperature ReS 425°F 415°F 410°F 400°F Pressurizer Level 28% 29% 30% 31%

  • 1A Charging pump is running, 1 1A 1BBand and 1 1CC Charging pumps have been stopped.
  • 1A S/G level is 50% NR with AFW at 150 gpm.
  • 1 B S/G level is 43% NR with AFW at 160 gpm.

(

  • Containment temperature is 110°F.
  • SIAS has NOT been reset.

Which of the following states the:

1) Safety function in jeopardy at 0452?
2) Actions required to regain / maintain the jeopardized safety function?

A. 1) Core Heat removal

2) Stop the cooldown and depressurize the RCS.

B. 1) Core Heat removal

2) Continue to cooldown NOT to exceed 100°F in anyone hour.

C. 1) Pressure control

2) Continue to cooldown NOT to exceed 100°F in anyone hour.

D. 1) Pressure control

2) Stop the cooldown and depressurize the RCS.

( 153

Proposed Answer: D0 Explanation (Optional): A. Incorrect, all criteria is met core heat removal. RCS is >200°F subcooled at 0432. RCS is outside Figure 1A, >200°F subcooled B. Incorrect, Core Heat removal is met, cooldown will make subcooling worse C. Incorrect, cooldown will make subcooling worse D. Correct, RCS is outside Figure 1A, >200°F subcooled Technical Reference(s): 1-EOP-03 (Attach if not previously provided) 1-EOP-99 Figure 1A Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: 1-EOP-99 Figures 1A and 1B Learning Objective: _0-=-.7c...::0:..::2:..::8=24-,---=..0-=-.9 _0_7_0_2_8_2_4-_0_9_ ____ _ (As available) Question Source: Bank# ( Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis x 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 -- 5 -- - Comments: ( 154

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 39 PPENDICES / FIGURES / TABLES / DATA SHEETS 116 of 155 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-99 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 FIGURE 1A RCSPRESSURETEMPERATURE RCS PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (Page 1 of 1) (Containment Temperature Less Than or Equal to 200°F) CAUTION The RCP NPSH curve assumes one pump is operating in each loop. RCP instrumentation should be monitored for seal and pump performance in accordance with 1-EOP-99, Table 13. 2400 2400*** I I~J 2200 2{1()0 2000 I I l 1800 Subcooled' .... 9 I ( i.e.8: 1600

                                                                        ""'1 I e

it< i!: i£

                      """'"t 1400 I
                      '§,~:>
                        '"~e
                        <II 1200                                        /

0-1;;

                      'S"
                      'is
                      £$:

v 1000 800 1')00 600 400 200* 200 Shlitdown o0 o () 100 ZOO ZDO SOo 300 400 500 600 700 eoo 000 indicllt<l>d Res Temperature IF) Indical'ld (F) RCS Pressure Range Required QSPDS Subcooled Margin Reading (Rep CET) 2250 psia to 1000 psia 1000 psi a to 500 psia 50 to 170T Less than 500 psia

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 39 APPENDICES PPENDICES / FIGURES / TABLES / DATA SHEETS ( I----------------~ 117 of 155 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-99 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 FIGURE 18 RCS PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (Page 1 of 1) (Containment Temperature Greater Than 200°F) CAUTION The RCP NPSH curve assumes one pump is operating in each loop. RCP instrumentation should be monitored for seal and pump performance in accordance with 1-EOP-99, Table 13. NQTE 2400 At} ()-r"f'f'<)!~)( A!r! h~~ hHQ() P!t:~'o:l Unll" j t:()~lltOl Rr..w~m R'C...c u~, (My r<'~t!$~¢fI to t"l!t ~'":.t'¢n ~t tm PfW.;,duRl U!oC H,<'Orr',!:~ v.Qlldtly 01 ~hc OPOf1Wf.>\Jd ,l.nt;l .f CP;)flgoC ~J<:> (jt'C:C-~$~fY rot~tv tho FOr Cnortiin!;itQ-f I 2200 . 2000 1800 ' Maximum ( Subcooleo" "'",~

                -;;-   1600
                'iii
                .e
                 ~
l
                 <11
                 '"~   1400 ..

Q.

                 ~

N

                '\:
                 =     1200,
                 '"'"~

Q.

                ""11l  1000 ;
                 '"u ii
                .s                     RCPNPSH 800         ReqUirement",- '

600 _____ I'~~*

                                                     ' \L ____ . :...

i

                                                                                      "!'~

400 Minimum Subcooled" Subcooled' 200 . . 'Includes Ir;strumanl Um:wtaltlti#s : o0 ' o0 100 200 300 400 500 600 GOO 700 eoo 800 Indicated ReS Temperature (F) (FJ

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 26 LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-03 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 4.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS (continued) INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS o 26. Maintain RCS within Figure 1A or 1B Limits 26.1 !f the RCS is over-subcooled, 26.111 or RCS pressure exceeds the upper limits of Figure 1A or 1B, S, MAINTAIN the RCS less than the RCS Pressure Temperature, upper limits of Figure 1A or 1 B, S, RCS Then RESTORE subcool1ng subcooling Pressure Temperature, by performing or pressure to within the ANY of the following: appropriate limit: A. OPERATE Main cooldawn. A. STOP the cooldown. or Auxiliary Pressurizer sprays. B. DEPRESSURIZE the RCS B. !f 11 HPSI throttle criteria are met, using Main Then THROTTLE SI flow. or Auxiliary Pressurizer spray. REFER TO Appendix S, Safety Injection Throttling and C. If

                                                                  !f HPSI  throttle criteria are met, Restoration.                                   Then THROTTLE SI flow.

( REFER TO Appendix S, Safety Injection Throttling and Restoration. 26.2 !f the cooldown rate is greater than 26.211 100°F in ANY 1 hour period, Then RESTORE the cooldown rate to within its limit: A. STOP the cooldown AS NECESSARY. B. MAINTAIN the plant in a stable pressure-temperature configuration. C. CONTINUE the plant cooldown within the 100°F in ANY 1 hour period limit. o 27. Maintain SIG Level 60 to 70% NR ENSURE at least ONE S/G has level being maintained or restored to between 60 and 70% NR. N R. (

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 26 LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT 55 of 67 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-03 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 3 of 11)

3. RCS INVENTORY CONTROL SAFETY ACCEPTANCE FUNCTION CRITERIA CHECK ~

A. IF HPSI Throttling Criteria Met: Pressurizer Level At least 30% I I I I I I I AND RCS Subcooling Greater than or equal I I I I I I I to minimum subcooling AND ( Reactor Vessel Hot legs covered I 1 I I J I ~ Level (sensors 4 through 8 covered) OR Less than 20°F I I I I I I ~ difference between T HOT and Rep CET temperature OR JJ (Continued on Next Page) (

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 26 LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT 56 of 67 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-03 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 i>>

                                                                                    .1: ..

ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 4 of 11)

3. RCS INVENTORY CONTROL (continued)

SAFETY ACCEPTANCE FUNCTION CRITERIA ~ CHECK --J B. IF HPSI Throttling Criteria NOT Met: Charging Pumps All available running ALL I I I I I I I AND Safety Injection Flow In accordance with I I I I J I ~ Figure 2, Safety Injection Flow vs. RCS Pressure ( OR RAS with at least I I I I I I ~ ONE HPSI Pump running AND Reactor Vessel Level Core covered I I I I I I ~ (sensors 7 and 8 covered) OR Rep CET Less than 22°F I I I I I I ~ temperature superheated END OF SAFETY FUNCTION 3

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 26 LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT 570[@7 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-03 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 "; ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 5 of 11) 11 )

4. RCS PRESSURE CONTROL SAFETY ACCEPTANCE FUNCTION CRITERIA CHECK .y -V A. RCS pressure Within limits of I I I I I I I Figure 1A or 1B, RCS Pressure Temperature OR

( B. Charging Pumps available ALL ava ru n ni nglI'-----L_..L..--1----'-_-"----' iIable running I I I I I I AND SI Flow SI flow in accordance I I I I I I ~ with Figure 2, Safety Injection Flow vs. RCS Pressure OR RAS with at least I I I I I I ~ ONE HPSI Pump running END OF SAFETY FUNCTION 4

REVISION SION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAG .. PAGE;

                                                                                 <';<-/

26 LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT PROCEDURE NO.: 58 af67 1-EOP-03 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 6 of 11)

5. CORE HEAT REMOVAL SAFETY ACCEPTANCE FUNCTION CRITERIA CHECK -,j
                                                                    ..J Forced Cire RCS T HOT                   Not superheated     I I I I I I I OR Natural Cire

( Rep CET Temperature Less than 22°F I I I I I I I superheated END OF SAFETY FUNCTION 5 ((\.

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 26 LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT 596[1:67 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-03 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 7 of 11)

6. RCS HEAT REMOVAL SAFETY ACCEPTANCE FUNCTION CRITERIA CHECK -V ..J A. Steam Generator ONE At least ON E S/G with I'-----'----'-_'-----'----'---'

I I I I I ~ Level level between 60 and 70% N NRR with Feedwater available OR At least ONE S/G with I I I I

                                                          '-----'----'--~~~~

I I ~ Feedwater being controlled to restore ( level to between 60 and 70% NR AND RCS TCOLD Stable or lowering I I I I I I I END OF SAFETY FUNCTION 6

Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier# 1 Group # 1 KIA # 022AA2.04 Importance Rating 3.8 Loss of Rx Coolant Makeup: How long PZR can be maintained within limits Proposed Question: SRO 78 Unit 2 is performing a Natural Circulation cooldown lAW 2-0120039 'Natural Circulation Cooldown'. At time 0220 the following conditions were noted:

  • Pressurizer pressure is 1620 psia.
  • SIAS has been blocked.
  • RCS temperature is 490°F and lowering.
  • BAM tanks and RWT are NOT available for makeup to the RCS.
  • Pressurizer level is 30% and lowering at a rate of 1.2% every 30 minutes.

Based on the above conditions: ( Pre~surizer would be

1) In accordance with Technical Specifications when is the earliest the Pressurizer considered Inoperable and what is the required action if the Pressurizer is declared inoperable?
2) What lineup is available for makeup to the RCS?

A. 1) 0320, be in HOT SHUTDOWN within 6 hours

2) Safety Injection tanks directly to the suction of the Charging Pumps B. 1) 0350, be in HOT SHUTDOWN within 6 hours
2) Safety Injection tanks directly to the VCT to the suction of the Charging Pumps C. 1) 0320, be in HOT SHUTDOWN within 72 hours
2) Safety Injection tanks directly to the VCT to the suction of the Charging Pumps D. 1) 0350, be in HOT SHUTDOWN within 72 hours
2) Safety Injection tanks directly to the suction of the Charging Pumps 155

Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional): A. Incorrect: Time line is incorrect. At 0320 Pressurizer level would be appx. 27.5 % which is above the Technical Specification lower limit. Incorrect: SIT lineup is to the VCT not the RWT. Various valves to the RWT are manipulated but lineup is to the VCT. B. Correct: Pressurizer level would be 26.4% which is lower than T.S. lower limit Correct: Lineup is to VCT not RWT C. Incorrect: Time line is incorrect. At 0320 Pressurizer level would be appx. 27.5 % which is above the Technical Specification lower limit. 72 hour restoration time is only for heater operability. Correct: Lineup is to VCT not RWT D. Correct: Pressurizer level would be 26.4% which is lower than T.S. lower limit. 72 hour restoration time is only for heater operability. Incorrect: SIT lineup is to the VCT not the RWT. Various valves to the RWT are manipulated but lineup is to the VCT. Technical Reference(s): T.S. 3/4.4.3 (Attach if not previously provided) ( 2-0120039 Natural Circulation Cooldown. Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: Learning Objective: 0902723-01,,,--0_7_0_2_85_8_-0_8___ _0_9_0_2_7_23_-_0_1 0702858-08 available) (As avai lable)

                             ----------~---------------

Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis x 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 - 5- - Comments: ( 156

REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM \.\ 3/4.4.3 PRESSURIZER LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.4.3 The pressurizer shall be OPERABLE with a minimum water level of'greater of!greater tIlan or equal to 27% jndicated than indicated level and a maximum water level of less than or equal to 68% indicated level and at least two groups of pressurizer heaters capable of being powered from 1E buses each having a nominal capacity of at least 150 kW. APPLICABILITY: MODES 1, 2 and 3. ACTION:

a. With one group of the above required pressurizer heaters inoperable, restore at least two groups to OPERABLE status within 72 hours or be in at least HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours and in HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours.
b. With the pressurizer otherwise inoperable, be in at least HOT STANDBY with the reactor trip breakers open within 6 hours and in HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours.

( SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.4.3.1 The pressurizer water volume shall be determined to be within its limits at least once per 12 hours. 4.4.3.2 The capacity of each of the above required groups of pressurizer heaters shall be verified to be at least 150 kW at least once per 92 days. 4.4.3.3 The emergency power supply for the pressurizer heaters shall be demonstrated OPERABLE at least once per 18 months by verifying that on an Engineered Safety Features Actuation test signal concurrent with a loss of offsite power:

a. the pressurizer heaters are automatically shed from the emergency power sources, and
b. the pressurizer heaters can be reconnected to their respective buses manually from the control room after resetting of the ESFAS test signal.

( ST. LUCIE - UNIT 2 3/4 4-9 Amendment No. g, 11

REVISION NO,: NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 36A NATURAL CIRCULATION COOLDOWN 6 of 31 PROCEDURE NO,: NO.: 2-0120039 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 7.2 Subsequent Operator Actions (continued) INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS CAUTION After a boron concentration for cold shutdown is attained in the RCS, makeup water added to the RCS during the cooldown should be at least the same boron concentration as in the RCS to prevent any dilution of RCS boron concentration.

3. §1 BORATE to maintain adequate SDM 3. If BAM tanks and RWT are NOT throughout the RCS cooldown. available, the SITs may be used for makeup to the RCS per Appendix A.
4. §1,2,3 PERFORM ALL of the following: 4.

NOTE Chemistry Department should be informed of any holds or cooldown rate changes that will affect the frequency of RCS boron concentration sampling. Once ( be ins, at least 15 minutes of lead-time is required to obtain the sample. sampling begins, A. COMMENCE an RCS cooldown to A. OPERATE ANY of the less than 325°F, within the limits of following to cooldown the Figure 1, RCS Pressure RCS to less than 325°F, Temperature, at a rate NOT to within the limits of Figure 1, exceed 50°F per hour, using SBCS. RCS Pressure Temperature, REFER TO Figure 2, Recommended at a rate NOT to exceed 50°F Cooldown Guidelines. per hour. REFER TO Figure 2, Recommended Cooldown Guidelines .

  • ADVs
  • 2C AFW Pump B. RECORD the Pressurizer water phase temperature on Table 1 and PLOT on Figure 4, Pressurizer I RCS Cooldown Curve, every 30 minutes.

C. PLOT the highest RCS cold leg temperature on Figure 4, Pressurizer I RCS Cooldown Curve, every 30 minutes. D. RECORD RCS Boron Concentration every 50°F on Data Sheet 1.

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 36A NATURAL CIRCULATION COOLDOWN 21 of 31 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-0120039 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 APPENDIX A VCT MAKEUP FROM THE SITs (Page 1 of 2) INITIAL If other sources of make up are NOT available, the SITs may be used for makeup to the RCS as follows: CAUTION

         §1 Use only one SIT at a time. RCS pressure must be less than 1750 psia before using this method.
1. Verify NO CIAS or SIAS signal is present. If present, they must be reset for operation of certain valves.
2. Ensure V2501, VCT Outlet Valve, is in open and V2504, Refueling Water to Charging Pumps, is in closed.
3. Align the SIT to RWTNCT line as follows:

( A. ,-r3

                 ,-[3         V2621,, VCT Inlet from Pri M/U Wtr. & BAM Isol Ensure V2621 CLOSED.

B. Close V3597, SIT Test Line to RWT. C. Open and lock V3463, SIT Test Line to RWT. D. Open V3201, SIT Recirc. to VCT. E. Open SE-03-2A12B, SIT Test Line to RWT.

4. Add borated water to the VCT from the selected SIT by opening its associated Fill & Drain Valve as needed. 3J w

(J) 2A1 SIT:SE-03-1AN3621 3J w 2A2 SIT:SE-03-1 BN3611 (J) 2B1 SIT:SE-03-1 CN3631 SIT:SE-03-1CN3631 3J w 2B2 SIT:SE-03-1 DN3641 (J) 3J w

5. Borate the RCS to Cold Shutdown boron concentration. (J)

REVISION NO. NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 36A NATURAL CIRCULATION COOLDOWN 22 of 31 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-0120039 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 APPENDIX A VCT MAKEUP FROM THE SITs (Page 2 of 2) INITIAL

6. ~3 When the associated SIT reaches its wide range level of 5%, Then
         'h    ISOLATE by closing its associated fill and drain valve:

A. 2A1 SIT:SE-03-1A1V3621 SIT:SE-03-1AN3621 B. 2A2 SIT:SE-03-1 BN3611 C. 2B1 SIT:SE-03-1CN3631 D. 2B2 SIT:SE-03-1 DN3641 ( END OF APPENDIX A

                                                                                                       , ./

r~; ;/~;I t, c,

                                                                                                    ~

TABLE 1.2 OPERATIONAL MODES OPERATIONAL REACTIVITY  % OF RATED

                                                         %                  AVERAGE COOLANT MODE                CONDITION, KeffKeff   THERMAL POWER*         TEMPERATURE
1. POWER OPERATION ~ 0.99 >5%
2. STARTUP ~ 0.99 ~5%
5% ~ 325°F
3. HOT STANDBY < 0.99 0 ~ 325°F
4. HOT SHUTDOWN < 0.99 0 325°F> T avg > 200°F
5. COLD SHUTDOWN < 0.99 0 ~ 200°F
6. REFUELlNG** ~ 0.95
0 ~ 140°F
  • Excluding decay heat.
 ** Fuel in the reactor vessel with the vessel head closure bolts less than fully tensioned or with the head removed.

( ST. LUCIE - UNIT 2 1-9

Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier# Group # 1 KIA # 058AG2.2.4 Importance Rating 3.6 Loss of DC Power: Ability to explain the variations in control board layout, systems, instrumentation and procedural actions between units at a facility. Proposed Question: SRO 79 Unit 1 was at 100% power when a loss of the 1A 1A DC bus occurs.

1) The response of the Auxiliary Feedwater Actuation System (AFAS) will be:
2) Which Technical Specification action statement applies to the loss of the A DC bus?

A. 1) Channel A will be in bypass, channel C will be in trip. If SG levels drop to <19% narrow range, full AFAS actuation will occur in 235 seconds.

2) Restore the 1A DC bus to operable status within 2 hours.

B. 1) Channel A will be in bypass, channel C will be in trip. If SG levels drop to <19% ( narrow range, full AFAS actuation will occur in 210 seconds.

2) Restore the 1A DC bus to operable status within 6 hours.

C. 1) Channel A will be in trip, channel C will be in bypass. If SG levels drop to <19% narrow range, full AFAS actuation will occur in 210 seconds.

2) Restore the 1A DC bus to operable status within 2 hours.

D. 1) Channel A will be in trip, channel C will be in bypass. If SG levels drop to <19% narrow range, full AFAS actuation will occur in 235 seconds.

2) Restore the 1A DC bus to operable status within 6 hours.

( 157

Proposed Answer: A Explanation (Optional): A. Correct: B. Incorrect: 210 seconds AFAS time delay is Unit 2 not Unit 1. T.S. action is 2 hours not 6 hours C. Incorrect: A channel in trip, not bypass. C channel in bypass not trip. D. Incorrect: A channel in trip, not bypass. C channel in bypass not trip. T.S. action 2 hours not 6 hours Technical Reference(s): PSL OPS SYS 412 TXT (Attach if not previously provided) T.S. 3.8.2.3 Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: Learning Objective: PSL OPS 0702412 Obj. 14, 19 (As available) Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New X ( Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis X 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 5,6,7

                                        ,10 55.43      2 Comments:

(, 158

PSL OPS SYS 412 TXT R22 For Training Use Only Battery Bus A and Instrument Inverters Band D are powered from Battery Bus B. The internal power supply auctioneering scheme for AFAS is such that the Bistable, Matrices, Initiation, Actuation, and Trip Bypass circuits for each channel should remain energized in the event one safety battery bus is lost. However, power would be lost to the corresponding process instruments (e.g., S/G Level, pressure) resulting in an actuation of AFAS-1 and AFAS-2. The Battery Failure Bypass was built to preclude the unneeded actuation. Both of the Battery Buses are monitored for voltage and in the event one of them loses power the Battery Failure Bypass is invoked in affected Ch. A or B. The two affected channels will trip, but in Ch. A(B) the battery bus monitoring relay causes the AFAS-1 and AFAS-2 Channel Bypass Relays in the affected Channel A or B to energize, placing that channel in Trip Channel Bypass. This causes the same annunciation and indication as the CHANNEL BYPASS, plus illuminates the BATTERY FAILURE BYPASS indicator on the Ch. A or B Control Panel front and additional annunciators on RTGB-102(202). The additional annunciators are: UNIT 1 UNIT2 ( AFAS Bistable Pretrip AFAS Cabinet Trouble AFAS Stm Gen Faulted Channel Trip AFAS Stm Gen Low Level Channel Trip AFAS TroublelTest Trouble/Test The end result is one of the two affected channels is bypassed (Ch. A or B), the other is in a tripped condition (Ch. C or D) and the AFAS coincidence logic is reduced to 1 out of 2. If a low level or loss of power subsequently occurs in one of the two operable channels, an AFAS-1 (2) would occur. Based on actual plant operating conditions on loss of a single DC bus, Reactor Protection System will cause the plant to trip. When SG levels drop to <19% on 2/4 channels AFAS-1 and AFAS-2 will actuate after its assigned time delay of 235[210] seconds is met. On Unit 1, if the "B" DC bus (and thus the AB DC bus) were lost, then AFW Pumps Band C would NOT start. AFW Pump A would feed SG-A. If the "A" DC bus were lost (AB DC bus remained energized), then AFW Pump B would feed SG-B and AFW Pump C would start Page 49 of99

PSL OPS SYS 412 TXT R22 For Training Use Only electric Pumps would sequence back on. As an alternative, flow can be restored immediately by using the C pump. Both of these examples are potential scenarios for an AFAS-1 (2) dIp dip lockout to one of the S/Gs. A feedwater header dIp dip lockout can occur due to one header being pressurized before the other one. This can result from differences in equipment response times (Le., (i.e., valve stroke), differences in the sequence of events (Le., (i.e., AFAS-1 occurs before AFAS-2), loss of one offsite source vs. both, etc. OPERATION OF REMOTE-MANUAL INITIATION SWITCHES (RTGB-202) Each Remote-Manual Initiation Switch at RTGB-202 de-energizes the Initiation, Interposing, Lockout, and both the cycling and latching Actuation Relays for its respective channel without a time delay. Thus, all four switches associated with AFAS-1 (2) should be positioned to MANUAL for complete actuation and AFW flow will commence without delay. After the flow control valves have traveled to their full-open position, they can then be ( throttled to establish manual S/G level control. Since the switches de-energize the Initiation Relays directly (Figure 26), both the Fault/Rupture Identification and the Automatic Level Control features associated with that S/G will be overridden. AFAS System behavior upon returning the RTGB-202 switches to AUTO will depend upon the status of S/G level and the Initiation Time Delay timer: 1. 1.JL?/4 channels have sensed S/G level below the AFAS trip sBtpointb£J9.5% NR), the'firli'erfH3s"reacne'dtheend ofthe preset delay. 235121(1] .'1".

                                                                               ~.J~ria_l*

s"econds, and not been restored (~29% NR ), AFW flow should continue uninterrupted. However, if and level R), has level has manual-close operation had been used to move the flow control valves from their full open position, the valves will remain in the manual control mode. Automatic valve cycling operation will not be established until level is restored to the AFAS reset point.

2. If 2/4 channels have sensed S/G level below the AFAS trip setpoint, the timer has not yet reached the end of its preset delay, and level has not been restored, the Page 54 of99

ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS D.C. DISTRIBUTION - OPERATING LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.8.2.3 As a minimum the following D.C. electrical sources shall be OPERABLE:

a. 125-volt D.C. bus No. 1A, 125-volt Battery bank No. 1A and a full capacity charger.
b. No.11B, 125-volt D.C. bus No. B, 125-volt Battery bank No.

No.11B B and a full capacity charger. APPLICABILITY: MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4. ACTION:

a. With one of the required battery banks or busses inoperable, restore the inoperable battery bank or bus to OPERABLE status within 2 hours or be in at least HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours.
b. With one of the required full capacity chargers inoperable, demonstrate the OPERABILITY of its associated battery banks by performing Surveillance Requirement 4.8.2.3.2.a.1 within 1 hour, and at least once per 8 hours thereafter. If any l Category A limit in Table 4.8-2 is not met, declare the battery inoperable.

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.8.2.3.1 Each D.C. bus train shall be determined OPERABLE and energized at least once per 7 days by verifying indicated power availability. 4.8.2.3.2 Each 125-volt battery bank and charger shall be demonstrated OPERABLE:

a. At least once per 7 days by verifying that:
1. The parameters in Table 4.8-2 meet the Category A limits, and
2. The total battery terminal voltage is greater than or equal to 129-volts on float charge.

ST. LUCIE - UNIT 1 3/48-10 Amendment No. 61 ItJ If}

                                                                                    /
                                                                                    /r0/  o/"J o~..J 07fJLc./fl-07fn. <.}12--   Ja 14

( Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier # 1 Group # 1 KIA # 038EA 1.41 038EA1.41 Importance Rating 3.4 Steam Generator Tube Rupture (SGTR): Venting of the S/G to atmosphere Proposed Question: SRO 80 Unit 1 has tripped 10 minutes ago, from 100% power with the following: Time 0220

  • 1C Charging pump is out of service
  • 1A and 1B 1A S Charging pumps are operating
  • Letdown has been isolated
  • Slowdown, SJAE, and Main Steam line Monitors are in alarm SG Blowdown,
  • Pressurizer level is 22% and lowering
  • Pressurizer pressure is 1980 psia and lowering
  • Tave is 532°F and stable with SBCS in automatic

( Time 0240

  • A loss of offsite power occurs and both EDG's start and load on their respective buses.

Which ONE of the following identifies the Emergency Classifications for the above times? A. Unusual Event at Time 0220. Site Area Emergency at Time 0240. B. Unusual Event at Time 0220. Alert at Time 0240. C. Alert at Time 0220. Site Area Emergency at Time 0240. D. Alert at Time 0220. General Emergency at Time 0240. 159

( Proposed Answer: C Explanation (Optional): InCOrrect: Initial classification is Alert due to SGTR >Charging pump capacity. SAE due A. Incorrect: to loss of SBCS (LOOP) and atmospheric dump valves required to be open. B. Incorrect: Same as above. C. Correct. Steam Bypass to condenser will not be available due to loss of non-vital buses. Atmospheric Steam Dump valves will have to be opened to cool down the RCS. This will require escalation to SAE. D. Incorrect: General Emergency would require loss of 2 of 3 fission barriers with imminent loss of third. Technical Reference(s): EPIP-01 Classification Of (Attach if not previously provided) Emergencies. Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: Learning Objective: -=c.c.-::....:::=...:.~O...:-...

                               --=--'-.:....:~:...:.....--=-=-

0702833-03 _ _________ _ (As available) Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) C ( New X Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis x 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 Comments: 152

Q _ S'D REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 16 CLASSIFICATION OF EMERGENCIES NO .. PROCEDURE NO.: 17 of 39 EPIP-01 ST. LUCIE PLANT A ITACHMENT 1 ATTACHMENT EMERGENCY CLASSIFICATION TABLE (Page 3 of 21 21)) EVENT/CLASS UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT SITE AREA EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY

2. ABNORMAL A. RCS PRIISEC Leakage B.1. RaQid gross failure of one Ra!!id C .1. RaJ;lid C.1. Ra!2id gross failure of steam D. Qroduct Loss of 2 of the 3 fission !!roduct PRIMARY TO SECONDARY LEAK RATE
                        . Measured RCS to secondary leakage exceeds Tech. Spec.

Qum!2 caJ;laciM charging !!um!! (WITHIN steam generator tube {WITHIN ca!2acityl with Qower loss of offsite J;lower (GREATER generator tubes {GREATER

                                                                                                                              \:lum\:l ca\:lacit~}

THAN charging !2um!2 ca!2acitYl Qower with a loss of offsite \:lower barriers with imminent loss of the third (any two of the following exist and the third is imminent). (Page 1 of 2) limits.

                        .             AND Secondary plant activity is detected.
  • Measured RCS to secondary leakage greater than Tech. Spec Limits and within charging pump limits Spec..
  • Measured RCS to secondary leakage is greater than charging pump capacity.
  • Fuel element failure (confirmed DEQ 1-131 activity greater than
                                                                                                                                                              ~Ci/mL).

275 IlCi/mL). capaciity. capacity. AND AND Secondary plant activity is

  • Secondary plant activity is detected.
  • LOCA or SGTR.

detected. AND AND Loss of both Non-Vital 4.16 KV ** Containment integrity breached, or Secondary steam release in

  • Loss of both Non-Vital 4.16 KV buses.

buses. progress from affected steam generator (i.e., stuck open ADVs, steam safety(s) or an unisolable leak}. leak). (continued on next page) (continued on next page) It NOTE Core Melt Also refer to Potential Event/Class 14.

                                                                                                                                                      . EvenUClass I
2. ABNORMAL PRIMARY TO SECONDARY LEAK RATE

~FTER AFTER CLASSIFYING, GO TO EPIP-02, DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE EMERGENCY COORDINATOR

o~tD REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 16 CLASSIFICATION OF EMERGENCIES 18 of 39 PROCEDURE NO.: EPIP-01 ST. LUCIE PLANT A ITACHMENT 1 ATTACHMENT EMERGENCY CLASSIFICATION TABLE (Page 4 of 21) EVENT/CLASS UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT SITE AREA EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY

2. ABNORMAL B.2. Rapid failure of steam C.2. §,
                                                                                      §z  Rapid failure of steam PRIMARY TO                                      generator tubes (GREATER                          tube(s) generator tubels)

SECONDARY LEAK THAN charging pump (GREATER THAN charging RATE ~ capacity) pump capacity) with steam (Page 2 of 2) release in progress

  • Measured RCS to secondary leakage greater than charging
  • Measured RCS to secondary pump capacity. leakage greater than charging AND pump capacity.
  • Secondary plant activity is AND detected.
  • Secondary plant activity is detected.

AND

  • Secondary steam release in progress from affected steam generator (i.e (i.e.,.. stuck open ADVs, steam safety(s) or an unisolable leak.)
2. ABNORMAL PRIMARY TO SECONDARY LEAK RATE AFTER CLASSIFYING, GO TO EPIP-02, DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE EMERGENCY COORDINATOR IAFTER

Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier# 1 Group # 1 KIA # 062AA2.05 Importance Rating 2.5 Loss of Nuclear Svc Water: The normal values for SWS-header flow rate and the flow rates to the components cooled by the SWS. Proposed Question: SRO 80 Unit 2 is at 30% power with the 2A TCW Heat Exchanger out of service. The 2A Heat Exchanger is to be filled and vented using 2-NOP-21.03A '2A Intake Cooling Water System Operation'. The A header is pressurized and the 2A TCW Heat Exchanger will be filled using manual control (throttling open) of MV-21-3, A ICW TRAIN TO TCW HXS. Which ONE of the following states:

1) The maximum flow through the tubes of the 2A TCW Heat Exchanger?
2) The Operability status of the 2A Intake Cooling Water header?

A. 1) 6250 gpm

2) 2A ICW header is OPERABLE as long as MV-21-3 can be closed manually if

( required. B. 1) 19000 gpm

2) 2A ICW header is OPERABLE as long as MV-21-3 can be closed manually if required.

C. 1) 6250 gpm

2) 2A ICW header is NOT OPERABLE until MV-21-3 has been electrically stroked satisfactorily.

D. 1) 19000 gpm

2) 2A ICW header is NOT OPERABLE until MV has been electrically stroked satisfactorily.

( 159

Proposed Answer: C Explanation (Optional): A. Incorrect: flow rate correct but MV-21-3 must be electrically stroked satisfactorily to be declared back in service. B. Incorrect: flow rate is for CCW heat exchanger not TCW heat exchanger, MV-21-3 must be electrically stroked satisfactorily to be declared back in service. C. Correct D. Incorrect: flow rate is for CCW heat exchanger not TCW heat exchanger Technical Reference(s): 2-NOP-21.03A 2A Intake (Attach if not previously provided) Cooling Water System Operation 2-0640030 Intake Cooling Water System 2-NOP-14.02 Component Cooling Water System Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: Learning Objective: PSL OPS SYS 313 LPC Obj. (As available) B.2 ( Question Source: Bank# Bank # Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis x 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 5 Comments: ( 160

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 1 2A INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM OPERATION PROCEDURE NO.: 2-NOP-21.03A ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 5.2 ,M  ;;4&211:"1.'*

  • Filling A Non-EssentiallCW - _

Header Using_MV-21-3'7 INITIAL NOTE Manual control of MV-21-3, A ICW TRAIN TO TCW HXS will render 2A ICW header out of service until MV-21-3 has been electrically stroked satisfactorily.

1. ENSURE A Non-EssentiallCW Header down stream of MV-21-3, A ICW TRAIN TO TCW HXS is aligned per 2-NOP-21.12, Intake Cooling Water Initial Valve Alignment.
2. VERIFY A Essential ICW Header is pressurized.

EssentiallCW I

3. CLOSE TCV-13-2A, 2A TCW HX OUTLET using manual control (TGB/22/S-20IW-C).

(TGB/22/S-20/W-C).

4. CLOSE TCV-34-3A, 2A OBHX TUBE SIDE OUTLET using manual control (TGB/43/N-211D).

(TGB/43/N-21/D). ( 5. OPEN breaker 2-41301, Intake Cooling Wtr Hdr. A Non-Emerg. Isol

\

Va. MV-21-3, (RAB 43' A Switch Gear Room 480V MCC 2A6). I

6. Manually THROTTLE OPEN MV-21-3, A ICW TRAIN TO TCW HXS (INTK/11/N-4IW-C).

(INTK/11/N-4/W-C).

7. VENT 2A TCW Heat Exchanger:

A. OPEN SH21171 , 2A TCW HX OUTLET HEAD VENT (TGB/26/N-21/E-K). B. OPEN SH21172, 2A TCW HX TUBE SIDE INLET HEAD VENT (TGB/26/N-21/W-D). C. WHEN a solid stream of water issues from vents, THEN CLOSE valves:

                           **     SH21171, 2A TCW HX OUTLET HEAD VENT
                            **    SH21172, 2A TCW HX TUBE SIDE INLET HEAD VENT
8. VENT 2A OBHX Heat Exchanger:

i A. OPEN SH212012, 2A OBHX INLET HEAD VENT I (TGB/45/S-20/E-K).

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 1 2A INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM OPERATION :4 of 29 PROCEDURE NO.: NO,: 2-NOP-21.03A ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 1.0 PURPOSE 'INITIAL This procedure provides instructions for operating the Intake Cooling Water (ICW) System Train A under normal plant operating condition. 2.0 PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS 2.1 Precautions

1. During normal operations, the standby ICW pump RTGB control switch shall be maintained in PULL TO LOCK position.
2. When approaching maximum flows, the heat exchangers should be monitored carefully to detect tube rattle.

2.2 Limitations

1. Flow through a single ICW pump shall not exceed 21,600 gpm.

(Section 7.1.3 Management Directive 1) fIIIII'

2. A Flow through the tubes of a Component Cooling Water (CCW) Heat Exchanger shall not exceed 19,000 gpm.
3. Flow through the tubes of a Turbine Cooling Water (TCW) Heat Exchangers shall not exceed 6,250 gpm.
4. The ICW Pump discharge valve should be opened approximately 10 turns when starting on a depressurized header.
5. ICW pumps shall not be operated for any extended period of time with the discharge valve near closed.

3.0 PREREQUISITES AND INITIAL CONDITIONS 3.1 Prerequisites

1. ENSURE Screen Wash System is available to support ICW Pump operation per 2-NOP-11, Circulating Water System Initial Alignment.
2. ENSURE Intake Cooling Water is aligned in accordance with 2-NOP-21 .12, Intake Cooling Water System Initial Valve Alignment.

2-NOP-21.12, 3.2 Initial Conditions None

( Proposed Answer: A Explanation (Optional): A. Correct. MV-18-1 is initially opened. If air leak confirmed, MV-18-1 is closed in 1-101003. Letdown valves close on loss of air which requires Charging pumps to be stopped. B. Incorrect; All Unit 1 CCW valves to the RCP's are outside of Containment. 2 of 4 CCW valves on Unit 2 are inside containment. C. Incorrect: MV-18-1 is initially opened. D. Incorrect: CCW would be lost on Unit 2 but not on Unit 1 Technical Reference(s): 1-1010030 Loss of Instrument (Attach if not previously provided) Air, Unit 1 T.S. 3.6.1.4 1-ARP-01-F46 Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: _ _ _ ____ __ __ __ __ __ Learning Objective: _ 0702860-08, 0902723-02_ _ _ (As available) 07_0_2_8_60_-_08--,-,_0_9_02_7_2_3_-0_2

                              ------~---------

Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge - X --- - Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 - 10 55.43 5-- Comments: 162

REVISION: PROCEDURE TITLE: PANEL; 1A ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE F PROCEDURE NO: WINDOW: 1-ARP-01-F46 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 46 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 CNTMT AIR CNTMTAIR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 DRYER 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 OUTLET 33 41 DEVICE: 34 35 42 43 PIS-18-32 I1599 599 36 44 37 45

                                    -38    39 47 40 48 LOCATION:

RAB/RTGB-102 PRESS LOW SETPOINT: 80 psig F-46 ALARM CONFIRMATION:

1. PIS-18-32, Cntmt Instr Air Hdr Press, (RTGB-1 02) indicates low pressure.

OPERATOR ACTIONS: NOTE

  • Containment Instrument Air Compressor will load at 95 psig and unload at 105 psig.
  • Standby Containment Air Compressor will auto start at 90 psig decreasing and will unload

( at 100 psig.

  • PCV-18-5, Backup Instrument Air Supply to Containment, will open at 80 psig decreasing.
1. CHECK PIS-18-32, Containment Instrument Air Header Pressure, (RTGB-102)

(RTGB-1 02) to determine containment instrument air pressure.

2. DISPATCH an operator to check reflash panels AF-22-1, AF-22-2, and AF-22-3 (RAB 43' elevation near column RA2-RAJ) to determine cause of alarm.

1f a low air pressure condition exits, Then PERFORM the following:

3. If A. ENSURE MV-18-1, Instr Air to Cntmt, is OPEN.

B. If S. 1f standby Containment Air Compressor is NOT operating, Then PLACE standby Containment Instrument Air Compressor in service in accordance with 1-NOP-18.41, Containment Instrument Air Compressors - Normal Operation. ......

                                                                                                               ;;0 C. IMPLEMENT off-normal procedure 1-1010030, Loss of Instrument Air.                                    >>

CAUSES: Alarm may be caused by failure of 1A (1B) (1 B) Containment Air Compressor or malfunction of 1A (1 B) Containment Air Dryer.

REFERENCES:

1. CWD CWO 8770-B-327, Sheets 599 and 642
2. TEDB l

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 34A LOSS OF INSTRUMENT AIR PROCEDURE NO.: 12 of 23 1-1010030 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1

.2 7.2     Subsequent Operator Actions (continued)

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS NOTE

  • Indications that there is an instrument air leak inside containment may include the following:
  • PIS-18-32, Containment Instrument Air Header Pressure, indicates significantly lower than PI-18-9, Instrument Air Header Pressure.
  • Instrument air operated components inside containment have positioned to their fail position (Reference Appendix C)
  • Containment Pressure is rising.
  • Loss of instrument air to containment will result in the following:
  • Letdown isolates.
  • Pressurizer Spray Valves fail closed. The use of Auxiliary Spray valves will be limited due to loss of letdown flow.
  • RCPs should remain operable since the CCW Supply and Return valves are located outside containment. The RCP Cooling Water Outlet valves fail open. The RCP oil reservoir levels will indicate low.
  • Steam Generator Blowdown Slowdown flow isolates.
  • Technical Specification"_Irequires 3.6.1.4 requires that primary containment internal pressure be maintained between -0.7 and 2.4 psig.

15. 15 !f there is an instrument air leak inside 15. containment, Then perform the following: A. Ensure MV-18-1, Instr Air to Cntmt, A. !f MV-18-1 is unable to be is CLOSED. closed from the control room, Then dispatch an operator to manually close MV-18-1 (Located in the 19.5 Pipe Pen, Pen 9). B. Isolate letdown and charging in accordance with 1-0NP-02.03, Charging and Letdown.

c. Utilize pressurizer heaters and auxiliary spray valves as required to maintain pressurizer pressure.

REVISION NO.: IREVISION PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 34A LOSS OF INSTRUMENT AIR 22 of 23 PROCEDURE IIRF NO.: 1-1010030 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 APPENDIX C AIR ACTUATED COMPONENTS (Page 5 of 6) 11. 111. Instrument Air COMPONENT LOC DESCRIPTION FAIL POSITION FCV-23-3 oe 1A 1A S/G Bldn Penetr 6 Isol Closed FCV-23-5 oe 1B S/G Bldn Penetr 5 Isol Closed FCV-23-7 oe 1A S/G Bldn Sample Isol 1A Closed FCV-23-9 oe 1B S/G Bldn Sample Isol Closed FCV-23-12 oe A S/G Bldn Hdr to SGBTF Closed FCV-23-14 oe B S/G Bldn Hdr to SGBTF Closed RCV-23-2 oe Unit 1 S/G Bldn to Bldn Fltrs RAD Cntl Open RCV-23-1 oe Unit 1 S/G Bldn to Disch Canal RAD Cntl Closed RCV-31-1 oe Processed Bldn to Disch Canal RAD Cntl Closed FCV-23-4 Ie 1A S/G Bldn Penetr 6 Isol Closed FCV-23-6 Ie 1B S/G Bldn Penetr 5 Isol Closed PCV-18-3 ANN Instr Air to A Main Hatch Door Seal Open ( PCV-18-4 ANN Instr Air to B Main Hatch Door Seal Open

12. Heating, Ventilation and Air Condition COMPONENT LOC DESCRIPTION FAIL POSITION FCV-25-1 OC RX Cntmt Purge Isol before Penetr P-11 Closed FCV-25-6 OC Inlet of HVE-8A & & HVE-8B Casing Closed FCV-25-7 ANN Cntmt VAC Relief ~Closed FCV-25-8 ANN Cntmt VAC Relief A "'...... '.S:

Closed FCV-25-3 IC RX Cntmt Purge Isol after Penetr P-11 Closed FCV-25-4 IC RX Cntmt Purge Isol before Penetr P-1 0 Closed FCV-25-2 ANN RX Cntmt Purge Isol Penetr P-11 in Annulus Closed FCV-25-5 ANN RX Cntmt Purge Isol Penetr P-1 0 in Annulus Closed

13. Radiation Monitoring COMPONENT LOC DESCRIPTION FAIL POSITION FCV-26-2, 4, 6 OC RCB Atmospheric Sample Isol. Valve Closed FCV-26-1, 3, 5 IS RCB Atmospheric Sample Isol. Valve Closed

CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS ( INTERNAL PRESSURE LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.6.1.4 Primary containment internal pressure shall be maintained between -0.7 and 2.4 PSIG. APPLICABILITY: MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4. ACTION: With the containment internal pressure outside of the limits above, restore the internal pressure to within the limits within 1 hour or be in at least HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours. SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.6.1.4 The primary containment internal pressure shall be determined to be within the limits at least once per 12 hours. ( ST. LUCIE - UNIT 1 3/46-12

Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier # 1 Group # 2 KIA # KJA 037AA2.10 Importance Rating 4.1 Ability to determine and interpret the following as they apply to the Steam Generator Tube Leak: Tech-Spec limits for ReS leakage Proposed Question: SRO 82 Unit 1 is at 100% power with the following Reactor Coolant System Leakage rates. 1A Stearn Generator: .05 gpm 1B Steam Generator: .11 gpm Which ONE of the following states the Technical Specification Reactor Coolant System Leakage that is being exceeded and what is the applicable action statement? A. TOTAL of 1A and 1B 1B Steam Generator together exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 6 hours. B. ONLY 1B Steam Generator leakage exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in ( at least Hot Standby within 6 hours. C. ONLY 1B Steam Generator leakage exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 4 hours. D. TOTAL of 1 A and 1B Steam Generator together exceeds the Tech. Spec. 1A limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 4 hours. Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional): 155

A. Incorrect: 1A SG .05 gpm is 72 gallons per day. 1B is 158 gal per day. Up to 150 ( gallons per day through ONLY ONE SG is the limit. B. Correct:: 11 gpm is 158 gallons per day. C. Incorrect: Hot standby in 6 hours D. Incorrect: Total riot riOt correct, Hot standby in 6 hours Reference( s): Technical Reference(s): T.S. 3.4.6.2 Reactor Coolant (Attach if not previously provided) System Leakage Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: Learning Objective: 0902723-02 (As available) Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New x ( Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis x 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 Comments: 156

Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier Tier# # 1 Group # 2 KIA # 037AA2.10 Importance Rating 4.1 Ability to determine and interpret the following as they apply to the Steam Generator Tube Leak: Tech-Spec limits for RCS leakage Proposed Question: SRO 82 Unit 1 is at 100% power with the following Reactor Coolant System Leakage rates . 1A Steam Generator: .05 gpm 1B Steam Generator: .11 gpm PORV 1402: 1.2 gpm Check Valve V3227 0.8 gpm Which ONE of the following states the Technical Specification Reactor Coolant System Leakage that is being exceeded and what is the applicable action statement? A. TOTAL of 1A and 1 B Steam Generator leakage exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 6 hours. B. ONLY 1 B Steam Generator leakage exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 6 hours. C. Leakage from Check Valve V3227 exceeds the Tech. Spec. limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 4 hours. D. Leakage from the PORV 1402 exceeds the Tech. Spec limit. Be in at least Hot Standby within 4 hours. 163

Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional): A. Incorrect: 1A SG .05 gpm is 72 gallons per day. 1 B is 158 gal per day. Up to 150 gallons per day through ONLY ONE SG is the limit. B. Correct:: 11 gpm is 158 gallons per day. C. Incorrect: V3227 is allowed 1 gpm or 1-5 gpm if previous leakage rates allow. D. Incorrect: PORV leakage is identified leakage and up to 1 ° 10 gpm allowed. Technical Reference(s): T.S. 3.4.6.2 Reactor Coolant (Attach if not previously provided) System Leakage Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: Learning Objective: _0-,-9,-0,--2_7_2~3-~0_2 _0-'-9:......:0'-'-2_7_23-'-----'-0_2_ _ (As available) ( Question Source: Bank # Bank# Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis x 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 5 _5-=--_ Comments: I, 164

REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ( REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.4.6.2 Reactor Coolant System operational leakage shall be limited to:

a. No PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE,
b. 1 GPM UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE,
c. 150 gallons per day primary-to-secondary leakage through anyone steam generator (SG),
d. 10 GPM IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE from the Reactor Coolant System, and
e. Leakage as specified in Table 3.4.6-1 for each Reactor Coolant System Pressure Isolation Valve identified in Table 3.4.6-1.

APPLICABILITY: MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4. ACTION:

a. With any PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE, or with primary-to-secondary leakage not within limit, be in at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours.
b. With any Reactor Coolant System operational leakage greater than anyone of the above limits, excluding primary-to-secondary leakage, PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE, and Reactor Coolant System Pressure Isolation Valve leakage, reduce the leakage rate to within limits within 4 hours or be in at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours.
c. With any Reactor Coolant System Pressure Isolation Valve leakage greater than the limit in 3.4.6.2.e above reactor operation may continue provided that at least two valves, including check valves, in each high pressure line having a non-functional valve are in and remain in the mode corresponding to the isolated con-dition. Motor operated valves shall be placed in the closed posi-tion, and power supplies deenergized. (Note, however, that this may lead to ACTION requirements for systems involved.) Otherwise, reduce the leakage rate to within limits within 4 hours or be in at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours.

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.4.6.2 Reactor Coolant System operational leakages shall be demonstrated to be within each of the above limits by:

a. Monitoring the containment atmosphere gaseous and particulate radioactivity at least once per 12 hours.

ST. LUCIE - UNIT 1 3/44-14 OFder dated 4/20/81 Order 4-1-&, 200 Amendment No. 448,

TABLE 3.4 6-1 PRIMARY COOLANT SYSTEM PRESSURE ISOLATION VALVES Check Valve No. V3227 V3123 V3217 V3113 V3237 V3133 V3247 V3143 V3124 V3114 V3134 V3144 NOTES (a) Maximum Allowable Leakage (each valve):

1. Leakage rates less than or equal to 1.0 gpm are acceptable.
2. Leakage rates greater than 1.0 gpm but less than or equal to 5.0 gpm are acceptable if the latest measured rate has not exceeded the rate determined by the previous test by an amount the reduces the margin between previous measured leakage rate and the maximum permissible rate of 5.0 gpm by 50% or greater.
3. Leakage rates greater than 1.0 gpm but less than or equal to 5.0 gpm are unacceptable if the latest measured rate exceeded the rate determined by the previous test by an amount that reduces the margin between measured leakage rate and the maximum permissible rate of 5.0 gpm by 50% or greater.
4. Leakage rates greater than 5.0 gpm are unacceptable.

(b) To satisfy ALARA requirements, leakage may be measured indirectly (as from the performance of pressure indicators) if accomplished in accordance with approved procedures and supported by computations showing that the method is capable of demonstrating valve compliance with the leakage criteria. (c) Minimum test differential pressure shall not be less than 150 psid. ST. LUCIE - UNIT 1 3/44-14b Order dated 4/20/81

Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier# 1 Group # 2 KIA # 067AG2.4.21 067 AG2.4.21 Importance Rating 4.6 Plant Fire on Site: Knowledge of the parameters and logic used to assess the status of safety systems Proposed Question: SRO 83 Given the following events on Unit 1 1:: / r$

                                              ~er 0912: Unit 1 tripped from 100% 8~~~r and an inadvertent SIAS occurred and has yet to be
                                             ~~

reset.t . rese 1'/ Iff' V' 0923: A fire alarm was receiVedrecejVed in the Control Room. 0925: The NPO confirmed~ confirmed~ lube oil fire under the HP Turbine. 0927: Both 1 1AA & 1B Fire Pumps are manually started. 0940: The Fire Brigade is fighting the fire but it is NOT under control. 0941: a Loss of Offsite Power (LOOP) occurs.

1) What will be the status of the electric Fire Pumps in support of the fire fighting effort?
2) At what time is the E-Plan EAL required to be declared?

( A. 1) Both Fire pumps will AUTOMATICALLY restart following a time delay after EDG breaker closure. 2)0935 B. 1) Both Fire pumps will AUTOMATICALLY restart following a time delay after EDG breaker closure. 2)0940 C. 1) Both Fire pumps must be MANUALLY restarted following EDG breaker closure. 2)0940 D. 1) Both Fire pumps must be MANUALLY restarted following EDG breaker closure. 2)0935 ( 165

Proposed Answer: D Explanation (Optional): A. Incorrect: Electric Driven Fire Pumps will trip on the LOOP and require manual restart following EDG breaker closure. B. Incorrect: Do not automatically start. Time should be 0935 C. Incorrect: EAL should be met at 0935 D. Correct: Electric Driven Fire Pumps will trip on the LOOP and require manual restart following EDG breaker closure. 10 min EAL clock started at time 0925 when fire was confirmed by NPO. Technical Reference(s): NOP-15.12 Fire Protection (Attach if not previously provided) System Operation EPIP-01 Classification Of emergencies ( Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: Learning Objective: --,,-0-,-70-,,-2:::...:3,--,1-'

                            ---,,0-,-7-,-,02=-3=-1__       -.1--=-0,-,-7-,---,

1_-0,--7....!...-=.-=--90;

9. . : .:.0.=.: 2,7'-0::..::2=--0.:..:2=--___
                                                                                                   --,-7--=-0=2---=0-=:2_ _ _ (As available) a v a iIa b Ie)

Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis x 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 --- 7 55.43 - 5 -- - Comments: ( 166

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 3 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM OPERATION ( PROCEDURE NO.: 4 of 22 4of22 0-NOP-15.12 ST. LUCIE PLANT 2.4 Drawings

  • 8770-G-084, Firewater, Domestic and Makeup Systems (sheets 1, 2 & 3)
  • 8770-G-087, Miscellaneous Systems (sheet 2)
  • 2998-G-087, Miscellaneous Systems (sheet 2) 2.5 ,-r1
         ~1     CR-01-1501, Restoration of Sprinkler Systems 3.0      PREREQUISITES                                                                INITIAL 3.1      NOP-15.11, Fire Protection System Initial Alignment, is complete.

US 3.2 Domestic Water System is in operation in accordance with 01-15-01, Domestic Water System - Normal Operation. US 4.0 PRECAUTIONS / LIMITATIONS 4.1 Both Fire Pumps should be properly aligned and operational at all times. 4.2 §1 Level in the City Water Tanks shall be maintained above 14' 6" at all times. 4.3 Fire Pump operation following a SIAS:

  • SIAS - Overrides Fire Pump automatic start. Permissive to manually start.
  • LOOP coincident with SIAS - Pump receives a TRIP signal. Permissive to manually start after the associated bus is energized.

5.0 RECORDS REQUIRED 5.1 Completed copy of this procedure shall be maintained in the plant files in accordance with QI-17-PSL-1, QI-17 -PSL-1, Quality Assurance Records.

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 16 CLASSIFICATION OF EMERGENCIES PROCEDURE NO.: EPIP-01 ST. LUCIE PLANT S1. 5.2 Classifying the Event (continued

1. A. 1 1., (continued)

Example Scenarios: (1) 1000 Fire Alarm is received in the Control Room 1005 Fire is confirmed by a NLO in the field 10 minute clock starts 1015 10 minutes have passed since fire was confirmed, the fire is not out and is uncontrolled - EAL is met and an Unusual Event is to be declared - There is no additional 15 minute assessment period. (2) 1000 All Feedwater is lost ( 15 minute clock starts 1100 S/G levels lower to below 40% wide range - EAL is met and an Alert is to be declared - There is no additional 15 minute assessment period.

2. Use the best information available when working through the Emergency Classification Table. When confronted with conflicting information for which resolution is not apparent, classify the condition at the highest appropriate emergency class.
3. il, If, in the judgement of the Shift Manager (SM) IEmergency
                                                                  /Emergency Coordinator (EC), a situation is more serious than indicated by instrument readings or other parameters, Then classify the emergency condition at the more serious level (i.e., at the highest appropriate emergency class).
4. 115 Security Event il the Control If Room is contacted by any of the following: Security, NRC, FBI or NORAD that a terrorist attack on the plant site is imminent or is occurring, Then perform the actions in ONOP-72.01, Response to Security Events and the applicable Security Force Instruction (SFI).

(

( Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier# 1 Group # 2 K/A# 074EG2.2.40 Importance Rating 4.7 Inad Core Cooling: Ability to apply technical specifications for a system Proposed Question: SRO 84 The following are the Unit 1 QSPDS indications. Incore Thermocouples Operable Reactor Vessel Level Monitoring Sys. Operable Channel A 3/core quadrant 4 sensors Channel B 2/core quadrant 3 sensors In accordance with Technical Specifications which ONE of the following states the operability of the above systems? ( A. Channel A and Channel B for Incore and Reactor Vessel Level are OPERABLE. B. Channel A for Incore and Reactor Vessel are operable, Channel B for Incore and Reactor level are INOPERABLE. C. Channel A and B for Incore are OPERABLE, Channel A for Reactor Vessel is OPERABLE, Channel B for Reactor Vessel is INOPERABLE. D. Channel A for Incore is OPERABLE, Channel B for Incore is INOPERABLE. Channel A and B for Reactor Vessel are both OPERABLE. 167

Proposed Answer: C ( Explanation (Optional): A. Incorrect, Channel B for Reactor Vessel is INOPERABLE. Must have a minimum of 4 sensors operable. B. Incorrect C. Correct, channel B Reactor Vessel level only has 3 sensors operable D. Incorrect Technical Reference(s): T.S. Table 3.3-11 Accident (Attach if not previously provided) Montioring Ops Policy 503 Technical Specification Guidance Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: ( Learning Objective: _0,---7---,0_2_40-,---7_0~bJ,--*. _1_1_ _ _ _ _ _ _0,,-7--,0,--2_4-,-0_7_O_b.L..j._1_1______ (As available) Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis x 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 - 10- - - 55.43 2,5 Comments: 168

                                                                       -                                                                  ~

{lid o~l~\

   ~,~

TABLE 3.3-11 ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION MINIMUM TOTAL NO. CHANNELS INSTRUMENT OF CHANNELS OPERABLE ACTION

1. Pressurizer Water Level 2 1 1,6
2. Auxiliary Feedwater Flow Rate 1/pump 1/pump 7
3. RCS Subcooling Margin Monitor 2 1 1,6
4. PORV Position Indicator 1/valve 1/valve 2 Acoustic Flow Monitor
5. PORV Block Valve Position 1/valve 1/valve 2 Indicator
6. Safety Valve Position 1/valve 1/valve 3 Indicator
                                                                     /...-._--...,
                                                                                              ~21core
7. Incore thermocouples ,/' 4/core'*

4/core~ 2/core ". 1,6

                                                                  ~ quadrant ")

i

                                                                                              ~uadrant

___ quadrant ~

                                                                      ~'--,.-,. f* .. ------/
8. Containment Sump Water Level
                                                                             --f";-'-                ,. 1 1*-
                                                                                                            '-'-'-~'

4,5 (Narrow Range)

9. Containment Sump Water Level 2 1 4,5 (Wide Range)
10. Reactor Vessel Level Monitoring 2** 1** 4,5 System
11. Containment Pressure 2 1 1,6
  • The non-safety grade containment sump water level instrument may be substituted.
     **    Definition of OPERABLE: A channel is composed of eight (8) sensors in a probe, of which four (4) sensors must be OPERABLE.

ST ST. LUCIE - UNIT 1 3/43-42 Amendment No. U, ~,

                                                                                                                            +9, ~, ~, 177

TABLE 3.3-11 (continued) ( ACTION STATEMENTS ACTION 1 - With the number of OPERABLE channels less than the Total No. of Channels shown in Table 3.3-11, either restore the inoperable channel(s) to OPERABLE status within 30 days or be in HOT STANDBY within the next 12 hours. ACTION 2 - With position indication inoperable, restore the inoperable indicator to OPERABLE status or close the associated PORV block valve and remove power from its operator within 48 hours or be in HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours. ACTION 3 - With any individual valve position indicator inoperable, obtain quench tank temperature, level and pressure information once per shift to determine valve position. ACTION 4 - With the number of OPERABLE Channels one less than the Total Number of Channels shown in Table 3.3-11, either restore the inoperable channel to OPERABLE status within 7 days if repairs are feasible without shutting down or prepare and submit a Special Report to the Commission pursuant to the specification 6.9.2 within 30 days following the event outlining the action taken, the cause of the inoperability and the plans and schedule for restoring the system to OPERABLE status. ACTION 5 - With the number of OPERABLE Channels less than the Minimum Channels OPERABLE requirements of Table 3.3-11, either restore the inoperable channel(s) to OPERABLE status within 48 hours if repairs are feasible without shutting down or:

1. Initiate an alternate method of monitoring the reactor vessel inventory; and
2. Prepare and submit a Special Report to the Commission pursuant to Specification 6.9.2 within 30 days following the event outlining the action taken, the cause of the inoperability and the plans and schedule for restoring the system to OPERABLE status; and
3. Restore the Channel to OPERABLE status at the next scheduled refueling.

ACTION 6 - With the number of OPERABLE accident monitoring channels less than the Minimum Channels OPERABLE requirements of Table 3.3-11, either restore the inoperable channel(s) to OPERABLE status within 48 hours or be at least in HOT SHUTDOWN within the next 12 hours. ACTION 7 - With the number of OPERABLE accident monitoring channels less than the Minimum Channels OPERABLE requirements of Table 3.3-11, either restore the inoperable channel(s) to OPERABLE status within 72 hours or be at least in HOT SHUTDOWN within the next 12 hours. ST. LUCIE - UNIT 1 3/43-43 Amendment No. J+, +9,165

                                                                                               +9, 165
                       ~t-- til lI/i!t~

a....- ST. LUCIE PLANT OPS-503 ( OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT POLICY Rev. 35 Date 05/04/09 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION GUIDANCE Page 8 of 34 Operational Guidance for Section 3/4.3 (continued) 3/4.3.3 Monitoring Instrumentation (Unit 1)

1. Table 3.3-6 Item 1 Area Rad Monitors The FHB Refueling Canal Area Rad monitor (channel 8) is redundant to the Fuel Storage Pool Area Rad monitor (channel 7) as documented in CR 2006-30899 disposition. Either chan nel may be used for compliance with the technical specification when one of these Area Radiation Monitors is out of service.
2. Radiation monitors identified in Tech Specs and ODCM that alarm in the Control Room must have alarm capability in order to be declared OPERABLE. OPER ABLE. If the alarm function does not 0 perate, then the n the appropriate actions need to be taken in accordance with Tech Specs or ODCM. While the use of the RM-23P may be used on Unit 2 to com ply with the alternate method of monitoring, any reports would still be required until the Radiation Radiati on Monitor is restored to Operable status.

3/4.3.3.8 Accident Monitoring Instrumentation

1. Containment Pressure Transm itter Isolation Valves If power is lost to SE-07-5E or SE-07-5F, Containment Pressure Transmitter Isolation Valves, these valves will fail closed. This results in associated pressure transmitter transm (PT-07-4A itter (PT PT 4A 1 or PT 4B1) 4B 1) being isolated, and will NOT reflect actual req uirements of TIS 3.3.3.6, Accident containment pressure. Apply the appropriate requirements Containm ent Isolation Valves in Section Monitoring Instrumentation. Also refer to Containment 3.6.3.

If power is lost to SE-07-5A I B I C I D, Containment Pressure Transmitter Isolation Valves, the associated valve willw ill fail open such that containm containmentent pressure input to RPS and ESFAS is assured.

2. Core Exit Thermocouples Technical Specification Table 3.3-11 lists the total number of channels as 4/core quadrant with a minimum number of channels of 2/core quadrant.

A. Total- 4/core quadrant requires at least 2/core quadrant on A QSPDS and 2/core quadrant on B QSPDS to reach a total of 4/core quadrant. This will ensure that upon a loss of one channel of QSPDS the minimum number of CETs would still be available. B. Minimum - 2/core quadrant per QSPDS channel (Le., (i.e., one operable QSPDS channel with 2 CETs per core quadrant operable).

Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier# 1 Group # 2 KIA # K/A# 076AA2.04 Importance Rating 3.0 High Reactor Coolant Activity: Process effluent radiation chart recorder Proposed Question: SRO 85 Unit 1 has been at 100% power for 67 days: xv'" RR-2202)Process radiation monitor has indicated a significant increase in ./selected RR-2202process Vselected isotope and Gross activity has not significantly changed.

1) Based on the above indications, what is occurring in the Fuel/RCS?
2) What Technical Specification action is required ifj\selected Isotope exceeds the limit for longer than the allowable time? ~
                                                                          ""y  ;,'A,..

A. 1) Fuel Failure

2) Be in HOT STANDBY with Tave <500°F within 6 hours.

B. 1) Crud Burst ( 2) Be in HOT STANDBY with Tave <500°F within 6 hours. C. 1) Fuel Failure

2) Be in HOT STANDBY with Tave <515°F within 6 hours.

D. 1) Crud Burst

2) Be in HOT STANDBY with Tave <515°F within 6 hours.

169

Proposed Answer: A ( Explanation (Optional): A. Correct: Iodine increase that remains above prior level during steady state B. Incorrect: Must have gross activity increase during power change C. Incorrect: Tave <515°F is Technical Specification limit for critically. D. Incorrect: Both 1 and 2 Technical Reference(s): U1 T.S. 3.4.8 (Attach if not previously provided) 1-0NP-01.06 Excessive RCS Activity Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: Learning Objective: _0_7_0_2_8_6_1-_0_8~,0_9_0_2_7_2_3-_0_1_ _ _ (As available) _0_7_0_2_8_61_-_08-",-0_9_0_27_2_3_-0_1___ Question Source: Bank # ( Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge - X Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 - 5 Comments: 170

REVISION SION NO.: PROCEDURE RE TITLE: PAGE: 3E PROCESS RADIATION MONITORS ( PROCEDURE NO.: 156(39 1-0NP-26.01 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 4.4 Letdown Monitor (continued) INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS NOTE

  • Iodine increase that remains significantly above prior levels during steady state operation is indicative of fuel failure.
  • Iodine increase concurrent with a Gross Activity increase during a plant load change is indicative of a crud burst.
3. If
              !f the affected monitor is functioning properly and indicates high activity, 1-0NP-01.06, Then GO TO 1-0NP-01         .06, Excessive RCS Activity.

( END OF SECTION 4.4

REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM SPECIFIC ACTIVITY LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.4.8 The specific activity of the primary coolant shall be limited to: a ~ 1.0 IlCi/gram a.. .:=: f.lCilgram DOSE EQUIVALENT 1-131, and

                    ~ 100/E IlCi/gram.
b. .:=: f.lCi/gram.

APPLICABILITY: MODES 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5. ACTION: MODES 1, 1,2 2 and 3*:

a. With the specific activity of the primary coolant> 1.0 IlCi/gram f.lCilgram DOSE EQUIVALENT 1-131 for more than 100 hours during one con-tinuous time interval or exceeding the limit line shown on Figure 3.4-1, be in HOT STANDBY with Tavg < 500°F within 6 hours.
b. With the specific activity of the primary coolant> 100/E f.lCi/gram, be in HOT STANDBY with T IlCi/gram, avg < 500°F within 6 hours.

Tavg MODES 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5: 1,2,3,4 ( With the specific activity of the primal): primal)' coolant> 1.0 IlCi/gram f.lCilgram DOSE EQUIVALENT 1-131 or> 100/Ef.lCilgram, 100/EIlCi/gram, perform the sampling and analysis requirement of item 4 a) of Table 4.4-4 until the specific activity of the primary coolant is restored to within its limits. SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.4.8 The specific activity of the primary coolant shall be determined to be within the limits by performance of the sampling and analysis pro-gram of Table 4.4-4.

  • With T avg ~

Tavg  ::: 500°F. 500° F. ST. LUCIE - UNIT 1 3/44-17 Amendment No. W, 101

( 5. Loss of charging and letdown EO-9E

a. Inability to makeup to ReS to compensate for:

1 ) power change

2) Temp changes
3) Rep Bleedoff -----.,
6. Res crud burst EO-9F
a. Increased activity in ReS
1) Unit 1 letdown process monitor  ?
  • Increase in gross gamma (channel 40)
2) Unit 2 RAD monitor isolated
                                                                                      \)

EO-9G f

7. Failed fuel element
a. Increased activity in ReS
1) Unit 1 letdown process monitor
  • Increase in gross gamma (channel 40)
  • Increase in 1-131 (channel 41)
2) Unit 2 Rad monitor isolated
8. Inadvertent Start of a charging pump while the EO-9H ReS is solid
a. Res P increase
b. Potential ReS integrity challenge V. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OVERVIEW A. Operability of Boron Injection Flowpaths EO-11,
1. Shutdown must have one boron injection TS 3.1.2.1 flowpath.
2. Operating must have two complete boron TS 3.1.2.2 injection flowpaths

( 0702205, Rev. 18, Page 37 of 48 FOR TRAINING USE ONLY

Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier# 2 Group # 1 KIA # 003G2.1.32 Importance Rating 4.0 Reactor Coolant Pump: Ability to explain all system limits and precautions Proposed Question: SRO 86 Unit 1 is in Mode 5 performing 1-NOP-01.05 'FILLING AND VENTING THE RCS'. The RCS is solid and the crew is preparing to start the first RCP for venting after a short SNO. The following conditions exist:

  • RCS temperature is 140°F.
  • RCS pressure is 310 psia.
  • Secondary side of the Steam Generator is 145°F.
1) Which of the following states the acceptability of starting the RCP?
2) What are the Technical Specification bases for the criteria to start the RCP?

( A. 1) The RCP may NOT be started with the Steam Generator temperature above the RCS temperature.

2) To prevent RCS overpressurization due to energy addition to the RCS.

B. 1) The RCP may NOT be started with the Steam Generator temperature above the RCS temperature.

2) To prevent challenging the opening of the PORV's which are NOT designed to relieve a water solid condition.

C. 1) The RCP MAY be started with the current RCS I Steam Generator ~ f.. T.

2) To prevent RCS overpressurization due to energy addition to the RCS.

D. 1) The RCP MAY be started with the current RCS I Steam Generator f.. ~ T.

2) To prevent challenging the opening of the PORV's which are NOT designed to relieve a water solid condition.

( 171

Proposed Answer: C Explanation (Optional): A. Incorrect: RCS / SG L'lT L'1T is <30°F which is within T.S. criteria of 30°F. B. Incorrect: PORV's are set for LTOP and are designed to relieve water solid conditions. C. Correct: D. Incorrect: PORV's are set for LTOP and are designed to relieve water solid conditions. Technical Reference(s): U1 T.S. 3.4.14 (Attach if not previously provided) U1 T.S. 3/4.4 BASES 1-NOP-01.05 Filling and Venting The RCS Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: Learning Objective: _0_9_0_2_7_2_3-~0_1,,-'0_9_0_2_7_2_3-_0_3___ _0_9_0_2_7_2_3-_0_1-,-,0-,-9_0_2_7_2-,---3--,-0-,-3___ (As avai ava ilable) ( Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis x 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 55.43 2 Comments: 172

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 20A FILLING AND VENTING THE RCS ( PROCEDURE NO.: 8 of 118 1-NOP-01 1-NOP-01.05 .05 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 4.9 1112,13

         ~12.13    It is acceptable to fill the RCS from below the 33 foot elevation ((63 inches L1-1117-1) on LI-1117                                                         isollate~d to
                               -1) to above the 33 foot elevation with seal injection isolated an RCP (coupled or uncoupled), without pump seal degradation.

4.10 117

         ~7      Continued use of seal injection when filling above the level of Seal Cartridge is not required.

4.11 When RCS temperature is greater than 200°F, both charging header loop isolation valves should remain open when seal injection is aligned to the RCPs to minimize thermal stress on the RCP shafts. 4.12 §1

         §1      When the RCS cold leg temperature is less than 304°F, the Reactor Head is on the Reactor Vessel AND the RCS is NOT vented through a hole greater than 1.75 square inches, Then two PORVs shall be operable, in service and selected to LOW RANGE OPERATION.

OPERATION .

  .13 4.13    When the RCS is in Solid Pressure Control, Then close scrutiny should be given to any action that could result in the de-energization of any portion of the Class 1E 125V DC System. This could cause both the isolation of the RCS while solid and the simultaneous failure of one PORV thereby challenging the LTOP single failure design criteria.

( 4.14 14 §11 An

         §1           RCP shall NOT be started in an idle RCS loop unless the Steam Generator secondary temperature is less than 30 F above each of the RCS cold leg temperatures (T.S. 3.4.14).

15 4.15 113

         ~3      Routine operation of the RCGVS has resulted in degradation of the solenoid actuated valves in the system. RCS venting from the Reactor Vessel and the Pressurizer shall be accomplished through manually operated valves and attached hoses.

16 4.16 Do NOT operate the Control Element Drive Mechanisms (CEDMs) unless RCS pressure is at least 100 psia above the pressure that the RCS was vented. !f 11 CEDM operation is required less than 100 psia above the RCS venting pressure, Then VENT the CEDMs in accordance with Appendix A (8770-15818, Replacement Jack Type Control Element Drive Mechanism). 4.17 17 Appendix D, RCGVS Vent Path Debris Removal/Flush, Removal! Flush, may be performed at any time as management directs and does not require all Related System Status items to be completed. 18 4.18 When the RCS was not drained to the point where the S/G S!G U-tubes were drained, RCP sweeps may be limited based on the observed air quantity during system vent and management concurrence. 4.19 19 This procedure may contain steps that could adversely affect reactivity. ENSURE that proper consideration and appropriate briefings occur prior to performance of steps that could challenge reactivity.

l!. VV o"V SECTION NO.: 3/4.4 TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 PAGE: alJ1/'p 5 280f29 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 3 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued) BASES (continued) 3/4.4.11 DELETED 3/4.4.12 PORV BLOCK VALVES The opening of the Power Operating Relief Valves fulfills no safety related function. The electronic controls of the PORVs must be maintained OPERABLE to ensure satisfaction of Specifications 3.4.12 and 3.4.13. Since it is impractical and undesirable to actually open the PORVs to demonstrate reclosing, it becomes necessary to verify operability of the PORV Block Valves to ensure the capability to isolate a malfunctioning PORV. 3/4.4.13 POWER OPERATED RELIEF VALVES and 3/4.4.14 REACTOR COOLANT PUMP - STARTING The low temperature overpressure protection system (LTOP) is designed to prevent RCS overpressurization above the 10 CFR 50 Appendix G ( operating limit curves (Figures 3.4-2a and 3.4-2b) at RCS temperatures at or below 304°F during heatup and 281°F during cooldown. The LTOP system is based on the use of the pressurizer power-operated relief valves (PORVs) and the implementation of administrative and operational controls. The PORVs aligned to the RCS with the low pressure setpoints of 350 and 530 psia, restrictions on RCP starts, limitations on heatup and cooldown rates, and disabling of non-essential components provide assurance that Appendix G PIT limits will not be exceeded during normal

              ; operation or design basis overpressurization events due to mass or energy addition to the RCS. The LTOP system APPLICABILITY, ACTIONS, and SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS are consistent with the resolution of Generic Issue 94, "Additional Low-Temperature
Overpressure Protection for Light-Water Reactors," pursuant to Generic l Letter 90-06.

REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM REACTOR COOLANT PUMP - STARTING LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 1 1 3.4.14 If the steam generator temperature exceeds the primary temperature by more than 30°F, the first idle reactor coolant pump shall not be started. APPLICABILITY: MODES 4# and 5. ACTION: If a reactor coolant pump is started when the steam generator temperature exceeds primary temperature by more than 30°F, evaluate the subsequent transient to determine compliance with Specification 3.4.9.1. SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.4.14 Prior to starting a reactor coolant pump, verify that the steam generator temperature does not exceed primary temperature by more than 30°F. (

       #    Reactor Coolant System Cold Leg Temperature is less than 304°F.

ST. LUCIE - UNIT 1 3/44-60 @G, 8-1-, Amendment No. 00, &4-, 104

Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier# Tier # 2 Group # 1 KIA # 010A2.01 Importance Rating 3.6 Pressurizer Pressure Control: Heater failures Proposed Question: SRO 87 Unit 2 was operating at 100% power. Given the following events and conditions on 8/20 at 0200:

  • DCS is temporarily out of service.
  • Proportional heater bank Pi P1 breaker failed.
  • Surveillance 2-0SP-100.02 (Schedule of Periodic Tests, Checks and Calibrations Week 2) step 7.4 (Thursday) was conducted.
  • The following results were obtained for Pressurizer backup heaters:

o 1E bus voltage = 480 volts o B1 = = 182 amps o B4 = 192 amps Given:

  • Heater KW calculation: 13 .[3 x amps x volts Ii 000 11000
  • The DCS and backup manual calculates heater KW from the 4.16KV side.

Losses of approximately 5 KW will occur in Pressurizer heater step down ( transformers. Which ONE of the following statements correctly describes the required maintenance actions to allow continued operation at 100%? A. Power operations may continue with NO restrictions. Schedule maintenance to repair the proportional heater breaker during the next scheduled maintenance period. B. Schedule maintenance to repair and have the proportional heater group made operable NO later than 8/23 at 0200. C. Schedule maintenance to repair and have the backup heater group B1 made operable NO later than 8/23 at 0200. D. Schedule maintenance to repair and have the backup heater group B1 made operable NO later than 8/20 at 0800. 173

Proposed Answer: C Explanation (Optional): B1 =1.73*480*182/1 000=151.3KW<155KW - fails B1 =1.73*480*192/1 000=159.3KW>155KW - pass Total for bank B1 = 151.3 KW<155KKW = does not meet surveillance requirement T.S. 3.4.3 requires 2 B/U heater banks B1 and B4 >150KW heating capacity A. Incorrect: with B1 <155KW, the plant is in a 72 hour LCO per action a. B. Incorrect: Repairing the proportional heater bank does not restore pressurizer heater capacity per T.S. 3.4.3 C. Correct D. Incorrect: 72 hour to restore the heater banks. Technical Reference(s): 2-0SP-100.02 2-0SP-1 00.02 Schedule of (Attach if not previously provided) Periodic Tests, Checks and Calibrations Week 2 T.S. 3.4.3 T.S.3.4.3 Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: ( Learning Objective: _0_7_0_2_20_6_-_05--,,_0_7_0_22_0_6_-1_5_ _0_7_0_2_2_0_6-_0_5,--,0_7_0_2_2_0_6-_1_5 __ _ _ (As available) avai lable) Question Source: Bank# Bank # X (2004 See Comment NRC Exam) Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis x 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 5

                                           ---=---

55.43 - 5 Comments:

References:

2004 NRC exam gave references, including Tech. Specs. to determine operability. Revised this question by including the two bullets under 'Given' and not handing out references. ( 174

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 34A SCHEDULE OF PERIODIC TESTS, CHECKS ( PROCEDURE NO.: AND CALIBRATIONS WEEK 2 19 of 30 2-0SP-100.02 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 7.4 Surveillances performed on Thursday (continued) INITIAL

2. ,-r4 Day shift surveillances are to be performed as follows:

NOTE

  • 2A3 and 2B3 bus voltage should be at approximately 4.16 KV for performance of the following surveillance. Consideration should be given to adjusting switchyard voltage as necessary to obtain nominal bus voltage.
         * ,-r5  The pressurizer heater kW can be calculated and used as a second -

check verification of the DCS indicated pressurizer heater kW for the Tech Spec surveillance. The calculation is:

                  .J3 J3 x amps x volts .;--i-11000 000
         * ,-r7  The DCS and backup manual method calculates heater KW from the 4.16 KV side. Losses of approximately 5 KW will occur in pressurizer heater step down transformers.

A. §1 VERIFY Pressurizer Backup heaters 1 and 4 each have a nominal capacity of at least 150 kw.

1. ,-r7 With only the backup heater bank 1 in service (de-energize "A" side proportional heater P-1) on the "A" side, VERIFY nominal capacity of at least 155 kw (150 kw tech spec + 5 kw xmfer losses) as indicated by DCS point W943A Presszer Heater Pwr A.

___ kw switchyard voltage OR

                                ,-r5,7    With only the backup heater bank 1 in service on the "A" side, VERIFY VERI FY nominal capacity of at least 155 kW (150 KW tech spec + 5 KW xmfer losses) as indicated by AM 943 on plant auxiliary control board no. 2 VM 954 on RTGB201..

RTGB201 03 x --~~ amps x

                                 .[3                                  volts = _ _ _ __     watts AM 943            VM 954          ----
                                -    - - - watts .;--i- 1000 = -  ____
                                                                    - - - kW

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 34A SCHEDULE OF PERIODIC TESTS, CHECKS 20 of 30 PROCEDURE NO.: AND CALIBRATIONS WEEK 2 2-0SP-100.02 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 7.4 Surveillances performed on Thursday (continued) INITIAL

2. A. ((continued) continued)
2. ,-r7
                            ~7     With only the backup heater bank 4 in service (de-energize "B" side proportional heater P-2) on the "B" side, VERIFY nominal capacity of at least 155 kw (150 kw tech spec + 5 kw xmfer losses) as indicated by DCS point W944B Presszer Heater Pwr B.

____ _ kw switchyard voltage OR

                            ,-r5,7
                            ~5,7   With only the backup heater bank 4 in service on the "B" side, VERIFY nominal capacity of at least 155 kW (150 KW tech spec + 5 KW xmfer losses) as indicated by AM 944 on plant auxiliary control board no. 2 VM964 on RTGB 201.

201 .

                             .J3 x 13     AM 944 amps x VM 964 volts =

watts ____ watts .;-

                                                 -;- 1000 =-____
                                                             - - - - kW___

Tech. Spec.: 4.4.3.2 Record ID 929 Applicable Modes: 1, 2 and 3 B. §1 PERFORM 2C AFW Pump Monthly Operability per 2-0SP-09.01 C, 2C Auxiliary Feedwater Pump Code Run, Testing of the 2C Auxiliary Feedwater Pump for Operability. Applicable Modes: 1,2 and 3 C. ALIGN the Fuel Pool Purification System to the Spent Fuel Pool, in accordance with OP 2-0350020, Fuel Pool Cooling and Purification System - Normal Operation. SNPO Application Modes: All

REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 3/4.4.3 PRESSURIZER LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.4.3 The pressurizer shall be OPERABLE with a minimum water level of greater than or equal to 27% indicated level and a maximum water level of less than or equal to 68% indicated level and at least two groups of pressurizer heaters capable of being powered from 1E buses each having a nominal capacity of at least 150 kW. APPLICABILITY: MODES 1. 1, 2 and 3. ACTION:

a. With one group of the above required pressurizer heaters inoperable.

inoperable, restore at least two groups to OPERABLE status within 72 hours or be in at least HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours and in HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours.

b. With the pressurizer otherwise inoperable.

inoperable, be in at least HOT STANDBY with the reactor trip breakers open within 6 hours and in HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours. SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS ( 4.4.3.1 The pressurizer water volume shall be determined to be within its limits at least once per 12 hours. 4.4.3.2 The capacity of each of the above required groups of pressurizer heaters shall be verified to be at least 150 kW at least once per 92 days. 4.4.3.3 The emergency power supply for the pressurizer heaters shall be demonstrated OPERABLE at least once per 18 months by verifying that on an Engineered Safety Features Actuation test signal concurrent with a loss of offsite power:

a. the pressurizer heaters are automatically shed from the emergency sources, and power sources.
b. the pressurizer heaters can be reconnected to their respective buses manually from the control room after resetting of the ESFAS test signal.

ST. LUCIE - UNIT 2 3/4 4-9 g, 11 Amendment No. S,

Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier# 2 Group # 1 KIA # 012G2.4.31 Importance Rating 4.1 Reactor Protection: Knowledge of annunciators alarms, indications or response procedures. Proposed Question: SRO 88 Unit 2 is at 2% power and performing a Reactor startup when the following alarm illuminates: START - UP RATE HIGH CHANNEL TRIP L-25 Reactor power remains unchanged.

1) Which ONE of the following would have caused the annunciator to illuminate?
2) As a result of the above condition, what are the required Technical Specification actions?

A. 1) Wide Range Nuclear Instrument failing HIGH

2) Bypass or trip the failed channel within one hour. Start up may continue however the channel must be restored to operable status or placed in the tripped condition.

B. 1) Wide Range Nuclear Instrument failing HIGH

2) Bypass or trip the failed channel within one hour. Start up may continue with the channel in bypass however the channel shall be returned to operable status no later than during the next cold shutdown.

C. 1) Linear Range Nuclear Instrument failing HIGH

2) Bypass or trip the failed channel within one hour. Start up may continue however the channel must be restored to operable status or placed in the tripped condition.

D. 1) Linear Range Nuclear Instrument failing HIGH

2) Bypass or trip the failed channel within one hour. Start up may continue with the channel in bypass however the channel shall be returned to operable status no later than during the next cold shutdown.

175

( Proposed Answer: B

\

Explanation (Optional): A. Incorrect: Not required to be placed in the tripped condition. This is a Unit 1 Tech Spec. B. Correct C. Incorrect: Both parts incorrect D. Incorrect: Part 1 incorrect, Part 2 correct. Technical Reference(s): T.S. table 3.3-1 (Attach if not previously provided) 2-ARP-01-L25 Annunciator Response Procedure Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: Learning Objective: _0_7_0_2_4_03_-_03--,,_0_7_0_24_0_3_-1_4___ _0_7_0_2_4_0_3-_0_3-,---,0_7_0_2_4_0_3-_1_4___ (As available) Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge X ____ _X:.....:....... Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 - 10 55.43 -- 5 -- - Comments: ( \. 176

REVISION: PROCEDURE TITLE: PANEL: OB ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE L PROCEDURE NO: WINDOW: 2-ARP-01-L25 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 25 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL L START-UP RATE HIGH CHANNEL TRIP L-25 DEVICE: LOCATION: SETPOINT: Module W9P2 K4 relay RPS Cabinets  ::;

s; 2.49 Decades per minute ALARM CONFIRMATION:
1. Any HI RATE Trip Unit trip light LIT
2. JKI-001 A to JKI-001 D,0, Startup Rate, indicate greater than 2.49 DPM startup rate.
3. JI-001A to JI-001 D, 0, Wide Range % Power, indicate a rapidly RISING Reactor power.
4. RI-26-80A4/80A5 and RI-26-80B4/80B5, SourcelWide Source/wide range Excore Neutron Monitors indicate a rapidly RISING Reactor power.
5. RI-26-80A3 and RI-26-80B3, Rate Of Change Excore Neutron Monitors, indicate greater than 2.49 DPM startup rate.

OPERATOR ACTIONS: NOTE

  • This Trip function is enabled between 10-44 % to 15% reactor power.
  • The Wide Range Nuclear Instruments enable this trip function,
  • The Linear Range Instruments disable this trip function
1. 11 2 out of 4 Safety channels on
  !f                                 Startup Rate are greater than 2.49 DPM, Then PERFORM the following:

A. TRIP the Reactor B. TRIP the Turbine C. GO TO 2-EOP-01, Standard Post Trip Actions. --

0
                                                                                                               ;;0 o

OJ

2. MONITOR for disagreement between the four Wide Range Nuclear Instruments.

11 only one channel is tripped or failed, Then IMPLEMENT 2-0NP-99.01, Loss of Tech Spec

3. !f Instrumentation. --
0 o

CAUSES: The Reactor tripped on 2/4 logic from High Rate of Power Change or a Wide Range Nuclear Instrument Failed.

REFERENCES:

1. CWD 2998-B-327 SH 406, CWO 406,50,51 50, 51
2. VTM 2998-14944
3. Tech Specs.

~,-~ TABLE 3.3-1 REACTOR PROTECTIVE INSTRUMENTATION MINIMUM TOTAL NO. CHANNELS CHANNELS APPLICABLE FUNCTIONAL UNIT OF CHANNELS TO TRIP OPERABLE MODES ACTION

1. Manual Reactor Trip 4 2 4 1,2 1 4 2 4 3*,4*,5* 5
2. Variable Power Level - High 4 2(a)(d) 3 1,2 2#
3. Pressurizer Pressure - High 4 2 3 1,2 2#
4. Thermal Margin/Low Pressure 4 2(a)(d) 3 1,2 2#
5. Containment Pressure - High 4 2 3 1,2 2#
6. Steam Generator Pressure - Low 4/SG 2/SG(b) 3/SG 1,2 2#
7. Steam Generator Pressure 4 2(a)(d) 3 1,2 2#

Difference - High

8. Steam Generator Level - Low 4/SG 2/SG 3/SG 1,2 2#
9. Local Power Density - High 4 2(c)(d) 3 1 2#
10. Loss of Component Cooling Water 2 1,2 2#

4 3 to Reactor Coolant Pumps

11. Reactor Protection System Logic 4 2 3 1,2 2#

3*,4*,5* 5

12. Reactor Trip Breakers 4 2(f) 4 1,2 4 3*,4*,5* 5
13. Wide Range Logarithmic Neutron Flux Monitor
a. Startup and Operating -

Rate of Change of Power-Power - 4 2(e)(g) 3 1,2 2# High

b. Shutdown 4 0 2 3,4,5 3
14. Reactor Coolant Flow - Low 4/SG 2/SG(a)(d) 3/SG 1,2 2#
15. Loss of Load (Turbine 2(c) 1 2#

4 3 Hydraulic Fluid Pressure - Low)

                                                                                                                ~

ST. LUCIE - UNIT 2 3/4 3-2 Amendment No. 60

                                                                                                           ':t.   ....<..
                                                                                                           ':l:""<.
                                                                                                             -cr
                                                                                                             -c;r y~~

T~~~ ~"

                                                                                                              ~
                                                                                                                       .,...~
                                                                                                               \"

TABLE 3.3-1 (Continued) ( ACTION STATEMENTS ACTION 2 - a. With the number of channels OPERABLE one less than the Total Number of Channels, STARTUP and/or POWER OPERATION may continue provided the inoperable channel is placed in the bypassed or tripped condition within 1 hour. The channel shall be returned to OPERABLE status no later than during the next COLD SHUTDOWN.

b. With the number of channels OPERABLE one less than the Minimum Channels OPERABLE, STARTUP and/or POWER OPERATION may continue provided the following conditions are satisfied:
1. Verify that one of the inoperable channels has been bypassed and place the other inoperable channel in the tripped condition within 1 hour.
2. All functional units affected by the bypassed/tripped channel shall also be placed in the bypassed/tripped condition.

With a channel process measurement circuit that affects multiple functional units inoperable or in test, bypass or trip all associated functional units as listed below: ( Process Measurement Circuit Functional Unit Bypassed

1. Safety Channel - Nuclear Instrumentation Wide Range Rate of Change of Power - High (RPS)

Linear Range Variable Power Level - High (RPS) Local Power Density - High (RPS) Thermal Margin/Low Pressure (RPS)

2. Pressurizer Pressure - Pressurizer Pressure - High (RPS)

Thermal Margin/Low Pressure (RPS) Pressurizer Pressure - Low (ESF)

3. Containment Pressure - Containment Pressure - High (RPS)

Containment Pressure - High (ESF)

4. Steam Generator Pressure - Steam Generator Pressure - Low (RPS)

Thermal Margin/Low Pressure (RPS) AFAS-1 and AFAS-2 (AFAS) Steam Generator Pressure - Low (ESF)

5. Steam Generator Level - Steam Generator Level - Low (RPS)

If SG-2A, then AFAS-1 (AFAS) If SG-2B, then AFAS-2 (AFAS) ST. LUCIE - UNIT 2 3/4 3-4 3/43-4 4S,~, Amendment No. +8, +-d, 149

or-- ~~ ) o~ J~ TABLE 3.3-1 {Continued} REACTOR PROTECTIVE INSTRUMENTATION MINIMUM TOTAL NO. CHANNELS CHANNELS APPLICABLE FUNCTIONAL UNIT OF CHANNELS TO TRIP OPERABLE MODES ACTION

           ,X
       ,11. Wide Range Logarithmic Neutron Flux Monitor Monitor
a. Startup and Operating -- 4 2(d) 3 1,2 and
  • 2#

Rate of Change of Power - High

b. Shutdown 4 0 2 3,4,5 3
12. Reactor Protection System 4 2 4 1,2* 4 Logic
13. Reactor Trip Breakers 4 2 4 1,2*

1, 2* 4 ST. LUCIE - UNIT 1 3/4 3-3 Amendment No. ~, 4-e, 27

TABLE 3.3-1 (Continued) TABLE NOTATION

  • With the protective system trip breakers in the closed position and the CEA drive system capable of CEA withdrawal.
 # The provisions of Specification 3.0.4 are not applicable.

(a) Trip may be bypassed below 1% of RATED THERMAL POWER; bypass shall be automatically removed when Wide Range Logarithmic Neutron Flux power is ~ 1% of RATED THERMAL POWER. (b) Trip may be manually bypassed below 685 psig; bypass shall be automatically removed at or above 685 psig. (c) Trip may be bypassed below 15% of RATED THERMAL POWER; bypass shall be automatically removed when Power Range Neutron Flux power is ~ 15% of RATED THERMAL POWER. 4 (d) Trip may be bypassed below 10-4 % and above 15% of RATED THERMAL POWER; bypass shall be automatically removed when Wide Range Logarithmic Neutron Flux power is ~ 10-4 % 4 power ~ 15% of RATED THERMAL POWER. and Power Range Neutron Flux power.:s. (e) Deleted. ( (f) There shall be at least two decades of overlap between the Wide Range Logarithmic Neutron Flux Monitoring Channels and the Power Range Neutron Flux Monitoring Channels. ACTION STATEMENTS ACTION 1 - With the number of channels OPERABLE one less than required by the Minimum Channels OPERABLE requirement, restore the inoperable channel to OPERABLE status within 48 hours or be in HOT STANDBY within the next 6 hours and/or open the protective system trip breakers. ACTION 2 With the number of OPERABLE channels one less than the Total Number of Channels, STARTUP and/or POWER OPERATION may proceed provided the following conditions are satisfied:

a. The inoperable channel is placed in either the bypassed or tripped condition within 1 hour. For the purposes of testing and maintenance, the inoperable channel may be bypassed for up to 48 hours from time of initial loss of OPERABILITY; however, the inoperable channel shall then be either restored to OPERABLE status or placed in the tripped condition.

( ST. LUCIE - UNIT 1 3/4 3-4 Amendment No. +e, 4a, 'B,

                                                                                                 'B-, 4§,

46, 4@,159

                                                                             +00,159

Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier# Tier # 2 Group # KIA # 063A2.01 Importance Rating 3.2 DC Electrical Distribution: Ability to predict the impacts of the following malfunctions or operations on the DC electrical systems: based on those predictions, use procedures to correct, control or mitigate the consequences of those malfunctions or operations: Grounds Proposed Question: SRO 89 Unit 1 has received the following alarms: 125V DC 125V DC BUS1B BUS1AB GROUND GROUND A-10 A-40 The 1AB DC Bus is cross-tied to the 1B DC Bus.

1) Which of the following procedures will be implemented FIRST in an attempt to determine

( the ground location?

2) When the 125V DC Bus 1B and 1AB bus are separated, what Technical Specification equipment could be affected?

A. 1) 1-0NP-50.01 125V DC GROUND DIAGNOSTIC

2) 1B I 1BB Battery Charger B. 1) 1-0NP-50.01 125V DC GROUND DIAGNOSTIC
2) AFW PP 1C C. 1) 1-0NP-50.04125V 1-0NP-50.04 125V DC BUS 1AB GROUND ISOLATION
2) 1B I 1BB Battery Charger D. 1) 1-0NP-50.04125V 1-0NP-50.04 125V DC BUS 1AB GROUND ISOLATION
2) AFW PP 1C 177

( Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional): A. Incorrect: part one is correct, part two is incorrect. The 1B/1 BB battery charger is not removed form service in this procedure. B. Correct. Ground diagnostics procedure is implemented first to determine where the ground is located. Ground diagnostic procedure CAUTION states 1AB loads will be inoperable when removing 1 AB DC bus. 1AB C. Incorrect: both part one and part two are not correct. Part one going to 1-0NP-50.04 is plausible because it will be entered after a ground is determined by 1-0NP-50.01 APPENDIX-B. D. Incorrect: part one is not correct, part two is correct. Technical Reference(s): 1-0NP-50.01 125V DC Ground (Attach if not previously provided) Diagnostic 1-ARP-01-A40 & Ai Bus/Batt CHGR 1AB Ground

                                                          ° A10 125V DC

( Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: Learning Objective: _0_7_0_2_86_3_-_08-,,_0_9_02_7_2_3_-0_2___ _0_7_0_2_86_3_-_08--".,--"0_9_02_7_2_3_-0-'-2'---__ (As available) availab Ie) Question Source: Bank# Bank # Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New X Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis ------ X 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 5 55.43 5 Comments: ( 178

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 1E 125V DC GROUND DIAGNOSTIC 7 of 14 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-0NP-50.01 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 6.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS (continued) INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS B lj VERIFY annunciator A-40, 125V DC Bus 1AB Ground, is CLEAR.

6. !f annunciator A-40 is ALARMED, If and 125V DC Buses 1 1A A and 1 are cross-tied, Then PERFORM 1AB AB Appendix A, Determination of 125V DC Buses 1A 1A and 1AB 1AB Ground Location.
                                                           !f annunciator A-40 is ALARMED, If and 125V DC Buses 1Band 1AB are cross-tied, Then PERFORM Appendix B, Determination of 125V DC Buses 1Band 1AB 1AB Ground Location.

11 125V DC

                                                           !f           Bus 1AB 1AB is NOT cross-tied to 125V DC Buses 1A

( or 1B, 1B, Then GO TO 1-0NP-50.04, 125V DC Bus 1AB Ground Isolation.

7. VERIFY annunciator B-10, 125V DC Bus 7. 11 annunciator B-10
                                                           !f                    is ALARMED 1A Ground, is CLEAR.                         Then GO TO 1-0NP-50.02, 125V DC Bus 1A Ground Isolation.
8. VERIFY annunciator A-1 0, 125V DC Bus A-10, 8. If annunciator A-1 0 is 1B Ground, is CLEAR. ALARMED, Then GO TO 1-0NP-50.03, 125V DC Bus 1B 1B Ground Isolation.

END OF SECTION 6.0

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 1E 125V DC GROUND DIAGNOSTIC ( PROCEDURE NO.: 11 of 14 1-0NP-50.01 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 APPENDIX B DETERMINATION OF 125V DC BUSES 1 BAND 1B AND 1AB GROUND LOCATION (Page 1 of 3) INITIAL

1. ENSURE 1AB Battery Charger is in hot standby, in accordance with 1-NOP-50.01AB, 125V DC Bus 1AB (Class 1E) 1E) Normal Operation.

US CAUTION Separating 125V DC Bus 1Band 1AB will render Bus 1AB loads inoperable, since no battery is connected to the bus.

2. REFER TO the following Tech Spec sections for LCO and Action requirements:
         **       Charging Pump 1C, Sections 3.1.2.1, 3.1.2.2, 3.1.2.3 and 3.1.2.4
         **       AFW PP 1C, Section 3.7.1.2

(

         **       CCW PP 1C , Section 3.7.3.1
         **       ICW PP 1  1C, C, Section 3.7.4.1 Separating 125V DC Bus 1      1B  and 1AB is authorized.

Band US

3. 11J1 separating 125V DC Bus 1Band 1 AB is NOT authorized, Then 1AB PERFORM BOTH of the following:
  • GO TO 1-0NP-50.03, 125V DC Bus 1B 1 B Ground Isolation.
         **       GO TO 1-0NP-50.04, 125V DC Bus 1AB Ground Isolation.
4. VERIFY at least ONE of the following:

A. Battery Charger 1B is operable. US B. Battery Charger 1BB is operable. US

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 1E 125V DC GROUND DIAGNOSTIC 14 of 14 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-0NP-50.01 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 FIGURE 1 DIAGNOSTIC FLOW CHART (Page 1 of 1) CHECK REQUEST YES Local EM 1--_< J..--e.<' STOP Indication Assistance r.::::.:::::.

                 ~Y.:::E~S_             _______________

_______________ -to-IGO

                                                                                          .......! GO TO TO 1*0NP*SO.05, 1*0NP*50.05, 125V DC Bus 1 1CC Ground Detection r:-;;.;;;.._______________
                  ;>-:-Y.:;;.E.;;;.S_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _+iGO                      ..,..jGO TO 1*0NP*SO.06,
                                                                                                           *!-ONP-50.06, 125V DC Bus 1 1DD Ground Detection

( YES YES GO TO 1*0NP*SO.04, 1*0NP*50.04,

                                                                     ~..;;;;;.;r------...J
>-:-.;;:::..;;:.----+-1 125V DC Bus 1AB Ground Detection
                 >"">--Y_ES
                      . ;.Y.; ; ;.E;_
                                    ;. S________ ___  ____  __  __ ______  __   __   _........,..jGO
                                                                                         ~          GO TO 1-0NP-50.02, 1-0NP*50.02, 125V DC Bus 1A Ground Detection
                 '-Y          E_S_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _......!
                 '""'-Y..;.E..;.S
                            .....                                                          .......! GO TO 1-0NP-50.03 1-0NP-5003
                 /'                                                                                   125V DC Bus 1B Ground Detection

REVISION NO: PROCEDURE TITLE: PANEL: OA ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE A A ( PROCEDURE NO: WINDOW: 1-ARP-01-A10 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 10 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL A 125V DC BUS1B GROUND A-10 DEVICE: LOCATION: SETPOINT: 64P/1 002, 64N/1002 64P/1002, 1B 125V DC Bus DC System Ground 30-1/1527 RAB/RTG B-1 01 RAB/RTGB-101 64P/64N Energized ALARM CONFIRMATION:

1. ANY/ALL of the following:

A. DISPATCH an operator to the 1B 125V DC Bus to verify the ground and to determine which pole of the DC Bus is grounded as follows:

1. MOVE the ground test toggle switch to the upward position and observe the brilliance of the positive and negative test lights.
2. The DIMMER of the two lights is the side that has the ground with the difference in brilliance indicating the severity of the ground.

OPERATOR ACTIONS:

1. Corrective Actions:

A. RECALL any DC equipment starts that occurred at or near the same time the ground annunciated and CONSIDER these loads as possible causes of the ground. B. GO TO ONOP 1-0NP-50.01, 125V DC Ground Diagnostic. CAUSES: DC bus, cable, or equipment degradation has resulted in DC current leakage to ground.

REFERENCES:

1) CWO 8770-B-327 sheet 1527,1002

REVISION NO: PROCEDURE TITLE: PANEL: OB ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE A A ( PROCEDURE NO: WINDOW: 1-ARP-01-A40 1-AR P-O 1-A40 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 40 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL A 125V DC BUS1AB BUS 1AB GROUND A-40 DEVICE: LOCATION: SETPOINT: 64P, 64N/1003 64N/1 003 1AB 125V DC Bus 1 AB DC System Ground 30-2/1524 30-211524 RAB/RTGB-101 64P/64N Energized ALARM CONFIRMATION:

1. ANY/ALL of the following:

A. DISPATCH an operator to the 1AB 125V DC Bus to verify the ground and DETERMINE which pole of the DC bus is grounded as follows:

1. MOVE the ground test toggle switch to the upward position and OBSERVE the brilliance of the positive and negative test lights.
2. The DIMMER of the two lights is the side that has the ground with the difference in brilliance indicating the severity of the ground.

OPERATOR ACTIONS: ( 1. Corrective Actions: A. RECALL any DC equipment starts that occurred at or near the same time the ground annunciated and CONSIDER these loads possible causes of the ground. B. GO TO 1-0NP-50.01, 125V DC Ground Diagnostic. 3J o OJ CAUSES: DC bus, cable, or equipment degradation has resulted in DC current leakage to ground.

REFERENCES:

1) CWD CWO 8770-B-327 sheet 1524, 1003
2) 1-EMP-50.02, 125V DC System Battery Charging 18 Month Maintenance

(

Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier Tier## 2 Group # 1 KIA # 076A2.01 Importance Rating 3.7 Service Water: Ability to predict the impacts of the following malfunctions or operations on the SWS; and based on those predictions, use procedures to correct, control, or mitigate the consequences of those malfunctions or operations: Loss of SWS Proposed Question: SRO 90 Given the following conditions:

  • Unit 2 is at 100% power.
  • 2A and 2B Intake Cooling Water pumps are operating on their respective headers.
  • 2C Intake Cooling Water pump is in standby aligned to the A header.
  • The 2B Intake Cooling Water pump trips unexpectedly.
1) Which ONE of the following states the acceptability of an immediate attempt to restart the 2B Intake Cooling water pump?
2) If the 2C Intake Cooling Water pump valve alignment was configured to the B side but the

( electrical alignment remained to the A side, what would be the required actions if the pump started? A. 1) One restart attempt IS allowed for the stated conditions.

2) The respective offsite power source AND the 2B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service.

B. 1) One restart attempt IS NOT allowed for the stated conditions.

2) ONLY the 2B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service.

C. 1) One restart attempt IS allowed for the stated conditions.

2) ONLY the 2B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service.

D. 1) One restart attempt IS NOT allowed for the stated conditions.

2) The respective offsite power source AND the 2B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service.

( 179

Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional): A. Incorrect: Restart ONLY allowed if health and safety of the public is in jeopardy. Offsite power is not required to be declared out of service on Unit 2, only Unit 1. B. Correct C. Incorrect: Restart NOT allowed D. Incorrect: Offsite power not required to be declared out of service. Technical Reference(s): 2-0640030 Intake Cooling (Attach if not previously provided) Water System, U2 T.S. 3.7.4, OPS -503 ( Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: Learning Objective: _0_7_0_2_86_2_-_08-,,_0_9_0_27_2_3_-0_1___ _0_7_0_2_8_6_2-_0_8-,--,0_9_0_2_7_2_3-_0_1___ (As available) Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # 2008 NRC Exam (Note changes or attach (see comment parent) below) New Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge - X

                                                                                 -X- - -- -

Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 - 5 55.43 - 5 Comments: 2008 NRC exam Ques. 90 was written for Unit 1. This question is written for Unit 2 which DOES NOT require offsite power to be declared out of service if two ICW trains electrically aligned and operating on the same train. (2008 Ques. 90 answer was D) 180

St. Lucie HLC-18 NRC Exam

                                /~8/'/thIJ         //C        EX~;

Question 90 I\ Given the following conditions:

  • Unit 1 is at 100% power
  • 1A 1A and 1B Intake Cooling Water pumps are operating on their respective headers
  • 1C Intake Cooling Water pump is in standby aligned to the A header
  • The 1B Intake Cooling Water pump trips unexpectedly
1) Which ONE of the following states the acceptability of an immediate attempt to restart the 1B Intake Cooling water pump?
2) If the 1C Intake Cooling Water pump valve alignment was configured to the B side but the electrical alignment remained to the A side, what would be the required actions if the pump started?

A. 1) One restart attempt IS allowed for the stated conditions.

2) The respective offsite power source AND the 1B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service.

( B. 1) One restart attempt IS NOT allowed for the stated conditions.

2) ONLY the 1 B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service.

C. 1) One restart attempt IS allowed for the stated conditions.

2) ONLY the 1B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service.

D. 1) One restart attempt IS NOT allowe~fo stated conditions.

2) The respective offsite power sourc N t e 1B Intake Cooling train must be declared out of service.

u;U {r U;tJ (1 Ll e6 REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: PAGE: 41A INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM OJ 67 ( PROCEDURE NO.:

                                                                                  .° 66of67 2-0640030                             ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 7.0    OPERATOR ACTIONS 7.1    Immediate Operator Actions:
1. None 7.2 Subsequent Operations Actions:

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS CAUTION If affected ICW header indicates 0 pressure, the standby pump discharge valve must be throttled prior to startin starting.

1. if an ICW pump indicates extremely
           !f high amps, OR an ICW pump trips unexpectedly, Then:

A. if the health and safety of the

                   !f public is in jeopardy, Then ATTEMPT ONLY ONE restart.

B. Place the pump control switch to PULL TO LOCK position. c. C. Then align the standby pump to C. 11 an ICW pump cannot be

                                                              !f the header, lAW 2-NOP-                     restored to a header, Then:

21.03A(B)(C), 2A(S)(C) 21.03A(S)(C), 2A(B)(C) Intake Cooling Water System Operation, and start the standby pump.

1. Reduce MVARS to minimum.
2. Monitor Main Generator Gas Temperatures. Refer to 2-0NP-53.01, Main Generator.
3. Reduce turbine load as needed to within the heat removal capability of the TCW system.

TCWsystem.

4. Isolate S/G blowdown, then place the Open Slowdown Blowdown heat exchanger TCVs in MANUAL and close.

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: 41A INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE NO.: 1-0640030 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 7.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS 7.1 Immediate Operator Actions

1. None 7.2 Subsequent Operations Actions:

INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS CAUTION

          ..*   If affected ICW header indicates 0 pressure, the standby pump discharge valve must be throttled prior to starting.
          *     ~1    In Modes 1 through 3 (SIAS NOT blocked), when two ICW Pumps are electrically aligned AND operating on the same electrical bus, the respective Off-site Power Source must be declared out of service, as two ICW Pumps could affect the load shed and resequencing loads b the Diesel. REFER to Technical S ecifications 3.8.1.1.a.

( 1. If

        !f an ICW pump indicates extremely high             1.

amps, OR an ICW pump trips unexpectedly, Then: A. ,-r2

                 ~2      !f the health and safety of the If public is in jeopardy, Then A TTEM PT ONLY ONE restart.

ATTEMPT B. Place the pump control switch to PULL TO LOCK position. C. Then align the standby pump to the C. If

                                                                     !f an ICW pump cannot be header, lAW 1-NOP-21.03A(8)(C),                     restored to a header, Then:

1A(1 8)(1 C) Intake Cooling Water System Operation, and start the 1. Reduce MVARS to standby pump. minimum.

2. Monitor Main Generator Gas Temperatures.

Refer to 1-0NP-53.01, Main Generator.

3. Reduce turbine load as needed to within the heat removal capability

( of the TCW system.

                                                                                                   ~
 ~------------------------------------------------------------~ ~

Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier# Tier # 2 Group # 2 KIA # 027A2.01 027 A2.01 Importance Rating 3.3 Containment Iodine Removal: High temperature in the filter system Proposed Question: SRO 91 Unit 2 has been in a Large Break LOCA for 48 hours with the following conditions:

  • Containment Temperature is 120°F.
1) As Unit Supervisor, in accordance with 2-EOP-03 LOCA, when would you direct starting of Hydrogen Purge fans HVE-7A and lor HVE-7B?
2) If the Hydrogen Purge fans were started the following Annunciator illuminates, CONT CNTMTI H2 PURGE ADSORBER TEMP

( HIGH X-1 What would be the most likely cause of this alarm? A. 1) Consultation with the TSC if the Hydrogen Recombiners CANNOT maintain H2 concentration less than 3.5%

2) Restricted air flow through the filter train B. 1) Consultation with the TSC if the Hydrogen Recombiners CANNOT maintain H2 concentration less than 3.5%
2) High Containment temperature C. 1) Any H2 concentration when the Hydrogen Recombiners are NOT available
2) Restricted air flow through the filter train D. 1) Any H2 concentration when the Hydrogen Recombiners are NOT available
2) High Containment temperature

( 181

Proposed Answer: A Explanation (Optional): A. Correct B. Incorrect; High containment temperature will not bring in alarm. Alarm setpoint is 200°F. Outside air makeup should cool the filter train for any containment temperature. C. Incorrect; containment combustible gas control safety function is met at 0.5% hydrogen. Placing Hydrogen purge in service is last resort Hydrogen concentration control. D. Incorrect; both part 1 and part 2. Technical Reference( s): Reference(s): 2-EOP-03 LOCA (Attach if not previously provided) 2-ARP-01-X1 ( Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: Learning Objective: _0~7-,,0_2...::..82.:.::..4-,--...::..09-,,--,,-,0,-,-7-,-0=26,,-0,--2_-3.:....:2,,--__ _0-,-7---,0_2_82_4_-_09--,,_0_7_0_26_0_2_-3_2_ _ _ (As available) ava ila b Ie) Question Source: Bank# Bank # Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis x 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 --- 5 55.43 - Comments: ( 182

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 26 LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT ( PROCEDURE NO.: 38 of 72 2-EOP-03 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 4.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS (continued) INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS o 50. Operate H2 Purge System OPERATE the H2 purge system as directed by the Technical Support Center. REFER TO Appendix N, Hydrogen Purge System Operation. o 51. Reset Safety Systems PERFORM BOTH of the following: A. ENSURE proper actuation of ESFAS components. REFER TO Tables 1,2,3,4 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 (SIAS, CIAS, CSAS, RAS and ( MSIS) AS NECESSARY. B. 11 ANY ESFAS signals have If actuated and are no longer needed, Then RESET the appropriate signals. REFER TO Appendix P, Restoration of Components Actuated by ESFAS. (

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE II"'I TITLE: JRETITLE: IPAGE: 26 LOSS OF COOLANT ACCIDENT 68 of 72 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-EOP-03 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 ATTACHMENT 1 SAFETY FUNCTION STATUS CHECK SHEET (Page 11 of 11)

9. CONTAINMENT COMBUSTIBLE GAS CONTROL SAFETY ACCEPTANCE FUNCTION CRITERIA CHECK -..j
                                                                                -)
 ~

A. Hydrogen Less than 0.5% I I I I I I I Concentration OR B. Hydrogen ALL available operating I I I I I I I Recombiners AND Hydrogen Less Than 3.5% I I I I I I I Concentration ( .. ~

        ;                                              OR I

C. Hydrogen Purge As recommended I I I I I I I System by the TSC END OF SAFETY FUNCTION 9 INITIALS RO / SRO / STA I I I I I I I END OF ATTACHMENT 1 (

REVISION: PROCEDURE TITLE: PANEL: OA ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE x PROCEDURE NO: WINDOW: 2-ARP-01-X 1 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 CONT CNTMTI H2 PURGE ADSORBER TEMP HIGH X-1 J DEVICE: LOCATION: SETPOINT: TR-25-3 HVCB Panel Multiple UltiPle Inputs Point 2 (TE-25-58) TR-25-3 200°F rising (high) Point 3 (TE-25-59) TR-25-3 200°F rising (high) Point 4 (TE-25-60) TR-25-3 200°F rising (high) Point 5 (TE-25-61) TR-25-3 200°F rising (high) ALARM CONFIRMATION:

1. TR-25-3 Points 2 through 5 (Cont Cntmt H2 Purge Sys HVE-7N7B HVE-7A/7B Charcoal Adsorb) indicate 200°F and rising.
2. TR-25-3 Point 6 (TE-25-57, Cont Cntmt H2 Purge Sys HVE-7N7B HVE-7A/7B After Charcoal Adsorb) indicates 200°F and rising.

OPERATOR ACTIONS: ( NOTE

         ** High charcoal temperatures are postulated to occur only as a result of restricted air flow rates less than 55 cfm.
  • Iodine desorption occurs at approximately 300°F and charcoal ignition approximately 640°F.
1. VERIFY proper operation of Continuous Containment/H ContainmentlH 2 Purge, as follows:
  • HVE-7A or HVE-7B, Continuous ContainmentlH Containment/H 2 Purge Exhaust Fan, RUNNING.
  • FCV-25-20, Cont CntmtlH Cntmt/H22 Purge Exhaust Isol, OPEN.
  • FCV-25-21, Cont CntmtlH Cntmt/H 2 Purge Exhaust Isol, OPEN.
  • FCV-25-9, Control Vlv Filter Inlet, OPEN.
  • FCV-25-35, Cont CntmtlH Cntmt/H 2 Purge Exhaust Valve, OPEN.
  • FCV-25-28, Control Vlv Bypass, CLOSED.
  • UR-25-1, Point 6, HVAC/CNTMT Purge Flow/Pressure Recorder indicates greater than 55 cfm.
2. !f the problem is NOT immediately corrected, Then STOP the running H2 Purge Exhaust Fan.
3. NOTIFY Chemistry.

CAUSES: This annunciator may be caused by low air flow through the charcoal adsorber or by temperature instrumentation malfunction.

REFERENCES:

1. CWD 2998-B-327 sheets 480 and 1145
2. P&ID 2998-G-879 sheet 3
3. TEDB

( Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier # 2 Group # 2 KIA # 029G2.4.50 Importance Rating 4.0 Containment Purge System Ability to verify system alarm setpoints and operate controls identified in the alarm response manual. Proposed Question: SRO 92 Unit 1 is in Mode 3 performing a Containment (Cntmt) Purge using HVE-8A when the following alarm is received: CNTMT VACUUM HIGH P-1 Which ONE of the following:

1) Operator actions should be taken and
2) Identifies the Technical Specification bases for Containment pressure?

STOP HVE-8A Cntmt Purge fan and: ( A. 1) manually OPEN FCV-25-1, 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves.

2) Limit peak containment pressure during steam line break accident conditions. Limit negative pressure differential with respect to annulus atmosphere to prevent Containment structure from exceeding design negative pressure.

B. 1) verify FCV-25-1, 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves have CLOSED

2) Limit peak containment pressure during steam line break accident conditions. Limit negative pressure differential with respect to annulus atmosphere to prevent Containment structure from exceeding design negative pressure.

C. 1) manually OPEN FCV-25-1, 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves.

2) Limit peak containment pressure during loss of coolant accident conditions. Limit negative pressure differential with respect to outside atmosphere to prevent Containment structure from exceeding design negative pressure.

D. 1) verify FCV-25-1, 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves have CLOSED.

2) Limit peak containment pressure during loss of coolant accident conditions. Limit negative pressure differential with respect to outside atmosphere to prevent Containment structure from exceeding design negative pressure.

175

Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional): A. Incorrect: manually opening FCV-25-1,2 and 3 can not be performed from the control room. Control room INDICATION only. These valves operate from starting and stopping the Purge fans HVE-8A (B). T.S. basis is correct B. Correct: HVE-8A should have automatically stopped on negative pressure. When manually stopped, verification of makeup valves closing is performed. C. Incorrect: manually opening FCV-25-1,2 and 3 can not be performed from the control room. T.S. basis D. Incorrect: T.S. basis Technical Reference( Reference(s): s): 1-ARP-0 1-P 1 1-ARP-01-P1 (Attach if not previously provided) 0711602 Containment and Shield Building Ventilation Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: ( Learning Objective: _PS_L_O_P_S_S_Y_S_60_2_-_16_LP_C _ _P_S_L_O_P-,,-S_S_Y---,-S_6_0_2-_1_6_L_P_C___ _ (As available) Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis x 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 55.43 5- - Comments: 176

SECTION NO.: PAGE: TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 4 oJ of 10 ( REVISION NO.: CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 5 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued) BASES (continued) 3/4.6.1 CONTAINMENT VESSEL (continued) 3/4.6.1.4 INTERNAL PRESSURE The limitations on containment internal pressure ensure that 1) the containment structural is prevented from exceeding its design negative pressure differential with respect to the annulus atmosphere of 0.70 psi and 2) the containment peak pressure does not exceed the design pressure of 44 psig during steam line break accident conditions. The maximum peak pressure obtained from a steam line break accident is 41.6 psig. The limit of 2.4 psig for initial positive containment pressure will limit the total pressure to 44.0 psig which is the design pressure and is consistent with the accident analyses. 3/4.6.1.5 AIR TEMPERATURE The limitation on containment air temperature ensures that the ( containment vessel temperature does not exceed the design temperature of 264°F during LOCA conditions. The containment temperature limit is consistent with the accident analyses. 3/4.6.1.6 CONTAINMENT VESSEL STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY The limitation ensures that the structural integrity of the containment steel vessel will be maintained comparable to the original design standards for the life of the facility. Structural integrity is required to ensure that the vessel will withstand the maximum pressure of 39.6 psig in the event of the limiting design basis loss of coolant accident. A visual inspection in accordance with the Containment Leakage Rate Testing Program is sufficient to demonstrate this capability.

( Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier Tier# # 2 Group # 2 KIA # 029G2.4.50 Importance Rating 4.0 Containment Purge System Ability to verify system alarm setpoints and operate controls identified in the alarm response manual. Proposed Question: SRO 92 Unit 1 is in Mode 3 performing a Containment (Cntmt) Purge using HVE-SA HVE-8A when the following alarm is received: CNTMT VACUUM HIGH P-1 Which ONE of the following:

1) Operator actions should be taken and
2) what possible consequence could occur if Operator: Operator ctions did NOT occur?

( STOP HVE-8A HVE-SA Cntmt Purge fan and: A. 1) manually OPEN FCV-25-1 FCV-25-1, and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves. J

2) Containment internal pre ure could exceed the Technical Specification limit of - 4.0 in. H2 0.

B. FCV-25-1, 2 d 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves have CLOSED

1) verify FCV-25-1 J
2) Containment inter inter: al pressure could exceed the Technical Specification limit of - 0.7 PS .

C. 1) manually OR N FCV-25-1 FCV-25-1, 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves. J

2) Containm t internal pressure could exceed the Technical Specification limit of - .7 PSIG.

D. CV-25-1, 2 and 3 Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves have CLOSED. verif>;: CV-25-1

1) verif J
2) Co tainment ainment internal pressure could exceed the Technical Specification Ii it of - 4.0 in. H2 0.

( 183 1S3

Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional): A. Incorrect: manually opening FCV-25-1,2 and 3 can not be performed from the control room. Control room INDICATION only. These valves operate from starting and stopping the Purge fans HVE-8A (B). Containment internal pressure of -4.0 in. H2 0 is not correct but plausible due to annunciator setpoint is -4.0 in. H2 0 B. Correct: HVE-8A should have automatically stopped on negative pressure. When manually stopped, verification of makeup valves closing is performed. C. Incorrect: manually opening FCV-25-1,2 and 3 can not be performed from the control room. Control room INDICATION only. These valves operate from starting and stopping the Purge fans HVE-8A (B). D. Incorrect: Containment internal pressure of -4.0 in. H2 0 is not correct but plausible due to annunciator setpoint is -4.0 in. H2 0 Technical Reference(s): 1-ARP-01-P1 (Attach if not previously provided) 0711602 Containment and ( Shield Building Ventilation Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: Learning Objective: _P,-S~L=-=O,-P-=S--,S~Y:....:S~60=.c::2~-,-16=-=L PSL OPS SYS 602-16 LPC

                              - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -P'-C-'=--__-------

available) (As ava i lab Ie) Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis x 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 - 10-- - 55.43 -- 5 -- - Comments: ( 184

0711602, t.©. .'__ .**rD~i~t~d;5 .........................................

                                                                                                             .--rD~i~t~d*;5***---"'**-*----***-*****-***-*"'***-**'-J 0711602, Rev.

Rev. 1..9.. FOR TRAININ6a~~~ooo~~~ Page 10 of 84 " .. "'{~D~e~le~te~d:~4~~~~~~= FOR TRAINING USE ONLY

                                                                                                     ... ,--._--{ Deleted: 4                                                             j

( FCV-25-1, FCV-25-2, FCV-25-3, Containment Purge Makeup Valves These 48" air-operated, fail-closed, butterfly valves are operated from RTGB 106 [HVCB] by the control switches for Containment Purge Exhaust Fans HVE-8A or HVE-8B. Once HVE-8A or HVE-8B is started, and a vacuum of 0.5" water gauge (wg) between containment and ambient air exists, the valves will open. This ensures that unfiltered/un monitored backflow through the makeup air valves will not occur. Once open, the makeup valves seal in, and only close on fan shutdown, loss of instrument air, or CIS. Indication for open and close valve position is provided on RTGB 106 [HVCB).[HVCB]. Refer to Figure 7. Leakage testing of containment purge valves is performed in accordance with the Containment Leakage Rate Testing program. Containment Purge Valve Travel Limit Stops

  • Unit 1 Spring Side Restriction on the use of all of the Unit 1 containment purge valves require that travel limit stops be employed for Modes 1, 2, 3, 4 to prevent the valve from going beyond 40 degrees of travel open. This is an FSAR requirement. This stop is attached to the spring side of the actuator, which is positioned into the spring assembly and pins the travel limit screw at the 40 degrees position, as shown on Figure 9, thereby

( limiting full open travel. This opening has been designed such that critical valve parts will not be damaged by DBA-LOCA loads and that the valve will tend to close when dynamic forces are introduced. During refueling operations, it is permissible to allow the travel limit stop, as shown in Figure 10, to be pinned in the full open position, thereby allowing for full open operation. Any positioning of these stops is performed by I&C Valve group personnel.

  • Unit 1 Air Side The air side of the containment purge valve actuator has a travel limiting stop as well. Its purpose is to maintain the valve fully open on a loss of instrument air. The valve is opened, and then the travel limit screw is run in to the full open position, with the pin on the screw closest to the handwheel as shown on Figure 10. This allows for maintenance personnel to have a backup safety means of keeping these valves

Rev.l"tL,. 0711602, Rev. '{D~i~i:~d:5 * * * * * * * * * ""-"J 1,§. . __ .---rD~5--*"--"--------- 1 FOR TRAININ~~~~ 100~~~ Page 11 of 84 """{ Deleted: 44 FOR TRAINING USE ONLY --------{~.Deleted: ~~~~~~~~~~. 1 open for ductwork and butterfly elastomer inspections in the event of a loss of air. Any positioning of these stops is performed by I&C Valve group personnel.

  • Unit 2 Unit 2 travel limit stop is only on the air side of the containment purge valve actuators. Normal on-line configuration is as shown in Figure 11. For maintenance purposes when allowed in refueling or cold shutdown conditions, the travel limit screw may be positioned in as shown in Figure 12. Any positioning of these stops is performed by I&C valve group personnel.

Although operations procedures refer to the travel limit stops as jacking stops, at no time should they be "jacked" in against air pressure or spring compression. In Modes 1, 2, 3, and 4 the containment purge valves have their actuators pinned and control fuses removed because it could not be demonstrated that they would close in the required amount of time on a Containment Isolation Signal. Containment Purge Fans, HVE-SA and HVE-S8 The containment purge fans are belt-driven fans that discharge to the plant vent stack. Each fan is rated for 42,000 cfm at 10.5 inches wg static pressure. (

                                                                                                 +- .-_.... "-_.(j    Formatted: Indent: Left: OS',                                                0.5",                             i
  • Fans HVE-8A / 8B are powered by MCC 1A5/1 1A5 / 1B5 [2A5/2B5]

[2A5 / 2B5] I, Bulleted + Level: 1 + Aligned at: 0"  ! i + Tab after: 0.25" + Indent at: I i 0.25", Tabs: 0.75", List tab + Not at i i 0.25"  ! The fans are controlled by STOP/START switches that spring return to neutral on RTGB 1..................... ....................,.....................................................* J 106 [HVCB]. To start HVE-8A (8B), the following logic must be satisfied:

                                                                                                 ..........~ ---1
                                                                                                              --      Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5",                                                                                1
  • CIS Train A and B must be reset. Bulleted + Level: 1 + Aligned at: 0" I I + Tab after: 0.25" + Indent at: ,

I 0.25", Tabs: 0.75", List tab + Not at

                                                                                                 +..                  0.25"
                                                                                                                  '0.25"                                                                                                             :
  • Containment to annulus differential pressure must not be excessive (PDIS- ~', ~==;;""-="""="""""""""''~ ....' ' ' =<
                                                                                                               " 1 Formatted: Indent: Left: OS',                                                   0.5",                            !

I Bulleted + Level: 1 + Aligned at: 0" i 25-11A and 11 B :"::

s:; 4" wg [9" wg]). I + Tab after: 0.25" + Indent at: i i 0.25", Tabs: 0.75", List tab + Not at i 0.25" 10.25"
                                                                                                                                                       -~----                                 ....--          .......-.-......:.

I

REVISION: PROCEDURE TITLE: PANEL: o ANNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURE P ( PROCEDURE NO: WINDOW: 1-ARP-01-P1 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 1 CNTMT VACUUM HIGH P-1 DEVICE: LOCATION: SETPOINT: 63XA1 RTGB-106 De-energized PDIS-25-11A RAB/24/N-RA2!W-RAE RAB/24/N-RA2/w-RAE -4 in. H2 0 63XB1 RTGB-106 De-energized PDIS-25-11 B RAB/24/N-RA2/RAF -4 in. H2 0 ALARM CONFIRMATION: 6P, indicates -4 in. H2 0 or more negative.

1. PDIS-25-1A, Containment A L'1P,
2. PDIS-25-1 6P, indicates -4 in. H2 0 or more negative.

B, Containment B L'1P, PDIS-25-1B,

3. If Containment Purge was in progress, the following is indicated:
  • HVE-8A and HVE-8B, Cntmt Purge Exhaust Fans, indicate STOPPED.
  • FCV-25-7 and FCV-25-8, Vacuum Relief Valves, indicate OPEN.
  • FCV-25-1, 2 and 3, Cntmt Purge Makeup Valves, indicate OPEN.

( OPERATOR ACTIONS:

1. If Containment Purge Fans areB,UNNING, Then STOP the r;unnihgfan: ~.
  • HVE-8A, Cntmt Purge Exhal;jst Fan."
  • HVE-8B, Cntmt Purge Exhaust Fan.
2. If Containment Vacuum Reliefs are CLO§ED, Thenatthed.irection ofthe US,.OPEN th~ valves; manually: -.- . ... . ... .
    ,*  FCV-25-7, Vacuum Relief Valve.

e FCV-25-8, Vacuum Relief Valve. CAUSES: This annunciator may be caused by failure of the purge inlet dampers to open, failure of the containment vacuum relief valves to open, or a misaligned valve lineup.

REFERENCES:

1. CWO CWD 8770-B-327 sheets 366, 509, 510, 511 and 529
2. P&IDs 8770-G-862 and 8770-G-878 sheet 1
3. TEDB

Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier# 2 Group # 2 KIA # 034K4.03 Importance Rating 3.3 Fuel Handling Equipment: Overload protection Proposed Question: SRO 93 Unit 2 is performing refueling operations. 2-NOP-67.04 REFUELING MACHINE OPERATION is in use. Appendix F 'Troubleshooting An Overload Condition While Raising a Fuel Assembly' is being implemented due to an overload condition. Xv!" f0/ V The Refueling Machine operator questions the Refueling SRO if Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) override can be used to override the overload and raise the fuel bundle. As the Refueling SRO, which ONE of the following responses would you give to the Refueling Machine operator and why? PLC override is: ( A. NOT allowed for the above conditions. PLC override is only to be used to place a fuel bundle in a safe condition for specific equipment failures. B. NOT allowed for the above conditions. PLC override is only to be used for preoperational testing of the Refueling Machine interlocks prior to fuel movement. C. ALLOWED to be used for the above conditions. PLC override does not override the Technical Specification overload cut off limit. D. ALLOWED to be used for the above conditions but only after the Bridge and Trolley manual positioning is not successful in clearing the overload condition. ( 185

Proposed Answer: A Explanation (Optional): A. Correct B. Incorrect; PLC override is used during pre-op testing but procedure guidance states override is to be used to place the fuel bundle in a safe condition in the event of a computer failure C. Incorrect; PLC override not allowed but it is true it does not override the T.S. limit on overload D. Incorrect; Appendix has manipulations to move the bridge and trolley, but PLC override not mentioned and not allowed. Technical Reference(s): 2-NOP-67.04 Refueling (Attach if not previously provided) Machine Operation 0711208 Refueling Equipment ( Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: Learning Objective: 0702208-06 _0-=--7'---'0:. . . 2-".2-=-.08-=---.. : . .0-=-.6_ _ _ _ _ _ _ (As available) Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge _X Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 6,7 Comments: ( 186

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 16A REFUELING MACHINE OPERATION 7 of 87 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-NOP-67.04 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 4.0 PRECAUTIONS / LIMITATIONS 4.1 General

1. Do NOT take any unnecessary items into the refueling cavity.
2. All personal items (glasses, pencils, personal monitors, etc.), shall be tied or taped to prevent them from falling into the cavity.
3. Each person should inventory personal items they take into the refueling cavity.
4. No loose items should be stored on the Refueling Machine unless tethered to a person or machine.
5. A Radiation Work Permit (RWP) shall be in effect that covers the scope of the work to be performed.
6. Health Physics should be notified and approval obtained for any use of the Refueling Machine.

( 7. No articles shall be removed from the Refueling Cavity unless Health Physics is present to monitor radiation levels during the removal process.

8. Prior to flooding the refueling cavity, check out all underwater equipment.
9. The hoist shall never be raised above the Hoist Up Limit with a fuel bundle attached.
10. Health Physics shall monitor any hoist movement above the Hoist Up Limit even without a fuel bundle attached.

11' 11 ~, Operation with the COMPUTER OVERRIDE switch in OVRD bypasses all PLC interlocks. It is intended for emergency use only to allow a fuel bundle fi' to be placed in a safe condition in the event of a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) failure.

12. An SRO or refueling SRO shall be in containment to supervise fuel
                  ';}:movement vement and maintain oversight of activities in containment and the spent fuel pool.
13. Rotation of the Refueling Machine mast while at up limit may cause loss of the Hoist Up Limit permissive. This may cause an automatic sequence to abort and may prevent the machine from performing functions that require the hoist to be at up limit.

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 16A REFUELING MACHINE OPERATION i \ 41 of 87 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-NOP-67.04 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 6.12 Abnormal Events (continued) NOTE There is NO alarm associated with an 1/0 I/O system failure. If the machine halts unexpectedly while moving OR will not move on any axis, consider the possibility of an 1/0 I/O system failure.

7. 1/0 I/O System Failure Actions INITIAL A. STOP all movement of the Fuel Transfer Machine.

B. NOTIFY the Refueling SRO I/ Refueling Center of the 1/0 I/O System failure. NOTE The Refueling SRO may authorize a reboot to attempt to clear the fault table. Rebooting is accomplished by turning OFF then ON at the Operator Console. C. REBOOT to Clear the fault table. CAUTION Operation with the COMPUTER OVERRIDE switch in OVRD bypasses all PLC interlocks and the potential exists for equipment damage. It is intended for emergency use only to allow a fuel bundle to be placed in a safe condition in the event of a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) failure. D. If rebooting does not reset the operation of the Refueling Machine AND a fuel assembly or load must be placed in a safe location, Then with Refueling SRO concurrence, PLACE the Computer Override keyswitch in OVRD. E. CONTACT SCE (PSL Engineering) for assistance. END OF SECTION 6.12

REFUELING OPERATIONS MANIPULATOR CRANE OPERABILITY LIMITING CONDITION FOR OPERATION 3.9.6 The manipulator crane shall be used for movement of CEAs or fuel assemblies and shall be OPERABLE with:

a. A minimum capacity of 2000 pounds, and
b. of ~ 3000 pounds.

An overload cut off limit of::: APPLICABILITY: During movement of CEAs or fuel assemblies within the reactor pressure vessel. ACTION: With the requirements for crane OPERABILITY not satisfied, suspend use of any inoperable manipulator crane from operations involving the movement of CEAs and fuel assemblies within the reactor pressure vessel. SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.9.6 The manipulator crane used for movement of CEAs or fuel assemblies within the reactor pressure vessel shall be demonstrated OPERABLE within 72 hours prior to the start of such operations by performing a load test of at least 2500 pounds and demonstrating an ( automatic load cut off before the crane load exceeds 3000 pounds. ST. LUCIE - UNIT 1 3/4 9-6 3/49-6 Amendment No. 152

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 16A REFUELING MACHINE OPERATION ( PROCEDURE NO.: 80 of 87 2-NOP-67.04 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 APPENDIX F TROUBLESHOOTING AN OVERLOAD CONDITION WHILE RAISING A FUEL ASSEMBLY (Page 1 of 2) NOTE If several assemblies are consistently off by two or more tenths in the same direction, consider checking benchmarks to ensure proper Refueling Machine alignment.

1. DETERMINE if assembly being lowered into the core is slightly coming in contact with another assembly, using binoculars.
2. 1f If so, Then PERFORM the following:

A. LOWER the hoist until the load cell reads between 1300 and 1400 Ibs. B. ROTATE mast, as follows:

1. REMOVE the detent pin.

(

2. TURN the handwheel to move the mast approximately 10 degrees in either direction.
3. MONITOR the load cell.

C. RAISE the hoist. D. MONITOR the load cell for indication of an overload condition. ( "\

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 16A REFUELING MACHINE OPERATION 81 of 87 PROCEDURE NO.: 2-NOP-67.04 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 APPENDIX F TROUBLESHOOTING AN OVERLOAD CONDITION WHILE RAISING A FUEL ASSEMBLY (Page 2 of 2) NOTE If another assembly is leaning excessively into the path of the assembly being withdrawn from the core, the RFM can be manually positioned in the direction away from the leaning assembly.

3. 11 another assembly is leaning excessively into the path of the assembly being withdrawn from the core, Then PERFORM the following:

A. LOWER the hoist until full assembly weight is shown on the load cell. B. OPERATE the RFM manually in accordance with Section 6.3, RFM Manual Indexing From RFM Console. C. ADJUST the Bridge / Trolley position of the Refueling Machine 0.2 inches while monitoring the digital position indicator. ( NOTE If a hoist position where the original overload condition is reached and the overload no longer exists, the assembly has passed the obstruction. D. LOWER the Hoist while watching load cell for an overload condition. E. 11 a hoist position pOSition where the original overload condition is reached and the overload no longer exists, Then PERFORM the following:

1. RETURN THE RFM to its original position for the assembly being withdrawn.
2. RETURN the RFM to power operation in accordance with Section 6.3, RFM Manual Indexing From RFM Console.
3. RAISE the assembly while monitoring the load cell.

F. 11 the overload persists, Then NOTIFY the Refueling Supervisor that additional adjustments may be required. END OF APPENDIX F

0711208, Rev. 18 Page 50 of 120 ( FOR TRAINING USE ONLY CONTROL CONSOLE VERTICAL PANEL COMPONENT POSITION INDICATION FUNCTION

1. Heater On IighUTest Red light Auto on when power Pushbutton off. Pushbutton for lamp lam test.
2. Hoist Overload light Red Ilight ht Lit during overload Litd
3. Hoist Underload light Red Ilight ht Lit during underload Litdu
4. Hoist Max Overload Red light Lit when a pre-set light maximum overload setpoint has been exceeded (independent of PLC)
5. Override Active Light Red light Lit Indicating that Override Keyswitch is in the OVRD position (PLC bypassed)
6. Override Active OVRD Red light Allows bypassing the Keyswitch PLC (emergency use only)

( 7. FLAT SCREEN Various refueling Information display MONITOR fu nctio ns/ activiti es functions/activities including diagnostics and interactive command function capability

8. Cable load Digital Meter Monitors load on fuel hoist cable
9. Upender Vertical Green light ON when reactor side light ht Upender U er is vertical
10. Travel Override Momentarily Red light Lights when bridge or Pushbutton/light depressed trolley violates a secure zone (pushbutton allows slow speed outside secure zone) zone
11. Main Power On Momentarily White light Supplies or secures Pushbuttonilight Pushbuttonllight depressed refueling machine power including A/C AlC unit (ON when power is on) on
12. Main Power Off Momentarily None Secures power to depressed machine

(

Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier# 3 Group # KIA # K/A# G2.1.1 Importance Rating 4.2 Conduct of Operations: Knowledge of operations requirements Proposed Question: SRO 94 Unit 2 has tripped due to the loss of the 2A Main Feedwater Pump. Upon the trip a Main Steam Safety Valve (MSSV) on the 2A Steam Generator stuck open and has failed to reseat. A Steam Generator Tube leak on the 2B S/G was identified post trip. S/G Blowdown radiation monitors are in alarm. The crew has entered 2-EOP-15 Functional Recovery. The MSIV's were closed and the following conditions exist:

  • 2A S/G pressure is 710 psia lowering.
  • 2B S/G pressure is 790 psia stable.
1) Which ONE of the following S/G's is considered the MOST AFFECTED S/G?
2) When is the faulted S/G considered NO LONGER FAULTED and what EOP will be utilized when the SG is no longer considered faulted?

( A. 1) 2B S/G.

2) When the MSSV is gagged. Remain in EOP-15 B. 1) 2B S/G
2) When EOP-99 Appendix R 'Steam Generator Isolation' is complete. Exit to EOP-04 Steam Generator Tube Rupture.

C. 1) 2A S/G

2) When the MSSV is gagged. Remain in EOP-15 D 1) 2A S/G
2) When EOP-99 Appendix R 'Steam Generator Isolation' is complete. Exit to EOP-04 Steam Generator Tube Rupture.

( 187

Proposed Answer: C Explanation (Optional): A. Incorrect: Most affected SG is 2A, part two is correct B. Incorrect: Most affected SG is 2A, Ops Policy requires MSSV to be gagged to be considered NO LONGER FAULTED C. Correct D. Incorrect: 2A SG is LEAST AFFECTED, part two incorrect, MSSV required to be gagged to be NO LONGER FAULTED Technical Reference(s): Operations Department Policy: (Attach if not previously provided) OPS-521 Emergency Operating Procedure Implementation 0702828 Functional Recovery ( Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: Learning Objective: _0~7'-.:0:.-2....:.8=2-=-8-....:.0..:...7 _0-'-7-'0'-2_8_28 ___----'-0_7_ ____ _ (As available) Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge X _X Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 - 10 10 -- - 55.43 5 Comments: ( 188

ST. LUCIE PLANT OPS-S21 OPS-521 OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT POLICY Rev. 13 EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE Date 03/31/09 IMPLEMENTATION Page 11 of 16

1. J. (continued)

(continued)

6. Manual initiation of AFAS should NOT be done during other scenarios because it defeats the rupture identification circuit. This does NOT prevent a crew decision to manually operate AFW components, start pumps and open valves, if deemed necessary.
7. ESFAS Actuation: Use of ESF Override features in EOPs
a. When opening a valve that was closed by SIAS or CIAS, increased awareness / monitoring should be employed on that system to detect a release to the environment via that flow path.
b. Increasing RAB radiation indications, loss of Containment sump inventory and unexpected Containment depressurization are all examples of Containment boundary leakage which may have been created by operator action, and should be considered when taking these type of actions.

K. Manual Override of MFIV Following AFAS Actuation (Unit 2):

1. Do NOT override and open MFIV from within EOP-1. This overrides a safeguard signal prior to diagnosing the event.

L. CCW to RCPs:

1. SPTAs SPT As take precedence over restoring CCW.
2. Restore CCW to RCPs when an RCa RCO is available AND the attention required to restore does NOT adversely affect the maintenance or recovery of other safety functions.

M. Excess Steam Demand event guidance while implementing EOP-OS, EOP-05, Excess Steam Demand, and EOP-1S, EOP-15, Functional Recovery.

1. Regardless of the rate of ReS RCS pressure and inventory reduction during an Excess Steam Demand, RCS pressure SHALL NOT be intentionally lowered to enhance inventory addition into the RCS unless the RCS Inventory Control Safety Function can NOT be maintained otherwise.
2. If a Main Steam Safety Valve is stuck open, or was stuck open, causing entry into an EOP, Then the affected Steam Generator shall be considered faulted until the Safety Valve is gagged, even if the Safety Valve reseats. The Steam Generator shall NOT be unisolated until the Safety Valve is gagged.

(

e. RCS and Core Heat Removal (HR) When monitoring the RCS The success paths for RCS and core heat temperature during forced removal contain some optimal guidance for circulation conditions, THOT is SGTR, ESDE, and TLOF (Le., steps to the heat indicator. During all initiate Once Through Cooling or guidance other conditions CET indication not to initiate OTC if no HPSI is available). shows the most accurate state of the core fluid. (Le. during safety injection the Tc RDT's ROT's are influenced by injection water)

CEN-152.

f. Containment Isolation (CI) Explain that if a steam generator tube rupture exist, containment isolation can not be met until the most affected S/G is isolated.
g. Containment Temperature and Pressure Control (CTPC)
h. Containment Combustible Gas Control Explain: TSC must agree to H2 (CCGC) purge success path prior to use.
7. Long Term Actions EO-2 These actions should be pursued

( concurrently with the TSC.

a. Determine Plant Status
b. Cooldown necessary Due to the event a standard cooldown may not be achievable.
c. Coldown Feasible E. MULTIPLE EVENT STRATEGY
1. Simultaneous ESD and SGTR EO-7A
a. The Containment Isolation Safety Function Note: If the S/G with the SGTR will not be met for this dual event due to is required to be steamed, then secondary activity and the most affected SG CI-1 will only be met when the (ESD SG has yet to be isolated). Assuming ESD SG is isolated (no steam other safety functions are being met, the US release) and the most affected implements CI-1 Success Path first. CI-1 SG pressure is <930 psia.

will direct him to Heat Removal Success Path HR-1 or HR-2 as appropriate where he will isolate the most affected S/G (in this case it is the one with the ESD). He then returns to CI-1 and completes the procedure in the normal fashion. 0702828, Rev. 10, Page 10 of 28 FOR TRAINING USE ONLY

( Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier Tier# # 3 Group # KIA # G2.1.9 Importance Rating 4.5 Conduct of Operations: Ability to direct personnel activities inside the control room Proposed Question: SRO 95 Unit 2 has tripped from 100% power. A Loss Of Offsite Power (LOOP) occurred during the trip. The following conditions were noted immediately after the trip:

  • 2A EDG is running with its output breaker closed.
  • 26 2B EDG is running but its breaker failed to close, no abnormal alarms noted.
  • Steam Generator pressures are 1000 psia.
  • RCS pressure is 2200 psiastable. psia stable.
  • ONLY the 2A Charging pump is running.
  • Pressurizer level is 35% slowly lowering.
  • ONE CEA is at the Upper Electrical Limit (UEL).

Which ONE of the following directions can be given to the RCO's prior to formal entry into 1-( EOP-01 Standard Post Trip Actions? A. Direct RCO to contact the field operator to perform Appendix X, direct RCO to close MSR TCV's.

6. Direct RCS depressurized to between 1800-1850 psia, direct start of 2C B.

Charging pump. C. Direct RCO to close the MSIV's, direct RCO to emergency borate. D. Direct ADV's operated to control Steam Generator pressure, direct one attempt to close the 2B 26 EDG output breaker. ( 189

Proposed Answer: D ( Explanation (Optional): A. Incorrect: US does not direct RCO to contact field operator. RCO announces unit trip and requests Field Operator call the control room. MSR TCV closure is performed by RCO as contingency actions if MSR block valves did not close. B. Incorrect: RCS is depressurized to 1800-1850 in EOP-09 LOOP to protect RCP seals. 2C Charging pump would not be started, Pressurizer level is within safety function range. C. Incorrect: MSIV's are closed in EOP-09 LOOP to protect the main condenser. Emergency Borate not required with ONE CEA not fully inserted. D. Correct: US will give direction post trip to stabilize the plant prior to formal entry into EOP-01 Standard Post Trip Actions. Technical Reference(s): Operations Department Policy (Attach if not previously provided) OPS-521 Emergency Operating ( Procedure Implementation 2-EOP-01 Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: Learning Objective: 0702822-09 (As available) Question Source: Bank # Bank# Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis x 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 55.43 ------ 10 5---- - Comments: 190

ST. LUCIE PLANT OPS-S21 OPS-521 OPERATIONS DEPARTMENT POLICY Rev. 13 EMERGENCY OPERATING PROCEDURE Date 03/31/09 IMPLEMENTATION Page 6of16 6 of 16

1. H. (continued)
3. If a Safety Function is not being met or a contingency action must be taken, that information must be communicated to the US. The US will direct these contingency actions. This communication will utilize 4-parts.
4. Following completion of the Immediate Actions, the SM, US and RCOs should spend approximately one minute assessing plant status and acknowledging alarms.

During this time the Desk RCO should:

a. Announce on the Gaitronics "Attention all Plant Personnel, the Unit 1 (2) Reactor has tripped."
b. NOTIFY the NPO to perform Appendix X, Section 1 of EOP-99
c. CONTACT the STA ST A and Shift Communicator to report to the Control Room and

(

d. Close the MSR TCV block and/or warm-up valves.
e. While the US and BRCO are performing the Inventory and/or Pressure Control safety function, the DRCO should CLOSE MV-OS-S14.

The US / SM should:

f. Mentally perform EOP-1 to quickly assess the status of the plant.
g. Actions required to stabilize the plant may be taken at that time.

(e.g., close an EDG breaker, start a charging pump, manually control S/G pressure) (

Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier# 3 Group # KIA # G2.2.17 Importance Rating 3.8 Equipment Control: Knowledge of the process for managing maintenance activities during power operations Proposed Question: SRO 96 Which ONE of the following work activities are examples that are controlled by:

1) O-ADM-80.01 CONTROL OF FIX IT NOW I MINOR MAINTENANCE WORK ACTIVITIES?
2) What work activities require the SRO I Shift SRO permission to start?

A. 1) Adjusting packing on pumps that are Quality AND Safety Related.

2) Work that involves installed plant equipment within the power block.

B. 1) Adjusting packing on pumps that are Quality Related equipment ONLY.

2) Work that involves installed plant equipment within the power block.

( C. 1) Minor welding on Quality Related OR Safety Related equipment.

2) Work activities that require a Equipment Clearance Order.

D. 1) Minor welding on Quality Related equipment ONLY.

2) Work activities that require a Equipment Clearance Order.

( \ 191

Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional): A. Incorrect: minor maintenance NOT permitted on Safety Related Pumps, although minor maintenance IS allowed on some Safety related equipment. B. Correct: maintenance allowed on Quality Related. SRO required to approve power block work C. Incorrect: minor welding NOT allowed on Safety related equipment. D. Incorrect: minor welding NOT allowed on Quality related equipment Technical Reference(s): 0-ADM-80.01 Control of Fix It (Attach if not previously provided) Now / Minor Maintenance Work Activities. Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: Learning Objective: _0_9_0_4_7_2_4-_0_2 _0_9_0_4_7_24_-_02_ __ __ __ ___ _ (As available) ( Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge X Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 55.43 5 Comments: ( 192

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 22E CONTROL OF FIX IT NOW I/ MINOR MAINTENANCE ( 1--------4 I-P-RO-C-E-D-UR-E-N-O-.:---t PROCEDURE NO.: WO RK ACTIVITI WORK ES ACTIVITIES 12 of 28 ADM-80.01 ST. LUCIE PLANT 7.3 Minor Maintenance Work Control Process: (continued)

6. (continued) 6"t' In addition to the above requirements, minor maintenance work orders which require an equipment clearance shall be reviewed by the Fin SRO prior to implementation to ensure there are no conflicts
                  ~          with scheduled POD activities or operational requirements.
7. Minor Maintenance work orders that involve the removal of grating clips shall include Supervisor I/ GML signoff for verification of the re-installation of grating clips.
8. The planned duration of any job worked under minor maintenance is normally limited to having the work completed on the same day but may be extended by the Supervisor.
9. Minor Maintenance Work Orders shall be reviewed and verified as Minor Maintenance by the specific departments Production Supervisor and the Verified Minor Maintenance Field signed and dated prior to commencement of field work.

( t 10 ..i Fin SRO I/ Shift SRO permission to start work is required for any Minor Maintenance Work Order that involves work activities which could affect unit operation or involves installed plant equipment within the power block. A. The Fin SRO I/ Shift SRO I/ Shift Manager shall document permission to start work by signing and dating the Minor Maintenance Work Orders. Security shall be notified prior to work on security related equipment.

11. Work performed shall be summarized and parts documented in the Work Performed Section of the Minor Maintenance Work Order and the Journeyman I/ GML I/ Supervisor shall date and sign.
12. The Deficiency Tag shall be removed and EOOS sections shall be completed.
13. For work reports requiring more than one page, utilize a form similar to Attachment 2, Page 1 of 1.
14. The Work Performed section shall be reviewed by Supervisor I/ Foreman I/

Chief I/ GML. Security related work orders may require review by Security Specialist. Shift SpeCialist.

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 22E CONTROL OF FIX IT NOW / MINOR MAINTENANCE ( I------~~~----~ I-------------------~ PROCEDURE NO.: WORK ACTIVITIES 17 of 28 ADM-80.01 ST. LUCIE PLANT FIGURE 1 MINOR MAINTENANCE FLOW PROCESS (Page 1 of 1)

            /"Main!enan~
                              --...   ~
            ,              Need -- )
            \'...Ldenlifi~
                         '~,.C                                                                                                        /'"/",,
                                   ~
                                                                                               /"',
                                                                                            /
                                                                                                                            /.                                                 /'""                                 --
                                                                                                                                                                                                            /~'C;ntr"G;~""'"
                 //
           /Maintenance Supervisor ()(

SROiShifl SRO FIN SROIShift or No Opef8tlons & Maintenance

                                                                                   .l"/To.dpouch \.'" No
                                                                                   '. Mamtenance />-..:--_.

(/ Minor " " No

                                                                                                                   .."' r',.!lo!nt~n,e.Jnce )>'-'-__...."'r 'tv'*ork Order'~
                                                                                                                                                                            /"       Plant          '. No       c;;,;;;h:>

orWR or I{vR ) Determines FIN RlWiewof

                                                                                     "        Activilv,,*                 "          ,\C\.v.\)'             /              " , ACI!/VilY . / '              "'~~".C.el_

Cancellatlk1ti,?)/

L :;/
                                                          .'!fork Reg~!!st1l             " 7/                                '            ?         //                           "     .          .               '      .-'

Ll Fi. It Now Cutegories:

           'A" Priority                                                      -Non Power Toolpooch
                                                                                  ~~,~:.~.~~n.~!.~E~,g!:!.~~.~.!~

Maintenance <':~l?,ia Po\lv'B( BIod< 8!ock r.'Pi~':.~~1 1 Plant Work Order

                                                                                                                                                                                 ~Qt~Q::?:j~,~

Ca)agories i,. Focus i.IS Power

                                                                                                                                                                        ¥            POVlef Block PWC)'s PWO's                                                                 Component Work Component         Work                 MWlor Maintenance                            ;¥,. Fi""

Fwc Year Year Plan Plan Work Work "8'< PrlorUy "S" Priority Ii"noh~

                                                                             ,.* Materials HAndhng Minor         Maintenance CntcHa 9fj~ Jobs
                                                                                                                                                                     >
  • Preventive PreventIve Maintenance P\'IO's .

PWO's I'~co! & lit1u Lme Work

                                                                             ,.- 1<001   &  UtlJl Line   VVork 1   ~ Short Oun:1tion
                                                                                                                   - Short Duration Jobs
                                                                                                                                                                     !
  • CorrectIVe
                                                                                                                                                                        ¥ Correcthffi Maintenance Maintenance Emergent wor';;

Eme'll"ntwor' ,:u~::~~,~~~~,~,l~N~~!,~,:~~,~:~~,~J

                                                                             ,. No Clearance Requirod
                                                                                                                   -~ No No DetAiled Oetailed Planning   Planmf1g              l¥*.--~"

Installing PCMsiMEPs Installing PCMsfMEPs would cause that vvDUld G,,)US0 POD togo to go IJUst l)ust *- No T Tech

                                                                                                                            ..cI1 Spec LCO          LeO Work
                                                                                                                   - No OC
                                                                                                                    ¥      QC Involwment lnvo!vem-ent In          in Ihe the planning:

planni~ stage

                                                                                                                  ,.- Minimal MInimal Risk     Ris~~ for ESF ToolpouCh Mamte:n.aooo Criteria                                                                                       Actuations, ACh.lt~  lions, Rad    Rod l-I-Non Power BIoCk"-                                                                                                Exposure, Personnel Expos",,,,.

( I Component Work , Injury

                                                                                                                    - No \,V(~ldlr'lg Ot~

SRo( Materials Handling QR Parts or Components

  • Kool & Lite Line Work
.:'.:'~Ie"ran,:,,~~~~ired Minor Maintenance M.linl"MOCP
                    .~t!".!'!~.
                     ~:!!~L!9<
     *" Short Duralion puratK.\() Jobs G
   ,,. No Detailed PWnnlng       Planning
     *- No Tech Spec LeO Work Work                        .                                                                                               Work WOrkin        ~-'"""-',,\
     *- No OCQC Involvement Irrvol'lemer,! In     in Ihe                                                                        Acoordancll Win, Accordan.ce                 \>Vlth)'

planning stage ADM 80.01 B(\()1

  • Minimal Risk RISk for ESF .. ,,~...-"-'"~

Actu3~!Ons, Actuations, Rad

                                                                                                                              .........-"""'".~-

Exposure, Personnel Flefsonnl Injury

    -~ No Weld/fig Welding on SR ()r            or     I OR Paris Pans or Components Corilponents I
              ~~"~e~r-".......J TS'Il"ted Targeted Improvement                   !                                                                          / . . . . .w;;;;-~

Opporiunity: Opportunity:  ! Evaluated by Evaluatec I (Completion of P~O II Open)\tons lAW ADM 0010432 Operations apptk:{lble disciplines applicable d1sc!phnes or ADM.oo,01 supprn1ing, supporiiJ19 Work/II

                                                         /Workin                          Aet;()(c!snce with

( Accordance 'AA'PWOper

                                                        "     W~h GMP*21               "-ADM 0010432 iPtAOIvIIADlvf.liO 011F1(,}, l!1'1EV.(J. TlF)
                                                              "'"--                        ~

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 22E CONTROL OF FIX IT NOW / MINOR MAINTENANCE I-P-RO-C-E-D-UR-E-N-O-.:---f WORK ACTIVITIES ACTIVITI ES 21 of 28 PROCEDURE NO.: WORK ADM-80.01 ST ST. LUCIE PLANT APPENDIX A CHECKLIST TO DETERMINE MINOR MAINTENANCE (Page 3 of 4) EQUIPMENT "fQNS QR SR

                                                 >>n                AC*llvll ACTIVITY   Y                        LIMITATIONS IMotors I Pumps               X      X IX    X IX      Draw oil samples Compressors I Fans           X      X    X      Add oil IX   IX X      X IX    X IX      r:;~I""~~~ filters Replace IXX      X IX    X IX      Lubricate Motors                       X                  Disconnect I Reconnect             N/A for EQ EO (75 HP or less)

Panels I Consoles X IX X X Replace missing covers I screws' Piping I Fittings X IX X Replace caps' I Repair pipe thread I Replace fittings* fittings' Pneumatic circuits I X X Troubleshoot instructions Use GMP-21 or specific instructions-loops for SR equip. X IX I Wl""~~~ Repair I Replace X IX X IX ICalibration check X IX ICalibrate Pumps ps X J ~'~

                                                    ' Adjust packWlg II Cooling Cooling Water Flow X

IX Replace packing I Minor repair I Simple alignment I Coupling repair I replace, complete pump replacement Security Equipment X N/A N/A Repair Doors and Gates Notify Fire Protection for impact of work to be performed on security fire barrier doors to determine if fire breach permit will be needed. No modification to door or its mounting hardware may be performed under minor maintenance. X N/A N/A Repair Equipment and Building Systems Strainers X X Install I Remove I Replace I Repair I Clean' I ~lIlfJ~rature Indicators X Temperature X IX Replar.e I Repair* Calibrate I Replace Repair' Temporary Pipe Caps X X IX X IX Install I Remove I Replace* Terminal I Pull Boxes X X IX X IX Replace missing covers I screws* NOTES NOTES: Minor Maintenance may not be performed on Equipment with Safety Classifications blacked out. N/A indicates Safety Classification is not applicable. Use Minor Maintenance.

*Replacement parts shall be consistent with component quality group, parts application, and specified component
'Replacement configuration.

Welding permitted on non-safety related, non-quality related, non-seismic structural or piping categories 6,7,8 when final VT inspection is required. V.T. Fire Impairments or Barrier Breach Requests will be documented PRIOR to any plant breach.

Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier # Tier# 3 Group # KIA # G2.2.43 Importance Rating 3.3 Equipment Control: Knowledge of the process used to track inoperable alarms Proposed Question: SRO 97 Unit 1 is at 100% power steady state. The following annunciator was alarming approximately every 30 minutes for the past 8 hours. IIC has determined a faulty circuit is causing the alarm. The annunciator has been defeated for 10 days. STEAM BYPASS DEMAND K-6

1) The above annunciator was:
2) The annuncaitor is tracked by:

( A. 1) CONSIDERED a nuisance annunciator.

2) ADM-17.18 'Temporary System Alteration' B. 1) CONSIDERED a nuisance annunciator
2) ADM-09.03 'Administrative Control Of Defeated Annunciators' C. 1) NOT CONSIDERED a nuisance annunciator.

ADM-17.18

2) ADM-17 .18 'Temporary System Alteration' D. 1) NOT CONSIDERED a nuisance annunciator.
2) ADM-09.03 'Administrative Control Of Defeated Annunciators' Proposed Answer: A Explanation (Optional):

( 193

A. Correct: Annunciator is considered a nuisance annunciator that alarms greater than or equal to 8 times in a consecutive 8 hour period. Transfer of tracking defeated annunciator must be performed by ADM-17.18 Temporary System Alteration if annunciator defeated greater than 7 days. B. Incorrect: Control of defeated annunciator performed by ADM-09.03 Administrative Control of Defeated Annunciators for a MAXIMUM of 7 days. C. Incorrect: Annunciator is a nuisance annunciator due to alarming greater than 8 times in a consecutive 8 hour period D. Incorrect: Annunciator is a nuisance annunciator due to alarming greater than 8 times in a consecutive 8 hour period Technical Reference(s): ADM-09.03 Administrative (Attach if not previously provided) Control of Defeated Annunciators Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: ( Learning Objective: _0-'0904724-02

                                -9=-:0'-4_7_24_--'-0_2_ _ _ _ _ _ _ (As available)

Question Source: Bank# Bank # Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New X X Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge X _X Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 --- 10 55.43 - 5 5- - - Comments: ( 194

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 7C ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROL OF DEFEATED 4 of 21 PROCEDURE NO.: ANNUNCIATORS ADM-09.03 ST. LUCIE PLANT 3.0 RESPONSIBILITIES 3.1 Requestor / Originator Each individual requesting that an annunciator be defeated shall be responsible for the following:

1. Ensure NPWO(s) submitted to correct nuisance condition.
2. Recommendation that an annunciator is a nuisance annunciator.
3. Recommendation of the method for defeating the annunciator's input process signal that causes the nuisance condition.
4. Recommendation of the compensatory monitoring measures necessary to monitor the defeated input process signal while the annunciator is defeated.
5. Recommendation of the restoration and testing method for restoring the defeated annunciator to service.

3.2 Shift Manager (SM) The

        "~'"       ~ SM   ~      is responsible
                                    '~~~t' 111::iIUIt:: for lUI the    Iullowlng:

lilt:: following: >, *

    * 'iffi;£~!l~~~<~&B!\,M)lf;;

1.

    'i!§fftJtlJ;C!!'

Determination that an annunciator is a valid nuisance annunciator.

2. Determination that defeating the nuisance annunciator is appropriate.
3. Approval of the method used to defeat the nuisance annunciator input process signal.
4. Approval of the compensatory monitoring measures utilized to monitor the defeated input process signal while the annunciator is defeated.
5. Approval of the restoration and testing methods for defeated annunciators.
6. Ensure the defeated annunciator is entered in the Equipment Out of Service Log.
7. Ensuring that defeating the annunciator does NOT require a License Amendment Request.
8. Ensuring that compensatory monitoring measures are performed for all defeated annunciators.
9. Ensuring that the time limit for defeating annunciators is NOT exceeded.
10. Ensuring that defeated annunciators are returned to normal operation in a timely manner.

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 7C ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROL OF DEFEATED ( PROCEDURE NO.: ANNUNCIATORS 5 of 21 ADM-09.03 ST. LUCIE PLANT 3.3 Appropriate Engineer The Appropriate Engineer for the system associated with the defeated annunciator is responsible for the following:

1. Evaluating the request to ensure that the recommended defeated input process signal alters aJters only the defeated annunciator.
2. Evaluating the request to ensure that the recommended defeated input process signal compensatory monitoring measures are adequate.
3. Evaluating the request to ensure that defeating the annunciator will NOT result in a required License Amendment Request.

4.0 DEFINITIONS 4.1 Appendix A, Defeated Annunciator Worksheet Appendix A, Defeated Annunciator Worksheet is any form similar to that of ( Appendix A that contains the same or more information pertaining to the process of , defeating an annunciator. 4.2 Appendix B, Defeated Annunciator Log Sheet Appendix B, Defeated Annunciator Log Sheet is any form similar to that of Appendix B that contains the same or more information pertaining to the process of administratively tracking a defeated annunciator. 4.3 Compensatory Monitoring Measures Compensatory monitoring measures are increased surveillances of the defeated input process signal parameter(s) required to adequately monitor the affected system. 4.4 Defeated Annunciator An annunciator which is prevented from providing visual and/or audible indication of the input process signal's relationship to an alarm setpoint. 4.5 Nuisance Alarm

        ~ A nuisance annunciator is an annunciator that alarms greater than or equal to eight (8) times in a consecutive eight (8) hour period.

(

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 7C ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROL OF DEFEATED 7 of 21 PROCEDURE NO.: ANNUNCIATORS ADM-09.03 ST. LUCIE PLANT 6.0 INSTRUCTIONS 6.1 Identification of Nuisance Annunciators

1. annunciator.

Operations Department Watchstanders will identify a nuisance annunciator. 2. The Shift Manager shall determine if the suspected annunciator is a nuisance annunciator.

3. Maintenance Disciplines shall be notified by Nuclear Plant Work Order (NPWO) of the existence of nuisance annunciators.

END OF SECTION 6.1

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 7C ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROL OF DEFEATED 13 of 21 PROCEDURE NO.: ANNUNCIATORS ADM-09.03 ST. LUCIE PLANT 6.4 Tracking of Defeated Annunciators

1. Following Shift Manager's approval to defeat an annunciator, Appendix A, Defeated Annunciator Worksheet, and Appendix B, S, Defeated Annunciator Log Sheet, shall be maintained in the Unit's Equipment Out of Service Log.
2. Each shift, the Shift Manager shall review all defeated annunciators to determine if any defeated annunciator may be returned to service.

A. The Shift Manager shall expedite efforts to correct problems with the defeated annunciator such that the annunciator may be returned to service as soon as possible. B. Actions in progress to correct problems associated with the defeated annunciator should be communicated to the Unit Supervisor (US). c. C. Compensatory monitoring measures shall be reviewed and communicated to the Unit Supervisor (US). I

3. ' A A defeated annunciator shall NOT be administratively controlled under this procedure for more than seven (7) consecutive days.

( A. The annunciator shall be considered defeated at the date and time of Shift Manager Approval to defeat the annunciator. B.I B'I Prior to exceeding the seven (7) day time limit, one of the following measures shall be satisfied:

                    .. 1.       Restore the annunciator to normal operation, including testing of the annunciator. (Ref 3.C.1 )

OR

2. Temporary circuit modifications to be installed on components that are out of service, i.e., in the Out of Service Log, may be excluded from the TSA process and controlled under a Work ;0
                                                                                                  -...j Order using IMP-1 00.01, I&C Department Forms, Appendix 4.        o (Ref 3.C.2)

OR

3. Implement ADM-17.18, Temporary System Alteration, and transfer administrative control of the defeated annunciator from ADM-09.03, Administrative Control of Defeated Annunciators to ADM-17.18, Temporary System Alteration.

(Ref 3.C.3)

                            .~~

Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier# 3 Group # KIA # G2.2.11 Importance Rating 4.3 Radiation Control: Ability to control radiation releases Proposed Question: SRO 98 Unit 1 is operating at full power. Given the following events and conditions:

  • A radioactive liquid release is in progress from the 1B waste monitor storage tank.
  • Liquid Release Permit # 09-36 was issued to authorize this release.
  • After 30 minutes, liquid radwaste discharge radiation monitor channel R-6627 (channel #43) alarms, the monitor indicates off-scale HIGH.
  • The Desk RCO reports that all the actions of ONP 1-0510030, Uncontrolled Release of Radioactive Liquids, have been completed.
  • I&C reports that Channel R-6627 has failed HIGH and will be out of service for at least 60 days.

Which ONE of the following statements correctly describes the required actions to properly complete the discharge from the 1B Waste Monitor Storage Tank? ( A. Restart the release using permit #09-36 with periodic grab samples in lieu of an OPERABLE radiation monitor. B. Issue a new release permit with independent sample and valve lineup verifications. C. Restart the release using permit #09-36, after independently verifying the release rate calculations. D. Issue a new release permit using periodic grab samples in lieu of an OPERABLE radiation monitor. 195

Proposed Answer: B Explanation (Optional): A. Incorrect: New release permit must be issued. Independent sample and valve lineup required. Periodic grab samples not acceptable B. Correct: New release and independent sample and valve lineup required. C. Incorrect: New permit required D. Incorrect: Periodic grab samples not acceptable. Technical Reference(s): 1-NOP-06.01 Controlled Liquid (Attach if not previously provided) Release to the Circulating Water Discharge. 1-0510030 Uncontrolled Release of Radioactive Liquids ( Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Learning Objective: _0_7_'0_2_8_56 0702856-07 __-_'_07_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (As available)

                            ~~~~~~~~~~~~---

Question Source: Bank # X (2004 NRC EXAM) Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge X

                                                                           ~---

Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 -- 11 -- - 55.43 4 Comments: 196

b~6ltc* II/'i/>> ( REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 15A CONTROLLED LIQUID RELEASE TO THE 4 of22 of 22 PROCEDURE NO.: CIRCULATING WATER DISCHARGE 1-NOP-06.01 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 3.0 PREREQUISITES INITIAL 3.1 Electrical power is available to the following pumps:

1. 1A 1A Waste Monitor Pump Bkr. 1-40948
2. 1B Waste Monitor Pump Bkr. 1-41756
3. Liquid Waste Control Panel (LWCP) PP-109, Ckt. 18 4.0 PRECAUTIONS / LIMITATIONS 4.1 Prior to release, the tank contents shall be sampled, analyzed and a Liquid Release Permit (LRP) prepared and approved. Once a sample has been drawn for release purposes, radioactive waste shall NOT be added to the tank.

4.2 The Operator shall perform a release only after receipt of an approved Liquid Release Permit. Form similar to Figure 1. 4.3~ The The Liquid LiqUdid Waste Waste Monitor shall be Mohnitohr shall intS~rvbicel be in dUtrhingt~ service during rele~Ste and a release frequently atnt.d frequenttlY ( observe to assure tthat

      ., observed                       at tthe e count rate ra e is IS below e ow thee trip riP point pOln settings se Ings as no   noted ed on
     }.:/..;~,. the Release Permit. If the Liquid Waste Monitor is determined to be inoperable, Sf'" refer to C-200, Offsite Dose Calculation Manual (ODCM), Section 3.3.3.9 for provisions to proceed with the release.

required actions and proVisions 4.4 If activity reaches the high rate trip setpoint as indicated on the Release Permit, an arm is activated in the Control Room and Flow Control Valve FCV-6627X trips larm osed. FCV-6627X may be closed from RTGB-105 closed. RTGB-1 05 to terminate the release at the Operator's perator's discretion. Do not re-initiate a liquid release that has been terminated by a monitor alarm until authorized by the Chemistry Department. 4.5 The minimum number of circulating water (CWP) and/or Intake Cooling Water Pumps (ICWP) should be in service during a release as specified by the Liquid Release Permit. Even though not desirable, a release may be made with only ICW pumps for dilution if administrative limits are not exceeded. 4.6 NORMAL/CUTOUT Switches bypass (cutout) the Tank low level switch that stops the associated Pump on low level. This may be desirable when pumping down a tank for maintenance or inspection. When in this configuration, an Operator should remain on location to stop the Pump when the desired level is reached and to prevent damage to the Pump. The Switches for the Waste Monitor Pumps/Tanks are interconnected. If one Tank reaches its respective low level cutout, the NORMAL/CUTOUT Switch for its associated Pump must be placed in the CUTOUT position in order for either Pump to operate. When level in the affected tank has been restored, the switch should be restored to the NORMAL position to prevent damage to the Pump. Manipulation of these Switches on the Liquid Waste Control Panel should be performed with the concurrence of the NWE/US.

REVISION NO. NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 15A CONTROLLED LIQUID RELEASE TO THE 6 of 22 6of22 PROCEDURE NO.: CIRCULATING WATER DISCHARGE 1-NOP-06.01 1-'NOP-06.01 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 6.0 INSTRUCTIONS INITIAL 6.1 Initial Conditions

1. ENSURE Section 3.0, Prerequisites, completed.
2. REVIEW Section 4.0, Precautions / Limitations.
3. IF diving operations are in progress in the discharge canal, NOTIFY the diving operations supervisor to ensure that divers are out of the water before starting the release and DO NOT re-enter into the water before the end of the liquid release.
4. REVIEW the Liquid Release Permit for appropriate signatures under AUTHORIZATION.

Permit Number_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ releasing. ________________ Tank releasing ________ __ CAUTION If the Liquid Waste Monitor is Out of Service, C-200, ODCM Control 3.3.3.9 requires two independent tank sample / analysis and two independent valve alignments to verify the discharge line valving.

5. ,-r1 REVIEW the Equipment Out of Service Log and determine if Channel R-6627, Liquid Waste Monitor has been declared Out of Service.

If if Channel R-6627 is Out of Service OR the affected Waste Monitor Tank is to be drained completely, Then PERFORM the following: YES NO A. Has Chemistry attached two independent Radioactivity analysis of the tank to the Release Permit? B. Has Chemistry attached two independent Release Rate Calculations for the tank on the Release Permit? C. Have you arranged for independent verification of the discharge valve alignment? __ __ If if the answer to any of the above questions is "No", Then STOP, do not approve the Liquid Release Permit. END OF SECTION 6.1

( Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier# Tier # 3 Group # KIA # G2.4.19 Importance Rating 4.1 Emergency Procedures/Plans: Knowledge of EOP layout, symbols and icons Proposed Question: SRO 99 ATTACHMENT 3 Checkoffs Safety Functions Success Paths 1 2 Reactivity Control RC-1, CEA Insertion X X RC-2, Boration via CVCS RC-3, Boration via SIAS Maint. of Vital Aux. DC MVA-OC-1, MVA-DC-1, Batteries/Chargers X X Maint. of Vital Aux. AC MVA-AC-1, Startup Transformers MVA-AC-2, EOG's EDG's X X MVA-AC-3, Unit Crosstie RCS Inventory Control IC-1, CVCS IC-2, Safety Injection X X RCS Pressure Control PC-1, Subcooled X ( PC-2, PORV's/PZR Vent PC-3, Saturated Control X RCS & Core Heat HR-1, S/G Without SIAS HR-2, S/G With SIAS X X HR-3, Once Through Cooling Containment Isol CI-1, Automatic/Manual Isol 1501 X X Cntmt. Press & Temp CTPC-1, Normal Cntmt Fans CTPC-2, Cntmt Coolers X CTPC-3, Cntmt Spray 0 Cnmt. Comb Gas CCGC-1 Hydrogen <3.5% X X CCGC-1 Hydrogen >3.5% Unit 1 is in 1-EOP-15 FUNCTIONAL RECOVERY. The above safety functions and success paths were evaluated over a period of 30 minutes. Based on the above, what success path instructions would be performed FIRST for Checkoff #1 and Checkoff #27 #2? 197

A. 1) Maint. of Vital Aux. AC, success path MVA-AC-2, EOG's

2) Maint. of Vital Aux. AC, success path MVA-AC-2, EOG's B. 1) Cntmt. Press & Temp, success path CTPC-3, Cntmt Spray
2) Reactivity Control, success path RC-1, CEA Insertion C. 1) Reactivity Control, success path RC-1, CEA Insertion
2) Reactivity Control, success path RC-1, CEA Insertion D. 1) Cntmt. Press & Temp, success path CTPC-3, Cntmt Spray
2) Maint. of Vital Aux. AC, success path MVA-AC-2, EOG's Proposed Answer: D Explanation (Optional):

A. Incorrect: Cntmt. Press & Temp, not met by ANY success path. Should be implemented first. Applicant may pick Maint. of Vital Aux. AC if applicant doesn't know the first safety function that is not met by ANY success path is the success path that should be implemented first. B. Incorrect: part one correct, part two incorrect. C. Incorrect: this safety function is met by success path 1, not to be implemented first. D. Correct. CTPC-3 is success path that should be implemented to meet the safety function, checkoff 2 MVA-AC-2 EDG's is the success path that should be implemented. ( Technical Reference(s): 1-EOP-15 (Attach if not previously provided) Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: Learning Objective: _0_7_0_2_8_2_8-_0_6_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (As available) Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # Last NRC (Note changes or attach parent) Exam New Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge Comprehension or Analysis x 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10

                                           -..-:....:=-----

55.43 --- 5 Comments: 198

St. Lucie HLC-18 NRC Exam Question 74 Unit 1 is in 1-EOP-15, "Functional Recovery," with the following Safety Function status: SAFETY FUNCTION SUCCESS PATH Reactivity control RC-1 CEA Insertion X RC-2 Boration via CVCS RC-3 Boration via SIAS Maint. Of Vital Aux - DC MVA - DC - 1 Batteries/Charger X Maint. Of Vital Aux - AC MVA - AC - 1 Startup Transformers MVA - AC - 2 EDG's X MVA - AC - 3 Unit Crosstie RCS Inventory Control IC -1 CVCS IC - 2 Safety Injection 0 RCS Pressure Control PC - 1 Subcooled Controlled PC - 2 PORV's / Pzr Vent PC - 3 Saturated Control X RCS && Core Heat HR - 1 S/G Without SIAS HR - 2 S/G With SIAS 0 HR - 3 Once Through Cooling Containment Isol CI - 1 Automatic / Manual Isol 0 ( Cntmt Press & & Temp CTPC - 1 Normal Cntmt Fans CTPC - 2 Cntmt Coolers CTPC - 3 Cntmt Spray X Cntmt Comb Gas CCGC - 1 Hydrogen <3.5% X CCGC - 2 Hydrogen >3.5% o Not Met I X Met What Success Path should be addressed first and the reason? A. Implement MVA-AC-2, EDGs. Reason: the EDG success path is evaluated to ensure power will be maintained to the equipment needed to support other safety functions. B. Implement IC-2, Safety Injection. Reason: without adequate RCS inventory, core cooling will be challenged. C. Implement HR-2, S/G with SIAS: Reason: RCS saturation margin needs to be maintained to ensure adequate core cooling. D. Implement CI-1, Automatic / Manual Isol. Reason: Containment integrity ensures release to the public is minimized. REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 27 27A A FUNCTIONAL RECOVERY 11 of 205 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-15 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 4.0 OPERATOR INITIAL ACTIONS (continued) INSTRUCTIONS CONTINGENCY ACTIONS °12. 012.

    .I     Perform Success Path Instructions I

PERFORM ALL the following IN THE ORDER LISTED:

               . Instructions for a success path MOST LIKELY to be met for safety functions that are NOT met by ANY success path.path .
             *,' Instructions for success paths for safety functions that are NOT met by Success Path 1.
              ,. Instructions for ALL other I  success paths for safety functions met by Success Path 1.

o 13. Perform Long Term Actions When ALL Safety Function Status Check acceptance criteria are being satisfied, Then PERFORM Long Term Actions. REFER TO Section 4.10, Long Term Actions. END OF INITIAL ACTIONS

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE; PAGE: 27A FUNCTIONAL RECOVERY 205 of 205 PROCEDURE NO.: 1-EOP-15 ST. LUCIE UNIT 1 ATTACHMENT 3 FUNCTIONAL RECOVERY SUCCESS PATHS (Page 1 of 1) Checkoffs Safety Functions Success Paths 1 2 3 4 5 6 Reactivity Control RC-1, CEA Insertion RC-2, Boration via CVCS RC-3, Boration via SIAS Maint of Vital Aux - DC MVA-DC-1, Batteries/Chargers Maint of Vital Aux - AC MVA-AC-1, Startup Transformers MVA-AC-2, EDGs MVA-AC-3, Unit Crosstie RCS Inventory Control IC-1, CVCS IC-2, Safety Injection RCS Pressure Control PC-1, Subcooled Control PC-2, PORVs/Pzr Vent PC-3, Saturated Control ( RCS & Core Heat HR-1, S/G Without SIAS HR-2, S/G With SIAS HR-3, Once Through Cooling Containment Isol CI-1, Automatic/Manual Isol Cntmt Press & Temp CTPC-1, Normal Cntmt Fans CTPC-2, Cntmt Coolers CTCP-3, Cntmt Spray Cntmt Comb Gas CCGC-1, Hydrogen <3.5% CCGC-2, Hydrogen >3.5% END OF ATTACHMENT 3

Examination Outline Cross-reference: Level RO SRO Tier # 3 Group # KIA # G2.4.30 Importance Rating 4.1 Emergency Procedures/Plans: Knowledge of events related to system operation/status that must be reported to internal organizations or external agencies, such as the State, the NRC, or the transmission system operator. Proposed Question: SRO 100 Which ONE of the following events is required to be reported and who are the agencies that will be notified? A. Two dead raccoons with apparent rabies have been discovered within the protected area. Notify Florida Fish and Wildlife Conservation Commission. B. Loss of 50% of the backup notification method used to notify the State and NRC. Notify State Watch Office and the NRC. C. A Tornado is sighted in the Met Tower parking lot area. Notify State Watch Office and the NRC. ( D. A major automobile accident has blocked A A1A 1A south of the plant prohibiting southbound evacuation of the site, if needed. Notify State Watch Office and the NRC. ( 199

Proposed Answer: C Explanation (Optional): A. Incorrect: There are reporting requirements for bird kill and fish kills as a result of plant operation but not minor kill of animal life due to natural causes. B. Incorrect: Reporting requirement is loss of all primary and backup communication methods. C. Correct: Met tower is not in the power block but is in the owner controlled area North of Unit 1. This is classified as Unusual Event. EPIP will require notification of NRC and SWO. D. Incorrect: Reporting required if the island was not able to be evacuated from North AND South routes. Technical Reference(s): EPIP-01 Classification of (Attach if not previously provided) Emergencies Proposed references to be provided to applicants during examination: Learning Objective: 0902702-02 Classification of (As available) ( Emergencies. Question Source: Bank # Modified Bank # (Note changes or attach parent) New x Question History: Last NRC Exam Question Cognitive Level: Memory or Fundamental Knowledge - X Comprehension or Analysis 10 CFR Part 55 Content: 55.41 10 Comments: 55.43 5 200

                                                                                                                                                                                   ~..

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 16 CLASSIFICATION OF EMERGENCIES 27 of 39 PROCEDURE NO.: EPIP-01 ST. LUCIE PLANT ATTACHMENT 1 EMERGENCY CLASSIFICATION TABLE (Page 13 of21) EVENT/CLASS UNUSUAL EVENT ALERT SITE AREA EMERGENCY GENERAL EMERGENCY

12. TORNADO A. Notification ofa tornado sighted in the .Owner Controfred Area B. §2 An~ tornado striking the Any Power Block.

I NOTE NOTE Refer to Potential Core Melt Event /I I

                                     ~           ~

Class 14. 14 .

13. ABNORMAL WATER A. Abnormal water level conditions B. Flood, low water.

Flood. water, hurricane surge C. Flood. Flood, low water. water, hurricane LEVEL eXl2ected or occurring are expected or other abnormal water level surge or other abnormal water

  • Low intake canal level of -1 0.5 ft.

ft . conditions level conditions causing failure of vital equipment eguil2ment ML W for 1 hour or more. MLWfor OR Visual sightings by station The storm drain capacity is exceeded during hurricane surge or known flood conditions.

                                                                                                              . Flood/surge water level reaching elevation +19.5 ft. (turbine personnel that water levels are approaching storm drain system capacity.
                                                                     .               OR Low intake canal level of -1 0.5 ft.

MLW for 1 hour or more with MLWfor ft . building / RAB ground floor). OR Low intake canal level has emergency barrier valves open. caused the loss of alllCW all ICW flow.

12. TORNADO
13. ABNORMAL WATER LEVEL FTER CLASSIFYING, GO TO EPIP-02, DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE EMERGENCY COORDINATOR

!AFTER

                                                                                                                                                                                               ..:::c..~
                                                                                                                                                                                              ~-      ';
                                                                                                                                                                                              ~ ..tL c::3
                                                                                                                                                                                                 ~~

fl>--. 6l,<'- fl.>-... Yj 1,<- rlfi/('} Y//{/(f!J e...J e>.....J NO,: REVISION NO: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 650 NRC REQUIRED NON-ROUTINE NOTIFICATIONS I--------i 14 of 43 NO,: PROCEDURE NO.: AND REPORTS 0010721 ST ST. LUCIE PLANT 8.12 (continued) Upon notification that the 12 month cumulative running siren availability decreased to less than 90 percent, or the siren availability during any 2 week period is determined to be less than 75 percent, a NRC notification will be made as a major loss of communication capability, The loss of all primary and backup communication channels to a state or local government agency or emergency response facility [Control Room, Technical Support Center (TSC), Operational Support Center (OSC), Emergency Operations Facility (EOF)] meets the EPIP-01 requirements for the declaration of an unusual event event. The communication channels include dedicated telephone communication (i.e., Florida State Watch Office), commercial telephone lines, and offsite links (i,e" emergency radio communication system.system, If a dedicated NRC primary communication channel is lost (i.e., either the ENS, HPN, or EROS data link hardware (modem or phone line) for any amount of time, then the event is considered to be a major loss of emergency communication capability. In addition to the off-site communications above, the total loss of the in-plant ( paging, and in-plant radio systems required for safe plant operation would be reportable as a major loss of emergency communication capability.

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: 20 OFF-SITE NOTIFICATIONS AND PROTECTIVE ( 4 of 56 PROCEDURE NO.: ACTION RECOMMENDATIONS EPIP-08 S1. LUCIE PLANT ST. 1.1 Discussion (continued) 7.

7. (continued)

NOTE The State Department of Health (Bureau of Radiation Control) may not have their office staffed on a 24-hour basis. In the event that they do not answer the Hot Ring Down (HRD) telephone, the State Watch Office (SWO) assumes responsibility for notifying their duty officer. However, the EC/RM shall verify that the Bureau of Radiation Control has been notified. B. Who Shall Be Notified

  • State Division of Emergency Management
  • State Department of Health (Bureau of Radiation Control)
  • St. Lucie County Emergency Operations Center
  • Martin County Emergency Operations Center

((

  • NRC
1. State and County Notification
a. State and local agencies are notified by using the Hot Ring Down (HRD) telephone. The HRD rings the State Watch Office (SWO). The SWO puts the other agencies on line and reduces the need for individual calls.
2. : NRC Notification
a. The NRC is notified using the Emergency Notification System (ENS) telephone.
b. NRC notifications occur through an open line of communication in the TSC and, when operational, the EOF.

REVISION NO.: PROCEDURE TITLE: PAGE: OC SITE ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN 10 of 20 PROCEDURE NO.: AOM-27.14 ADM-27.14 ST. LUCIE PLANT APPENDIX A SPECIFIC CONDITIONS OF THE UNIT 1 EPP (Page 5 of 13)

4. 1, 3 Environmental Conditions
         § 1,3 A.      Unusual or Important Environmental Events
1. Any occurrence of an unusual or important event that indicates or could result in significant environmental impact causally related to station operation shall be recorded and promptly reported to the NRC Operations Center within 72 hours via Emergency Notification System described in 10 CFR 50.72 for environmental protection issues. In addition, the reporting requirement time frame shall be consistent with 10 CFR 50.72 for environmental protection issues.

The initial report shall be followed by a written report as described in Section 5.0.2. No routine monitoring programs are required to implement this condition. Events covered by Section 3.B of this Appendix will be subject to reporting requirements as defined in that section and not subject to these requirements. ( 2. The following are examples of unusual or important events: excessive bird impaction events; onsite plant or animal disease outbreaks; mortality (causally related to station operation), or unusual occurrence of any species protected by the Endangered Species Act of 1973; unusual fish kills; increase in nuisance organisms or

                     /: conditions; and unanticipated or emergency discharges of waste water or chemical substances.

B. Terrestrial/Aquatic Issues The certifications and permits required under the Clean Water Act provide mechanisms for protecting water quality and indirectly, aquatic biota. The NRC will rely on the decisions made by the State of Florida under the authority of the Clean Water Act and, in the case of sea turtles, decisions made by the NMFS under the authority of the Endangered Species Act, for any requirements pertaining to terrestrial and aquatic monitoring.}}